Fourth Semester Civil Engineering Syllabus

Fourth Semester Civil Engineering Syllabus
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : CIVIL ENGINEERING GROUP
COURSE CODE : CE/CS/CR/CV
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS for CE/CS/CR ( 8 SEMESTERS for CV)
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies
$
Transportation Engineering
Advanced Surveying
Geo Technical Engineering
Hydraulics
Theory of Structures
Computer Aided Drawing
Professional Practices-II
Abbrevi
ation
EST
TEN
ASU
GTE
HYD
TOS
CAD
PPT
SUB
CODE
17401
17418
17419
17420
17421
17422
17036
17037
Total
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
SW
(17400)
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
01
03
03
03
03
03
---
-----01
---
02
-04
02
02
-04
03
01
03
03
03
03
04
---
50#*
100
100
100
100
100
---
20
40
40
40
40
40
---
--50#
-25#
-25#
--
--20
-10
-10
--
---------
---------
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
-20
10
10
-10
20
50
16
01
17
--
550
--
100
--
--
--
200
--
50
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
th
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Examination in 5 Semester Professional Practices-III
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 34 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 900
@ - Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* - Online Theory Examination.
Note: In plant training of 04 weeks after IVth semester & before Vth semester. Optional for the students & to be assesses in the Vth semester in PPT.
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as
sessional work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
25 @
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Credit, Ecosystem
3
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Civil Engineering Group
Course Code : CE/CS/CR/CV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Transportation Engineering
Subject Code : 17418
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
--
03
100
--
--
--
100
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
This subject caters to the need of technician engaged in the investigation, planning,
construction and maintenance of railway, bridges, tunnels, airways and waterways. In Practical
field, each component of transportation is a specialized branch of engineering.
This subject aims at basic knowledge about railway, bridges, tunnels, airport engineering
and docks and harbour engineering in respect of their various types, materials used, functions of
component parts, methods of construction, planning principles, aspects of supervision and
maintenance.
Topic of railway engineering will be useful to understand the components of permanent way
with their function, different types of rails and rail gauges. The topic of track geometry and yards
will be useful to plan for station and yard layout. The topic on maintenance will be useful in the
supervision of railway track.
Content on bridge engineering will be useful to understand different types and components
of bridges with their functions. The content in topic site investigation will be useful while taking
decision about site selection for a bridge.
Topic on tunnel engineering will be useful to understand different cross-sections of tunnel
and methods of tunnellining. Contents on investigation will be useful for transferring the centre line
of tunnel during construction.
Topic on Airport engineering and Docks and harbour engineering will be useful to
understand different terms and used in these fields.
Thus all modes of transportation are useful in the development of a nation and improving
over all standards in Agricultural, medical, industrial, educational and social fields.
General Objectives:
Student will be able to1. Know component parts of railway, bridges, tunnels, airport and dock and harbour
engineering
2. Understand methods of survey and investigation of alignment of railway, bridges and
tunnels.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17418
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
3. Organize, supervise and coordinate the construction activities related to railway, bridges
and tunnels
Learning Structure:
Application
Investigation, planning, preparation of drawing, construction, inspection, & maintenance of
Railways, Bridges, Tunnel, Engineering Structures. Layout of docks, harbors and ports,
runways and taxiways.
Procedure
Layout of
docks
harbours
and ports
Classific
ation of
dock
harbour
and port
Concept
Fact
Site
selection
and
requirem
ents of
port and
harbour
Definition of
dock, harbour
and port
Construction
and
maintenance
work of
Railway
track
Railwary
compone
nts
function
s&
Require
ments of
permane
nt way
track
geometr
y
Docks and harbour Engg.
Investigation,
Construction
and
maintenance
work of
bridges
Station
s and
yards
layout
Functi
on and
types
of
station
s and
yards
Perma
nent
and
tempor
ary
bridges
details
and
drawin
g
bridges
compo
Railway Engg.
Construction,
maintenance
work of
tunnel
Site
investi
gations
Bridge Engg.
Method
of
tunneli
ng
concept
of
shape
and
size of
tunnel
Tunnel Engg
Layout of
runways and
taxiways
Align
ment
work
of
tunnel
Tunne
l
survey
Airport Engg
Transportation Engineering Systems
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
17418
Comp
onent
parts
of
airpor
t and
airstri
ps
Airpo
rt
buildi
ng
d
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1. Overview of Transportation Engineering
Specific objectives:
 List various modes of transportation system with their merits and
demerits
 State importance of cross drainage works
Contents:
 Role of transportation in the development of nation
 Modes of transportation system - roads, railway, airways,
waterways, Importance of each mode, comparison and their relative
merits and demerits.
 Necessity of Cross drainage works for railways.
Topic 2. Railway Engineering
Hours
Marks
02
04
18
32
Specific objectives:
 List zones of Indian Railway and rail gauges.
 State component parts of permanent way with their functions types,
merits and demerits.
 Calculate the superelevation and cant deficiency.
 Draw different track junctions and station yards
Contents:
2.1 Alignment and Gauges and Permanent ways………….12
 Classification of Indian Railways, zones of Indian Railway.
Alignment- Factors governing rail alignment.
Rail Gauges – types, factors affecting selection of gauge. Rail track
cross sections – standard cross section of BG and M.G Single and
double line in cutting and embankment.

Permanent ways
Ideal requirement, component parts.
Rails - function and its types. Rail Joints - requirements, types, Creep
of rail, causes and prevention of creep. Sleepers - functions and
Requirement, types - wooden, metal, concrete sleepers and their
suitability, sleeper density Ballast - function and different types with
their properties, relative merits and demerits. Rail fixtures and
fastenings – fish plate, bearing plates, spikes, bolts, keys, anchors and
anti creepers.
2.2 Railway Track Geometrics and Branching of Tracks…….14
 Coning of wheels, tilting of rails, Gradient and its types, Super
elevation limits of Super elevation on curves, cant deficiency negative
cant, grade compensation on curves
 Branching of Tracks
Definition of point and crossing, a simple split switch turnout
consisting of points and crossing lines. Sketch showing different
components, their functions and working. Line sketches of track
junctions-crossovers, scissor cross over, diamond crossing, triangle.
Inspection of points and crossings.
2.3 Station and Yards and Track Maintenance………………..06
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
17418
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

Site selection for railway stations, Requirements of railway
station, Types of stations (way side, crossing, junction and
terminal)
Station yards , types of station yard, Passenger yards,good
yard Locomotive yard – its requirements, water column ,
Marshalling yard – its types. .
 Track Maintenance
Necessity, types, Tools required and their function,
orgnisation, duties of permanent way inspector,gang mate
key man.
Topic 3. Bridge Engineering
Specific objectives:
 Define different terminologies related to bridge engineering
 State functions of component parts of bridge
 Draw sketches of temporary and permanent bridges
Contents:
3.1 Site selection and investigation…………………………..08
Factors affecting selection of site of a bridge. Bridge alignment
Collection of design data, Classification of bridges according to
function, material, span, size, alignment, position of HFL.
3.2 Component parts of bridge………………………………..16
Plan and sectional elevation of bridge showing component parts of,
substructure and super structure.
Different terminology such as effective span, clear span, economical
span, waterway, afflux, scour, HFL, freeboard, etc.
Foundation – function, types. Piers-function, requirements, types.
Abutment – function, types. Wing walls – functions and types.
Bearing – functions, types of bearing for RCC and steel bridges.
Approaches –in cutting and embankment.
Bridge flooring- open and solid floors.
3.3 Permanent and Temporary Bridges and Maintenance of Bridge…08
 Permanent Bridges - Sketches and description in brief of culverts,
causeways, masonry, arch, steel, movable steel bridges, RCC girder
bridge, prestressed girder bridge, cantilever, suspension bridge.
Temporary Bridges- timber, flying, floating bridges
 Inspection and Maintenance Of Bridge
Inspection of bridges-General points to be observed. Pre and post
mansoon inspection-Purpose
Maintenance of bridges: types – routine and special Maintenance.
Topic 4. Tunnel Engineering.
Specific objectives:
 Draw tunnel cross sections for highways and railways.
 List data for tunnel investigation and survey.
 State precautions in constructions of tunnel.
16
32
12
32
Contents:
4.1……………………………………………………………16
 Definition, necessity, advantages, disadvantages, Classification of
tunnels, Shape and Size of tunnels, Tunnel Cross sections for highway
and railways
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17418
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

Tunnel investigations and surveying –Tunnel surveying locating
center line on ground, transferring center line inside the tunnel. Shaft its purpose and construction.
4.2 ………………………………………………………………16
 Methods of tunneling in Soft rock-needle beam method, fore-poling
method. Line plate method, shield method. Methods of tunneling in
Hard rock-Full-face heading method, Heading and bench method, drift
method
 Precautions in construction of tunnels Drilling equipments-drills and
drills carrying equipments, Types of explosives used in tunneling.
Tunnel lining and ventilation-Purpose and methods
Total
48
100
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
01
Railway Engineering
S.C. Saxena
02
Railway Track
K.R. Antia
03
Principles of Railway Engineering
S.C. Rangwala
Charotar Publication
S.P. Bindra
Dhanpatrai & sons
N.L.Arora and S.P.
Luthra
IPH New Delhi
Title
Principles and Practice of Bridge
Engineering
A Text book Transportation Book of
Engineering
04
05
Author
Publisher
Dhanpatrai & sons
The New Book Co. Pvt.
Ltd Mumbai
06
Elements of Bridge Engineering
J.S. Alagia
Charotar Publication
07
Road railway and bridges
Birdi and Ahuja
Std.Book house
2. IS, BIS and International Codes:
Sr.
No.
01
Title
IS 4880,I.S.5878,Part-I to X
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17418
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Civil Engineering Group
Course Code : CE/CR/CS/CV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Advanced Surveying
Subject Code : 17419
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
200
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
In search of precision and accuracy surveyor has to use more precise instruments like
transit theodolite, micro optic theodolite, digital theodolite, total station and digital planimeter.
Being a versatile instrument theodolite can be used more precisely for all civil engineering survey
works. After studying theodolite survey student will able to precisely measure horizontal and
vertical angles and calculate coordinates of various stations. After studying components of curve
students will able to set the curve.
After studying Tacheometry student will able to find horizontal distances and elevations of
various stations. After studying contouring student will able to prepare and interpret contour map.
With the use of planimeter student will able to calculate area of contour and volume
occupied. It is intended to abreast with new technology for which study and use of Total station
becomes inevitable.
Geographical Information System (GIS) is rapidly used in technological field which intend
to assess real-world problems. GIS backed by modern computers allow us to benefit from visual
power of maps. It is the time demand to nurture civil engineers with latest surveying technology.
General objectives
Students will be able to:
 Understand handling and use of various survey instruments for field observations.
 Understand linear and angular measurements
 Select suitable instruments and appropriate method of survey.
 Understand the preparation of maps from the field observations.
 Interprete survey maps.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17419
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principles
Concepts
Facts
Determining relative position various stations on ground and plotting
plans/maps/curves for execution of civil engineering works.
Direct and
indirect
methods
Intersectio
n of Equal
elevation
horizontal
planes
Contour,
Contour
interval,
Horizontal
equivalent,
Grade
contour
Contour
maps
Measure
ment of
Horizont
al angle,
Vertical
angle
Relationsh
ip amongst
Fundamen
tal axes
Fundament
al axes of
Theodolite,
Measuring
horizontal and
vertical
distances
Principal
of
Isosceles
triangle
Constant of
tacheometer,
tacheometry
Consecutive
Locating
and
plotting
the
stations
simultaneo
usly
Phase
difference
Deflection
angle
Electrom
agnetic
waves
Radius of
curve,
Degree of
curve
coordinates
Theod
olite
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Digital
Theodolite,
Digital level,
Microoptic
theodolite,
Total station.
Tache
ometer
13
Setting
the
curve
Curves
Phase
difference
Micro
waves
Remote
sensing, GIS,
GPS
17419
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1. Contouring
Specific objectives :
 State the meaning of contour, contour interval and horizontal equivalent.
 Carry out contouring by direct and indirect method
 Interpret features of ground from contour map
Contents:
 Concept of contour, contour interval and horizontal equivalent.
Factors affecting contour interval, Characteristics of contours,
Interpretation of ground features from contour map, Uses of contour
map.
 Methods of contouring, Direct method and Indirect method (block
contouring, Longitudinal and cross sectioning) Interpolation of
contour and its methods,
 Concept of grade contour, Establishing grade contour on ground,
Locating grade contour on contour map.
Topic 2. Area and Volume Measurement
Specific objectives :
 Measure the area of plans/maps.
 Compute the volume
Contents:
 Instruments used for measuring the area- Polar Planimeter and Digital
Planimeter. Polar Planimeter- Component parts and procedure of
measurement of area. Simple numerical problems.
 Digital planimeter- Component parts and procedure of measurement.
 Computation of volume from contour maps by Trapezoidal and
Priszmoidal formulae, Simple numerical problems.
Topic 3. Theodolite Survey
Specific objectives :
 Use the theodolite for measurement of horizontal angle, deflection angle,
magnetic bearing and vertical angle
 Carry out theodolite traversing
 Carry out calculations for Gale’s traverse table.
3.1 ……………………………………………………………(06)
Types of theodolite, uses of theodolite, Component parts of transit
theodolite and their functions, Reading the vernier of transit thedolite,
Technical terms- Swinging, Transiting, Face left, Face right, Fundamental
axes of transit theodolite and their relationship
3.2 ……………………………………………………………(08)
Temporary adjustment of transit theodolite, Measurement of horizontal
angle- Direct and Repetition method, Errors eleminated by method of
repetition, Measurement of magnetic bearing of a line, Prolonging and
ranging a line, Measurement of deflection angle, Measurement of vertical
Angle. Permanent adjustment of transit theodolite (only relationship of
different axes of theodolite)
3.3…………………………………………………………….(10)
 Thedolite traversing by included angle method and deflection angle
method. Check in open and closed traverse, Calculations of bearing
from angles, Traverse computation-Latitude, Departure, Consecutive
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
Hours
Marks
06
14
04
10
12
24
17419
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
cordinates, Independent cordinates, Balancing traverse by Bowditch’s
rule and Transit rule, Gale’s table calculations, Simple numerical
problems
Topic 4. Tacheometry
Specific objectives :
 Use tacheometer to find horizontal and vertical distances
 Carry out contour survey by tacheometer
Contents:
 Meaning of tacheometer and tacheometry, Principle of tacheometry,
Essential requirement of tacheometer. Tacheometric formula for
horizontal distance with telescope horizontal and staff vertical,Field
method for determining constants of tacheometer, Determining
horizontal and vertical distances with tacheometer by fixed hair method
and staff held vertical, Limitation of tacheometry Simple numerical
problems.
 Contouring by tacheometer-Method and specific use.
Topic 5. Modern Survey Instrument
Specific objectives :
 Use the microoptic theodolite for measurement of horizontal and vertical
angle
 Use the digital theodolite for measurement of horizontal and vertical
angle
 Use the digital level for finding and recording reduced level.
 Use the total station for surveying work
Contents:
5.1 …………………………………………………………..(10)
Component parts and procedure to set and use microoptic theodolite for
measurement of horizontal and vertical angle, Component parts and
procedure to set and use digital theodolite for measurement of horizontal
and vertical angle, Component parts and procedure to set and use digital
level or finding and recording reduced level.
5.2 …………………………………………………………..(10)
Component parts of total station, Minimum inventory required, Set up of
total station, Setting a back sight, Azimuth mark, Measurement with
total station, General setting required for all stations, Field book
recording, Radial shooting, Survey station description by codes,
Instrument station entry, Data retrieval, Field generated graphics, Lay
out using Total station.
Topic 6. Curves
Specific objectives:
 List components of simple circular curve
 Set simple circular curve by offsets from long chord and Rankine’s
deflection angle method
Contents:
 Necessity of curve, Classification of curve, Notation of simple circular
curve, Designation of curve
 Setting simple circular curve by offsets from long chord and Rankine’s
deflection angle method, Simple numerical problems.
Topic 7. Remote sensing and GIS
Specific objectives:
 Descibe remote sensing process
 Identify the components of GIS
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
06
12
10
20
06
12
04
08
17419
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 State applications of GPS
Contents:
 Definition of remote sensing, Concept of remote sensing, Types of
remote sensing system-Passive system, Active system, Distance of
remote sensing, Remote sensing data, Remote sensing processs,
Application of remote sensing, Advantages of remote sensing,
Limitations of remote sensing
 Definition of GIS, Key components of GIS, Application of GIS in Land
information, Environmental field.
 Introduction to GPS, Application of GPS in civil engineering.
Total
48
100
Practicals:
Skills to be developed:
Instructions: Intellectual Skills:
 Understand different instruments for linear measurement and leveling.

Understand the method of taking observations with the survey instruments.

Understand specific use of various types of survey instruments.

Identify the errors of the survey instruments.
Motor Skills:
 Measure distances, Bearings and finding Reduced Levels with various survey instruments.

Recording of survey field data collected in Field Book and Leveling Book.

Prepare drawing (plans/maps) using survey data.

Reading and Interpretation of drawing (plans/maps).
List of Practicals:
 Group size for survey practical shall be about five students.
 Each teaching staff shall handle maximum two groups.
 Students shall record the observations in Field Book at field itself.
 One full day per project is required for project survey work.
 Drawing and plotting should be considered as a part of practical.
 Term work shall consists of record of all practicals and projects in field book and drawing
sheets for the given projects.
1. Carry out Block contouring of plot 30 m x 30 m with each block 5mx5m
2. Locate a contour on a field by direct contouring method.
3. To find area of given contour map with polar planimeter and digital planimeter
4. Understanding different components of transit theodolite, Temporary adjustment and
reading the vernier and recording it.
5. Measurement of horizontal angle by transit theodolite (direct method)
6. Measurement of horizontal angle by transit theodolite (repetition method)
7. Measurement of magnetic bearing by transit theodolite
8. Measurement of deflection angle by transit theodolite
9. Measurement of vertical angle by transit theodolite
10. Find constants of tacheometer
11. To find horizontal distance and elevation of given object with tacheometer
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
17419
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
12. Measure horizontal and vertical angle with micro-optic theodolite
13. Measure horizontal and vertical angle with digital theodolite
14. Use total station for measuring horizontal angle, vertical angle, horizontal distance,
sloping distance, vertical distance.
15. Layout with total station
16. Setting curve by offset from long chord method
17. Setting curve by Rankine’s deflection angle method
Mini Projects:
1. Carry out Block contouring project for a plot 100mx120m with a block size 10mx10m plot
the contours on imperial drawing sheet.
2. Theodolite survey for a closed traverse (5-6) sides and locating the details of buildings.
Plotting the Gale’s table and traverse on A1 size imperial drawing sheet.
3. Carry out block contouring using total station for a plot of 100x120 meter with block size of
5 m x5m on sloping ground and locate the building layout up to 100 square meter on site.
Prepare the contour map and centre line plan on A-1 size imperial sheet.
Learning Resources:
1. Books :
Sr.
No.
1
2
Title
Author
Surveying and Leveling- 38 th
N.N. Basak
edition.
Surveying- Volume-I, II Third
S.K. Duggal
Edition
3
Surveying and Leveling-1,II
T.P. Kanetkar and Kulkarni
4
5
6
7
8
Surveying and Leveling-1
Surveying and Leveling
Advance Surveying
Remote sensing and GIS
Surveying,( seventh edition)
Dr. B.C. Punmia
R. Subramanian
Satheesh Gopi, N. Madhu
Basudeo Bhatta
Arthur Bannister
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill
Tata McGraw Hill
Pune Vidyarthi Grigh
Prakashan
Laxmi Publication
Oxford university press
Pearson
Oxford university press
Pearson
17419
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Civil Engineering Group
Course Code : CE/CS/CR/CV
Semester
: Forth
Subject Title : Geo Technical Engineering
Subject Code : 17420
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Geotechnical engineering is the important for every structure, since all structures rest on
soil. The stability of these structures depends upon behavior of soil and bearing capacity of soil to
carry loads under different loading conditions. Formation of soil and rocks, defects in rocks, soil
behavior, and soil as an engineering material are essential parameter to an engineer. The design of
foundation of buildings, dams, towers, embankments, roads, railways, retaining walls, bridges is
mainly governed by these above stated parameters.
The content of this subject are also useful in designing basement, underground tank and
underwater structures. Knowledge of geology, soil characteristics, and stress distribution under
loading on soil, bearing capacity of soil is also useful to every engineer in the design, execution and
stability analysis of structures.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to
1) Know types of rocks and their formation, ground water table, detail investigation,
mineralogy, earthquake forces and their effects.
2) Understand the structure and sub soil strata of earth.
3) Understand the causes and effects of earth quake
4) Understand soil properties and interpretation of results of test on soil.
5) Understand the suitability of foundation based on soil condition at site.
6) Know importance of shear strength, bearing capacity, stability of slopes and techniques of
stabilization of soil.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17420
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Concept
Fact
Identify the type of Rock and soil through determination of physical properties and
stabilization techniques during construction of foundation of structure. To handle
situation where marshy land, loose soil and soil of low bearing is available.
Establish
functional
relationship
between
properties of
Soil.
Sketches of
folds,faultsa
nd Joints.
Determine
Index
Properties
of Soil
using I. S.
Code
methods
and
classify
the Soil.
Soil as
three
phase
System,
forma-tion
of Soils.
Voids ratio,
porosity
Degree of
Saturation,
particle size
distribution,
Fold, Faults,
Joints.
Determine
the
permeabili
ty of Soil
applying
Darcy’s
Law by
Constant
head &
falling
head Test
Performing
Proctor test
to obtain
OMC &
MDD and
improve
Soil
properties
through
soil
stabilizatio
n methods
Seepage, Head,
Gradient, MDD,
OMC,
Consolidation
shear strength,
Bearing
Capacity
stabilization.
Calculate
shearing
strength
from shear
test on Soil
and
applying
Coulomb’s
Law
Calculate
bearing
Capacity
of Soil by
I.S. Code
Method.
Causes and effect
of Earthquake.
Data of seismic
forces to be used
for design of RCC
and steel
structures.
Rock, Soil, Density, Specific gravity, Stress, Fold, Faults, permeability, compaction,
stabilization.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17420
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic
Topic 1: General geology, mineralogy and petrology.
Specific Objectives:
 State purpose of geology in civil engineering.
 Describe different structure and composition of earth.
Contents:
 Introduction of geology, different branches of geology, importance of
geology for civil engineering structure and composition of earth.
Introduction to mineralogy, physical properties of minerals depending
on light and state of aggregation.
 Introduction of petrology, definition of a rock, classification based on
their genesis (mode of origin), formation, classification and
engineering uses of igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks.
Topic 2: Structural Geology
Specific Objectives:
 State the meaning of different terms related to structural geology.
 State causes and condition of formation of fold, fault and joints.
Contents:
 StructuralGeology: Definition, importance, Outcrop, dip, strike, foldsDefinition, parts and types, Joints- Definition and classification, FaultsDefinition, parts and Types
Topic 3: Physical Geology.
Specific Objectives:
 State the effect of weathering on rocks.
 Describe the Earth movement and Volcanism.
Contents:
 Introduction of Physical geology, weathering-Definition, Types. SoilDefinition, formation of soil, classification of soils.
 Earthquakes-Definition, Terminology-focus, Epicenter, Intensity,
Seismograph, Isoseismic lines. Classification of Earthquakes based on
focus, origin, Richter’s scale. Causes and effect of earthquakes. Record
of earthquake, seismic waves Indian earthquakes, earthquake resistant
structures
Topic 4: Overview Geotechnical Engineering
Specific Objectives:
 State purpose of Soil as construction and Engineering material.
 Describe field application of Geo-technical Engineering.

IS definition of soil, Importance of soil in Civil Engineering as
construction material in Civil Engineering Structures, as foundation
bed for structures
 Field application of geotechnical engineering for foundation design,
pavement design, design of earth retaining structures, design of earthen
dams, salient features of earthen dam in Maharashtra and India.
Topics 5: Physical Properties of Soil
Specific Objectives:
 State the different physical properties of Soil.
 Classify the soil as per IS classification.
Contents:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
Hours
Marks
04
06
02
06
06
12
02
06
12
26
17420
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
5.1 Soil Properties ……………………………….
(10 Marks)
 Soil as a three phase system, water content, determination of water
content by oven drying method as per IS code, void ratio, porosity and
degree of saturation, density index, unit weight of soil mass – bulk unit
weight, dry unit weight, unit weight of solids, saturated unit weight,
submerged unit weight, determination of bulk unit weight and dry unit
weight by core cutter method and sand replacement method as per IS
code, specific gravity, determination of specific gravity by pycnometer.
5.2 Consistency Limits of Soil ………………………… (8 Marks)
 Consistency of soil, stages of consistency, Atterberg's limits of
consistency viz. Liquid limit, plastic limit and shrinkage limit,
plasticity index, determination of liquid limit, plastic limit and
shrinkage limit as per IS code.
5.3 Grading of Soils ……………………………….
(8 Marks)
 Particle size distribution, mechanical sieve analysis as per IS code
particle size distribution curve, effective diameter of soil, Uniformity
coefficient and coefficient of curvature, well graded and uniformly
graded soils, particle size. classification of soils, I.S. classification of
soil.
Topics 6: Permeability and Shear Strength of Soil.
Specific Objectives:
 State the factors affecting the permeability of soil.
 Describe the shear failure of cohesive and Non-cohesive soil.
Contents:
 Definition of permeability, Darcy’s law of permeability, coefficient of
permeability, factors affecting permeability, determination of
coefficient of permeability by constant head and falling head
permeability tests, simple problems to determine coefficient of
permeability. Seepage through earthen structures, seepage velocity,
seepage pressure, phreatic line, flow lines, application of flow net, (No
numerical problems.)
 Shear failure of soil, field situation of shear failure, concept of shear
strength of soil, components of shearing resistance of soil – cohesion,
internal friction. Mohr-coulomb failure theory, Strength envelope,
strength Equation for purely cohesive and cohesion less soils. Direct
shear test and vane shear test –laboratory methods.
Topics 7: Bearing Capacity, Compaction and Stabilization of Soil
Specific Objectives:
 Describe the procedure of test for Bearing Capacity of soil.
06
16
16
28
 State the necessity of compaction and stabilization of soil.
Contents:
7.1 Bearing capacity and theory of earth pressure …… (14 Marks)
 Concept of bearing capacity, ultimate bearing capacity, safe bearing
capacity and allowable bearing pressure, Introduction to Terzaghi’s
analysis and assumptions made effect of water table on bearing
capacity.
 Field methods for determination of bearing capacity – Plate load test
and standard penetration test. Test procedures as Per IS: 1888 & IS:
2131.
 Definition of earth pressure, active earth pressure and passive earth
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
17420
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
pressure, coefficient of earth pressure, Rankine’s theory and
assumptions made for non-cohesive Soils.
7.2 Compaction and consolidation ………………….. (14 Marks)
 Concept of compaction, purpose of compaction, field situations where
compaction is required, Standard proctor test – test procedure as per IS
code, Compaction curve, optimum moisture content, maximum dry
density, Zero air voids line, Modified proctor test, factors affecting
compaction, field methods of compaction – rolling, ramming and
vibration and Suitability of various compaction equipments-smooth
wheel roller, sheep foot roller, pneumatic tyred roller, Rammer and
Vibrator, difference between compaction and consolidation.
 Concept of soil stabilization, necessity of soil stabilization, different
methods of soil stabilization – Mechanical soil stabilization, lime
stabilization, cement stabilization, bitumen stabilization, fly-ash
stabilization. California bearing ratio, C.B.R. test, meaning of C.B.R.
value.
 Necessity of site investigation and sub-soil exploration, types of
exploration, criteria for deciding the location and number of test pits
and bores.Field identification of soil – dry strength test, dilatancy test
and toughness test.
Total
48
100
Practicals:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Identify type of rocks and mineral.
2. Identify properties of soil.
3. Interpret test results.
4. Understand IS procedure of testing.
Motor Skills:
1. Measure the quantities accurately.
2. Handle the instruments carefully.
List of Practicals:1. Identity different rocks specimen.
2. Prepare chart of different mineral families with physical properties.
3. (A) Determine water content of given soil sample by oven drying method as per I.S. 2720
part- II
And
3. (B) Determine specific gravity of soil by pycnometer method as per I.S. 2720 part- III.
4. (A) Determine dry unit weight of soil in field by core cutter method as per I.S. 2720 partXXIX.
OR
4. (B) Determine dry unit weight of soil in field by sand replacement method as per I.S. 2720
part- XXVIII.
5. Determine Liquid Limit and Plastic Limit of given soil sample as per I.S. 2720 part- V.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17420
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
6. Determine grain size distribution of given soil sample by mechanical sieve analysis as per
I.S. 2720 part- IV.
7. (A) Determine co efficient of permeability by constant head test as per I.S. 2720 past- XVII
OR
7. (B) Determine co efficient of permeability by falling head test as per I.S.
8. (A) Determine shear strength of soil by direct shear test as per I.S. 2720 part- XIII
OR
8. (B) Determine shear strength of soil by vane shear test as per I.S. 2720 part- XXX
9. Determine MDD and OMC by standard proctor test of given soil sample as per I.S. 2720
part- VII.
10. Identify and classify soil by conducting field tests-Visual inspection, Dry strength test,
Dilatancy test and Toughness test. (Organize visit to construction site)
Note: For experiments 4, 7 and 8, divide batch in two sub groups and allot experiment ‘A’ to one
sub group and ‘B’ to other sub group .
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
M.T. Maruthesha
1
reddy.
2
Dr.R.B.Gupte
3.
Prof.T.N.Ramamurthy
& Prof.T.G.Sitharam
4
Dr.B.C.Punmia
Title
A text book of applied Engineering
Geology.
A text book of Engineering
Geology.
Geotechnical Engineering (Soil
Mechanics)
Soil Mechanics and Foundation
Engineering
Publisher
New age International
Publishers
Pune Vidyarthi Griha
Prakashan.
S Chand and Company
LTD.
Standard Book House,
New Delhi.
2. IS, BIS and International Codes:
1. Is 2809-1972-Glossary of Terms and Symbols Relating To Soil Engineering?
2. Is 4410-Part Vii-1968-Engineering Geology
3. Is 1892-1979-Code oOf Practice For Sub Surface Investigation of Foundation
4. Is 2132-1986-Code of Practice For Thin Walled Tube Sampling
5. Is 2720-Test For Soil
Part 1-1983 To Part 29
3. Websites:
www.totalgte.com, www.igs.org.in, www.gsi.gov.in, www.igsjournal.org,
www.geology.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17420
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Civil Engineering Group
Course Code : CE/CS/CR/CV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Hydraulics
Subject Code : 17421
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Hydraulics is a branch of engineering science which deals with behavior of liquids at rest as well as
in motion. It forms the basis of core engineering subjects like Irrigation Engineering, Bridge
Engineering and Inland water transport.
Problems in the field of water supply, irrigation, navigation can be solved by applying principles of
Hydraulics.
Physical properties of water will be useful in the analysis of the flow of water through pipes, open
channels.
The measurement of flow through pipe and open channel will be useful in the design of water
supply system, design of irrigation channels and assessment of water charges for water supply and
filed of irrigation.
The measurement of flow in open streams, flow over the spillways will be useful for regulation of
flood discharge.
The empirical formulae developed in hydraulics are useful in solving engineering problems.
Thus this subject will help students in the hydraulic design of various civil engineering structures.
General Objectives:
The students will able to:
1. Understand principles of pressure measuring devices and computation of hydrostatic
pressure and center of pressure
2. Identify the types of fluid flow.
3. Estimate the loss of head for flow through pipes.
4. Estimate the diameter of pipes for different arrangements of pipes.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17421
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5.
6.
7.
8.
‘G’ Scheme
Design most economical channel section.
Estimate the discharge over weirs and notches.
Understand the velocity of flow in open streams as well as in pipes.
Decide horse power of pump and selection of pump.
Learning Structure:
Application
Use the principles of hydraulics for various applications related Hydrology,
Water supply, Sanitary Engineering, Irrigation structures, Bridge
Engineering
Procedure
Determination of
Hydraulic Pressure
Design of Pipe
Energy Gradient
and Hydraulic
Gradient
Pressure
Measurement
Newton's Law of
Viscosity. Pascal's
Law
Bernoulli’s
Theorem
Continuity
Equation
Principal
Concept
Flow measurement
in open channel.
Chezy’s Equation
Manning’s
Formula
Physical Properties, Pressure, Flow, Reynolds’s Number, Froud Number
Fluid
Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17421
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Hours Marks
Topic 1: Properties of fluid
Specific Objectives:
 Differentiate between fluids with solids
 List properties of fluids
Contents :
 Definition of fluid, Fluid mechanics and Hydraulics, Hydrostatics,
Hydrodynamics. Difference in behavior of liquid with solids,
04
08
 Application of hydraulics with respect to irrigation and
environmental engineering.
 Physical properties of fluid and standard values of Mass density,
Weight density, Specific volume, Specific gravity, Surface tension
and Capillarity, Compressibility, Viscosity, Ideal and Real fluids.
Newton’s law of viscosity, simple numerical problems.
Topic 2: Hydrostatic Pressure
Specific Objectives:
 State principles, laws of hydrostatic pressure
 Compute total hydrostatic pressure and centre of pressure on
different surfaces
Contents :
 Definition of pressure and its SI Unit. Hydrostatic pressure at a point
in fluid, Pascal’s law of fluid pressure. Variation of pressure in static
08
12
liquid, Pressure diagram –concept and use.
 Total hydrostatic pressure and center of pressure-Determination of
total pressure and center of pressure on vertical, inclined and
horizontal plane surfaces in contact with liquid and horizontal plane
surfaces in contact with liquid faces of dams, sides and bottom of
water tanks sides and bottom of tanks containing two liquids.
Vertical surface in contact with liquid on either side. Numerical
Problems on all cases above.
Topic 3: Measurement of Liquid Pressure In Pipes
Specific Objectives:
 State meaning of liquid pressure, pressure head
 State principles and uses of different pressure measuring devices
Contents :
 Concept of pressure, pressure head and its unit, conversion of
04
12
pressure head of one liquid into pressure head of other liquid.
 Devices for pressure measurements in pipe, principles and working
of Piezometer, U-tube simple manometers, U-tube differential
manometers, Inverted manometers. Numerical problems. on
manometers
 Bourdon’s pressure gauge – construction and principle of working.
Topic 4: Fundamentals of Fluid Flow
Specific Objectives:
 Identify type of flow
06
12
 State the use of Reynolds number
 List the components of energy of liquid flow
 Write the statement of Bernoulli’s theorem as applied to flow of
liquid.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17421
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
 Types of flow- Gravity flow, pressure flow.steady and unsteady flow,
uniform and non- uniform flow, laminar and turbulent flow. Various
combinations of above flows with practical examples.
 Reynolds number and its application. Stream line and equi-potential
line. Flow net and its use.
 Discharge and its unit, continuity equation for liquid flow.
 Energy of flowing liquid – datum head, velocity head, pressure head.
Bernoulli’s theorem- statement, assumptions, equation.Loss of
energy and Bernoulli’s modified equation.
Numerical Problems on all above topics.
Topic 5: Flow of Liquid Through Pipes
Specific Objectives:
 List various losses in flow through pipes
 Estimate loss of head for flow through pipes
 List various pipe arrangements and calculate diameter of pipe
Contents :
5.1 Loss of energy or loss of head in flow through pipe…………..06
 Loss of head due to friction- Darcy-Weisbach Equation.
 Moody’s diagram and its use, common range of friction factor for
different types of pipe materials.
 Minor loss of head in flow through pipe- loss of head due to sudden
contraction, sudden expansion, entrance and exit losses. Losses in
various pipe fittings.
5.2 Different Pipes arrangements and hydraulic gradient
line.…………………………………10
 Flow through pipes in series and parallel pipes.
 Syphon pipe.
 Equivalent pipe- Dupit’s equition.
 Hydraulic Gradient Line and Energy Gradient Line
 Water Hammer- concept, causes, effects and remedial measures.
 Use of Nomograms for design of pipe.
Numerical Problems on above topics.
Topic 6: Flow Through Open Channel
Specific Objectives:
 Work out discharge through open channel
 Design most economical section of channel
Contents :
6.1 Open channel flow………………………………………….04
 Definitions of open channel flow.
 Types of channels- artificial and natural. Different shapes of
artificial channels. Geometrical properties of channel sections-wetted
area, wetted perimeter, hydraulic radius, hydraulic mean depth.
 Types of flow in open channel- steady, unsteady and uniform, nonuniform flow.
6.2 Determination of discharge through open channel…………08
 Chezy’s equation and Manning’s equation.
 Most economical channel sections- conditions for most economical
rectangular and trapezoidal channel sections.
6.3 Hydraulic Jump……………………………………………..04
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
08
16
07
16
17421
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme


Froud’s number and its significance.
Hydraulic Jump, its occurrence in field, use .
Numerical Problems.on above all topics
Topic 7: Flow Measurement Techniques
Specific Objectives:
 Understand principles and working of flow measuring devices
 Determine discharge through pipes and open streams
Contents :
7.1 Discharge measuring devices for pipes……………………08
 Venturimeter- component parts, its working, determination of
discharge through venturimeter.
 Flow through orifice-Definition, use, types. Hydraulic Coefficients of
orifice (Cd , Cc, Cv), relation between them and their determination,
Discharge through small sharp edged circular orifice.
7.2 Discharge measuring devices for open channel………….08
 Notches –Types- Rectangular, ‘V’, Trapezoidal notches.
Expression for discharge.
 Weirs- Types, discharge over rectangular sharp crested weir.
Velocity area method of discharge measurement - Velocity measuring devices-floats, pitot tube, Current meter.
 Study and use of water meter.
Numerical Problems. .on all above topics
Topic 8: Pumps and Turbines
Specific Objectives:
 Identify various types of pumps and their uses in different
situations
 Calculate power for pump
Contents :
 Pumps- Definition and types.
 Suction head, delivery head, static head and manometric head of
Pump. Computation of power required for pump. numerical
problems.
 Centrifugal pump, Reciprocating pump, Submersible pump and Jet
pump- component parts and their function, principle of working.
 Selection and choice of pump.
 Turbine- Types-impulse and reaction, components and their
functions, working, selection.
Total
07
16
04
08
48
100
Practicals:
Skills to be developed
Intellectual Skills: 1) Interpret test results
2) Calculate parameters
3) Interpret graphs
Motor Skills: 1) Observe and measure different parameters and record accurately
2) Operate the equipments
3) Handle various apparatus
4) Draw graphs
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17421
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Practicals:
1. Measure pressure head and pressure intensity by using piezometer and simple U-tube
manometer and demonstrate Bourdon’s tube pressure gauge for measurement of positive and
negative gauge pressure.
2. Measure pressure difference by using differential U-tube manometer and inverted U tube
differential manometer.
3. Calculate total head at different cross sections of a given pipe to verify Bernoulli’s theorem.
4. Identity type of flow through a pipe using Reynolds’s apparatus.
5. Determine friction factor for given pipes of different diameters using Darcy weisbach
equation.
6. Determine minor losses of head due to sudden enlargement, sudden contraction, bend and
elbow in pipe.
7. Calculate chezy’s and Manning’s constant for a given rectangular tilting flume and
demonstrate Hydraulic jump.
8. Determine coefficient of discharge for a given Venturimeter.
9. Determine coefficient of discharge for a given rectangular and triangular notch.
10. Determine Hydraulic coefficients for small circular sharp edged orifice.
11. Determine Hydraulic coefficients for small circular sharp edged orifice.
12. Understand construction and working of centrifugal and reciprocating pumps with the help of
model of charts and collect catalogues of pumps and use it for selection of pump for design
discharge and head.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Dr. P. N. Modi
Dr. S. M. Seth
02
Dr. R. K.Bansal
03
R. S. Khurmi
04
05
S. Ramamurtam
S. K. Likhi
Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic
Mechanics
A Text Book of Hydraulics, Fluid
Mechanics, Hydraulic Machines
Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics
Hydraulic Laboratory Manual
06
Dr. S. K. Ukarande
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulics
2.
Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics
Standard Book House, Dehli
Laxmi Publication New Delhi
S.Chand & Company Ltd.
New Delhi
Dhanpat Rai & Sons, Delhi
T.T.T.I.Chandhigrah
Ane Books Pvt. Ltd.
ISBN 9789381162538
Models and Charts etc.:
Model of pumps, hydraulic jump and pipe fittings.
3. Websites: 1) www.howstuffworks.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17421
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Civil Engineering Group
Course Code : CE/CS/CR/ CV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Theory of Structures
Subject Code : 17422
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
01
--
04
100
--
--
--
100
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Civil engineering structures are mainly made-up of column, Beam and Slabs and these
structures are subjected to axial as well as eccentric loading. These structures may be determinant
or indeterminate in nature. The members like fixed beam, continuous beam, portal frame are
indeterminate structures.
The content on calculations of actual shear stresses, bending moments and deflections
which are developed in various structural members will be useful in analyzing the forces in these
members which is further useful in design of these members. Analysis of member for deflection,
combined direct and bending stresses will be useful in safe design of various structural members.
Thus the total contents of this subject forms the basic for the efficient and safe design of
steel and RCC structures.
.
General Objectives:
The students will be able to1. Understand the stresses in the members due to eccentric load and wind pressure
2. Understand shear force and bending moment diagram for Fixed and continuous beams for
various external loading on them.
3. Understand the shear force and bending moment diagrams for beams subjected to point
load and uniformly distributed load.
4. Understand analysis of forces in various members of steel roof trusses for different spans.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17422
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Select the Method of analysis for various structural members with different
boundary conditions to calculate support moments, deflection, resultant
stresses.
Use
condition for
no tension
middle third
rule
Procedure
Eccentric
load, core
of section,
uni-axial
bending
Calculate
deflection &
slope using
relationship
between.
slope,
deflection,
radius of
curvature and
Macaulay
Method
Slope &
deflection
Principles
Theory:
Concept
Facts
Analyze roof
truss by
graphical
method and
method of
joints
Loads over
simple steel
frames, types
of supports
for trusses,
support
reactions,
Calculate
support,
moments by
using
Theorem of
three
moment,
Moment
distribution
method
Fixed and
moment free
BMD,
Support
moment
diagram,
stiffness
factor and
distribution
factor
Axial load, Direct stress, Bending stress, Moment of Inertia, Radius of
gyration, Types of beams.
Various steels & RCC structures
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17422
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Content:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Direct and Bending Stresses
Specific Objectives:
 List direct and eccentric loads on columns.
 Write conditions of no tension for beams, columns and pillars.
 Draw stress distribution diagram at bases of column, pillars and
chimneys subjected to wind pressure.
Contents:
1.1
……………………………………………………..(12 Marks)
 Introduction of direct and eccentric loads,
 Eccentricity about one principal axis, nature of stresses
 Maximum and minimum stresses, resultant stress distribution
diagram.
 Condition for no tension or zero stress at extreme fiber
 Limit of eccentricity, core of section for rectangular and circular
cross sections
 Middle third rule.
1.2
……………………………………………………..(08 Marks)
 Chimneys subjected to wind, rectangular and circular cross section,
wind pressure, coefficient of wind pressure, stress distribution
diagram at base.
 Walls subjected to horizontal pressure & stress distribution at base.
Topics 2: Slope and Deflection
Specific Objectives:
 State meaning of slope and deflection and stiffness of simply supported
beams and cantilevers.
 Calculate slope and deflection of simply supported and cantilever beam
subjected to point load and UDL by Macauley method.
 State relationship between slope and deflection and radius of curvature.
Contents:
2.1
……………………………………………………..(08 Marks)
 Concept of slope and deflection, stiffness of beams.
 Relation among bending moment, slope deflection and radius of
curvature, differential equation (no derivation), double integration
method to find slope and defection of simply supported and
cantilever beam.
2.2
……………………………………………………..(12 Marks)
 Macaulay’s method for slope and deflection, application to simply
supported and cantilever beam subjected to concentrated and
uniformly distributed load on entire span,.
Topics 3: Fixed Beam
Specific Objectives:
 State meaning of fixity effects and list advantages of fixed beam.
 Write the principle of superposition.
 Draw BMD and SFD for fixed beams with point load and UDL.
Hours
Marks
10
20
10
20
06
12
Contents:
Fixed Beam
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17422
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

Concept of fixity, effect of fixity, advantages and disadvantages of
fixed beam.
 Principle of superposition.
 Fixed end moments from first principle for beam subjected to UDL
over entire span, central point load, Point load other than mid span.
 Application of standard formulae in finding moments and drawing
S.F. and B.M. diagrams for a fixed beam (Derivation need not be
asked in the examination).
Topics 4: Continuous Beam
Specific Objectives:
 State the effects of continuity of beams and nature of moments induced.
 Write Calpeyron’s theorem of three moments (No derivation)
 Draw sketches of BMD and SFD for continuous beams.
Contents:
Continuous Beam
 Definition, effect of continuity practical example, nature of moments
induced due to continuity, concept of deflected shape
 Clapeyron’s theorem of three moment (no derivation).
 Application of theorem maximum up to three spans and two
unknown support moment only, Support at same level, spans having
same and different moment of inertia subjected to concentrated loads
and uniformly distributed loads over entire span.
 Drawing SF and BM diagrams for continuous beams.
Topics 5: Moment Distribution Method
Specific Objectives:
 List introduction and sign convention for fixed end moments.
 State meaning of carry over factor, stiffness factor and distribution
factor.
 Draw BMD, SFD with support at same level.
Contents:
Moment Distribution Method.



Introduction, sign convention
Carry over factor, stiffness factor, distribution factor.
Application of moment distribution method for various types of
continuous beams subjected to concentrated loads and uniformly
distributed load over entire span having same or different moment of
inertia up to three spans and two unknown support moment only, SF
and BM diagrams (Supports at same level)
 Introduction to portal frames – Types of portal frames (No problems
shall be asked on portal frames).
Topic 6: Simple Frames
Specific Objectives:
 List different types of roof trusses.
 State conditions for redundant and non- redundant frames.
 List types of forces in different members.
Contents:
08
16
08
16
06
16
Simple Frames
 Types of trusses (Simple, Fink, compound fink, French roof truss,
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17422
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13



‘G’ Scheme
pratt roof truss, Howe roof truss, North light roof truss, King post
and Queen post roof truss)
Calculate support reactions for point loads at nodal points.
Calculate forces in different members by using method of joints and
Method of sections.
Graphical method of analysis of truss.(No problem in the theory
examination)
Total
48
100
Tutorial:
Questions from any two old QP shall be given for tutorial on each topic. Students shall solve
these problems in a separate note book. The staff member shall assess these work batchwise.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
01
S. B. Junnarkar
02
S. Ramanrutham
Mechanics of structures
Volume-I,II
Theory of Structures
03
R. S. Khurmi
Theory of Structures
04
G.S. Pandit & S.P.Gupta
05
West
Theory of Structures
Fundamentals of Structural
Analysis
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
Publisher
Charotar Publishing House,
Anand
Dhanpatrai & Sons, Delhi
S.Chand Publications,
Delhi
Tata Mcgraw Hill
Wiley India
17422
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Civil Engineering Group
Course Code : CE/CS/CR/CV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Computer Aided Drawing
Subject Code : 17036
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
04
--
--
25#
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Drawing is a language of engineers and in the era computers, engineers prepare most
accurate and descent presentation of plans to satisfy the clients. It has become the practice to
prepare the drawing with the help of computer. This not only saves time, but also provides scope
for immediate improvements, changes in the drawings. From the aesthetic point of view also the
drawings give better presentations. Therefore, use of computer software’s (Auto Cad, Felix Cad,
Auto Civil) will enable Civil Engineers to prepare quality drawing in shortest possible time. Hence,
it becomes mandatory for the students of Diploma in Civil Engineering to possess drafting skills
with the help of software.
General Objectives:
The students will be able to –
1) Use different CAD commands for drawing
2) Prepare line plans with CAD Software
3) Prepare Submission drawing/ working drawing of buildings.
To develop following skills:
Intellectual Skills:
 Read and interpret building drawing

Plan residential and public building as per requirement
Motor Skills:
 Prepare line plan for residential and public building

Draw developed plan, elevation, section, site plan, foundation plan,

Prepare schedule of openings, area statement
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17036
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Prepare submission, working, detailed, presentation drawing for buildings
with CAD Software
Procedure
Drawing plan, elevation, section, site plan of building with CAD
Principle
Planning and design as per
requirement
Concept
Building
Codes
Building
Bye-laws
2 D Commands
‐ Drawing commands
‐ Editing and modifying
commands
Principles
of
Planning
Section 1.02 CAD
Software
Plan, Elevation, Section, Site Plan, Schedule of
openings, Area statement, construction notes.
Facts
Lettering, Types of Line, Convention, Symbol, Scale, Material, Section 1.03
Civil Engineering
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17036
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1. FUNDAMENTAL OF CAD
Hours

CAD Software – Meaning, various CAD software’s available in market,
Advantages of CAD
 Starting up of Cad, CAD Window, Toolbar, Drop down menu, Drop down
menu, Introduction of starting Auto Cad Screen.
 CAD fundamental, coordinate system in CAD. Absolute, Relative, Polar,
Spherical, Cylindrical coordinate system, filters, Use of function key in
AUTOCAD.
Topic 2. CAD COMMANDS
08


WCS icon, UCS icon, coordinates, drawing limits , grid, snap, ortho features
Drawing commands- line circle, arc, polyline, multiline, construction line, sp
line, ellipse, polygon, rectangle, table, block, text.
 Editing commands – copy, move, offset, fillet, chamfer, trim, stretch, lengthen,
extend, rotate, mirror, array etc.
 Working with hatches, fills, dimensioning, text etc.
 Important commands in insert menu, format menu, tools and dimensions.
Topic3. SUBMISSION AND WORKING DRAWING
 Preparation of line plan, detailed plan, developed plan, section, site plan, area
statement
 Procedure for printing drawings.
Topic 4. INTRODUCTION TO 3D DRAWING

16
36
04
Preliminary commands required for 3D.
Total
64
LIST OF PRACTICALS (TERM WORK) / ASSIGNMENTS:
Submission print on A 4 size paper
1. Draw a line plan of given residential building …………………………….08 Hrs.
2. Draw line plan of given public building ………………………..………….12 Hrs.
3. Drawing symbols of construction materials /components such as stone, brick, glass,
partition, wall doors and windows. ………………………………….04 Hrs.
4. Prepare working and detailed drawing for any two items, such as foundation plan, plan
of Stair such as straight, dog legged, open Newel. ……………. 08 Hrs.
5. Submission drawing, to the scale 1:100, of single storeyed Load Bearing Residential
Building (2BHKD) with Flat Roof and staircase showing developed plan, elevation,
section passing through Stair or W.C. and Bath, site plan (1:200), area statement,
schedule of openings , construction notes show enlarged section with details
…………. 16 Hrs.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
17036
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
(Print on A 4 size paper: Developed Plan, Elevation and Section on one page and
remaining drawing on other page)
6. Submission drawing, to the scale 1:100, of (G+1) Residential Building Framed Structure
(2 BHKD with attached toilet to 1 bedroom showing the position of European type WC pan) showing
developed plan, elevation, section passing through staircase, site plan (1:200),
(Also Show the place for
foundation plan (1:50), area statement, schedule of openings.
Washing machine, WHB, Pooja, store etc. Also show bed position, Dining table with chairs,
sofa, wardrobe etc.………... ………
12 Hrs.
(Print on A 4 size paper: Developed Plan, Elevation and Section on one page and
remaining drawing on other page)
7. Submission of soft copy of above drawing files on CD and Hard copy on A4 size
paper………….. 4 Hrs.
List of Equipment
S.No
1
2
3
Name of Equipments
Personal Computer’s with latest version, TFT
monitor 17 inches and Window based operating
system with networking
Printer
Software’s : AUTOCAD
Quantity
20
02
01 for 20 users
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Title
AUTOCAD
Introduction To Auto Cad 2012
AUTOCAD
Auto Cad 2010 Instructor
Auto CAD and its ApplicationsBasics 2010
Author
David Frey
Nighat Yasmin
Shyam & Titkoo
James Leach
Terence M. Shumaker
David A. Madsen
David P. Madsen
Publisher
BPB Publication New Delhi
SDC Publication.
-Tata McGraw Hill
Goodheart- Willcox
(Duplicate of GOODW)
2. CDs, PPTs Etc.:
SOFTWARE REQUIRED: Latest version of Auto-CAD, Build master, interior
Designer, 3D- Max Studio.
3. Websites: www.zwsoft.com/cad
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
38
17036
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Civil Engineering Group
Course Code : CE/CS/CR/CV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17037
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or competitive
tests.
While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, attitude
and ability to communicate and attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to student to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert lectures,
seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so that there will be
increased participation of students in learning process.
Objective:
To develop the following Skills:
Intellectual Skills
1. Understand construction of different Civil Engineering works through visits.
2. Understand the techniques of collecting different data.
3. Understand the Presentation for giving the seminar.
Motor Skills
1. Write report on various field visits to the construction sites.
2. Present the seminar.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
39
17037
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Present a seminar on identified topic related to new technology
Procedure
Searching information
from Journals, internet
and market
Preparing Power Point
Presentation text for the
topic
Principle
Principle of searching
information
Principle of Power Point
Presentation
Facts
Technical Journals,
Internet
Computer, Power Point
Presentation Software
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
40
17037
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Activities
Activity
No.
1
2
3
4
Content
Field Visits:
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student, to form a part of the term work. The
industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries (Any
Three)
i) Bridges under construction
ii) Tunnel site visit
iii) Railway Station
iv) Construction of basement / retaining wall /pile foundation
v) Public building under construction
vi) Airport / Docks and Harbour
vii) Visit to different construction Exhibitions
Expert Lectures:
Lectures by Professional persons / Industrial Expert / Entrepreneur Seminars
based on information search, expert lectures to be organized from any two
of the following areas :
i) Construction of Flyovers : Special Features
ii) Ready Mix Concrete
iii) Safety in Construction
iv) Latest Trends in Construction activities like Water Proofing,
Centering, Cladding, Plumbing
v) Software for Drafting
vi) Any other subject related to Civil Engineering
vii) Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
Data Collection:
Information search can be done through manufacturers, catalogue, internet,
magazines, books etc. and a submit a report (any three)
i) Collection and reading of drawings of buildings from architect /
Practicing engineers and listing of various features from the
drawings.
ii) Market survey for pumps, pipes and peripherals required for multi
storied buildings.
iii) Non conventional energy sources with focus on solar energy
iv) Elevators - Installation and Maintenance
v) Market survey for Advanced Construction material with respect
to Quality, Rate and application
vi) Modern products of Non-Conventional Energy like solar cooker,
solar lamp, solar water heater, solar distillation
Seminar :
Seminar topic should be related to the subject of fourth semester. Each
student shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar
(Presentation time - 10 minutes) (Any one topic)
Seminar topics may be from areas:
i) Geology
ii) Soil Mechanics
iii) Transportation Engineering
iv) Surveying and Advance Surveying
v) Environmental Science.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
41
Hours
12
06
08
10
17037
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Activity
No.
‘G’ Scheme
Content
Hours
vi)
vii)
Mini
i)
ii)
Building Construction
Materials for construction
Project / Activities: (any one)
Mix design of concrete.
Preparing two dimensional submissions drawing of residential
building using CAD.
iii) Soil Investigation at a site to find out the Bearing capacity
iv) A week program on Construction site and prepare a detail
report
12
5
v) Student shall collect the information by visiting Electrical /
Electronics Engineering dept. about the material required for
wiring and switches - lamps, fans, boards their materials and
capacities, systems of wiring and material used, control switches,
fuse, etc.
vi) Student shall collect the information by visiting Mechanical
Engineering department and study the mechanical devices like
pumps
Total
48
List of assignments to be done by each student as term work (Group of 5-6 students shall be
prepared and each group shall be given different activity.
1. Field Visit:
Industrial visit to be arranged for class / batch. Students are expected to observe and collect
data. Finally prepare a visit report. Report of three industrial visits,
2. Expert Lectures:
Expert lecture to be arranged at institute for the class. Student should attend and prepare the
keynote of it as a part of term work. Report of two expert Lecture
3. Data Collection:
Students are expected to collect data from various sources under the guidance of faculty
member and submit the report for the term work. Data collection report on two topics.
4. Seminar:
Each student should select the topic of his own interest from the list and prepare and present
the seminar on it and submit the hard copy as a term work.
5. Mini Project:
Form a group of 4 to 5 students. Each group shall select a topic from the given list. Submit a
report of 8-10 pages with sketches, photographs, diagrams, statements etc. as a part of term
work.
Learning Resources:
Reference Book, Journal, Exhibitions, Seminar Papers.
Sr.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Title
Fourth semester subjects reference books
Journals and magazines – IEEE Journals, IT technologies.
Local news papers and events
Apprenticeship Training Scheme: Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
42
17037
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Web sites: On Google search refer various sites on
1. How to write a report
2. How to prepare seminar
3. Effective Listening.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
43
17037
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
44
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN TEXTILE TECHNOLOGY
COURSE CODE : TC
DURATION OF COURSE : SIX SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM : 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
SUBJECT TITLE
Abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH (1)
Max
Min
EXAMINATION SCHEME
PR (4)
OR (8)
Max
Min
Max
Min
TW (9)
Max
Min
1
2
3
Environmental Studies $
Technology of Dyeing-I
Technology of Printing-I
EST
TOD
TOP
17401
17467
17468
01
04
04
----
02
03
03
01
03
03
50#*
100
100
20
40
40
-50#
50#
-20
20
----
----
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
10
10
4
Technology of Finishing-I
Elements of Chemical
Engg. Operation
Textile Testing
Professional Practices-II
Industrial Training
TOF
17469
03
--
03
03
100
40
--
--
25#
10
[email protected]
10
ECH
17470
03
--
--
03
100
40
--
--
--
--
--
--
TTE
PPS
ITR
17471
17052
17053
TOTAL
03
--18
-----
02
03
**
16
03
----
100
--550
40
----
---100
-----
---25
-----
[email protected]
[email protected]
-175
10
20
---
5
6
7
8
SW
(17400)
50
50
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 34 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 900
@ Internal Assessment, # External Assessment, $ Common to All Conventional Diploma,
No Theory Examination, ** Industrial Training
for six weeks to be completed during summer break after Fourth semester. Assessment to be done in Fifth Semester.
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Termwork, SW- Sessional Work.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subject are to be converted out of 100 marks
as sessional work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/AU/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding. We are today
facing a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of
the last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as
overexploitation of natural resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered
species, dangerous toxins, global warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects, pollution
control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept of Carbon credit
and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and resultant
of forces
Natural
resources such
as Forest, Water,
Food, Energy
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Classification
of pollution
Conservation of
Biodiversity
Concept
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
Resources
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Biodiversity
Fact
Sources, effects,
prevention
Threats,
Conservation
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon Credit,
Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources
 Definition
 Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources
 General description of forest resources
 Functions and benefits of forest resources
 Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber extraction,
Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources
 Hydrosphere: Different sources of water
 Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water
 Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06
 Categories of mineral resources
 Basics of mining activities
 Mine safety
 Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:
 Food for all
 Effects of modern agriculture
 World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13

‘G’ Scheme
Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts and
their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Technology
Course Code : TC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Technology of Dyeing-I
Subject Code : 17467
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
03
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The chemical processing of textiles is a value addition process by way of enhancing the
aesthetic properties through dyeing and printing. In the second year of this course, the students are
taught about the dyeing and printing of textiles with various types of dyes and pigments along with
different methods, and styles. The students are also made acquainted with the operations of the
machines involved in these processes. In general this subject is devised to impart the knowledge
and skills in the areas of dyeing and printing of the textiles.
General Objectives:
The students will be able to: 
Get the basic concepts in dyeing of cellulosic material

Know the technology of dyeing of cellulosic material with various classes of dyes.
Differentiate the various dyeing techniques and their advantages and disadvantages.

Understand construction and working of various dyeing machines used for cellulosic
dyeing.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17467 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principle
Concept
Facts
To understand various dyeing, techniques with all fixation
methods. Working of dyeing machines.
Different dyeing procedures for dyes like Reactive, Vat, Basic,
Sulphur, Acid etc.
Principles of dyeing with Reactive, Vat, Sulphur, Basic dyes.
Rate of diffusion of dyes in cellusocis.
Vat dye, Acid dye, Sulphur dye, Azoic dye, Reactive dye, yarn
dyeing machine, fabric dyeing machine, fibre dyeing machine.
Fibre, yarn & fabric dyeing machine.
Dyes, pigments, Dyeing, Dyeing machine.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
17467 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents: Theory
Chapter
01
02
03
Details
Introduction to Dyeing
Specific Objectives:
 To understand basic concept of dyeing
 Learn terminologies used in dyeing
 To understand effect of pretreatments on dyeing
Contents:
Definition of - Affinity, Substantivity, Exhaustion, Material to
Liquor Ratio (MLR), Percentage shade, Percentage expression.
Dyeing Agents – Sequestering agents, Exhausting agents,
Dispersing agents, Levelling agents, Retarding agents
Mechanism of Dyeing – Adsorption, Absorption, Fixation
Direct Dyeing
Specific Objectives:
 To understand chemical properties and classification of
direct dyes
 To study dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Direct Dyes: Properties, Classification, Mechanism, Effect of electrolytes, temperature, liquor ratio
Application on –cellulose and protein fibres
After-treatments with – Metallic salts, chromium compounds,
formaldehyde, cationic dye fixing agents, basic dyes (topping),
diazotization and development
Fastness properties
Faults and remedies
Reactive Dyeing
Specific Objectives:
 To learn chemical properties and classification of reactive
dyes
 To understand dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Reactive Dyes - Properties, Classification
Chemical reaction, Effect of dyeing parameters
Methods of dyeing with cold brand, hot brand, high-exhaust brand,
ME brand, VS brand dyes
Dyeing techniques – Exhaust, Pad-batch, Continuous
After treatments, Faults and remedies
Reactive dyes on silk, wool
Fastness properties
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
Hours
Marks
07
12
05
08
08
12
17467 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
04
05
06
07
‘G’ Scheme
Vat Dyeing
Specific Objectives:
 To learn chemical properties and classification of vat dyes
 To understand dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Vat Dyes - Properties, Classification
Application steps – vatting, dyeing, oxidation, after treatment
Methods – Leuco-vat dyeing (exhaust, padding), Pigmentation, vat
acid
Fastness properties
Faults and remedies
Solubalised Vat Dyeing
Specific Objectives:
 To learn chemical properties and classification of
Solubilised vat dyes
 To understand dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Properties
Steps involved in dyeing
Dyeing method
Fastness properties
Faults and remedies
Sulphur Dyeing
Specific Objectives:
 To learn chemical properties and classification of sulphur
dyes
 To understand dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Sulphur Dyes - Properties, Classification
Application steps – Reduction, dyeing, oxidation, after treatment
Fastness properties
Faults and remedies
Azoic Dyeing
Specific Objectives:
 To learn chemical properties and mechanism of azoic colour
formation
 To understand dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Properties
Naptholation, Diazotisation, Coupling
Shop floor method of application on cotton
After treatments
Fastness properties
Faults and remedies
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
08
12
04
06
07
10
05
08
17467 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
08
09
10
‘G’ Scheme
Dyeing with Basic Dyes
Specific Objectives:
 To learn chemical properties and classification of Basic
dyes
 To understand dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Properties
Mechanism of dyeing on – cellulosic fibres, protein fibres
Dyeing of silk fibre
Dyeing of wool fibre
Dyeing of cellulosic fibres
After treatments
Fastness properties
Dyeing With Acid Dyes
Specific Objectives:
 To learn chemical properties and classification of Acid dyes
 To understand dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Acid dyes – Properties, Classification
Dyeing mechanism of protein fibres
Dyeing of silk fibre
Dyeing of wool fibre
After treatments
Fastness properties
Dyeing With Metal Complex Dyes
Metal Complex dyes - Properties, Classification
Dyeing mechanism of protein fibres
Dyeing of wool fibre
After treatments
Fastness properties
Dyeing With Natural Dyes
Specific Objectives:
 To learn sources of natural dyes
 To understand dyeing procedure
 To analyze faults and remedies
Contents:
Classification of natural dyes
Properties
Application on cellulosic material
Faults and remedies
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
04
06
04
08
04
06
17467 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
11
‘G’ Scheme
Dyeing Machines
Specific Objectives:
 To understand types of dyeing machines
 To learn construction and working of m/cs
 To compare advantages and limitations of different m/cs
Contents:
Construction , working , advantages and disadvantages of:
 Fibre/Yarn Dyeing Machine - Hank Dyeing, Package
Dyeing
 Jigger Dyeing Machine
 Winch Dyeing Machine
 Semi continuous and Continuous Dyeing Machines
Total
08
12
64
100
Practicals:
Skills to be developed
Intellectual Skills:
The student will learn
1) Understand dying process.
2) Learn after treatments.
3) Learn dyeing machine.
Motor Skill:
The student will learn
1) Dyeing if cellulosic & protein fibre with different dyes.
2) To operate dyeing machine.
List of Experiments:
1.
Dyeing of cotton with direct dye
2.
After treatment with direct dyed goods
3.
Dyeing of cotton with hot brand & HE brand reactive dyes
4.
Dyeing of cotton with ME & ramazol reactive dyes
5.
Dyeing of cotton with vat dyes
6.
Dyeing of cotton with sulphur dye
7.
After treatments of sulphur dyed goods
8.
Dyeing of cotton with azoic colours
9.
Dyeing of wool & silk with basic dye
10. Dyeing of wool & silk with acid dye
11. Dyeing of wool & with metal complex dye
12. Dyeing of cotton fabric with reactive dyes by semi-continuous dyeing method.
13. Dyeing of cotton fabric with reactive dyes by continuous dyeing method.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17467 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Implementation Strategies:
The teaching learning will involve many methods such as: Class room lectures with
questions and answers, mill visits, discussions, exercises, practices assignments etc. The classroom
& practice sessions will be enriched by industry-based materials in the form of photographs, slides,
transparencies, video programs and computer based programs.
References:
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Author
Title
Dr. C. V.
Chemical
Koushik & Mr.
Processing of
Antao Irwin
Textiles
Josico
Technology of
V. A. Shenai
Dyeing
Textile
T. L. Vigo
processing &
properties
Clifford
The dyeing of
Pireston
cellulose fibres
Chemical
F. Sadav
technology of
fibres materials
Silk dyeing
M. L.
printing &
Gulrajani
finishing
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Year
of
Publication
Publisher & Address
st
2003
NCUTE, 8th Floor, Main
Building, IIT, Hauz
Khas, New Delhi-110016
2nd
2000
Sevak Publications
Mumbai - 400031
2nd
1994
Elsevier Science
B.V. Amsterdam
1st
--
1st
1973
Mir Publication Miscrow
3rd
1988
I.I.T. Delhi Dept.
Edition
1
13
Dyers co. Publication
Trust. England.
17467 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Technology
Course Code : TC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Technology of Printing-I
Subject Code : 17468
Teaching & Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
03
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The chemical processing of textile is a value addition process by way of exhausting the
aesthetic properties through printing and other processes. The students will be acquainted with the
operation of printing. In general this subject will impact knowledge and skills in the areas of
printing of textile fabrics.
Objectives:
The students will be able to:

Get the basic concepts in printing of fabrics.

Know the technology of printing, different techniques of printing, their advantages
and disadvantages.

Understand construction and working of various printing machines.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
17468 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To know the various printing techniques on cellulosic fabric and
protein fabrics.
Procedure
Process sequence of printing, preparation of fabric for printing.
Direct, discharge and resist style of printing.
Principle
Mechanism of direct, discharge and resist style of printing on
cellulosic fabric
Concept
Wool, silk & cotton printed goods. Batick & crimp style of
printing.
Facts
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Printed goods.
15
17468 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
CONTENTS: Theory
Chapter
Name of the Topic
Introduction to Textile Printing
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Importance of pretreatments for fabric printing
 Various ingredients and their role in printing
Hours
Marks
1
Contents:
 Preparation of cotton fabric for printing
 Print paste ingredients and their functions
 Classification of thickeners, chemistry of thickeners
 Advantages and limitations of thickeners.
 Selection criteria of thickeners for various dyes
Methods of printing and styles of printing:
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Various methods of printing
 Various styles of printing
10
16
2
Contents:
 General classification of methods of printing
 Tie and dye method, batik printing, stencil printing and
block printing.
 Classification of styles of printing
 Principles of direct ,discharge, resist styles of printing
Printing machinery
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Working of machineries for printing
 Advantages and limitations of every machinery
10
12
14
24
3
4
Contents:
 Table printing – Technical features, faults , causes and
remedies.
 Flat-bed printing- technical features, types of squeezes,
advantages and limitations.
 Screen preparation for flat bed printing machine.
 Rotary screen printing-technical features, types of
squeezes, advantages and limitations
 Screen exposing for rotary printing machine.
Printing of Cotton:
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Fixation mechanism of prints
 Print paste formulation for direct, reactive and azoic
colours.
Contents:
4.1 Print fixation methods
8 Marks
 Methods of print fixation
 Mechanism of print fixation during steaming
 Steaming machineries- Star ager and rapid ager
4.2 Formulation of print paste
16 Marks
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
20
17468 TC4
30
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

Printing with direct dye – Print paste formulation for
direct style of printing and discharge style of printing.
 Printing with reactive dye - Print paste formulation for
direct style of printing, discharge style of printing and
resist style of printing.
 Printing with azoic colours: Print paste formulation for
direct style of printing.
4.3 Special print effects
6 Marks
 Khadi printing
 Magic and Crimp styles of printing on cotton
Printing with pigment on Cotton:
 Principle of pigment printing,
 Print paste ingredients,
 Print paste formulation for pigment printing and process
sequence.
Printing of Wool and Silk:
 Preparation of fabrics for printing,
 Print paste formulation for direct style of printing on
wool and silk fabric using acid, metal complex and basic
dyes with process sequence.
Total
5
6
04
10
06
08
64
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1) Understand screen preparation.
2) Understand printing process.
3) Learn different styles of printing.
Motor Skill:
1) Drawing a design & prepare screen of same.
2) Direct, discharge & resist style of printing.
List of Practicals:
1) Preparation of screen for printing.
2) Develop Tie & dye effect on cotton fabric.
3) Develop batik effect on cotton fabric.
4) Application of direct dye on cotton by direct style of printing.
5) Application of reactive dye on cotton by direct style of printing.
6) Application of azoic colour on cotton by direct style of printing.
7) Develop magic style of printing, crimp style of printing effects on cotton.
8) Obtain White & colour discharge effects on cotton using direct and reactive dyes.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17468 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
9) Obtain azoic colour discharge effect on direct dyed ground.
10) Obtain White & colour resist effect on reactive dyed ground.
11) Printing of Silk using acid dyes.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Prof. N.L.
Gulrajani
Silk Dyeing,
Printing & Finishing
Dr. K.V.
Datye & A.A.
Vaidya
3
4
1
2
Edition
Year of
Publication
Publisher
Dept. Of Textile
Technology, IIT
Delhi
nd
1988
Chemical Processing
Of Synthetic And Its
Blends
2nd
1984
A Wiley Inter Science
Publication
L.W. C. Miles
Textile Printing
2nd
1981
The Dyer Company
Publication Trust
Dr. V. A.
Shenai
Technology. Of
Printing, Vol. IV
3rd
1990
Sevak Publication
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
18
17468 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Technology
Course Code : TC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Technology of Finishing-I
Subject Code : 17469
Teaching & Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
03
03
100
--
25#
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The word textile finishing defines a series of processing operations applied to grey fabrics
to enhance their appearance and hand, properties and possible applications. The term functional
finishing with reference to all the mechanical or chemical finishing operations carried out on
fabrics already bleached, dyed or printed to further enhance their properties and possibly add some
new ones.
The terms finishing and functional finishing are therefore similar and both play a
fundamental role for the commercial excellency of the results of textiles, strictly depending on
market requirements that are becoming increasingly stringent and unpredictable and permit very
short response times.
Objectives:
The students will be able to: 
Know the basic concepts and types of finishing

Have the knowledge of various formulations of different functional finishes.

Study the functional finishes.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17469 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To study application of different of finishes on various substrate
Procedure
Finishing of various substrate by different finishing recipe,
different methods of evaluation of finishes, Study the different
finishing methods.
Principle
Working principle of finishing machinery, Mechanism of resin
finishing, Mechanism of OBA, Mechanism of flame retardancy,
Mechanism of antimicrobial.
Concept
Finishing of textiles with resins, optical brightening agent,
flame retardant textiles, antimicrobial finish, water repellent
and water proof finish.
Facts
Functional finishing of various textiles and various machinery
required
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
17469 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents: Theory
Chapter
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Name of Topic
Introduction to Finishing and application techniques
Objects of finishing, classification of finishing,
Application techniques Review of exhaust method of application
 Padding - Concept of percentage expression, weight pickup, and operation
Working principle of machinery like Calendaring, Sueding,
Sanforising, Stenter.
Softeners & Stiffeners
Classification of softener, Properties, mode of action and
application of Cationic, Anionic, Non-ionic, Reactive and
Emulsion softeners. Softeners for cotton, wool, silk, polyester.
Classification of stiffeners, examples and their application.
Resin Finishing
Object of resin finishing, Mechanism of creasing and resin
finishing, General recipe for Resin finishing, Role of catalyst in
resin finishing, Concept of anticrease, wash-n-wear and Durable
Press. Classification and properties of resin and catalysts. Concept
of pre- cure and post cure method. Durable press finishing for
denim garments, Limitations of resin finishing. Concept of ecofriendly cross linking agents. Evaluation methods like crease
recovery angle and DP rating.
Optical Brightening Agent Finishing
Chemistry, mechanism and application methods of OBA for
cotton, wool, silk, polyester. Stripping of OBA.
Flame Retardancy
Burning cycle and thermal behaviour of textile fibres. Concept of
flame proof and flame retardancy. Limiting oxygen Index and its
importance, Classification of flame retardants. Mechanism of
Solid Phase and Gas Phase flame retardant. Factors affecting
flame retardancy. Essential requirements of a good flame
retardant. Various flame retardants for Cotton, Wool, Silk,
Polyester and Nylon. Evaluation of flame retardancy by angular
test method.
Antimicrobial Finishing
Objects, requirements, types and mechanism of antimicrobial
finishing. Desirable properties of a good antimicrobial finish,
Various antimicrobial finishes for Cotton, Wool, and Silk. Moth
proofing of wool, Evaluation of antimicrobial finishes.
Introduction to Special Finishes
Waterproof and water repellent finishing, Biopolishing, Scroopy
finish for silk, Concept of Nano-finishes.
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
Hours
Marks
08
20
08
16
10
20
04
08
06
16
06
10
06
10
48
100
17469 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Experiments:
1. Preparation and application of Blue Tone and Red Tone on cellulosic.
2. Application & evaluation of various types of softeners on cotton.
3. Finishing of cotton for imparting soft, medium and stiff handle.
4. Resin finishing of cotton.
5. Application of OBA on Cotton by continuous & exhaust method.
6. Finishing of wool to impart moth proofing.
7. Finishing of Silk to improve softness and crease recovery property.
8. Application & evaluation of anti microbial finish on cotton.
9. Application & evaluation of flame retardant finishing on cotton.
10. Application & evaluation of waterproof / Water repellent Finishing on cotton.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
1
Dr. K.V. Datye &
A.A. Vaidya
2
Dr. A. V. Shenai
3
J.T. Marsh
4
Marks, Atlas &
Wooding
5
R.M. Mittal & S.
S Trivedi
6
R. S. Bhagwat
7
ACMIT
8
Heywood
Title
Chemical Processing
of Synthetic and Its
Blends
Tech. of Finishing
Vol. X
Introduction To
Textile Finishing
Chemical After
Treatments of
Textiles.
Chemical Processing
of Polyester &
Cellulosic Blends
Handbook of Textile
Finishing Machinery
Finishing, Reference
Book of Textile
Technologies
Textile Finishing
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
Edition
Year of
Publication
Address of
Publisher
2nd
1984
A Wiley Inter
science Publication
3rd
1990
Sevak Publication
2nd
1979
4th
1971
Wiley Inter science
3rd
1984
ATIRA,
Ahemadabad
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
SDC Publications
B.I. Publication
17469 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Technology
Course Code : TC
Semester
: Third
Subject Title : Elements of Chemical Engineering Operation
Subject Code : 17470
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
--
03
100
--
--
--
100
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 100 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rational:
This subject intends to provide a self-contained introduction and back ground of cognate
topics of fluid or momentum transfer, heat transfer, and mass transfer. The chemical processing of
textile is very diverse in nature and involves the transfer of the fluid material from one place to
other for its use in the machines. The technologists in this industry should have the basic
understanding of the principles of fluid flow, heat transfer and mass transfer in order to control the
process by operating it to an optimum level.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:

Learn basics of the unit operations of Chemical Engineering.

Understand the importance of the subject to textile industry.

Apply the knowledge of the subject to textile industry practices.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17470 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To know the study of heat transfer, mass transfer and fluid flow.
Procedure
Finding viscosity, density of liquids. Flow measurement with
venturimeter, rotameters. Application of condition and convection.
Performance evaluation of heat exchange. Membrane separation by
reverse osmosis, dialysis, electro dialysis.
Principle
Study Reynolds number for pipe flow. Principle of flow measuring
device. Study of fan, blowers, compressor. Fourier’s law of hear.
Newtown’s law of cooling.
Concept
Density, viscosity, surface tension, energy balance, velocity
distribution, heat transfer, diffusivity, heat balance.
Facts
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Fluids, gases, drying products, mass transfer.
24
17470 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
CONTENTS: Theory
Chapter
01
02
03
04
Name of the Topic
Unit Systems And Introduction to Fluid Flow
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Different unit systems and conversions
 Properties of fluids & their variations


Review of various unit systems.
Study of units and conversions of some of the important
physical quantities.
 Introduction & importance of fluid flow studies to textiles.
 Definition of fluid, study of fluid properties like density,
viscosity, statement of Newton’s Law of Viscosity ,
 Definition of compressible, incompressible, real & ideal
fluids.
 Study of rheology of Non Newtonian fluids.
Study of Fluids In Motion
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Various flow equations & their significance
 Material & energy balances


Reynolds Experiment for fluid flow through pipes.
Equation of continuity and Bernoulli’s Equation
(Only expressions no derivation) with the significance of the
equations.
 Concept of energy losses & friction factor (no derivations &
no numerical)
 Pipe Fittings: Types & Purpose
Transportation of Fluids And Measurements of Fluid Flow:
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to
 Understand working of machineries required for fluid
transfer
 Measure & control the flow rates
 Need for pumping of liquids,
 Principle, construction & working of centrifugal pump..
 Importance of fluid flow measurement in textile.
 classification of flow measuring devices:
 Construction, principle, and working of venturi meter,
orifice meter.
Introduction to Heat Transfer
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Concepts of heat transfer
 Application of conduction





Definition of heat transfer operation.
Study of modes of heat transfer.
Definition of terminologies like specific heat, heat capacity,
Latent heat, sensible heat, thermal conductivity, and thermal
diffusivity, heat as a form energy, heat transfer rate and heat
transfer co-efficient.
Energy conservation in textiles
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
Hours
Marks
07
12
05
12
05
14
08
14
17470 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme


Conduction heat transfer: Fourier’s law of heat conduction,
Study of heat flow through a thick slab, thick cylindrical
pipe.
 Study of thermal insulations.
 Applications of conduction heat transfer in textile industry.
Convection & Radiation heat transfer
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Concept of convection & radiation
 Applications of above from textile point of view
05
06
07
08
 Statement of Newton’s Law of cooling,
 concept of heat transfer coefficient,
 Study of free & forced convection.
 Applications of convection heat transfer to textile industry.
 Concept of heat transfer by radiation,
 concept of black body radiation,
 statement of basic laws of radiation
 Applications
Introduction to Mass Transfer Operation
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Unit operations
 Control of mass transfer, avoid wastage, conservation of
mass



Concept of mass transfer operation & diffusion.
Definition of diffusion co-efficient, mass transfer rate.
Study of modes of mass transfer viz. molecular diffusion
and eddy diffusion.
 Classification of mass transfer operations.
 Definition and applications of distillation, extraction,
absorption, adsorption, crystallization, evaporation.
Simultaneous heat & Mass transfer operations
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 About drying & its need
 Working of driers
 Introduction to drying as a unit operation.
 Applications of drying techniques in general & particularly
to textile industry
 Study of diffusion and capillary theory of drying. Brief
 study of textile dryers :tumble drier, stenter
 Introduction to humidification operation. Importance of
humidification in textile mills.
 Definitions of the terms like dry bulb and wet bulb
tempratures, dew point , humidity, percent humidity,
absolute and relative humidity,
Filtration and Membrane Separation Techniques
Specific Objectives: Student will be able to understand
 Filteration & its application in textile industry
 advance techniques for effluent treatment

05
14
05
10
09
14
04
10
Introduction to filtration operation, filter aids, filter media,
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17470 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13




‘G’ Scheme
Applications of filtration to textile industry.
Introduction to membrane separation Techniques.
Advantages of membrane technology & applications of
these techniques in general & in particular to textile
industry.
Study of micro, ultra filtration, reverse osmosis.
Total
48
100
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No
Author
Edition
Year of
Publication
01
Badger & Banchero
Introduction to
Chemical Engineering
2nd
1991
02
Treybal
Mass Transfer
5th
1985
McGraw Hill
Publication
03
Coulson &
Richardson
Chemical Engineering
Vol 1-5
1991
McGraw Hill
Publication
Title
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
Address of
Publisher
McGraw Hill
Publication
17470 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Technology
Course Code : TC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Textile Testing
Subject Code : 17471
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 100 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Variety of raw materials for textile manufacturing are used, such as cotton, silk, synthetic
fibers, etc. These raw materials are being used individually or mixed in different proportions to
form a yarn of desired quality. The raw materials can be tested for numerous characteristics like
fiber length, fineness, strength, maturity etc. Intermediate products like sliver, roving etc. are also
required to be tested for controlling the process, for optimizing the process parameters or for
developing existing process. Finally, to ensure the quality product, final product that may be yarn,
fabric or garment, testing is imperative. This subject intends to equip students with the concepts,
principles and methods of testing of various textile fiber, yarns and fabric, which is helpful in
selection of raw materials, process control, process optimization, quality assurance and research
purpose.
Since textile is system of mass production and contains lots of variations, lot of
experimentation is required. Results obtained from specific number of observations are to be
analyzed, interpreted and used for best outcomes. Therefore, students are equipped with the
methods to analyze the testing results statistically.
General objectives:
1. Understand principle & concept of Testing of Yarns / Fabric
2. Measure Count, Twist, Evenness and Strength of yarn.
3. Measure strength, cover factor, air permeability of fabric.
3. List standard methods used for testing textile material.
4. Define various terms used in yarn & fabric testing.
5. Correlate the result of the tests to the application of material.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17471 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principle
Concept
Fact
Ensure quality of yarn and fabric through various tests.
Sampling, Testing,
Statistical Analysis,
Comparison with
norms
Fabrics-sampling,
Measurement of fabric
crimp, air permeability,
serviceability, strength,
drapeability etc.
Comparison with norms
C.R.E, C.R.T, C.R.L,
Strain gauge,
Cantilever Principle
Twist contraction,
C.R.E, C.R.T, Strain
gauge, Cantilever
Principle
Yarn, Count, Twist,
Evenness, Tensile
Strength, tearing
strength
Fix jaw, movable jaw,
pendulum, crease
recovery angle
Twist tester, tensile
strength tester, drape
tester, stiffness and
crease recovery ester
Fibre, Yarn
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17471 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Detailed Contents:
Chapter
1
Contents
YARN TESTING:
Specific Objectives
 Select yarn count measuring system.
 Describe the process testing of yarn twist.
 List different methods of twist measurement.
 Interpretation of effects of twist on fabric properties
 Know effects of unevenness.
1.1 Yarn Count:
 Different systems of yarn numbering.(direct, indirect)
 Definition : British count, Metric, Tex, Denier count
 Standard method of determination of yarn count with
electronic balance
1.2 Yarn Twist: Definition, direction twist, effect of twist on yarn
and fabric properties.
Measurement of yarn twist  Twist Contraction principle
 Twist and Untwisting principle
1.3 Yarn evenness: Concept, Types of variations in yarn
(random& periodic), Expressions used for unevenness: U%, C.V.
%, Imperfections.
Effect of yarn unevenness on yarn & fabric properties.
FABRIC TESTING:
Specific Objectives
 Know different fabric properties to be tested.
 List importance of fabric testing.
 Interpretation of test results.
 Selection of Testing Methods as per End use.
2
Hours Marks
10
16
06
08
06
16
04
14
06
12
2.1 Fabric sampling method
2.2 Fabric dimensional Properties: Fabric Length, Width,
Thickness, Weight measurement. Warp Count, Weft Count, and
Threads/Unit length, Cover factor (only formula), Crimp in Warp
and weft.
2.3 Stiffness & Drape of fabric:
Measurement of drape &stiffness.
2.4 Crease Recovery
Measurement by crease recovery angle
2.5 Serviceability of fabric
Definition: serviceability, wear, and abrasion. Measurement of
wear: Martindales Abrasion tester.
Pilling of fabric: factors responsible for pilling of fabric.
Measurement of pilling ICI Pill box tester.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17471 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3
‘G’ Scheme
2.6 Water and Air relation to fabric
Definitions : Waterproof, shower proof fabrics, water
Repellent fabrics.
Measurement:
 Spray test,
 Hydrostatic water head test.
Definition : Air-permeability, Air resistance, Porosity
Measurements of air permeability, Factors affecting airpermeability.
Specific Objectives
 Describe the process of tensile strength testing of yarn and
fabric
 Describe the process of tearing strength, Bursting strength
testing of and fabric.
 Use appropriate method of testing of tensile, tearing
strength.
3.1 Tensile Strength Testing:
Definitions: load, elongation, Mass Stress, tenacity, work of
rupture, work factor, elastic recovery.
08
12
04
10
04
12
48
100
3.2 Yarn Strength: Measurement of single yarn strength & lea
strength. Count Strength Product (CSP)
3.3 Fabric strength Testing:
Sample size, principle, working of testers for Fabric tensile
strength, tearing strength, Bursting strength.
Total
Skills to be developed
1) Intellectual Skills:
1. Proper selection of measuring instruments depending upon the data and precision
required.
2. Analyze properties of matter & their use for the selection of material.
3. To interpret the results from observations and calculations.
4. To use these results for corrective actions in mechanical and wet processing.
2) Motor Skills:
1. Proper handling of instruments.
2. Measuring physical properties of yarn and fabric accurately.
3. To observe the phenomenon and to list the observations in proper tabular form.
4. To adopt proper procedure while performing the experiment.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17471 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
List of Practical:
1. Determination of yarn count.
2. Determination of twist in single and doubled yarn.
3. Determination of breaking load and elongation of yarn.
4. Determination of lea strength & count strength product (CSP) of cotton yarn
5. Determination of tensile strength of fabric.
6. Determination tearing strength of fabric.
7. Determination of fabric stiffness.
8. Determination of drape of fabric.
9. Assessment of abrasion resistance and pilling propensity of fabric.
References:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
1
Angappan
Textile Testing
SS Textile Inst,
Coimbatore
2
J. E. Booth
Principles of Textile Testing
--
3
Kothari
Testing and Quality Management
IAFL, New Delhi
4
B. P. Saville
Physical Testing of Textiles
--
Websites:
1) www.scribd.com
2) www.fibre2fashion.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17471 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Technology
Course Code : TC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17052
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or competitive
tests.
While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability to
communicate and their attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert lectures,
seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so that there will be
increased participation of students in learning process.
Objectives:
Student will be able to:
1. Acquire information from different sources.
2. Prepare notes for given topic.
3. Present given topic in a seminar.
4. Interact with peers to share thoughts.
5. Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17052 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Present a seminar on identified topic related to new technology
Procedure
Searching information
from Journals, internet
and market
Preparing Power Point
Presentation text for the
topic
Principle
Principle of searching
information
Principle of Power Point
Presentation
Facts
Technical Journals,
Internet
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Computer, Power Point
Presentation Software
34
17052 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
‘G’ Scheme
Activities
Hours
Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same shall be
submitted by the individual student, to form a part of the term work.
The industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries :
i) Effluent treatment plant
ii) Auxiliary manufacturing unit
iii) Research unit.
iv) Quality testing unit.
v) Machine manufacturing unit
vi) Dyeing & Printing Unit
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert lectures to be organized from
any two of the following areas:
i) Interview Techniques.
ii) Energy conservation in textile.
iii) Non conventional energy sources.
iv) Woven and knit goods continuous processing & machines.
v) Nanotechnology.
Information Search:
Information search can be done through manufacturer’s catalogue,
websites, magazines, books etc. and submit a report any one topic.
Following topics are suggested :
i) Advances in chemicals & Auxiliaries.
ii) Latest trends in wet processing.
iii) Steam consumption & water consumption in processing machine.
iv) Right first time technique in processing.
v) Maintenance procedure for effluent treatment plant.
Seminar :
Seminar topic shall be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each student
shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar (Presentation
time - 10 minutes)
Mini Project / Activities : (any one)
a) Conventional process study of any one machine in dyeing.
b) Conventional process study of any one machine in printing.
c) Conventional process study of any one machine in bleaching.
d) Sketch and working of analytical instrument like spectrophotometer or
microscope.
e) Literature survey of any one given topic.
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17052 TC4
14
06
08
10
10
48
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Technology
Course Code : TC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Industrial Training
Subject Code : 17053
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
**
--
--
--
--
--
--
** Industrial training for six weeks to be completed during summer break after Fourth
semester. Assessment to be done in Fifth Semester
Objectives:
 Experience the industrial environment for textile industrial processes, equipment &
practices.
 Collect data about Plant lay out, equipment and machines-specifications and working
available in different sections and collect data.
 Experience operation of machines and process parameters of spinning and weaving
departments for the target production and collect data.
 Appreciate factory utilities – power water illumination men and material movement,
pollution control, industrial safety etc.
 Carryout the material testing at different stages of yarn and fabric production for quality.
 Experience maintenance schedules of all the equipment and collect information on the
effects of negligence of maintenance.
 Diagnose problems and find solutions to problems related with operation, and maintenance
of equipment.
 Study the organization structure, job description, job specifications, promotional schemes,
motivational strategies, etc.
 Collect data on production incentives, methods study and time & motion studies.
 Critical study of all activities with a view to find the areas for improvement.
 Devise solution to problem areas.
 Collect information / data for project work and seminars.
However, the detailed list of areas of study, working and data collection has been prepared
and is enclosed in 3.5 – Specific area of study and working. The student should regularly refer to
this list and accordingly choose the areas and acquire the knowledge information and skills.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17053 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
3.2 General Guidelines
 The students have to undergo industrial training in chemical processing departments of
fabric / yarn / garment for 6 weeks in between fourth and fifth semesters.
 The student has to maintain a daily diary, in which they will record the daily achievements,
which should be countersigned by the industry officer.
 The student should carry out the critical study of different activities and try to locate the
problem or problems in any of the areas of product quality, productivity, efficiency, cost
control and cost reduction, etc. Then, he should try to devise solutions to such problem.
 After completion of training each student has to bring the certificate for the entire duration
for satisfactory completion of training.
 The student will be required to submit a report in handwritten, which will be properly
bound.
 The students will be examined through viva-voce by the internal and external examiners.
(The external examiner should be from industry).
3.3 Maintenance of Daily Diary
The students are required to maintain a daily diary, regularly in systematic manner. After
the completion of day’s work the important information is recorded clearly as per the instructions
of section in charge and get it signed daily by him. Write in brief about observations made, daily
work problems / project/s undertaken, discussion held, instructions given by section in charge,
literature consulted, data etc.
3.4 Evaluation of daily diary
Term work assessment is based on daily diary maintenance, attendance, remarks of
industry. Term-work Marks will be given on the basis of evidence of diary maintenance, adequacy
and quality of record.
3.5 Specific areas of study and working: Students are required to collect the relevant information on the specific area given below.
This information should be recorded in daily diary and further used in preparing the Final Report.
(a) General Information
1. Name of mill, address, and year of establishment.
2. Type of organization, growth in terms of investment, assets, employment, sales, turnover,
product diversification, technological development.
3. Training orientation programmer of the organization.
4. Employee’s welfare schemes like PF, Medical, Canteen, Training, Recreation facilities
etc.
5. Detailed lay out of the mill, number of spindles, warp weft, doubling, and total number of
looms. (Non-automatic, automatic and total.)
6. Yarn counts spun-warp and weft. Average count of the yarn used.
7. Details of shifts: shift wise technical staff & number of workers in processing.
8. Quantity of fabrics produced in sq. meters. Quantity of fabrics exported in sq. meters.
Types of finish given.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
17053 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
9. Brief study of activities in quality control department.
(b) Grey Checking
1. Lay out plan, lighting scheme and fire prevention methods.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric.
3. Methods of checking.
4. Classification of faults.
5. Segregation of various sorts.
6. Process control exercised in gray checking.
7. Labour complement.
8. Power requirements.
9. Operative hours and production.
(c) Desizing
1. Lay out plan, lighting scheme and fire prevention methods.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric.
3. Type of desizing.
4. Desizing recipe and duration.
5. Labour complement.
6. Details of machineries used in desizing, if any.
7. Operative hours and production.
8. Water and steam consumption.
9. Power requirements.
10. Process control exercised in desizing.
11. Quality Control in desizing.
12. Costing.
(d) Scouring
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and fire prevention methods.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric.
3. Types of scouring.
4. Scouring recipe, duration, temperature, and pressure.
5. Water and steam consumption.
6. Power requirements.
7. Operative hours and production.
8. Labour complements.
9. Process control followed in scouring.
10. Time study and work study in scouring.
11. Costing.
(e) Mercerization
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and power requirements.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric.
3. Type of mercerization.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
38
17053 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Details of mercersing agents and auxiliaries like wetting agents used in mercerization.
5. Study of mercerization of various sorts
6. Steam and water consumption.
7. Operative hours and production.
8. Labour complements
9. Process control followed in mercerization.
10. Quality control in mercerization.
(f) Singeing
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and power requirements
2. Handling and transportation of fabric
3. Type of singeing.
4. Operative hours and production.
5. Labour complement.
6. Process control in Singeing.
(g) Bleaching
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and power requirements.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric.
3. Type of bleaching
4. Study of bleaching of various sorts like Poplin, cambric, polyester, polyester/cellulosic
blends, top dyed goods, terry towel etc.
5. Detailed study of machines used in bleaching.
6. Steam and water consumption.
7. Process control.
8. Quality control.
9. Labour complement.
(h) Dyeing
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and power requirements.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric.
3. Detailed of dyeing machines like jigger, jet-dyeing machine, winch, padding mangle, beam
dyeing, loose fibre dyeing machine, etc.
4. Steam and water consumption.
5. Labour complement.
6. Process control in jigger dyeing, HTHP beam dyeing, jet dyeing, winch dyeing, fibre dyeing
and cheese dyeing.
7. Quality control in dyeing.
(i) Printing
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and power requirements.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric.
3. Detailed study of various printing machines like roller, flat bed screen-printing, and rotary
screen-printing m/c.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
39
17053 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
‘G’ Scheme
Preparation of screen.
Steam and water consumption.
Labour complement.
Operative hours and production.
Process control in printing.
Quality control in printing.
(j) Finishing
1. Lay out plan, lighting scheme and power requirements.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric
3. Detail study of finishing machines like stenter (steam and oil heated), sanforising,
decatising, calendaring, felt, milling, crabbing steam calendar, finishing machines for
hosiery goods.
4. Study of finishing of various sorts of cotton, polyester, acrylic, wool silk nylon, and their
blends.
5. Study of axillaries used for finishing of cotton, polyester, acrylic, wool, silk, nylon and their
blends
6. Steam and water consumption in finishing.
7. Labour complement.
8. Operative hours and production.
9. Process control in finishing using various machines.
10. Quality control in finishing.
(k) Drying and Washing
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and power requirements.
2. Handling and transportation of fabric.
3. Brief study of various dyeing & washing machine.
4. Steam and water consumption.
5. Labour complement.
6. Operative hours and production
7. Process control in drying.
(l) Boilers, Thermopac And Effluent Treatment Plant
1. Layout plan, layout of machine.
2. Steam generation, distribution, and utilization.
3. Boiler feed water.
4. Operative hours and production.
5. Study of various oils used in thermopac.
6. Water management
7. Effluent treatment plant
(m) Costing
1. Fabric cost sheets for some sorts. Cost of dyes, chemicals
2. Wages of the time rate workers and their rate in each dept.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
40
17053 TC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3.
4.
5.
6.
‘G’ Scheme
Wages for piece rate workers in each dept.
Power cost.
Cost of water and steam.
Government levies classification wise.
(n) Laboratory
1. Testing and analysis of dyes, chemicals, and auxiliaries used in various departments.
2. Testing of bleached, dyed, and fabric, with respect to fastness properties.
3. Methods towards inventory control.
Assessment Strategy
a) Report of the industrial training shall be prepared by each student on the basis of his/her
actual work done, during the six weeks industrial training.
b) This report should be submitted in typed and bound form within 1 month after completion
of the industrial training.
c) Industrial training should be assessed equally by external and internal examiners for the oral
exam assessment.
d) Industrial training should be assessed by internal examiner only for term work assessment.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
41
17053 TC4
‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN TEXTILE MANUFACTURES
COURSE CODE : TX
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTER
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies
$
Yarn Manufacturing-III
Fabric Manufacturing-III
Knitting Technology
Textile Testing-III
Textile Chemistry-II
Professional Practice-II
Industrial Training
Abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
EST
YMA
FMA
KTE
TTE
TCH
PPS
ITR
17401
17462
17463
17464
17465
17466
17054
17055
TOTAL
TEACHING
SCHEME
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
01
04
03
03
03
03
--17
----------
02
02
02
02
02
02
03
**
15
01
03
03
03
03
03
----
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
TW (9)
Max Min
50#*
100
100
100
100
100
--550
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
-200
20
40
40
40
40
40
----
-50#
50#
[email protected]
----150
-20
20
20
------
----------
----------
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
---
SW
(17400)
50
50
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 32 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks: 950
@ Internal Assessment, # External Assessment, #* Online Examination,
No Theory Examination, $ Common to All Conventional Diploma,
** Industrial training for six weeks to be completed during summer break after Fourth semester. Assessment to be done in Fifth Semester
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Termwork, SW- Sessional Work.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subject are to be converted out of 100 marks as
sessional work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/AU/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
TH
01
Examination Scheme
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Fact
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classification
of pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Credit, Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06
17401 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Manufactures
Course Code : TX
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Yarn Manufacturing-III
Subject Code : 17462
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests of 25 mark each, to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of test marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark-sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
In the third semester, detailed study of the preparatory part of the spinning processes was
covered. In Yarn Manufacturing-II carding & draw frames were discussed.
In this fourth semester, Yarn Manufacturing III - is a continuation of the detailed study of
spinning process. This subject covers further part of spinning process comber preparatory and
comber fly frame & ring frame. It covers the study of principles and description of these processes
and functions of all machines and their parts with related information and skills.
Objective:
The student will able to:
a. Understand comber preparatory & comber fly frame & ring frame process.
b. Draw the sketch and gearing of all above machines.
c. Calculate draft, production of all above machines.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17462 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Learning Structure
To convert comber preparatory lab to yarn form Application
Comber Procedure
Transformation of
sliver to lap form
Speed frame To convert sliver
in to rove
Ring Frame To convert rove
in to Yarn
Principle
Lap conversion in to by
straghiting of hooks &
roemoving short fibers Concept
Sliver, lap cans, Sliver
lap, Ribbon lap,
Comber Machines Speed Frame Can,
Bobin Ring Frame Bobbins Sliver is Intermediate
form of material in
Spinning Process Sliver is Intermediate
Rove is form
Rove is Intermediate
Yarn is form Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Attenuating &
twisting 8
Attenuating &
twisting 17462 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Contents: Theory
Topic and Contents
Topic 1. Study of Comber lap preparation and Comber
Specific objective: The student will able to
 Understand the concept of parallelization & blending of fibers
 Understand effect of setting & process parameters on material.
 Understand the importance of comber needles.
 Understand the defect in combing preparatory & combing process
Content:1.1 Introduction – Preparation to combing and comber operation
1.2 Objects of Sliver lap, Ribbon Lap and Super Lap.
1.3 Study of construction and working of lap preparation machine-sliver lap,
Ribbon lap and Super lap.
1.4 Influence of lap preparation on combing- evenness of lap sheet, deposition of
the hooks.
1.5 Causes of defective production and their remedies at above machines
1.6 Calculation related to production & draft of Sliver lap & Ribbon Lap
1.7 Types of Comber - Sequence of operation of rectilinear comber
1.8 Technology of combing- parameters influencing the combing operation,
influence of the combing on quality.
1.9 Influence of machine component and setting on combing.- Feed distance
moved per cycle, type of feed ,the detachment setting, number of points
on the comb, the depth of penetration of top comb, piecing.
1.10 The comb- cylinder comb, top comb, operations of comb
1.11 Drafting arrangement, waste removal
1.12 Study of important setting and its effects on working - step gauge, distance
gauge, top comb settings.
1.13 Specification of Modern Comber
1.14 Causes and remedies of defective production at Comber
1.15 Calculation of Hank, Draft, Production ,and Noil Percentage
Topic 2.The study of Speed frame
Specific objective: The student will able to
 Understand the concept of drafting & twisting of fibers
 Understand effect of setting & process parameters on material.
 Understand the importance of stop motions.
 Understand the defect in Speed frame.
Content:
1 2.1 The necessity of Speed frame.
2.2 Description of functions of Speed frame – operating sequence, effect of
arrangement of bobbins in two rows.
2.3 Operating regions of the roving- creel, Spindle and flyer Imparting twist, the spindle, the flyer, the flyer top, the presser arm.
2.4 Winding of the bobbin. Flyer leading and bobbin leading its comparison
2.5 Gearing diagram of Speed frame (Question not to be asked in theory Exam)
2.6 Bobbin drive, cone drive transmission, lifter motion
2.7 Study of building mechanism of Speed frame- shifting of cone belt,
reversal of bobbin rail, shortening of lift.
2.8 Monitoring device- sliver stop motion, roving stop motion
2.9 Gear change position of the Speed frame.
2.10 Modern developments in Speed frames – creel, drafting and collecting zones
2.11 Calculation of Hank, Draft, Twist & Production.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
Hours
Marks
24
36
20
32
17462 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
2.12 Causes of defects and remedies.
Topic.3. Study of Ring frame process
Specific objectives: The student will able to
 Understand the concept of drafting & twisting of fibers
 Understand effect of setting & process parameters on material.
 Understand the importance of balloon control rings.
 Understand the defect in ring frame.
Content:
3.1 Introduction
3.2 Function and mode of operation.
3.3 Design feature of machine- Frame, creel, drafting arrangement,
3.4 Spindle drive, yarn guiding device, balloon control ring, separators, types of
rings,
3.5 Traveller-task and function, Types, wire profile of Traveller, Traveller
clearer, Traveller numbering system
3.7 Variable drive
3.8 Structure of Ring bobbin, Winding process, Builder motion of ring
bobbin, building the base.
3..9 Monitoring system, ring data system
3.10 Modern development in Ring frame
3.11 Calculation of draft, twist and production of Ring frame,
3.12 Average count and 20s conversion.
Total
20
32
64
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Calculate the speeds of various machine parts in comber preparation, comber, Speed frame and
ring frame.
2. Calculate the production of comber preparation, comber. Speed frame and ring frame.
3. Select various settings of comber, Speed frame and ring frame.
4. Identify various change places at comber preparatory, comber speed frame and ring frame.
Motor Skill:
1. Draw gearing diagram of, Comber preparatory and Comber machines speed frame and ring frame.
2. Draw the sketches of, Comber preparatory and Comber Machines speed frame and ring frame.
3. Measure the speed of Comber preparatory and Comber machine speed frame and ring frame
components using tachometer.
4. Follow standard setting procedure for various Comber preparatory and Comber machine speed
frame and ring frame components.
List of Practical
1. Study of gearing diagram and passage of the sliver lap machine, calculations of speed of various
parts, draft and production.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17462 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
2. Study of gearing diagram and passage of the Ribbon lap machine, calculations of speed of various
parts, draft and production.
3. Study of gearing diagram and passage of the Comber machine, calculations of speed of various
parts, draft and production.
4. Study of comber setting, (Step gauge, distance gauge, top comb setting, feed roll setting )
5. Study of gearing diagram and passage of the Speed frame machine, calculations of speed of
various parts, draft and production.
6. Study of gearing diagram and passage of the Ring frame machine, calculations of speed of various
parts, draft and production
7. Study of Drafting system, building mechanism and change places of ring frame.
8. Study of building mechanism, differential motions and drafting systems of a speed frame
machine.
9. Ring rail leveling, thread guide setting & spindle gauging of a ring frame.
Learning Resources:
Sr.
No.
Author
Titles
Publication
Essential Facts in Cotton
Spinning.
Spinning Tablet Series (9
numbers)
Somaiya Publication Pvt. Ltd.
Mumbai.
1
T. K. Pattabhiram
2
A. R. Garde (Editor)
3
A. E. De Barr, H.
Catling
The Principles and Theory Of
Ring Spinning. Vol. 5
The Textile Institute Manchester.
4
Ed. By K. Ganesh,
A. R. Garde
Cotton Spinning.
The Textile association, India.
5
R.Chattopadhyay,
Rengasamy J
6
K. R. Salhotra, R.
Alagirusamy, R.
Chattopadhyay
Ring Spinning, Doubling and
Twisting
7
R. Chattopadhyay
Advances in Technology of Yarn
NCUTE, IIT Delhi
Production.
8
W.klein
Practical Guide to combing &
Drawing
The Textile Institute Manchester
9
W.S.Tagart
Cotton Spinning vol-2
Macmillian & Company ltd.
10 A. R.Khare
Cotton Spinning
The Textile Institute Manchester.
11 T. K. Pattabhiram
Elements of practical cotton
spinning
Somaiya Publication Pvt. Ltd.
Mumbai.
The Textile association, India.
R. Spinning- Drawing, Combing and
NCUTE, IIT Delhi
Roving.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
NCUTE, IIT Delhi
17462 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Manufactures
Course Code : TX
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Fabric Manufacturing-III
Subject Code : 17463
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The textile manufacturing is done in various stages. In first year, we have experienced that
this subject of fabric manufacture dealt with yarn preparation in winding and ordinary weaving on
simple loom. In this second year, this subject deals with subsequent steps of yarn preparation and
automatic weaving. These are essential stages in the fabric production. This subject intends to
impart knowledge and skills in the area of important weaving process, i.e. warping, sizing operation
and fabric production on automatic looms.
Objectives:
The student will be able to
1. Understand Sizing and automatic looms.
2. Identify the Sizing ingredients as per the yarn, fabric and sizing machine.
3. Calculate the Sizing & Auto loom production.
4. Understand the working of Automatic loom and it’s preparation.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17463 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Learning Structure:
Applicatio
produce fabric on automatic loom.
To prepare warp yarn and
Procedure
Warping
Sizing & Drawing in
Warping
Principle
Improve
weavability
Conversion of individual yarn to
sheet form to suit fabric width
Interlacement of
warp and weft.
Concept
Facts
Warping m/c
& its parts,
yarn, beams,
cones,
tensioner
Sizing m/c & its
parts, size cooking
equipment &
materials, steam, air
compressor,
weaver’s beam,
moisture controller,
PIV drive
Yarn is used in all fabrics for
numerous uses
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Automatic loom &
its parts and
mechanisms
Weaving norms
13
17463 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Detailed Content:
Chapter
1
2
3
4
Topic
Sizing
1.1 Objects of Sizing.
1.2 Kinds and functions of Sizing ingredients.
1.3 Cooking of size paste- number and quantity of sizing
ingredients required sequence of addition of ingredients
during cooking. Cooking of size paste with pressure cooker
and storage. Size paste properties: congealing and keeping
properties and their importance. Study of viscosity and
concentration of size paste.
Study of Sizing Machine:
2.1 Creel construction, types, their merits and demerits, braking
systems, tension control on warp.
2.2 Size box: All elements in size box, and their functions, size
paste level control, temperature control, squeeze roller and
weighting system, immersion roller. Wet splitting & its
importance.
2.3 Drying zone: phenomena of multi-cylinder drying, removal
of condensed water, Teflon coating, drive to cylinders,
temperatures and its control.
2.4 Splitting zone: leasing, splitting, moisture control. Details of
headstock, marking and measuring device, comb, sheeting
rollers, drag roller.
2.5 Winding zone: drive to the weavers beam.
2.6 Drive to sizing machine: complete machine drive, use of
PIV gears, differential cone drive, multi-motor drive, drives of
different modern sizing machines, (Benniger, West Point etc.)
Stretch and migration control:
3.1 Definition and importance of stretch, measurement of stretch
and its control at different zones (stretch meter), definition of
lappers and migration, measurement of migration.
3.2 Size pick up: requirement of size pick up, size add-on,
factors effecting size pickup. Testing of sized yarn
Calculations of efficiency, size mixture, moisture in
ingredients, water vaporising capacity, costing and dead loss,
count of sized warp.
Automatic Weaving
4.1. Introduction, differences between ordinary loom and
automatic loom.
4.2. Study of pirn changing mechanism, different types of weft
feelers.
4.3. Warp stop motion of different types.
4.4. Various types of positive let off motions: Bartlett, Ruti,
CIMMCO, etc.
4.5. Centre weft fork motion, its comparison with side weft fork
motion.
4.6. Shuttle changing motion, its comparison with Pirn changing
motion.
4.7. Study of colour retaining device on multiple box loom
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
Hours
Marks
10
16
10
24
10
16
14
36
17463 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
4.8. Study of centre selvedge.
4.9. Study of the warp preparation method for the Automatic
looms.
Reaching In and Drawing In
5.1 Different type of Reaching, Drawing-in, denting and knotting:
Methods & machines.
5.2 Study of design of healds and types of healds.
5.3 Study of design of different reeds.
5.4 Calculation regarding count of heald sett and reed count.
5.5 Selection, care and storage of healds & reeds.
Total
04
08
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed
Intellectual skill
1. Select sizing ingredients.
2. Identify the requirements of auto loom.
Motor Skills
1. Operate auto loom.
2. Prepare size paste.
List of Practical
1. Study of sizing machines (at least two visits to sizing units) and sketching the passage
of warp on sizing machine and various mechanisms.
2. Dismantling, refitting, setting and timing of following mechanisms on Automatic
shuttle looms.
1. Shedding,
2. Under-picking,
3. Dagger-shaft, Swell mechanism
4. Battery, Loose end cutter mechanism
5. Weft fork and anti-crack,
6. Let-off motion,
7. Shuttle changing mechanism,
8. Feeler mechanism,,,
9. Warp stop motion,
10. Operating the automatic loom to produce good cloth.
Reference:
Books:
Sr.
Name of Author
No
Title
1.
Robinson and Marks
Principle of Weaving
2.
Bennett
An introduction to
automatic weaving
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Publication
The Textile Institute,
10 Black friars Street, Manchester
M3 5DR
Indo Overseas Trading Co.
280 Carnac Road, Bombay and
Columbine Press Co.Ltd.,
Manchester, London
15
17463 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3.
Banerjee N.N., Smt
Banerjee
4.
J.B. Aitken
5.
A. Ormerod,
6.
Talukdar M K
7.
Wadekar
Smt.T.Bnerjee, Textile Book House,
Weaving Mechanism, Vol I
29, Krishna Nath Road, Berhampore
& Vol II
– 742 101, West Bengal India
Columbine Press (Publishers) Ltd.,
Automatic Weaving.
Old Clony House South king, Street,
Manchester-2
Butterworths & Co.
Modern preparation and
(Publishers) Ltd., London, 88,
weaving machinery.
Kingsway, W.C.2
Weaving: Materials
Mahajan Publishers Pvt Ltd
Methods and Machines
Ahmedabad-9(1998)
Mahajan Publishers Pvt Ltd
Sizing
Ahmedabad-9(1998)
Specific Objectives:
Chapter
The Students will be able to
1
a) Identify sizing ingredients, Cooking of size paste. Number of sizing ingredients
required.
b) List characteristics features of sizing ingredients.
2
a) Draw the design of the sizing machine.
b) List functions of various motions in sizing machine.
3
a) Measure stretch and its control at different zones using stretch meter
b) Able to measure lappers and migration. size pick up, size add-on.
4
a) Identify working of different motions from Automatic loom.
b) Develop the good quality of cloth.
5
a) Identify requirements of drawing-in and it’s process for different fabrics.
b) Develop the relation between design requirements and weaving requirements.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
17463 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Manufactures
Course Code : TX
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Knitting Technology
Subject Code : 17464
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
[email protected]
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Knitting technology is the important area of textile industry. Knitted fabrics due to its
stretchable and favourable properties are in good demand and it is expected to rise day by day.
Knitted fabrics find uses for under garments, sports Uniforms, summer and winter dresses, etc. to a
large extent. This sector is now diversifying into synthetics, domestic fabric, carpets, technical and
geo textiles. Similarly, since last few years young generation has been attracted to readymade
garments due to quality, cost and readiness of availability. As such, large opportunities for the
textile technologist particularly diploma pass-outs exist in this field. Already many diploma pass
outs are finding employment in this area. Therefore, the main object is to equip the students with all
the relevant technical knowledge for manufacturing of knitted fabrics, articles, garments and the
maintenance aspects of the machines used. This subject will help the students to start their small
scale industrial units which will help them for self employment.
General Objectives:
The student will be able to,
Student will be able to
a. Understand Warp & Weft knitting machine.
b. Identify different Knitted structures.
c. Calculate Knitting machines production and efficiency.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17464 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Learning Structure:
Application
To manufacture fabric by Knitting process
Warp Knitting: Basic warp knit, Face and back, Under lap and Overlap
Procedure
Weft Knitting: Basic weft knit, Single jersey, Rib knit, Interlock knit,
Purl knit.
Intermeshing of loop
Principle
Concept
Facts
Yarns, Needles, Cams, Cylinder, Knitting m/c.
Hand knit fabrics & winter wears are being used since age.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17464 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1. Overview of Knitting Process
Specific objective: The student will able to
 To define knitting process
 To interpret the difference between Woven & Knitted fabric.
Content:
1.1) Introduction to knitting process.
1.2) Introduction of Warp & Weft Knitting.
1.3) Reasons for growth of knitting
1.4) Indian Knitting industry
1.5) Comparison of Woven and Knitted fabrics
1.6) Classification of Weft knitting machines.
Topic 2.Weft Knitting
Specific objective: The student will able to
 Define basic terminology of Knitting.
 Identify different parts of Knitting and their function
 Describe intermeshing process for Knitting
Content:
2.1 Definition of Basic terms in weft knitting: closed loop, face loop,
needle loop, sinker loop, course, wale
2.2 Function elements in Knitting
- Types of needle & its comparison
- Knitting action of different needles
- Sinker & its function
- Cylinder :Gauge, pitch
- Cams
- Feeder/stripper
- Fabric spreader
2.3 Needles with different butt positions: Use in design
2.4 Positive feeder- its functions, types.
Topic.3.Weft knitting Machines
Specific objectives: The student will be able to
 Operate knitting machine.
 Interpret different knitted fabric structure for appropriate use
 Select the procedure of knitted fabric production.
Content:
3.1 Passage of yarn through Single jersey machine
3.2 Single jersey machine -Structure, loop diagram, knitting
elements, knitting action.
3.3 Rib knitting machine-Structure, loop diagram, Needle arrangement,
knitting action, machine construction.
3.4 Interlock machine-loop diagram, structure, needle Arrangement,
trick arrangement, knitting action.
3.5 Purl Machine-loop diagram, structure, knitting action
3.6 Characteristics of Single jersey, rib, interlock, purl fabrics.
Topic 4. Weft knitted fabrics
Specific objective:-The student will able to
 Represent the knitted fabric on paper.
 Draw different knitted fabric structure.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
Hours
Marks
02
06
06
10
08
16
06
12
17464 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
 Differentiate the knitted fabrics
Content:
4.1) Principle stitches in weft knitting-knit, tuck, miss.
4.2) Notations in weft knitting
4.3) Ornamentation of plain knit fabrics
- La-coste, According, Thick Fleece, Jersey blister
4.4) Ornamentation of Rib Structure
- Half cardigan, Full cardigan
4.5) Ornamentation of Interlock
- Eight lock structure
4.6) Double knit structures-Milan Rib, Double pique, pique poplin,
punto di roma, ottoman rib, texi pique
Topic 5. Knitting Calculations
Specific objective: The student will able to
 Calculate knitting production in Kg/Day or Meters/day
 Estimate yarn requirement for a particular production
 Calculate no. of machine required for designed output
Content :
5.1) Production Calculation
5.2) Grams per square meter calculation
5.3) Tightness factor
5.4) Stitch length calculation
5.5) Weight per linear meter calculation
Topic 6 : Warp knitting
Specific objective : The student will able to
 Describe the process of warp knitting
 Compare different knitting technologies.
Content:6.1) Introduction of warp knitting
6.2) Loop structure
6.3) Comparison of warp and weft knitting
6.4) Basic Warp knitting terms- overlap, underlap, open & closed lap
6.5) Application of warp knit fabrics
6.6) Classification of warp knitting
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
06
12
03
08
17464 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Topic 7 :Warp Knitting machine-------------------------------------12 Marks
Specific objective: The student will able to
 Identify different parts of warp knitting machine.
 Represent the warp knitted fabric on paper.
 Understand mechanism of patterning.
 Prepare the chain links.
Content:7.1) Comparison of tricot And Rachel machine
7.2) Elements of Tricot knitting machine
7.3) Knitting cycles of Tricot m/c
7.4) Elements of Rachel knitting machine
7.5) Knitting action of Rachel machine
7.6) Notation for warp knit structures
Sub topic 7.1 :Patterning in warp knitting------------------------ 8 Marks
7.1.1) Introduction of patterning.
7.1.2) Pattern wheel, pattern drum and chain links
7.1.3) Notation
7.1.4) Principle stitches in warp knitting
Topic 8 :Flat Bed knitting
Specific objective: The student will able to
 To differentiates flat knitting and circular knitting.
 To understand mechanism of flat knitting.
Content:8.1) Introduction of flat knitting
8.2) Types and classification
8.3) Knitting elements
8.4) Yarn path in flat knitting machine Knitting cycle.
Topic 9 :Quality aspects of knitting
Specific objective:- The student will able to
 Understand quality parameters of knitted fabric.
 Define the knitted fabric defects.
Content:9.1) Basic properties of yarns used for knitting
9.2) Defects and their remedies in knitted fabrics.
9.3) Quality tests for weft knitted fabrics.
TOTAL
11
20
03
08
03
08
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1) The functions of knitting mechanisms.
2) Different knitted fabric structures.
3) The designs of needles and cams.
Motor Skills:
1) Identify different knitted fabric structures.
2) Draw diagrams of needles and cams.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
17464 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
List of Practical’s:
1. Study of Single jersey machine (Drawing, Understand the function of element).
2. Study of Double jersey machine (Drawing, Understand the function of elements).
3. Study of Flat knitting machine (Sketch yarn passage, Identify parts).
4. Study of various elements used on Circular knitting machine (Drawing, Identification of
parts).
5. Study of principle stitches used on circular knitting machine (draw the loop diagram,
assembling different cams).
6. Study of knitted fabric design, notation representation of fabric on paper(plotting design on
paper, unroving the yarn, counting the C.P.I & W.P.I)
7. Analysis of Single jersey fabric(Identification, Unroving, counting of fabric cpi & wpi)
8. Analysis of R ib Fabric (Identification, Unroving, counting of fabric cpi & wpi)
9. Analysis of Interlock fabric (Identification, Unroving, counting of fabric cpi & wpi)
10. Study of Warp knitting machine (Drawing, Identification of various parts).
11. Study of gearing arrangement of circular knitting machine
12. Visit to modern Knitting unit (plot the process flow)
List of Assignments:
1. Draw diagrammatic notation & symbolic notation for different knitted structure.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
1
David Spencer.
Knitting Technology:
2
S. Raz.
Warp Knitting Production
3
A. Reisfeld.
Warp Knit Engineering
4
D. F. Paling.
Warp Knitting technology
5
6
Title
Publisher
Woodhead Publishing India
Pvt. Ltd.
Verlag meliand textile berichte,
Heidelberg
National Knitedoutwear
association, Newyork
Cloumbine Press, London
Knitting- fundamentals, machine,
structure & Developments
Sadhan Chandra Fundamentals and advances in
ray
knitting technology
Dr.N.Anbumani
New Age International(P) ltd.
Woodhead Publishing India
Pvt. Ltd.
2. CDs, PPTs, Models, Charts etc. :
3. IS, BIS and International Codes:
1. Reference: ASTM D 3882-85 for fabric skewness.
2. Reference: AATCC 178-1994 for barre.
4. Websites:
1. http://www.shimaseiki.com/
2. http://www.kern-liebers.com/
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17464 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3. http://www.groz-beckert.com/
4. http://www.knittingindustry.com
List of Instruments, Equipment and Machines:
1. Single jersey machine.
2. Double jersey machine.
3. Flat knitting machine.
4. Warp knitting machine.
5. Electronic weighing scale.
6. Pick glass.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17464 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Manufactures
Course Code : TX
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Textile Testing-III
Subject Code : 17465
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
There is variety of raw materials for textile manufacturing, such as cotton, silk, synthetic
fibers, etc. These raw materials are being used individually or mixed in different proportions to
form a yarn of desired quality. The raw materials can be tested for numerous characteristics like
fiber length, fineness, strength, maturity etc. Intermediate products like sliver, roving etc. are also
required to be tested for controlling the process, for optimizing the process parameters or for
developing existing process. Finally, to ensure the quality product, final product that may be yarn,
fabric or garment, testing is imperative. This subject intends to equip students with the concepts,
principles and methods of testing of various textile fiber and yarns, and fabric which is helpful in
selection of raw materials, process control, process optimization, quality assurance and research
purpose.
Since textile is system of mass production and contains lots of variations, lot of
experimentation is required. Results obtained from specific number of observations are to be
analyzed, interpreted and used for best outcomes. Therefore, students are equipped with the
methods to analyze the testing results statistically.
General Objectives:
Student will be able to:
1. Understand principle & advanced concept of Testing of fibre/ Yarns / Fabric
2. Determine tensile, tearing & bursting strength of fabric.
3. List standard methods used for testing textile material.
4. Define various terms used in yarn & fabric testing.
5. Correlate the result of the tests to the application of material.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17465 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principle
Concept
Fact
Ensure quality of, fibre, yarn and fabric through various tests.
Fabrics-sampling,
Measurement of fabric
crimp, air permeability,
serviceability, strength,
Drapeability etc.
Comparison with norms
Sampling, Testing,
Statistical Analysis,
Comparison with
norms
Twist contraction, C.R.E,
C.R.T, C.R.L, Strain
gauge, Cantilever
Principle
C.R.E, C.R.T, C.R.L,
Strain gauge,
Cantilever Principle
Yarn, Count, Twist,
Evenness, Tensile
Strength, tearing
strength
Fix jaw, movable jaw,
Elongation scale, crease
recovery angle
Twist tester, tensile
strength tester, drape
tester, stiffness and
crease recovery ester
Fibre, Yarn, fabric
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17465 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Detailed Contents:
Chapter
Contents
Fabric Testing:
Specific Objectives
 Know different fabric properties to be tested.
 List importance of fabric testing.
 Interpretation of test results.
 Selection of Testing Methods as per End use.
1.1 Fabric sampling methods
1
2
1.2 Fabric dimensional Properties: Fabric Length, Width,
Thickness, Weight measurement. Warp Count, Weft Count, and
Threads/Unit length, Crimp in Warp and weft. Effect of crimp on
fabric properties. Method of determination of crimp percentage
(Crimp Tester). Cloth covers (IS 1963:1981 SP-15 Part-II 2000).
Mathematical relation between Cover Factor, yarn count and
diameter.
1.3 Stiffness & Drape of fabric:
 Terms and Definitions
 Measurement of stiffness of fabric by tester based on
cantilever principle (IS 6490-1971).
 Determination of drape coefficient by drape meter (IS 83571977).
1.4 Crease Recovery:

Measurement by crease recovery angle (IS 4687:1981 SP15 Part-II 2000).
1.5 Serviceability of fabric
 Definition: serviceability, wear, and abrasion.
 Measurement of Abrasion - Martindale Abrasion Tester
(ASTM D 4966-1998).
 Pilling of fabric: factors responsible for pilling of fabric.
 Measurement of pilling : ICI pill box Tester (IS 10971:1984
SP 15 Part- II)
1.6 Water and Air relation to fabric
 Definitions : Waterproof, shower proof fabrics, water
Repellent fabrics.
Measurement:
 Spray test,
 Hydrostatic water head test.
 Definition : Air-permeability, Air resistance, Air Porosity
 Measurements of air permeability.
 Factors affecting air-permeability.
Tensile Testing
Specific Objectives
 Describe the process of tensile, tearing strength testing of
fabric
 Use appropriate method of fabric strength testing.
Hours
Marks
08
16
04
14
06
12
08
14
06
14
Fabric strength:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17465 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
 Tensile strength (IS 6359:1971 SP-15 Part – II 2000),
 Tearing strength(IS 6359:1971 SP-15 Part – II 2000), ,
 Bursting strength (IS 1966:1975 SP-15 Part – II 2000),
Modern Testing Instruments
Specific Objective
 Describe Modern Fibre and yarn testing Instruments
3.1 Principle, working, parameters in brief.
 High Volume Instruments (HVI)
 AFIS testing.
 Tenso-Jet
 Tenso-Rapid yarn testing,
Garment Testing
 Describe the testing methods for garments
4.1Colour Fastness :
 Grey Scale for Colour Change and Staining
 Test Procedure for fastness of colour & Staining Fastness to
Washing, Dry-cleaning, & Light, Rubbing & Perspiration.
4.2 Dimensional Stability: Expansion, Shrinkage, Swelling,
4.3 Seam: strength, slippage.
Total
3
4
08
16
08
14
48
100
Skills to be developed
1) Intellectual skills:
1. Proper selection of measuring instruments depending upon the data and precision
required.
2. Analyze properties of matter & their use for the selection of material.
3. To interpret the results from observations and calculations.
4. To use these results for corrective actions in mechanical and wet processing.
2) Motor skills:1. Proper handling of instruments.
2. Measuring physical dimensions of fibre and yarn, fabric accurately.
3. To observe the phenomenon and to list the observations in proper tabular form.
4. To adopt proper procedure while performing the experiment.
List of Practical:
Determination of:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Determination of Cover factor.
Determination of Crimp % in warp & weft of the fabric.
Determination of Stiffness of fabric.
Determination of Drape of fabric.
Determination of Crease Recovery angle of fabric.
Determination of Tearing Strength of fabric.
Determination of Tensile strength of fabric.
Determination of dimensional stability of fabric
Determination of fibre parameters by HVI/AFIS
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17465 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
References:
Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
Title
Publisher
1
Angappan
Textile Testing
SS Textile Inst,
Coimbatore
2
J. E. Booth
Principles of Textile Testing
--
3
Kothari
Testing and Quality Management
IAFL, New Delhi
4
B. P. Saville
Physical Testing of Textiles
--
5
--
Methods of Tests, Fibre, Yarn & Fabric
CIRCOT, Mumbai
Websites:
1) www.scribd.com
2) www.fibre2fashion.com MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17465 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Course Name
: Diploma in Textile Manufactures
Course Code
: TX
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Textile Chemistry - II
Subject Code
: 17466
Teaching & Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The textile yarns and fabrics are being used in all occasions of life, which have varieties of
patterns, colours and designs all over the world. The people use fabrics treated with either with
natural and/or man made synthetic colours and chemicals to produce the desired effect in numerous
hue and tone of different colours. The physical and chemical properties of these chemicals and
colours are of prime interest to the people in textile industry. While working in various capacities in
textile industry, it is very essential to acquire the necessary knowledge and skills in using these
chemicals. In textile Chemistry-I Fiber manufacturing, sizing and pretreatments have been covered.
In textile Chemistry II discussion will be about
1. Dyeing of yarns and fabrics.
2. Printing of fabrics.
3. Finishing of fabrics like mercerizing, sanforising, etc.
Objectives:
The students will be able to
1. Study of various dyes and dyeing methods
2. Understand the dyeing machineries for cotton and polyesters
3. Select suitable ingredients for formulation of print paste used in printing cotton and
other textiles
4. Classify the finishing processes
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17466 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Learning Structure:
Application
To identify and use chemicals for textile manufacturing
Procedure
Checking of physical
properties & chemical
properties
Principle
Density, colour; hue, intensity
Concepts
Facts
Atom, Atomic number,
Element, Isotope,
Isobars, Texture, Mass,
Checking of physical
properties & chemical
properties
Volumetric analysis,
Qualitative analysis,
Concentration,
Reagents,
Burette, pipette.
Š‡ ‹…ƒŽ
‡ƒ…–‹‘
Formulation
HCl,H2SO4, Bleaching powder,
Na-bi-Corbonate, Benzene,
Toluene, Phenol, Acetic acid,
Men women are using dyed & bleached and printed fabrics all over the world.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17466 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Detailed Content:
Chapter
1
2
3
4
Topic
Dyeing
Specific Objectives;
Student will be able to
list the type of dyes used for various types of fibres
Explain dyeing process for various textile fibres.
1.1 Dyeing of cellulose materials with Direct, Sulphur, Vat,
Reactive and Azoic dyes.
1.2 Dyeing of Polyester with disperse dyes.
1.3 Dyeing of Nylon with disperse and reactive dyes.
1.4 Dyeing of acrylic with cationic dyes.
1.5 Study of dyeing of blends (Polyester and cotton or viscose)
Dyeing Machinery
Specific Objectives;
Student will be able to,
Identify machinery used for dyeing of fibre, yarn and fabrics.
Understand method for blend dyeing.
2.1. Construction and working of machinery used for dyeing yarn
and fabric: Package Dyeing, Jigger Winch, Padding Mangle
And Jet Dyeing Machine.
Printing
Specific Objectives;
Student will be able to ,
List the various chemicals used in printing
Understand different styles of printing
3.1 Printing of cellulosic fabrics with dyes direct, reactive, vat, and
pigment colours.
3.2 Study of direct, discharge and resist styles of printing.
3.3 Brief study of flat bed printing machine, Roller printing
machine and Rotary printing machine
Finishing
4.1 Object and classification of Finishing processes.
4.2 Finishes applied on cellulose and synthetic fabrics: resin
finishing, water proofing, flame retarding, soil release finish
heat setting, optical brightening agent treatment.
4.3 Construction and working of Drying, Stenter, Calendaring,
Mercerisation, Sanforising Machine
Total
Marks
Hours
28
14
20
10
24
12
28
12
100
48
Practical:
Skills to be developed
Intellectual skills
a. To Dye of yarn and fabric
b. Match with the standard shed card
Motor Skills
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17466 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
a. Weigh accurately the dyes
b. Handle the glass apparatus carefully
List of Practical:
1. Dyeing of cellulosic fabric with different classes of dyes-5experiments.
2. Dyeing of synthetic fabric with different classes of dyes- 2experiments.
3. Testing of colour fastness (washing, light, and abrasion) for dyed fabrics and garments.
1experiments
4. Preparation of screen for printing – One experiment.
5. Preparation of printing paste of different dyes. 3 experiments.
6. Fixation of prints with steaming and curing methods.
7. Visit to process house.
References
Sr.
Author
No
1
Dr.V. A. Shenai
Title
Textile Fibres
2
D. B. Ajgaonkar
Sizing
3
V. A. Shenai
Bleaching
4
V. A. Shenai
Dyeing
5
Printing
V. A. Shenai
6
An introduction of finishing
J. T. Marsh
7
Finishing
V. A. Shenai
8
Bleaching
E.R. Trotman
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17466 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Manufactures
Course Code : TX
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17054
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Most of the diploma holders join industries for jobs. Due to globalization and competition
in the industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or
competitive tests.
While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability to
communicate and their attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert lectures,
seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so that there will be
increased participation of students in learning process.
Objectives:
Student will be able to:
1. Acquire information from different sources.
2. Prepare notes for given topic.
3. Present given topic in a seminar.
4. Interact with peers to share thoughts.
5. Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17054 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Serial
No.
Activities
Hours
Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same shall be
1
submitted by the individual student, to form a part of the term work.
16
The industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries :
Spinning /Weaving / wet processing/ garment/Knitting
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert Lectures to be organized
from any two of the following areas:
1) Interview Techniques.
2) Modern Ring frame
2
08
3) Applications of Sensors and Transducers in Textiles
4) Different methods of Yarn manufacturing other than ring spinning
5) Latest developments in weaving machines
6) Other related topics
Information Search:
Information search can be done through manufacturer’s catalogue, websites,
magazines, books etc. and submit a report any one topic.
Following topics are suggested :
1) Lubricants & additives
2) Humidification and air conditioning in textile mills
3) Illumination in textile mill
3
4) Technical features of Spinning preparatory and spinning machineries
12
5) Technical features of weaving preparatory and weaving machineries
6) Technical features of garment manufacturing machineries
7) Specialty textiles
8) Intelligent textiles
9) Different drives/Transmission systems in textile machines.
10) Types of bearings – applications and suppliers.
11) Solar equipment and lighting systems in textiles
Seminar:
Seminar topic shall be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each student
4
shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar (Presentation
12
time - 10 minutes)
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
48
17054 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Course Name : Diploma in Textile Manufactures
Course Code : TX
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17055
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
‐‐ ‐‐ ** ‐‐ ‐‐ ‐‐ ‐‐ ‐‐ ‐‐ ** Industrial training for six weeks to be completed during summer break after Fourth
semester. Assessment to be done in Fifth Semester
Objectives:
 Experience the industrial environment for textile industrial processes, equipment &
practices.
 Collect data about Plant lay out, equipment and machines-specifications and working
available in different sections and collect data.
 Experience operation of machines and process parameters of spinning and weaving
departments for the target production and collect data.
 Appreciate factory utilities – power water illumination men and material movement,
pollution control, industrial safety etc.
 Carryout the material testing at different stages of yarn and fabric production for quality.
 Experience maintenance schedules of all the equipment and collect information on the
effects of negligence of maintenance.
 Diagnose problems and find solutions to problems related with operation, and maintenance
of equipment.
 Study the organization structure, job description, job specifications, promotional schemes,
motivational strategies,etc.
 Collect data on production incentives, methods study and time & motion studies.
 Critical study of all activities with a view to find the areas for improvement.
 Devise solution to problem areas.
 Collect information / data for project work and seminars.
However, the detailed list of areas of study, working and data collection has been prepared
and is enclosed in 3.5 – Specific area of study and working. The student should regularly refer to
this list and accordingly choose the areas and acquire the knowledge information and skills.
3.2 General Guidelines
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17055 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13






The students have to undergo industrial training in spinning and or weaving departments for
6 weeks in between fourth and fifth semesters.
The student has to maintain a daily diary, in which they will record the daily achievements,
which should be countersigned by the industry officer.
The student should carry out the critical study of different activities and try to locate the
problem or problems in any of the areas of product quality, productivity, efficiency, cost
control and cost reduction, etc. Then, he should try to devise solutions to such problem.
After completion of training each student has to bring the certificate for the entire duration
for satisfactory completion of training.
The student will be required to submit a report in handwritten, which will be properly
bound.
The students will be examined through viva-voce by the internal and external examiners.
(The external examiner should be from industry).
3.3 Maintenance of Daily Diary
The students are required to maintain a daily diary, regularly in systematic manner. After
the completion of day’s work the important information is recorded clearly as per the instructions
of section in charge and get it signed daily by him. Write in brief about observations made, daily
work problems / project/s undertaken, discussion held, instructions given by section in charge,
literature consulted, data etc.
3.4 Evaluation of daily diary
Term work assessment is based on daily diary maintenance, attendance, remarks of
industry. Term-work Marks will be given on the basis of evidence of diary maintenance, adequacy
and quality of record.
3.5 Specific areas of study and working: Students are required to collect the relevant information on the specific area given below.
This information should be recorded in daily diary and further used in preparing the Final Report.
(a) General Information
Name of the Mill, Address and year of establish.
No. of spindles-warp, weft, Doubling and Total.
No. of loom-Non automatic, Automatic, Shuttle less, Total
Yarn counts spun, ………… Warp. Weft.
Average count of the Spg. Dept………….
Shift wise No. of workers-Spinning, weaving processing, Engineering, General, Time
office, Technical staff.
No. Of workers per 1000 spindles.
No. Of workers per 100 looms.
No. Of preparations in spinning.
Mill Building-type Roof plan.
No. Of sorts running.
Quantity of cotton consumed per month in kg.
Quantity of yarn produced in kg. Per month
Quantity of fabrics produced in sq. meters.
Quantity of fabrics exported in sq. meters.
Types of finishes given
Note on Quality Control, Research and Development.
Plan of various department, Showing general layout of the departments.
Welfare schemes for Workers And staff.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17055 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Safety measures provided.
(b) Spinning
i) Mixing & Blow-Room
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and fire prevention method.
2. Handling and transportation of bales.
3. Temperature and Humidity.
4. Mixings (if possible) Type and Cotton used, Assessment of staple lengths, trash content.
5. Wastes (in details) with resale realization rate & disposal.
6. Speeds and settings of various beaters.
i) Vertical ii) Horizontal iii) Modern openers, production of various machines, line
diagram of the processing sequence for the mixing adopted in the mills.
1 Cleaning points for various mixings, Blows per inch, (Adopted for processing a particular
mixing)
2 Productive and ancillary workers, shift wise.
3 Lap wt. Wrapping, wt/Yd tolerance limit, lap rejection percent.
4 Machinery maintenance programme-Charts.
5 Quality control programme charts, warping stds.
6 Operative hours and machine hours per 100 kg.
7 Other particulars, if any.
8 No of bales consumed and the weight of cotton used.
ii) Carding
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme and fire prevention methods.
2. Materials handling - Quality and mode.
3. Temperature and Humidity.
4. Speeds of various parts, like cylinder, licker in, doffer, flats doffer: mb, stripping rollers
Grinders Rollers (fast and slow)
5. Hank of lap fed and hank of card sliver.
6. Draft constant and production constant of card.
7. Settings of card, size of the can.
8. Waste extracted (details) and Disposal of waste.
9. Frequency of stripping grinding flat grinding, Burnishing, re-clothing.
10. Shift wise productive and ancillary workers.
11. Production per hour Operative hours and machine hours per 100 kg.
12. Metallic card clothing and its information ( if any)
13. Semi high production and high production card (note)
14. Maintenance schedule.
15. Quality control scheme-charts-wrapping stds,
16. Can size and special features fitted on a card.
iii) Draw Frame
1. Layout plan lighting scheme, fire prevention methods.
2. Temp, humidity and materials handing.
3. No of draw frames, No. of passages package size No. of deliveries for each mixings.
4. Drafting systems for a draw frame.
5. Sliver hank and Wt. Tolerance limits, can size.
6. Speed of F.R. of draw frame, Production / Delivery / hour.
7. Hank of sliver fed and sliver delivered.
8. Setting of different rollers.
9. Production-operative hours and machine hour per 100 kg.
10. Shift wise productive and ancillary labour.
11. Maintenance schedule.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
17055 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
12. Quality control scheme and chart, wrapping stds.
13. Special features (if any)
iv) Slubber, Inter, Roving Frames:
1. Layout plan, lighting, humidity and materials, handling.
2. No. of slubber, inter and roving frames and spindles each preparation.
3. Spindle speeds.
4. Twist multiple and T.P.I. used for each preparation,
5. Drafts, hank-fed and hank delivered,
6. Production in Hanks / spindle / 8 hours.
7. Drafting systems, can size, roving bobbin size.
8. No. of teeth on change wheels. (Like draft change wheel, twist wheel lay gear wheel etc.)
9. Top arm weighting arrangement systems.
10. Machinery maintenance schedule, roller, covering, scouring spindle roller setting and gauges
used for different cottons, oiling schedule.
11. Shift wise number of productive and ancillary workers.
12. Production per 8 hours, operative hours of machine hours per 100 kg. of production.
13. Breakage rate, waste details, doffing time and No. of persons for doffing.
14. Quality control programme, control chart used wrapping stds.
15. Duties of various persons.
16. Threading methods used for Back and Front few bobbin.
v) Combers
1. Layout of combing dept.
2. No. of sliver lap Ribbon lap comber type and make.
3. Machine particulars and processing particulars, hank of sliver draft No. of doublings.
4. Production of sliver lap. Ribbon lap (lap size and lap weight and comber
5. Comber settings for different preparations.
6. Speed of sliver lap. Ribbon lap and combers (nips)
7. Waste percent foe different preparation.
8. Waste percent for different preparations.
9. Quantity of waste obtained and waste realization price and disposal of waste.
10. R.H. Temp. Lighting arrangement, material transport.
11. Note on high production comber (if any)
12. Quality Control programme- wrapping Standards.
13. Shift wise number of productive and ancillary workers.
14. Special feature, if any.
vi) Ring Frame Department
1. Layout of plan, lighting arrangement, humidification
2. No. of warp and weft ring frame with spindles / frame.
3. Spindle speeds, front roller speed, twist constant, draft constant, drafting arrangement
4. TPI Draft (back and front Zone) Twist factors used traveled.
5. Hank of sliver fed and counts spun.
6. Net weight / bobbin, per doff per operative, per hour
7. Production per frame per 8 hours operative hours and hours.
8. Yarn breakage rate, detail study of yarn breaks, Calculation of breaks / 100 spindle hours
9. Shift wise No. of productive and ancillary workers.
10. R.H. and temp
11. Quality control programme.
12. Machinery maintenance programme oiling, schedule, spindle gauge schedule spindle oil used.
13. Wrapping standards, yarn count, yarn strength, CSP and U% or C.V.% values for all counts.
Summary Of Spinning Section
Production in Hanks per frame and gms./spindle.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
38
17055 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
1) Spinning Organization (Hank & Draft)
Mixing -------------------I--------------------II-------------------III-------------Machine Hank Draft
Mixing (Detailed Organisation)
Machine
Hank Count
Ends
Draft
Speed
Sequence
Doubled
TPI
Product
spindles per 8
hrs
hank/labs kg.
Similar information should be tabulated for other mixing and counts.
Labour Organisation
Deptt
I Shift
II Shift
III Shift
Productive
Ancillary
Productive
Ancillary
Productive
Ancillary
Grand Total
I Shift
Maintenance Staff
II Shift
III Shift
Total
Mixing & Blow
Room to Ring
Frame
Total
Department
Maintenance schedule – as followed in the Mill. (Department – wise date)
(c) WEAVING
i) Warp & weft winding
1. Layout plan, Lighting scheme, humidification and fire prevention installations.
2. Temp. and humidity maintained, materials handling.
3. Types of warp winding machines, their speed in meters per counts, worked, slub catcher
settings, tensions, used, Eff. and H.P. required.
4. Spindles per operative (count-wise)
5. Production per operative (count-wise)
6. Breakage rate per 100 bobbins.
7. Yarn content of cones or cheeses in kg.
8. Tailing percentage (for B.C spooler)
9. Types of knots.
10. Quantity of waste obtained and waste realisation price and disposal of waste.
11. Operations to be performed by operatives.
12. Preparation for cheese dyeing (Note)
13. Preparation for weft re-winding.
14. Study of ribbon breaking, unwinding accelerator.
15. Maintenance schedule.
16. Quality control programme (if any)
17. Shift wise productive and ancillary labour.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
39
17055 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
ii) Warping
1. Layout lighting, humidification and fire prevention scheme.
2. Types of warping machines.
3. Types of creels their capacities and special features.
4. Speed and break application.
5. Beam dimensions and yarn content in metres or in kg.
6. Production per shift of 8 hrs. (Count wise)
7. Breakage rate per 400 ends per 1000 metres (Count wise).
8. Shift wise productive and ancillary labour.
iii) Sizing
1. Types of machines (2 Cylinder, Hot-air, multi cylinder)
2. Average sizing speed,
3. Drying capacity in kg / Hr.
4. Expected and actual production in kg.
5. Efficiency.
6. Special features and controls fitted on the sizing M/c.
7. Shift wise productive and ancillary layout.
8. Size recipes for different size-mix
9. Method of preparation of a size-mix
10. Cost of Size-mix material per kg.
iv) Drawing- In
1. Average No. of ends drawn/shift/operative for plain sorts, for drill sorts, for dobby sorts.
2. Particulars about drawing in and knotting machine. There production rate.
3. Labour complement shift wise (i) Productive (ii) Ancillary
v) Weaving Shed
1. Types of looms-width of the looms-Reed space available.
2. Jobber-wise allocation of looms.
3. Shift wise labour complement (i) Productive (ii) Ancillary
4. Duties of ancillary workers
5. Sort particulars.
6. Sort No
7. Name of the fabric
8. Finish given
9. Finished state Dimensions (i) width (ii) Length
10. Grey state Dimensions (i) width (ii) Length
11. Reed space in cms. Or inches.
12. Tape length in metres or yards.
13. Pick per cm. Or inch.
14. Reed count
15. Total selvedge ends.
16. Total ends.
17. Size % on warp weight
18. Count of warp yarn
19. Count of weft yarn
20. Count of selvedge yarn
21. Loom width in inches
22. Loom speed in R.P.M
23. Expected efficiency
24. Production in metres or yards / shift
25. Warp yarn required with waste allowance / per shift
26. Weft yarn required with waste allowance / per shift
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
40
17055 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
27. Selvedge yarn required with waste allowance / per shift
28. Mixed counts working on looms.
vi) Automatic Weaving (if available)
1) Sorts worked and their particulars in the above manner
2) Organisation of auto-looms section.
a) No of looms to a weaver with reference to width and type of auto loom.
b) No of looms to jobber
c) No of looms to Batter filler
d) No of looms to smash hand
e) No of looms to Oiler, helper, cleaner
f) Breakage rate study on some sorts
g) Wages paid to different categories of workers.
h) Layout of looms and humidification and lighting and ventilation system.
i) Quality control programme.
j) Different type of wastes.
k) Jobber and their work load duties.
3) Breakage rate study on all types of sorts possible.
4) Note on shuttle less loom (if existing)
Summary of Labour Organisation
Deptt
I Shift
Productive
Ancillary
II Shift
P.A.
III Shift
P.A.
Total
vii) Grey Room
1. Inspection of Goods
2. Classification of Faults
3. Grey room Record
4. Stitching of Goods for preparing lots
5. Give particulars of goods in Grey Room
6. How are the stains removed?
7. What are the other corrective processes carried out in Grey room
8. No of workers in Grey room and there functions
9. How are the grey goods assessed for faults?
10. How is the ink prepared?
11. Lay out of grey room
12. No of Stitching machine
13. Manufacturers of Stitching machine
14. Particulars of Thread Used in stitching machine with reference to fibre composition count etc.
15. Design of Observation tables
16. No of Supervisors per Shift.
(d) Testing and Quality Control
1. Layout plan, lighting scheme, fire prevention methods.
2. Temperature, humidity, air-conditioning & its effects on fibre properties.
3. Sampling techniques used for testing fibres, yarn & fabric.
4. Fibre length, fineness, maturity & strength determination, equipment & methods.
5. Selection of mechanical process in Spinning depending upon fibre parameters.
6. Evenness testing of lap, sliver & roving and suggestions for corrective measures.
7. Yarn Count, Twist, Strength determination, equipment & methods.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
41
17055 TX4 ‘G’ Scheme w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
8. Evenness & hairiness testing of yarn & suggestions for corrective measures.
9. Fabric testing & inspection.
10. Other testing such as trash content in cotton, nep count, waste percentage, cleaning efficiency
etc.
11. Synchronisation of Quality Control with Maintenance activities.
(e) Costing
The following information can be gathered, if possible. If the management is reluctant to
supply the information, do not insist upon.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Raw cotton cost for different types of wastes.
Waste realisation prices for different types of wastes.
Wages and fringe benefits given to the worker of various department.
Method of depreciation used for cost purpose.
Administrative charge percentage.
Selling expenses charges per kg or per Yd.
Spindle, Shift OH charges for different counts.
Selling price of yarn cost per kg. (if the yarn is sold to out side parties)
Waste multipliers for different mixings.
Loom shift OH charges for different mixings.
Method of costing.
Fabric cost sheet for some sorts.
Wages for the time rate workers in each department.
Wages for the piece rate workers in each department.
CRITICAL STUDY
Can you suggest ways to improve the operational deficiency and organisational technique,
considering first each department you have studied separately and then collectively? Your suggestions
may be based on (a) Material handling procedures, (b) Quality control programme (c) Maintenance
schedules. (d) Production improvement techniques, (e) Quality improvement
Technique.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
42
17055 TX4 w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : AE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies
$
Automobile Manufacturing
Processes
Heat Power Engineering
Automobile Engines
Automobile Systems and Body
Engineering
Theory of Machines
β
Professional Practices-II
Abbrev
iation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
EST
17401
01
--
02
01
50#*
20
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
AMP
17403
03
--
02
03
100
40
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
HPE
AEN
17407
17408
03
03
---
02
04
03
03
100
100
40
40
-50#
-20
25 #
--
10
--
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
10
ASB
17409
03
--
02
03
100
40
25 #
10
--
--
[email protected]
10
TOM
PPT
17412
17035
03
--
---
02
02
03
--
100
--
40
--
---
---
---
---
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
20
TOTAL
16
--
16
--
550
--
75
--
25
--
200
--
SW
(17400)
50
50
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 32 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 900
@ - Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* - Online Examination,
β - Common to ME, PG, PT, MH, MI
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as
sessional work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR, TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principles
Concept
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Credit, Ecosystem
3
17401AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Automobile Engineering
Course Code : AE
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Automobile Manufacturing Processes
Subject Code : 17403
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work. (SW)
Rationale:
Automobile manufacturing processes is a core technological subject. With advent of
technology there are many advances in manufacturing processes and equipments. The knowledge
of these advances is essential for a diploma student engaged in manufacturing organizations.
Students should be able to write and apply CNC programs in manufacturing industry.
General Objectives:
Student will be able to,
 Know the forging process and it’s use in manufacturing automobile parts.
 Know the different press tools and their operations.
 Understand different welding processes used in industry.
 Selection and applications of different surface cleaning and coating processes
 Know the different methods of surface finishing.
 Know about sub-systems of CNC machines and write CNC programs.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17403 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedures
Selection and use of appropriate manufacturing and finishing process to obtain
finished products.
To prepare forging
and press work
product of given
dimensions.
Forging and
press tools.
surface
finishing
To operate and
write part
programming for
given job on CNC
machine.
Speed, feed,
depth of cut,
for various
operations
process
Principles
Concepts
To select proper surface
cleaning, coating and
finishing process for
auto components.
Selection of Manufacturing
Process, surface treatment
Process, NC / CNC machine
CNC
machines
Selection of press tools, dies, welding
process, finishing process, machine
tool required
Fact
Raw
materials
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Press tools, Press
and forging dies.
8
Cutting Tools, Machine
tools, CNC machines
17403 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory
Topic and Contents
Hours
Marks
06
16
12
24
08
16
04
10
1: Forging
16 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Understand forging processes and their applications
Contents:
1.1
Introduction:
08 Marks
Forgeable materials and forgeability
Classification of forging processes
Advantages and limitations of forging processes
1.2
Forging sequences for Auto components08 Marks
Connecting rods, Crankshafts, Camshafts and Spanners
2: Press and press work
24 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know the press operations and their applications



Contents:
2.1 Introduction
08 Marks
 Materials used in press work for automobile applications.
 Classifications of presses and terminology used in presses
 Major parts of Fly press
2.2 Press tools
12 Marks
 Parts of standard die set
 Die accessories- Pilots, Stops, Strippers, Pressure pads and Knock outs
 Types and construction of dies—Simple, progressive,
compound and combination die
2.3 Press operations04 Marks
Blanking, piercing, bending, drawing.
3: Welding processes
16 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know various welding operations and their applications
Contents:
3.1
Introduction
04 Marks
 Classification and selection of welding process.
 Working principle of Gas welding and types of flames.
3.2
Arc welding process
08 Marks
 Metal arc, TIG and MIG
3.3 Resistance welding, Brazing and soldering
04 Marks
4: Surface treatment and finishing processes
10 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know various surface cleaning, coating and finishing operations.
Contents:
4.1 Surface cleaning and coating processes
06 Marks
 Surface cleaning processes- acid, alkaline, electrolytic cleaning, blasting
and tumbling
 Metallic surface coating- Electroplating, Galvanizing and metal spraying
4.2 Surface finishing processes
04 Marks
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
17403 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Lapping, honing, super finishing, buffing, burnishing and their
applications, advantages and limitations.
5: Introduction to CNC machines
16 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know the basic components of CNC machines and tools.
Contents:
 NC and CNC Machines.
 Difference between conventional machines and CNCs.
 Working principle of CNC machines.
 Classification of CNC machines.
 Advantages and disadvantages of CNC machines.
 Type of tools used on turning center and VMC.
 Absolute and Incremental Co-ordinate system.
6. CNC Part programming
18 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Understand and write CNC part programming
Content :
 Axes configuration- X, Y and Z axes.
 Procedure for developing the Part program
 ISO Codes used in programming
 Simple Part programming as per ISO codes on
CNC and VMC for operations like turning, drilling and
Milling.
Total
08
16
10
18
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Understand the different types of press and welding components.
2. Know the different types of programming codes
Motor Skills:
1. To prepare given job on milling machine.
2. To use press machine to produce various auto components
3. To prepare job by welding process
4. To produce a job on CNC turning center
List of Practicals:
1. One job involving different milling machine operations such as key way cutting, gear
cutting by indexing in a batch of 2 students.
2. One press work job involving operations like blanking, piercing and drawing. (Job should
be selected from market utility).
3. One resistance welding job to show the working principle of resistance welding. Calculate
current and time required for completion of a resistance welding job.
4. One simple part programming job on CNC machine. One job on CNC lathe having plain
turning, taper turning, step turning, threading, boring and grooving (Batch of 2 students).
OR
One job on CNC milling having following operations – face milling, slotting, contour
machining (Batch of 2 students)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17403 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
5. Industrial visit shall be arranged to demonstrate different Milling machines, grinding
machines, CNC machines, forging operations, press operations, Surface treatment and
surface finishing processes. Write a report.
Note: Different machine tools and operations may be shown during industrial visits arranged
under Professional Practices -IV
List of Assignments:
1. ISO codes for turning and machining center used in CNC programming.
2. Prepare Process sheet for forging operations of a simple automobile component.
3. Prepare Process sheet for press working operation using compound or progressive die.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr
No.
Author
Title
S. K. Hajra Choudhury.
A. K. Hajra Choudhury.
Nirjhar Roy
Elements of Workshop
Technology. Vol. - I and II
2.
H. S. Bawa
Workshop Technology
Vol. - I and II.
3.
R. K. Jain
Production Technology
4.
P.N.Rao
CAD/CAM Principles and
applications
5.
Aditan Pabla
6.
Serope Kalpakjian
Steven R. Schmid
CNC machines programming
and applications
Manufacturing Engineering
and Technology
7
N.K. Chougule
CAD/CAM/CAE
1.
Publication
Media Promoters
and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
Mumbai.
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd. New
Delhi.
Khanna Publishers.
Delhi.
Tata McGraw-Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd. New
Delhi.
New Age International
Publication
Pearson
Scietech
1. CDs, PPTs Etc.:
Electronics Trades and Technology Development Corporation (A Govt. Of India
undertaking), Akbar Hotel Anex, Chankyapuri, New Delhi-110 021.
Learning Materials: Transparencies, CBT packages developed by N.I.T.T.E.R. Bhopal.
2. Websites:
www.npkauto.com
www.youtube.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17403 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Automobile Engineering
Course Code : AE
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Heat Power Engineering
Subject Code : 17407
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
25#
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Heat energy is the basis for most of the power producing and power absorbing devices. In
order to understand the principles and working of these devices it is essential to understand the
basic laws and concepts of thermodynamic processes and gas cycles, properties of steam,
generation of steam with modern boilers, steam condensers and turbines. As modern diesel engine
vehicles are turbocharged. Students should also understand the working principles and
constructions of air compressors gas turbines and jet engines. Due to energy crunch of petroleum
products worldwide hunt for alternative energy sources is being done for the last three decades.
Hence students should also have comparative brief idea about various conventional energy sources,
calorific values, carbon value and evaporative power of
fuels and exploration of various
alternative energy sources. Student should have capability to know the necessary parameters
affecting efficiency of heat absorption, rejection or conversion devices into work.
Objectives:
Students will be able to:
 Correlate the theoretical knowledge with practical aspects of systems of work producing
and work absorbing devices like boilers, condensers, steam turbines, air compressors, gas
turbines etc.
 Describe various sources of energy and ways to harness it.
 Understand the chemistry of fuel and Estimate calorific value, mass of air required for
complete combustion of fuels.
 Identify and locate various parts of equipments, use of instruments, tools for assembly and
dismantling of various devices.
 Observe the working of devices with change in parameters MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17407 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure




Application of boilers, steam condenser.
Power producing and power absorbing devices.
Various ways to harness different sources of energy.
Calorific value measuring devices, flue gas analyzer.
Safety and
procedure of
improving
boiler
performance
Procedure of
Starting and
running of
compressor
and turbine
Procedure of
assembling and
dismantling of
devices
Principle
Thermodynamic processes and cycles based on ideal gas laws, Formation of
steam, Isothermal and Polytrophic compression, Conversion of heat into work,
Calorific value of fuels and chemistry of combustion, Conservation of energy
resources.
Concepts
Thermodynamic process, Thermodynamic cycle-V and T-S diagram and air
standard efficiency of thermodynamic cycle, Mechanism of formation of steam
and its quality , Heat exchangers, Venturi effect, Expansion of steam and
bleeding of turbine, isothermal, isentropic and polytrophic compression, Open
cycle and close cycle gas turbine, thermal jet, Renewable and non renewable
energy sources.
Facts
Boilers, Boiler mountings and Boiler accessories, Steam turbines, Steam
condensers, Reciprocating and rotary compressors, Rock drills, Torque
Wrenches Gas turbines, turbo jet and turbo prop engine, Thermal power plant,
Gas turbine power plant, Nuclear power plant, Wind mill, Solar collectors, Solar
heaters, Calorific value measuring devices
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17407 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Content
1. Fundamentals of thermodynamics.
18 marks
Specific Objectives:
 Understand the concepts of thermodynamic processes and air cycles.
 Know applications of thermodynamic principles and processes in
various heat engines and power absorbing devices.
Contents:
1.1
Study of thermodynamic processes for ideal gases
 Represent Isobaric, Isochoric, Isothermal, Adiabatic and polytrophic
processes on P-V and T-S diagram, formulae of work done, change in
internal energy and change in enthalpy.
 Relation between P,V and T
(Derivations only for adiabatic process, No mathematical calculations
for any process)
1.2 Air cycles:
 P-V and T-S diagram and equations for air standard efficiency of
Carnot, Otto, Diesel and Dual combustion cycle.
1.3 Fundamental of Heat transfer
 Modes of heat transfer – conduction, convection and radiation
 Application of heat transfer in automobiles
2. Properties of Steam and Steam Power
18 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know the process of formation of steam and efficient use of heat
energy stored in the steam into mechanical work
Content:
2.1 Formation of steam, various phases like wet steam, dry saturated steam,
superheated steam.
4 Marks
 Dryness fraction, degree of superheat, sensible heat, Latent heat ,
calculation of enthalpy of wet, dry saturated and superheated steam
using Steam table.
2.2Steam boilers8 Marks
construction and working of i) Three pass packaged type boiler
ii) La Mont Boiler
2.3 Steam condenser:
6 Marks
 Function, locations in steam power plant.
 Construction and working of two pass down flow Surface condenser.
 Condenser efficiency and sources of air leakage in condenser
3. Air Compressors
18 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know the working of reciprocating and rotary air compressor and it’s
application.
 Understand working of different pneumatic tools.
Content:
3.1 Classification of air compressor - Construction and working of
single stage and two stage reciprocating air compressors with P-V.
diagram. Necessity of multi-staging and inter cooling.
Construction and working of rotary compressors i) Centrifugal
compressor ii) Axial flow compressor iii) Screw compressor,
Comparison of various compressors
3.2 Air compressor terminology like i) Free air delivered, ii) Capacity of
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
Hours
Marks
09
18
09
18
08
18
17407 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Compressor, iii) Piston displacement, iv) I. P., v) B. P., vi) Volumetric
efficiency, vii) Isothermal efficiency, viii) Overall Isothermal or
Compressor efficiency. (Only definitions), Factors affecting volumetric
Efficiency of reciprocating air compressors.
3.3 Applications of compressed air: construction and working of i) Rock
drill, ii) pneumatic torque wrench
4. Gas Turbines
14 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know the working of gas turbine and its application in aviation
industries.
Content:
4.1 Brayton cycle - P.V. diagram and thermal efficiency.
4 Marks
 Classification of gas turbines.
4.2 Construction and working of gas turbines i) open cycle, ii)closed cycle
gas Turbines, P.V. and T.S diagrams.
10 Marks
 Turbojet and turboprop engine.
(no numerical)
5. Sources of Energy and Power plants
16 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know various sources of conventional and non-conventional energy
with their applications.
5.1 Classification of various conventional and non-conventional sources of
energy. Construction and working of power plants based on conventional
energy sources like :
a) Thermal power plant
b) Gas turbine power plant
c) Nuclear power plant -Pressurized water reactor.
 Parameters for the site selection of conventional power plants.
5.2 Power plants based on non-conventional energy sources.
i) Solar, ii) Biomass, iii) Wind energy
 Concepts of Geothermal and tidal power plant.
6. Fuels and Combustion
16 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know the comparative information of properties of various fuels.
 Know the chemistry of combustion of fuels.
 Calculate H.C.V./L.C.V of fuels and requirement of theoretical or
minimum air required for combustion of fuel.
Content:
6.1 Types of fuels –
4 Marks
Definition, classification, properties, Calorific value of fuels.
 Ultimate analysis and proximate analysis of solid fuels.
 Liquid fuels- Comparative information about composition, specific
gravity and gross calorific values of liquid fuel.
 Gaseous fuels- natural, LPG, CNG, and other artificially prepared
gaseous fuels.
6.2 Higher and lower Calorific values of fuel and it’s estimation, carbon
value, evaporative power of fuel. Dulong’s formula, construction and
working of Bomb calorimeter.
8 Marks
6.3 Combustion of fuels – combustion chemistry of carbon, hydrogen and
methane. Mass of air required for complete combustion of fuel, excess
air.
4 Marks
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
06
14
08
16
08
16
48
100
17407 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual skills:
1. Describe the locations of components.
2. Analyse the functioning of systems and respective components.
3. Describe the direction flow of fluids and work
4. Analyse the parameters affecting safety and efficiency of devices.
Motor Skills:
1. Proper use of tools.
2. Practice of safe working procedures.
3. Variations in parameters affecting efficiency.
List of Practicals:
1) Visit to any industry where boiler is installed with reference to observations of locations,
constructions and working of boiler mountings like safety valve and Bourdon’s pressure
gauge and boiler accessories like a) economizer b) super-heater.
(The same should also be explained on cut- section and table model in laboratory)
2) Visit to cogeneration plant of sugar factory or any other thermal power plant with reference
to observation of components, path of steam, minimum and maximum r.p.m., governing,
bleeding and maintenance schedule of steam turbine.
3) Study the provisions of Indian boiler act with reference to duties of boiler inspector, chief
inspector, annual registration process and accident.
4) Dismantling and assembling of one reciprocating and one rotary compressor.
5) Study of system components of gas turbines used in turbocharger with reference to direction
of flow of air and flue gas, shape of vanes, blades also describe maintenance schedule of gas
turbine.
6) Study any solar water heater and calculate it’s efficiency.
7) Determination of calorific value of solid or liquid fuel using Bomb calorimeter.
8) Visit a wind mill to study the various features and prepare report containing specification,
materials, operating speed range, wind speed data, locking mechanism, protective coatings
and efficiency.
Learning Resources
1. Books
Sr.
No.
Author
1
R. S. Khurmi and J. K.
Gupta
2
Patel, Karamchandani
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
A Text book of Thermal
Engineering
Elements of Heat Engines
(Vol. I, II and III )
16
Publisher
S. Chand and Co. Ltd.
Acharya Book Depot.
17407 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3
4
5
6
7
A course in Thermal
Engineering
Engineering
Thermodynamics
Thermodynamics
Engineering
Thermodynamics Work
and Heat Transfer
Govt. of India
‘G’ Scheme
S. Domkundwar, Dr C.P.
Kothandaramanand A.V.
DOmkundwar
Jones and Dugan
Yunus Cegeland Mike Boles
Dhanpat Rai and Co.(P)Ltd,
New Delhi
Prentice hall of India
Publication.
Tata McGraw Hill Publication
Gordon Rogers
Yon Mayhew
Pearson
Indian Boiler Act - 1923
--
2. Websites
www.howstuffworks.com
www.wikipedia.com
www.watertubeboiler.org
www.scince.uwaterloo.ca
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17407 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Automobile Engineering
Course Code : AE
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Automobile Engines
Subject Code : 17408
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work. (SW)
Rationale:
This is a core technology subject. I C engines are required to run the vehicles. The basic
principles of Thermodynamics are applied in I C engine. This subject forms the basis for the
Advanced Automobile Engine and vehicle maintenance. Knowledge of various engine systems
will be helpful in finding and evaluating engine maintenance problems.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to,
 Understand working principles, comparison and applications of I C engine.
 Know constructional details of different types of engine.
 Draw layout and understand construction and working of various systems required in
engine.
 Perform tests on I.C. engine and estimate performance parameters.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17408 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Automobiles, Airplanes, Locomotives, Electricity Generators, Earth moving
machinery and so on.
Procedures
Induction, Heat addition, Ignition, Injection, Heat rejection, Cooling,
Lubrication, Exhaust, Testing, Measurement.
Principles
Concepts
Otto cycle, Diesel cycle, Combustion, Heat transfer, Friction,
4 stroke cycle, crank and valve operating mechanism, properties of fluids
(coolants, lubricants, and fuels), performance testing methods.
Facts
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Components of I.C. engine systems
19
17408 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topics and Contents
01. Fundamentals of I.C. Engine
16 marks
Specific Objectives:
 Understand working principle of four and two stroke cycle engines.
 Write nomenclature of engine.
 Compare petrol and diesel engines, four stroke and two stroke engines.
 Classify I.C. engines and write their specifications.
Content
1.1 Introduction
4 Marks
 Definition of I C engine.
 Engine nomenclature.
1.2 The working principle of Engine
6 Marks
 Four-Stroke Spark Ignition Engine.
 Four-Stroke Compression Ignition Engine.
 Comparison of Four-Stroke SI and CI Engine.
 Two-Stroke Engines
 Scavenging.
 Comparison of Four-Stroke and Two-Stroke Engine.
1.3 Classification, Specifications and applications
6 Marks
 Classification of engine on the basis of: Cycle of operation, Fuel,
Method of Charging, Ignition, Cooling, Cylinder arrangement,
camshaft layout.
 Merits and Demerits of Vertical and horizontal engines.
 Engine Specifications - Two Wheelers, Light Motor Vehicle, Medium
Motor Vehicle and Heavy Motor Vehicle.
 Applications of I C Engines.
02. Construction of I. C. Engine
20 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Describe function, Construction and material of engine components.
 Understand Types of drives required to operate, draw and describe
various mechanisms.
 Understand and draw Valve and port timing diagrams.
Content
2.1 Function, construction , materials and manufacturing methods of Engine
components
16 Marks
 Cylinder block, Cylinder liners – Dry and Wet, Cylinder head, Inlet and
Exhaust manifold, Tappet cover, Timing cover, Crank case. Oil Sump.
 Crank Mechanism: Piston and piston rings, Piston pin, Connecting rod,
Crank Shaft, Cam shaft, Flywheel, Bearings, Oil seals, Gaskets. (Only
the Name of commonly used Manufacturing Method is expected)
 Valve and Valve Operating Mechanisms: Overhead Valve and
Overhead Cam arrangements.
 Valve Cooling.
2.2 Camshaft Drives and Valve Timing
4 Marks
 Camshaft drives: Timing Gears, Chain and Belt drive. Relation
between speed of camshaft and crank Shaft.
 Valve timing Diagram, Port timing Diagram.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
Hours Marks
08
16
10
20
17408 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
03. Fuel and Air Feed System
16 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Draw layout of fuel and air feed systems.
 Understand, describe, and compare the construction and working of
components involved in the systems.
Content
3.1 Petrol fuel supply system.
8 Marks
 Conventional Petrol Engine: Gravity feed, Pump feed (Layout,
Function of Components and location).
 Construction and working of components: Fuel Tank, Fuel Filter, S. U.
Electrical Fuel Pump, Air cleaners – dry type and Oil wetted types.
 Working Principle of Simple Carburettor, Air Fuel ratio requirements,
Circuits in Two-wheeler carburettor and Solex carburettor.
3.2 Diesel fuel supply system
8 Marks
 Diesel Engine: Need and requirements of Fuel Injection Systems.
 Layout of Fuel Injection systems – Individual pump, Unit injector
system, Distributor system and Common rail system.
 Fuel Injector and types of nozzles.
 Fuel metering in Fuel Injection Pump ( Inline pump and Distributor
pump )
 Working principle of Mechanical Governor in Fuel Injection Pump.
04. Ignition and Exhaust system
8 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Understand ignition systems.
 Understand firing order of the engine.
 Compare various types of mufflers
Content
4.1 Introduction to Ignition System
4 Marks
 Requirements of ignition system.
 Magneto and Battery Ignition systems (Working only).
 Firing order used in 3,4 and 6 cylinder engines
4.2 Types of Exhaust system
4 Marks
 Function of Exhaust manifold.
 Construction, Working and types of silencer / Mufflers.
05. Cooling and Lubrication systems
20 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Identify components and types of cooling and lubrication systems
 Compare Cooling and Lubrication systems.
Content:
5.1 Engine cooling system
4 Marks
 Need of cooling system.
 Limitations of cooling system.
 Types: Air, Water/ Liquid cooling system (Layout and Function of
Components)
 Properties of coolants and coolant additives
5.2 Construction and working of cooling system
6 Marks
 Construction and working of: Thermostat valve, Water expansion tank,
Temperature Indicators, Pressure cap, Water pump, Fan and fan belt.
 Electrically driven Fan circuit.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
08
16
04
08
10
20
17408 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Radiator: Construction and type of radiator cores.
5.3 Introduction to Lubrication system
4 Marks
 Need of lubrication system.
 Properties of lubricating oil, additives of lubricating oil.
 Parts to be lubricated.
5.4 Types of Lubrication system
6 Marks
 Types of lubrication system: Splash, Pressure – wet sump and dry sump
(Layout of lubrication system)
 Components: Oil filters, Pump and its drive, pressure regulators, oil
pressure gauge.
 Positive crank case ventilation
 Classification of Lubricating Oils on the basis of Viscosity (SAE) and
Load (API) Severity rating.
06. Performance of Engine
20 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Understand performance parameters, draw engine characteristic graphs.
 Perform Engine tests and measure different parameters and analyze the
results.
Content:
6.1 Performance parameters.
04 Marks
 Definitions: Indicated Power, Brake Power and Frictional Power,
Efficiencies - Air standard, Mechanical, Brake Thermal, Indicated
Thermal, Volumetric and Relative.
6.2 Dynamometers and engine testing:
16 Marks
 Working Principle and types of Dyanmometers: Rope brake, Hydraulic
and Eddy current.
 Engine Testing: Morse Test, Willian’s line Method for finding
Frictional Power.
 Heat balance sheet and Method of calculating Volumetric Efficiency
and Fuel Consumption.( Simple Numerical problems)
Total
08
20
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual skill:
 Understand working principle of S.I. / C.I. engine
 Select special tools used for engine disassembly / assembly.
 Identify engine components.
 Identify components of the engine systems.
 Interpret results from engine power observations and calculations.
Motor Skills:
 Sketch engine components and engine system components.
 Measure certain parameters with the help of - dynamometer, air box, fuel measuring
burette, exhaust gas calorimeter, measuring tools.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17408 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practicals:
1. Use Special Tools In Dismantling And Assembling By Identifying Tools, Demonstrating
and Arranging The Practice Of Same.
2. Operate Cut Section Engine Model To Understand Engine Nomenclature and Operate
Engine.
3. Identify and Observe Location Of Various Engine Components.
4. Trace Induction System and Fuel Supply System Curve to Understand the Characteristics.
5. Dismantle Ignition System and Distributor Assembly, To Understand The Functions.
6. Dismantle Cooling System, Identify Components and Their Functions.
7. Dismantle Lubrication System, Identify Components. Draw Layout.
8. Prepare Heat Balance Sheet And Plot Performance Characteristics Curve of An Engine
After Trial.
9. Conduct Morse Test On Multicylinder Engine & Calculate Frictional Power & Mechanical
Efficiency.
10. Dismantle & Assemble An Engine.
Notes:
1. Practicals may be performed in a group of 4 to 6 students.
2. Engine testing practicals may be performed by the batch.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher / Edition
1
Dr. Kirpal Singh
Automobile Engg. Vol.-2
Standard Publishers
2
Anil Chhikara
Automobile Engineering
Vol.1
Satya Prakashan, New Delhi
3
R.B. Gupta
Automobile Engineering
4
K.K. Ramlingam
Automobile Engineering
5
John B. Heywood
Internal Combustion Engine
Fundamentals
McGraw-Hill International
Edition
6
Newton and Steeds
Internal Combustion Engine
--
Satya Prakashan
Scitech Publications
2. Websites:
www.npkauto.com
www.howstuffworks.com
www.youtube.com for animations and videos of various engine system operations.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17408 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Automobile Engineering
Course Code : AE
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Automobile Systems and Body Engineering
Subject Code : 17409
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
This subject is Core Technology subject for Automobile Engineering course. This subject
is part of Automobile systems concerning control of vehicles. Knowledge of this subject is required
in the subjects like Automobile Component Design, Vehicle maintenance, vehicle testing.
Conceptual knowledge of this subject is useful for understanding and improving the performance of
Automobile system.
General Objectives:
Students will be able t o :
1. Understand construction, working and functions o f Automobile Systems.
2. Understand construction, working and functions of Automobile control systems
such as steering, b raking and suspension.
3. Comp are the developments in body engineering, control systems and safety
equipment
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17409 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Various control, safety and comfort systems of a Vehicle. Vehicle
Performance Analysis
Construction and Operation of various types of steering gear boxes,
Steering Linkages, Suspension system components identification and
operation, braking systems – construction and operation, Human Comfort
Parameters, Aerodynamic shape, Vehicle Performance.
Principles
Ackerman steering, Pascal Law, Law of friction, Tractive effort,
Traction, Performance of Vehicle
Concepts
Steering system, suspensions systems, body engineering, HVAC system
Facts
Axles, spring, steering gear box, Brake shoes, anti-roll bar, stabilizer,
vehicle body, car air conditioning
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17409 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Content:
Topic and Contents
1: Front Axle and Steering
22 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know various types of steering linkages.
 Understand working of different steering gear boxes.
 Know steering geometry.
 Understand concept of power steering.
Content:
1.1 Front Axle:
8 Marks
 Types of front axle - Dead axle, live axle.
 Type of stub axle arrangements- Elliot, reverse Elliot, Lamoine,
reverse Lamoine.
 Front wheel assembly.
1.2 Steering system. :
14 Marks
 Steering linkages.
 Steering geometry and its effects – Caster, camber, king pin
inclination, toe in– toe out, Correct Steering angle. Understeering
and oversteering, Turning radius.
 Construction, working and application of Steering gear box - rack
and pinion type, recirculating ball type, and worm and rollertype.
 Ackerman Principle and linkage.
 Power assisted steering and its types (Hydraulic and electrical)
2: Brakes
20 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know various types of braking systems.
 Understand construction and working of different braking system
components.
 Know latest developments in braking system.
Content:
2.1 Introduction
8 Marks
 Function and necessity of brakes.
 Classification of brakes and braking systems.
 Construction and working of -disc brake and drum brake
 Friction materials used for brake shoes and pads. Characteristics of
friction material- brake fade, coefficient of friction, dry friction and
wet friction
2.2 Braking systems
12 Marks
 Construction and working of - Mechanical braking system, Hydraulic
Braking system, Air braking system, Hydraulic operated air
braking system and vacuum assisted braking system.
 Concept and working of antilock braking system.
 Parking brake
 Properties of brake fluids and their specifications.
3: Suspension Systems
18 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Identify and describe various components of suspension systems.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
Hours
Marks
12
22
10
20
10
18
17409 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Know latest developments in suspension systems.
Content:
3.1 suspension systems
10 Marks
 Rigid and independent Suspension.
 Types of Independent suspension system-McPherson strut, wishbone
type.
 Semi-elliptical Leaf spring, coil spring , torsion bar arrangement,
 Construction and working of Air Suspension System.
3.2 Construction and working of8 Marks
 Shock absorbers -Telescopic and Gas filled
 Anti roll bar or stabilizer bar.
4: Body Engineering and Safety Devices.
16 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know various types of materials used for automobile body.
 Understand protective treatment of automobile body.
 Know latest developments in safety devices.
Content:
 Types of bodies and materials used in body construction
 Protective and anticorrosive treatments, painting and repainting
procedure.
 Safety devices –air bags, exhaust brake, emergency brake, central
locking, Collapsible steering.
5: Car Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning System (HVAC)
Specific Objectives:
 Understand the basic principles of HVAC system.
 Know the comfort conditions of the occupants.
Content:
 Fundamentals of Refrigeration and air conditioning.
 Description of vapour compression cycle with components in the
circuit.
 Layout and operation of HVAC.
 Type of refrigerants used in car air conditioning and their properties.
 Human comfort conditions.
 Temperature control system, humidity control.
6: Vehicle Performance :
08 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 Know and describe various resistances experienced by a vehicle.
 Understand the effects of resistances on a vehicle.
Content:
 Resistance faced by the vehicle- Air resistance , rolling resistance,
gradient resistance
 Definitions- traction, tractive efforts, drawbar pull, gradeability and
acceleration, pitching, bouncing, rolling, sway and yaw.
 Stability of vehicle on turn and slopes (No mathematical treatment).
 Concept of Streamline shape of a vehicle body
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
06
16
06
16
04
08
48
100
17409 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
Student will be able to.
1. Identify parts like front axle, steering, brakes, suspension system.
2. Classify the system according to their application.
3. Select proper tools and their range.
4. Understand the construction and working of the system under consideration.
Motor Skills:
Student will be able to.
1. Sketch the different systems and their components.
2. Handle tools, equipment and instruments.
3. Dismantle and assemble various system assemblies.
List of Practicals:
Know your Automobile Systems laboratory through, listing the systems, models, and
charts in laboratory with their purpose.
01
 Listing the tools used in dismantling and assembly of various Automobile
Systems.
Observe the steering linkages, draw its layout. Dismantle the steering gear box, identify
02
its type, sketch its components and assemble it.
03
Observe and sketch different types of Front Axles.
 Observe and draw the layout of hydraulic braking system. Dismantle master
cylinder, wheel
cylinder and remove brake drum, identify and sketch the
04
components and assemble it.
Observe and draw the layout of hydraulically operated air/vacuum
assisted braking system
 Observe and sketch the construction of Mc pherson and wishbone type
suspension with labels.
 Dismantle semi elliptical leaf spring, sketch its components with labels and
05
understand its working.
 Dismantle telescopic shock absorber, identify components and draw sketches of
components with labels and understand its working.
Visit to automobile service station of heavy vehicle to observe air suspension system,
06
air brakes, power steering system and draw layout. Write a report
Visit to Automobile Body Building and Body Manufacturing Industry, Prepare a report
07 considering following points – Layouts, Body Construction, Body Materials, Body
Repairs and Painting Procedure.
Observe and draw the layout of HVAC system. Measure the ambient temperature and
08
temperature at various locations inside the car. Describe the control systems.
Notes:
1. A number of practicals may be started simultaneously.
2. The practicals may be performed in a group of 6 to 8 students.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17409 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
1
Ramlingam K.K.
2
Kirpal Singh
Automobile Engineering
3
Anil Chikara
Automobile Engineering
4
R.B. Gupta
Automobile Engineering
5
S. Srinivisan
Automotive Mechanics
6
Crouse / Anglin.
Automobile Engineering
Automobile Mechanics
Publisher / Edition
Scitech Publication
Standard Publication
Satya Prakashan New
Delhi
Satya Prakashan New
Delhi
Tata McGraw - Hill
Tata McGraw - Hill
2. IS, BIS and International Codes:
3. Websites : www.npkauto.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17409 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Mechanical Engineering Group
Course code : AE/ME/MH/MI/PG/PT
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Theory of Machines
Subject Code : 17412
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
---
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
It is a core technology subject in Mechanical Engineering Discipline. Mechanical Engineers
often come across various machines in practice. They should be able to identify and interpret
various elements of machines in day to day life. In maintaining various machines, a diploma
engineer should have sound knowledge of fundamentals of machine and mechanism. It will be
helpful for them to understand the mechanisms from operational point of view in a better way. This
subject imparts the kinematics involved in different machine elements and mechanisms like gear,
cam-follower, follower, belt-pulley, flywheel, brake, dynamometer, clutch, etc.
Detailed knowledge of these aspects with deep insight into the practical applications
develops a professional confidence in them to become successful Engineer.
This subject serves as a prerequisite for subjects like Machine Design to be learned in
higher semester.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1. Understand different machine elements and mechanisms.
2. Understand Kinematics and Dynamics of different machines and mechanisms.
3. Draw cam profile suitable to various displacement diagram.
4. Select Suitable Drives and Mechanisms for a particular application
5. Understand the function, operation and application of flywheel and governor.
6. Understand the function, operation and application of brake, dynamometer, clutch and
bearing
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17412 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
7. Find magnitude and plane of unbalanced forces.
Theory:
Topic and Content
Hours
1. Fundamentals and type of Mechanisms
Specific objectives:
 Define various terms related to mechanisms.
 Explain construction and working of various mechanisms
1.1 Kinematics of Machines:- Definition of Kinematics, Dynamics, statics,
Kinetics, Kinematic link, Kinematic pair and its types, constrained motion
and its types, Kinematic chain and its types, Mechanism, inversion, machine
and structure.
----- 8 Marks
07
1.2 Inversion of Kinematic Chain
 Inversion of four bar chain, coupled wheels of Locomotive, Beam engine,
Pantograph.
 Inversion of single slider Crank chain –Pendulum pump, Rotary I.C.
Engine mechanism, Oscillating cylinder engine,Whitworth quick return
mechanism. Quick return mechanism of shaper.
 Inversion of Double Slider Crank Chain- Scotch Yoke Mechanism,
Elliptical trammel, Oldham’s Coupling
-----8 Marks
2. Velocity and Acceleration in Mechanisms
Specific objectives
 Draw velocity and acceleration diagram for given mechanism
2.1 Concept of relative velocity and relative acceleration of a point on a link,
angular acceleration, inter-relation between linear and angular velocity and
acceleration.
08
2.2 Analytical method (No derivation) and Klein’s construction to determine
velocity and acceleration of different links in single slider crank mechanism.
-----8 Marks
2.3 Drawing of velocity and acceleration diagram of a given configuration,
diagrams of simple Mechanism. Determination of velocity and acceleration
of point on link by relative velocity method(Excluding Coriollis component
of acceleration)
------- 8 Mark
3. Cams and Followers
Specific objectives
 Define the terms related to Cam
 Classify Cams and Followers
 Draw cam profile as per the given applications
3.1 Concept, definition and applications of Cams and Followers. Cam
terminology
06
3.2 Classification of Cams and Followers.
3.3 Different follower motions and their displacement diagrams - Uniform
velocity, Simple harmonic motion, uniform acceleration and Retardation.
---- 4 Marks
3.4 Drawing of profile of radial cam with knife-edge and roller follower with and
without offset with reciprocating motion (graphical method)
-----8 Marks
4. Power Transmission
Specific objectives
10
 Give broad classification of Drives.
 Select Suitable Drives and Mechanisms for a particular application
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
Marks
16
16
12
20
17412 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Calculate various quantities like velocity ratio, belt tensions, slip, angle of
contact, power transmitted in belt drives
4.1 Belt Drives- flat belt, V-belt & its applications, material for flat and V-belt.
Selection of belts, angle of lap, length of belt, Slip and creep. Determination
of velocity ratio of tight side and slack side tension, centrifugal tension and
initial tension, condition for maximum power transmission (Simple
numericals)
------ 8 Marks
4.2 Chain Drives- Types of chains and sprockets, velocity ratio. Advantages &
Disadvantages of chain drive over other drives, Selection of Chain &
Sprocket wheels, methods of lubrication.
----- 4 Marks
4.3 Gear Drives – Classification of gears, Law of gearing, gear terminology.
Types of gear trains, their selection for different applications. Train value &
velocity ratio for simple, compound, reverted and epicyclic gear trains.
.............8 Marks
5. Flywheel and Governors
--------- 8 Marks
Specific objectives
 Differentiate between flywheel and governor
 Explain with neat sketch the construction and working of various
governors
5.1 Flywheel –Concept, function and application of flywheel with the help of
turning moment diagram for single cylinder 4-Stroke I.C Engine (no
Numericals)
Coefficient of fluctuation of energy, coefficient of fluctuation of speed and its
significance.
5.2 Governors- Types, concept, function and application & Terminology of
Governors.
5.3 Comparison between Flywheel and Governor.
6. Brakes and Dynamometers. ------------- 10Marks
Specific objectives
 List the differences between brakes and dynamometers
 Explain with neat sketch the construction and working of various brakes
and dynamometers
 Calculate braking force, braking torque and power lost in friction in shoe
and band brake
6.1Function of brakes and Dynamometers, Type of brakes & Dynamometers,
comparison between brakes & Dynamometer.
6.2 Construction and working i) shoe brake, ii)Band brake iii) Internal expending
shoe brake iv) Disc Brake
6.3 Numerical problems to find braking force and braking torque and power for
shoe and band brake.
6.4 Construction and working of i) Rope brake Dynamometer ii) Hydraulic
Dynamometer iii) Eddy current Dynamometer.
7. Clutches and Bearings.
Specific objectives
 Explain the difference between uniform pressure and uniform wear
theories
 Explain with neat sketch, the construction and working of various clutches
 Calculate torque required to over come friction and power lost in friction
in clutches and footstep bearings
04
08
05
10
06
12
7.1 Clutches- Uniform pressure and Uniform Wear theories. Function of Clutch
and its application, Construction and working of i) Single plate clutch, ii)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17412 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Multiplate clutch, iii) Centrifugal Clutch iv) Cone clutch v) Diaphragm
clutch, (Simple numericals on single and Multiplate clutches).
7.2 Bearings- i) Simple Pivot, ii) Collar Bearing iii) conical pivot. Torque and
power lost in friction. (Simple numericals)
8. Balancing
Specific objectives
 Explain the concept of balancing
 Find balancing mass and position of plane, analytically and graphically.
8.1 Concept of balancing. Balancing of single rotating mass. Analytical/Graphical
methods for balancing of several masses revolving in same plane.
Total
02
06
48
100
Practicals:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Determine velocity and acceleration of links in a given mechanism.
2. Analyse balancing of rotating masses in a single plane.
3. Interpret interrelationship between components of various braking mechanisms.
4. Compare various power transmission devices.
Motor Skills:
1. Drawing of velocity and acceleration diagrams.
2. Dismantle and assemble given brakes and clutches.
3. Draw cam profiles for a given application
4. Draw velocity and acceleration diagram of the given mechanisms
5. Draw force polygon for unbalanced masses revolving in same plane
Note - The Term work shall consist of Journal / lab manual and A-3 size sketch book.
List of Practical:
1. Sketch and describe working of quick return mechanism for a shaper. Find the ratio of
time of cutting stroke to the return stroke to understand quick return motion in shaping
operation.
2. Sketch and describe the working of the following mechanisms with its application,
a) Bicycle free wheel sprocket mechanism
b) Geneva mechanism
c) Ackerman’s steering gear mechanism
d) Foot operated air pump mechanism
3. Determine velocity and acceleration of various links of the given two mechanism, by
relative velocity method for analysis of motion of links.
4. Determine velocity and acceleration in an I. C. engine’s slider crank mechanism by
Kleins’s construction.
5. Draw the profile of a radial cam for the given follower type to obtain the desired follower
motion.
6. Determine slip, length of belt, angle of contact in an open belt drive to understand its
performance.
7. Draw a schematic diagram of centrifugal governor and describe its working. Draw a graph
between radius of rotation versus speed of governor to understand its function.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17412 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
8. Dismantle and assemble mechanically operated braking mechanism of two wheelers.
Sketch the two wheeler braking system and identify the functions of various components.
9. Dismantle and assemble multi-plate clutch of two wheeler. Draw neat sketch and state the
functions of various components.
10. Determine graphically counterbalance mass and its direction for complete balancing of a
system of several masses rotating in a single plane.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
Title
No.
Author
Edition
Publication
--
Eurasia publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
2006 edition
Third
McGraw Hill companies, II Edition
01
Theory of Machines
Khurmi Gupta
02
Theory of Machines
S.S. Rattan
03
Theory of Machines
P.L. Ballaney
--
Khanna Publication
04
Theory of Machines
Jagdishlal
--
Bombay metro-politan book
limited
05
Theory of Machines
Sadhu Singh
06
Theory of Machines
Ghosh – Mallik
--
07
Theory of Machines
Thomas Bevan
Third
Pearson
08
Theory of Machines
J.E. Shigley
Third
Oxford
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Second
34
Pearson
Affiliated East west press
17412 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Mechanical Engineering Group
Course Code : AE/ME/PG/PT/MH/MI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17035
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
02
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rational:
The purpose of introducing Professional practices is to fulfill the need of students to stand in
today’s global market with knowledge and confidence. This can be achieved by arranging industrial
visits, expert lectures attitude to present them-selves, get alternative solutions and validation of the
selected alternatives, socially relevant activities, and modular courses. Professional Practices is
helpful in broadening technology base of students beyond curriculum. Model making exercises
allow students to think more creatively and innovatively and inculcating habit of working with their
own hands. Modular courses are introduced with a view of learning and acquiring higher
technology skills through industry experts and consultants from the respective fields.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1) Acquire information from different sources.
2) Prepare notes for given topics
3) Present seminar using power projection system.
4) Interact with peers to share thoughts.
5) Work in a team and develop team spirit.
Intellectual Skill:
Student will be able to1) Search information from various resources.
2) Prepare notes on selected topics.
3) Participate in group discussions.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17035 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Motor Skills:
1) Observe industrial practices during visits.
2) Prepare slides / charts for presentation in seminar.
3) Develop a model
Learning Structure:
Gaining confidence in report writing and presentations skills in identified
Applications contents of curriculum, apply knowledge in model making. Developing self
learning habbit.
Writing skill, expert lectures, seminars, industrial visit, material conversion
Procedures processes, brain storming technique.
Concepts
Industry Institute Interaction, Team work, brain storming, information search.
Facts
Contents of identified topics, Industrial experts, models, equipments, machinery,
projection system, etc.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17035 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Content:
Topic & Content
Hours
1: Information Search –
Information search be made through manufacturers catalogue, Hand books, magazines
journal and websites, and submit a report on any Two Topics in a group of 3 to 4
students, report size shall not be more than 10 pages.
Following topics are suggested, any other equivalent topics may be selected.
i)
Present scenario of electric power generation in Maharashtra state /India.
ii) Composite materials – Types, properties & application
iii) Material handling equipments commonly used in industries.
iv) Advances in Automobile engines.
v) Hydraulic steering systems of Automobile.
vi) Mechanisms used to produce straight-line motion.
vii) Mechanisms used for generating intermittent motion.
viii) Advanced surface coating techniques like chemical vapor deposition, ion
10
implantation, physical vapor deposition.
ix) Types of cutting tools- specification, materials and applications.
x) Booking of E-Tickets for Railways/Buses/Air travel.
xi) Profiles of 2 multinational companies.
xii) Engine lubricants, coolants and additives
xiii) Power steering, power windows
xiv) ABS(anti lock braking systems)
xv) MPFI(multi point fuel injection) system
xvi) Role of MIDC, MSSIDC, DIC, Financial institutions in development of
industrial sector.
xvii) Solar energy systems - Components and their functions, applications
xviii) Design data book - Study and use of types of data.
2. Lectures by professionals/Industry ExpertsTwo lectures of two hour duration be arranged on any two topics suggested below or any
other suitable topics to acquire practical information beyond scope of curriculum.
Students shall prepare a brief report of each lecture as a part of their term work.
i)
Components of project Report.
ii) Various loan schemes of banks, LIC and other agencies for education and
other purposes.
iii) Use of plastics & rubbers in Automobiles industries.
iv) Type of processes used to protect material surfaces from environmental effect.
v) Product life cycle.
06
vi) Industrial application of mechatronics.
vii) Special features of CNC machines
viii) Gear manufacturing & gear teeth finishing processes.
ix) Gear boxes-industrial & Automobile applications.
x) Super-finishing operation &their industrial applications.
xi) Processing methods for plastic components.
xii) Features of modern boilers
xiii) Strainers and filters –Types, functions and applications
xiv) Industrial drives-Types, components, comparison and applications.
xv) Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
3. Seminars:
One seminar be arranged on the subjects related to 4 th semester. Or topics beyond
curriculum.
06
Each student shall submit a report up to 10 pages and deliver the seminar.
batch size – 2-3 students.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
17035 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Source of information – books, magazine , Journals, Website ,surveys,
Topics suggested for guidancei)
Clutches- Types, Principles, working, & applications.
ii) High pressure boilers.
iii) Heat exchangers-Types, working, applications.
iv) Hydraulic turbines-Types, working,& applications.
v) Hydraulic pumps -Types, working, & applications.
vi) Sensors -Types, principle, & applications.
vii) Super conductor technology - Types, principle, & applications.
viii) Semi conductors-. Types, materials, & applications.
ix) Industrial breaks- Types, construction, working, & applications.
4. Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same shall be submitted by each
student to form a part of the term work.
No of visits- At least one
Scale of industry- medium scale unit, large scale unit.
Group size- practical batch
Report-not exceeding 7 to 10 pages.
Purpose :
To study the profile of industry
To see the advanced manufacturing processes & machinery.
To observe working of CNC machines, work centre’s ,flexible manufacturing
systems
To observe working in foundry ,forging shop, press shop, heat treatment shop etc.
To observe chip less manufacturing machines & processes.
To study process sheets , quality control charts & production drawings, metallurgical
testing laboratory
To observe Tool room, standards room etc.
08
Following types of industries may be visited in & around the institute.
i) Foundry
ii) Forging units
iii) Sheet metal processing unit
iv) Machine/ Automobile component manufacturing unit
v) Fabrication unit/ powder metallurgy component manufacturing unit.
vi) Machine tool manufacturing unit.
vii) Any processing industry like chemical, textile, sugar, agriculture, fertilizer
industries.
viii) Auto workshop / four wheeler garage.
ix) City water supply pumping station
x) Hydro electric power plant,
xi) Wind mills, Solar Park
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
38
17035 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
5. Socially Relevant Activities
Conduct any one activity through active participation of students and write the report.
Group of students- maximum 4
Report- Not more than 6 pages
List of suggested activities- ( activities may be thought in terms of campus improvement)
i) Awareness about carbon credit
ii) Anticorruption movement
iii) Awareness about cyber crimes.
iv) Developing good citizens.
v) Management of E- WASTE
vi) Recycling of waste materials.
vii) Accident prevention & enforcement of safely rules.
viii) Awareness about pollution and pollution control.
ix) Any other relevant activity may be performed)
6. Mini Projects
Students, in a group of 4, shall perform any one activity listed below.
i) Model making out of card board paper ,wood ,thermocol, plastics, metal, clay etc
a) Any new idea/principle converted into model
b) Mechanisms
c) Jigs/fixtures
d) Material handling device,etc.
ii) Toy making with simple operating mechanisms
iii Layout of workshop/department/college
iv) Experimental set up/testing of a parameter
v) Display board indicating different type of machine components like bearing,
fasteners, couplings ,pipe fitting, valves, cams & followers, exploded views of
assemblies, type of welding equipment ,welding rods (drawings, photo graphs )
vi) Any relevant project which will make students to collect information & work with
their own hands.
Students shall arrange exhibition of all mini projects in the class/hall and present the task
to the audience/ experts/examiners. The student shall submit a brief report (Max. 5 pages)
of the mini project.
OR
Modular course:
Modular courses on any one of the suggested or equivalent topic be undertaken by a
group of 15 to 20 students.
i) Advance features in CAD
ii) Meshing of solid model using any suitable software
iii) Developing Unfold Sheet or Hyperblank by using Blanking Software
iv) CAM Software
v) Basics of PLC programming
vi) Applications of mechatronics
vii) Piping Technology
viii) Modern packaging technology
ix) Enterprise Resource Planning
x) Bio-pneumatic Robots
xi) Bio-mimicry
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
39
06
12
48
17035 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Note:The students who wish to undergo in plant training shall go through details regarding
it in the syllabus of Professional Practices – III for fifth semester and complete the training in
summer vacation at the end of fourth semester examination.
All such students will be assessed out of ten marks as per guidelines mentioned in the
curriculum of professional practice III in the fifth semester
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Author
Title
Publisher
NRDC, Publication Bi
Monthly Journal
Invention Intelligence
National Research Development
Journal
Corporation, GOI.
How things works
DK Publishing
DK Publishing
encyclopedia
Innovation mgmt.& new
Trott
Pearson Education
product development
Basic Managerial Skills
E.H. McGrath, S.J.
PHI
for All – Ninth Edition
Apprenticeship Training Scheme:- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
2. Web sites
www.engineeringforchange.org
www.wikipedia.com
www.slideshare.com
www.teachertube.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
40
17035 AE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
41
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN AGRICULTURE ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : AU
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO
SUBJECT TITLE
1
Environmental Studies
2
3
4
Soil Mechanics
Surveying & Levelling
Hydraulics
Farm Power & Tractor
Systems
Agricultural Economics and
Business Management
Manufacturing Technology
5
6
7
$
Abbrev
iation
SUB
CODE
EST
TEACHING
SCHEME
TH (1)
Max
Min
EXAMINATION SCHEME
PR (4)
OR (8)
Max
Min
Max
Min
TW (9)
Max
Min
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
17401
01
--
02
01
50*#
20
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
SME
SLE
HYC
17450
17451
17452
02
03
03
----
02
04
02
02
03
03
50
100
100
20
40
40
25#
50#
50#
10
20
20
----
----
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
10
10
FTS
17453
03
--
02
03
100
40
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
AEM
17454
03
--
--
03
100
40
--
--
--
--
--
--
MTG
17047
--
--
04
--
--
--
50#
20
--
--
[email protected]
20
TOTAL
15
--
16
--
500
--
175
--
--
--
175
--
SW
(17400)
50
50
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 31 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks: 900
@ - Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, β – Common to Mechanical &
Chemical Engineering Groups, *# - On Line Theory Examination.
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as
sessional work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR, TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
25 @
75
*# Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principles
Concept
Fact
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Credit, Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources
 Definition
 Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources
 General description of forest resources
 Functions and benefits of forest resources
 Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber extraction,
Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources
 Hydrosphere: Different sources of water
 Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water
 Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
 Categories of mineral resources
 Basics of mining activities
 Mine safety
 Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:
 Food for all
 Effects of modern agriculture
 World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06
17401 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Agriculture Engineering
Course code : AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Soil Mechanics
Subject Code : 17450
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
02
---
02
02
50
25 #
---
25 @
100
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Every engineering structure such as building, bridges, dams, towers, monuments etc. are
supported by soil and rock the stability of these structures depends upon behaviors of soil and
capacity of soil to carry loads under different environmental conditions. The soil and rocks are also
used as construction materials for embankments, roads, dams, mud walls etc.
Thus it becomes mandatory to learn this subject which includes knowledge of physical
properties, classification of soil, its behavior and various techniques to improve soil properties as
well as agricultural structures viz. farm stead’s, poultry houses, dairy barns, water supply system
and sanitations, grain storage structures and silos.
Objectives:
The student will be able to,
1. Explain soil as three phase system and establish relationships between soil properties.
2. To determine properties of soil by standard tests, procedures and plot particle size
distribution curves.
3. Determine permeability by constant head and falling head tests by using Darcy’s law.
4. Obtained Optimum Moisture Content and Maximum Dry Density for any soil samples by
performing Proctor compaction tests.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17450 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Identify the type of Rock and soil through determination of physical properties
and stabilization techniques during construction of foundation of structure. To
handle situation where marshy land, loose soil and soil of low bearing is
available.
Procedure
Establish
functional
relationship
between
properties
of Soil.
Sketches of
folds, faults
and Joints.
Determine the
permeability of
Soil applying
Darcy’s Law by
Constant head &
falling head Test
Determin
e Index
Propertie
s of Soil
using I.
S. Code
methods
and
classify
the Soil.
Performing Proctor
test to obtain OMC &
MDD and improve
Soil properties through
soil stabilization
methods. Calculate
bearing Capacity of
Soil by I.S. Code
Method.
Seepage, Head,
Gradient, MDD,
OMC,
Consolidation
shear strength,
Bearing Capacity
stabilization.
Concept
Soil as
three phase
System,
formation
of Soils.
Fact
Soil, Density, Specific gravity, Stress, Fold, Faults, permeability, compaction,
stabilization.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Voids ratio,
porosity
Degree of
Saturation,
particle size
distribution,
Fold, Faults,
Joints.
8
17450 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Chapter
01
02
03
04
Name of the topic
Overview of Soil Mechanics
1.1 Definition of soil and introduction to soil formation.
1.2 Importance of soil in Civil Engineering as construction
material and as Foundation material.
1.3 Field applications of soil mechanics-for foundation design,
pavement design, design of earth retaining structures, design of
earthen dams.
1.4 Various constituents of soil and their importance, soil as
medium of plant growth. Major soils of India.
Basic soil properties
2.1 Composition of soil, soil as three phase system, weight
relationships, volume relationship, soil structure, factors
affecting soil structure, bulk density, particle density of soil,
soil consistency, Porosity, voids ratio, inter relationships,
Water content, Degree of saturation, specific gravity,
Available soil moisture, Field capacity, Permanent wilting
percentage, Drainable porosity. Wilting point, ultimate wilting
and wilting range. Relationships between soil properties.
2.2 Soil moisture content, methods of soil moisture content
determinations.
2.3 Retention of soil moisture, maximum retentive capacity,
2.4 Experimental determination of water content, unit weight,
specific gravity.
2.5 Consistency of clay soils, stages of consistency, Atterbergs
limit of consistency, plasticity index, determination of liquid
limit, plastic limit, shrinkage limit.
2.6 Numerical problems on above topic
Soil classification
3.1 Need for soil classification, Criteria for classification, Grain
size classification, classification based on plasticity, symbols
and graphical representation.
3.2 Textural classification of soils.
3.3 Mechanical analysis, Particle size distribution curve, Effective
diameter of soil, Uniformity coefficient, coefficient of
curvature.
Permeability, seepage and capillarity
4.1 Soil moisture - Modes of soil moisture occurrence, adsorbed
water, capillary water and free water. Darcy’s law, Coefficient
of permeability, Infiltration and infiltration rate, soil air and
aeration. Soil temperature, Soil tilth and its importance.
4.2 Flow of water through soil - permeability, factors affecting
permeability, Determination of permeability (Constant head
and falling head) test, values of permeability for different
soils.
4.3 Capillary phenomenon in soils.
4.4 Shrinkage and swelling in soils.
4.5 Seepage through earthen structures, seepage forces, phreatic
line, flow lines, equipotential lines, flow net, characteristics of
flow net, quick sand, application of flow net.(no numerical.)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
Hours
Marks
04
06
12
16
04
06
08
14
17450 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Soil Compaction and stabilization
5.1 Compaction phenomenon, Purpose, field application, standard
Proctor test, modified Procter test, compaction curve and
factors affecting compaction, Field methods of compaction.
5.2 Soil stabilization concept, necessity, Introduction to methods
of stabilization, CBR test.
Total
05
04
08
32
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Select appropriate method for determining field capacity
2. Use various methods to to decide quality of soil
Motor Skills:
1. Ability to perform various tests on soil accurately
2. Ability to measure various quantities like Specific gravity, Soil permeability etc.
List of Experiments
1. Determination of water content by oven drying method.
2. Determination of specific gravity by pycnometer method.
3. Mechanical analysis of soil for particle distribution.
4. Determination of liquid limit and plastic limit.
5. Determination of field capacity and unit weight by core cutter method.
6. Determination of field capacity, voids ratio and unit weight by sand replacement method.
7. Determination of soil permeability by constant head permeameter.
8. Determination of soil permeability by falling head permeameter.
9. Determination of Optimum Moisture Content and Maximum Dry Density by standard
proctor test.
Reference:
Books:
Sr.
Title
No
Basic and Applied Soil
1
Mechanics
Author
Gopal Ranjan and
A.S.R. Rao
Publisher
New Age International
Publisher
New Age International
Publisher
2
Geotechnical Engineering
C. Venkatramaiah
3
Soil Mechanics
B. C. Punmia
C. Jamanadas and Company
4
Soil Mechanics
Dr. S. B. Sehgal
CBS Publisher and
Distributor
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17450 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Agriculture Engineering
Course Code : AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Surveying & Levelling
Subject Code : 17451
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Diploma holders in Agricultural Engineering are vitally engaged in the field work rather
than administration and management. In order to take up this job satisfactorily and skill fully, he
must study the subject of basic importance like surveying. In the field he has to handle the
surveying equipments like compass, plane table, optical squares, cross staff and dumpy level etc.
and take readings, make the calculations and prepare the drawings.
For doing so he should be equipped with the knowledge of handling the surveying
equipments and prepare the drawings and reports.
Objectives:
The student will be able to,
1. Understand the principles and methods of different types of surveys.
2. Use the equipments on the field, note the readings
3. To make the calculations using the data collected
4. Prepare the drawings and reports
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17451 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
LEARNING STRUCTURE:
Application
Procedure
Principles
Determining relative position various stations on ground and plotting plans/maps
Ranging
Chaining
Working
from
Whole to
part
Plane and
Concepts Geodetic
survey
Facts
Geogra
phical
maps
Setting
Right
Angle
Measurem
ent in
straight
and
horizontal
direction
Horizontal
Projection
Chain,
Tape
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Measuring
Bearing and
Traversing
Triang
ulation
Right
angle,
Positive
and
negative
areas
Crossstaff,
Optica
l
square
Locating and
plotting the
stations
simultaneous
ly
12
Parallelism
Open and
closed
traversing
Meridian,
Bearing,
Local
attraction
Included
angle
Prismati
c
compass
Carry out the
leveling work
Centering
Leveling,
Orientation
Radiation
Intersection
Plane table
and
accessories
Horizontal
line of
sight
Level
surface
and level
line,
Bench
mark
Leveling
instrument
and Leveling
staff
17451 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Chapter Name of the topic
Hours
Basics of Surveying
1.1 Definition of surveying
1.2 Object of surveying
01
1.3 Types of survey
03
1.4 Classification of surveying-plane and Geodetic
1.5 Principles of surveying.
1.6 Uses of surveying.
Linear Measurements
2.1 Study of metric chain: 20m &30m, its components
2.2 Study of tape-Types of tapes - linen, metallic, steel and invar.
2.3 Instruments for marking stations- pegs, arrows, ranging rods
viz. specifications, material used for construction and
02
06
applications.
2.4 Chaining- chaining on plain and on sloping ground.
2.5 Errors in chaining errors due to incorrect length of chain,
correction in length and area
2.6 Study of scales-plain, vernier and diagonal.
Chain and Cross Staff Survey
3.1 Chain triangulation, Definitions of survey stations, Base line,
Check line, Tie line, Well-conditioned triangle, Selection of
survey stations.
3.2 Offsets- Perpendicular and Oblique offsets. Instruments used
for setting out right angles - Open cross staff and Optical
03
square.
06
3.3 Chain and Cross staff survey - Calculation of area from
recorded observations in field books and plan.
3.4 Obstacles in chaining and methods to overcome obstacles.
3.5 Conventional signs on survey maps for- Cutting, Embankment,
Marshy land, Road, Railway, River, Bridge, Tunnel, Fencing,
Transmission line, Cultivated land, Orchard, Places of worship
Chain and Compass Survey
4.1 Prismatic Compass - Principle, components, construction and
use.
4.2 Bearing of a line - True meridian, arbitrary meridian and
magnetic meridian. Whole circle and quadrantal system,
reduced bearings, fore bearing and back bearing. Conversion
of bearings, calculations of included angles from bearings.
04
08
4.3 Local attraction-errors due to local attraction, precautions to be
taken to avoid local attraction, corrections of bearings affected
by local attraction, numerical problems, magnetic declination,
dip of needle.
4.4 Traversing with chain and compass, different methods of
plotting the traverse, closing error, graphical adjustment of
closing error by Bow ditch’s rule.
Leveling
5.1 Definitions - Level surface, horizontal line, vertical line, datum
05
surface, reduced level, bench mark, and its types-GTS,
12
permanent, arbitrary, and temporary.
5.2 Dumpy level - components, temporary adjustments of level,
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
Marks
08
12
14
16
24
17451 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
06
07
08
‘G’ Scheme
line of sight, line of collimation, axis of bubble tube, fore sight,
back sight, intermediate sight, change point, height of
collimation, fundamental axis and their relationships.
5.3 Study and use of auto level.
5.4 Levelling staff-telescope and folding type.
5.5 Calculation of reduced levels, arithmetic check, examples by
plane of collimation method and rise and fall method,
computations of missing reading, obstacles in leveling,
numerical problems.
5.6 Classification of leveling - Simple levelling, differential
levelling, fly leveling, profile levelling and cross sectioning,
check levelling. Sources of errors in levelling-precautions to be
taken to eliminate the same.
Contouring
6.1 Definitions – Contour, contour interval, horizontal equivalent.
6.2 Characteristics of contour lines.
6.3 Interpolation of contours – Direct and Indirect method of
locating contours.
6.4 Uses of contour map, establishing grade contours.
Plane table survey
7.1 Principles of plane table survey, accessories used in plane table
survey.
7.2 Setting up of plane table- centering, levelling, orientation by
magnetic needle and back sighting.
7.3 Methods of plane table surveying-radiation, intersection and
traversing.
7.4 Merits and demerits of plane table surveying, situations where
plane table survey is preferred.
Minor Instruments
8.1 Polar planimeter- construction and use, Numerical problems on
calculation of area.
8.2 Digital planimeter, study and use.
8.3 Total Station study and Use
TOTAL
04
08
05
12
04
06
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:





Identify the different instruments for linear measurement and leveling.
Record and observe necessary observations with the survey instruments.
Select various types of survey instruments.
Identify the errors of the survey instruments.
Reading and Interpretation of drawing (plans/maps)
Motor Skills:
 Measure distances, Bearings and finding Reduced Levels with survey instruments.
 Recording of survey field data collected in Field Book and Leveling Book.
 Prepare drawing (plans/maps) using survey data.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
17451 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Practicals:
(All practicals to be booking in field book.)
1. Study and use of chain (20 m, 30m) Metallic and steel tapes, Ranging rods, pegs and
arrows.
2. Direct and Indirect ranging, study and use of line ranger, Measurement of distances with
chain and tape.
3. Study and use of open cross staff and optical square, measurement of area of five sided
traverse by chain and cross staff survey.
4. Running a survey line to locate adjacent objects such building, road, trees, electric poles
etc. by taking offsets with open cross staff / optical square. Booking field notes.
5. Study and use of Prismatic compass – components, their functions, adjustments,
Observing fore bearings and back bearing of lines, calculation of included angles.
6. Observing fore bearing and back bearing of a Five sided closed traverse, identifying the
stations affected by local attraction and calculation of corrected bearings.
7. Study and use of Dumpy level, components, temporary adjustments and study of leveling
staff.
8. Carrying out differential leveling, recording the reading in a level field book and
calculation of Reduced Levels, (H. I. Method) also applying arithmetic check.
9. Carrying out differential levelling, Calculation of reduced Levels (rise and fall method)
also applying arithmetic checks.
10. Fly levelling – carrying bench mark from one point to another point.
11. Study and use of auto level – temporary adjustments, taking staff readings.
12. Contouring by direct / indirect method.
13. Setting of contours by level and tube and ‘A’frame in the field.
14. Measurement of area irregular figure by polar planimeter
15. Measurement of area irregular figure by Digital planimeter.
16. Study and use of plane table and its accessories, temporary adjustments of plane table.
Locating points by method of radiation.
17. Locating details by the method of intersection and traversing. Orientation of plane table by
back sighting and magnetic meridian.
List of Projects
1. Chain and compass traverse survey- a closed traverse of minimum 5 sides enclosing a
building, calculation of included angles and corrected bearings, locating details and
plotting on A1 size imperial drawing sheet.
2. Profile levelling and cross-sectioning- Running a base line 300M. Length with cross
section at every 30m. Length of crossing may be 20m on either side with staff reading @
10m.interval. Spot levels should be taken at every 10m along the base line. Plotting of Lsection and minimum of 3 cross-sections on A1 size imperial drawing sheet.
3. Block contouring - A block of 100 m X 100 m with spot levels @ 10 m X 10 m and
plotting the contours with suitable contour interval by interpolation on A1 size imperial
drawing sheet.
4. Plane table traversing- running a minimum Five sided traverse enclosing a building using
method of traversing. Locating details of building, poles etc. by radiation and intersection
method. Plotting the traverse with details on A1 size imperial drawing sheet.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
17451 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Reference:
Books:
Sr.
No
1
2
3
4
Title
Author
Publisher
Surveying and Levelling Vol. 1 &
Vol. 2
Surveying and Levelling Vol. 1 &
Vol. 2
Surveying and Levelling Vol. 1 &
Vol. 2
T. P. Kanetkar and S.V.
Kulkarni
S. K. Duggal
Tata McGraw Hill
Surveying and Levelling
N. N. Basak
Tata McGraw Hill
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Dr. B.C. Punmia
16
Pune Vidyarthi Griha
Prakashan
Laxmi Publication
New Delhi.
17451 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Agriculture Engineering
Course Code : AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Hydraulics
Subject Code : 17452
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Now a days the fluid mechanics find wide applications in many situations directly or
indirectly. Agricultural engineers are expected to have the knowledge and the understanding of the
basic principles and concepts of fluid mechanics both in static and dynamic conditions. This is to
enable them to analyse and design systems in which fluid is the working medium.
Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Explain the working of mechanical gauges.
2. Explain continuity equation and Bernoulli’s equation.
3. Know types of flow of fluids and practical applications.
4. Estimate the discharge through orifices, mouth pieces, notches & weirs.
5. Definition of flow through pipes, losses of head due to friction.
6. Flow through open channel, velocity of flow in open channel.
7. Select the type and size of the pump as per the requirements
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17452 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principle
Concept
Facts
Enable students to use the principles of hydraulics in solving problems related t
Hydrology, Water supply, Bridge, Irrigation, and Sanitary Engineering
Total
Hydrostatic
Pressure
Pressure & Its
Measurement
Flow
Measurement
Simple
Hydraulics
Machines
Flow Through
Open Channel
Flow Through
Pipe
Physical
Properties
Fluids
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Fundamental
of Fluid Flow
18
17452 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Properties of Fluids
1.1 Introduction:
Fluid; Real Fluid, Ideal Fluid, Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulics,
Hydrostatics, Hydro kinematics and Hydrodynamics
1.2 Properties of Fluids
Properties of fluids, mass density, weight density, specific volume,
specific gravity, compressibility, vapour pressure, cohesion and adhesion,
surface tension, capillarity, viscosity, types of viscosity, classification of
fluids, Problems.
Topics 2: Pressure and Its Measurement
Pressure units , atmospheric pressure, gauge pressure, vacuum pressure,
absolute pressure, pressure vary with depth and pressure head, pressure head
in terms of equivalent liquid column, Pascal’s law of transmissibility, proof,
applications, hydraulic press, hydraulic jack, Pressure device, Piezometer
tubes, U-tube manometers (simple and differential) problems.
Mechanical pressure gauges: Bourdon’s tube, diaphragm and dead weight
pressure gauges. Pressure on plane surfaces, Total pressure, centre of
pressure, depth of centre of pressure, fluid pressure on plane surfaces
immerse in liquid, vertically and inclined simple problems.
Topics 3: Flow of Fluids
2.1 Flow of Fluids
Types of fluid flow, steady, unsteady , uniform and nonuniform, laminar,
turbulent, definitions only, mean velocity of flow and discharge, units,
Equation of continuity of flow, Hydraulic energy and total head,
Bernoulli’s theorem (statement only), limitations , practical applications,
problems, Venturimeter, simple problems, Orifice meter, comparison
with Venturimeter, Pitot, simple problems.
2.2 Orifices, Mouth Pieces, Notches & Weirs
Orifice , definition, types of orifices , Flow through small orifice, head
causing flow, Vena-contracta, velocity and discharge, hydraulic
coefficients and its relationship, problems, Mouth piece - definition,
types, discharge through mouth piece, Notches, definition, types,
discharge through rectangular & triangular notches, Advantages of Vnotch over rectangular notch, Weir, classification, difference between
notch and weir.
Topics 4: Flow Through Pipes
4.1 Loss of head due to friction, Darcy-Weisbach Equation Friction factor,
relative roughness. Moody’s diagram and its use. Common range of
friction factor for different types of pipe material.
4.2 Minor loss of head in pipe flow- loss of head due to sudden Contraction,
sudden expansion, gradual contraction & expansion, at entrance and exit
of pipe in various pipe fittings. Pipes in series and parallel Equivalent
pipe – Dupuit’s equation
4.3 Hydraulic gradient line and Energy gradient line, Siphon pipe. Water
hammer in pipes – cause effects and remedial measures Use of
Nomograms for design of water distribution system. Numerical
Problems.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
Hours
Marks
05
10
06
14
10
20
08
16
17452 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Topics 5: Flow Through Open Channels
5.1 Types of channels- artificial & natural, purposes of artificial channel,
Different shapes of artificial channels Geometrical properties of channel
section - wetted area, wetted Perimeter, hydraulics radius Prismatic
channel sections, steady- uniform flow through prismatic channel section.
5.2 Chezy’s equation and Manning’s equation for calculation of discharge
through an open channel, common range of values of Chezy’s constants
and Manning’s constant of different types of channel surfaces. Most
economical channel section, conditions for most economical channel
sections.
5.3 Froud’s number and its significance. Critical, sub-critical and
supercritical flow in channel Hydraulic jump and its occurrence in field,
uses of hydraulic jump. Numerical Problems.
Topics 6: Agricultural Pumps
6.1 Centrifugal Pumps
Centrifugal pumps, description and working, Types of casings and
impellers, Bearing housing , Stuffing boxes and glands, Drives for
centrifugal pumps, operation of centrifugal pumps, priming, use of foot
valve and strainers, Layout and accessories, Maximum height of suction,
Multistage pumps, Maintenance and repair of centrifugal pumps, causes
of vibration trouble and remedies, Problems on discharge power and
efficiency, Selection of pump for given speed and discharge
specifications, no problems.
6.2 Reciprocating Pumps
Reciprocating pumps , classifications , working of single acting and
double acting reciprocating pump , plunger and piston pumps , discharge
of reciprocating pump , theoretical power required , coefficient of
discharge , slip , negative slip , indicator diagram , separation or
cavitations , air vessel , simple problems.
Special pumps , jet pumps , Turbine pumps , Submersible pumps ,
Working principles, no problems
6.3 Submersible Pumps: description and working , Types of casings and
impellers
Total
08
16
11
24
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
a. Interpret test results
b. Calculate quantities of parameters
c. Draw graphs
Motor Skills:
a. Measure different parameters accurately
b. Adjust levels by operating valves
List of Practicals:
1. Measurements of pressure and pressure head by Piezometer, U-tube manometer
2. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem
3. Reynolds experiment to study types of flow
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
17452 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Determination of Minor losses in pipes (any two)
5. Demonstration of Hydraulic jump
7. Determination of coefficient of discharge for given rectangular or triangular notch.
8. Determination of coefficient of discharge for a given Venturimeter.
9. Determination of hydraulic coefficients for sharp edge orifice
10. Study of a model of centrifugal and reciprocating pump.
11. Use of characteristic curves/ nomograms /charts / catalogs from manufactures for
selection of pump for the designed discharge and head (Refer IS: 9694)
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Dr. P. N. Modi &
Dr. S. M. Seth
Hydraulics & Fluids Mechanics
Standard Book House,
Dehli
S. Chand & Company
Ltd. New Delhi
Metropolitan Book Co.
Private Ltd. New Delhi
02
R. S. Khurmi
A Text Book of Hydraulics, Fluids
Mechanics Hydraulics Machines
03
Dr. Jagdish Lal
Fluids Mechanics Hydraulics
04
Dr. R. K. Bansal
Fluids Mechanics & hydraulic
structures
Laxmi Publcation
05
A.M. Michael & S.D.
Khepar
Water wells & pump Engineering
Tata McGraw Hill, Delhi
06
S. K. Likhi
Hydarulics Laboratory
Manual
T.T.T.I. Chandhigrah
2. IS, BIS and International Codes:
A) Refer IS: 9694 for selection pumps
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
17452 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Agriculture Engineering
Course Code : AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Farm Power and Tractor Systems
Subject Code : 17453
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Diploma holders in agricultural Engineering should have the knowledge of different sources
of power available at farms for driving the farm machinery and equipment. I.C. Engines and tractors
are the primary sources of power available on farms.
The aim of introducing this subject is to equip them with the knowledge of both conventional
and non-conventional sources of Power. The contents of this subject have been developed to cater
above mentioned needs.
Objectives: The students should be able to:
1. Know the Sources of farm power
2. Able to classify of IC engines,
3. Knows function of the engine, details of construction and maintenance requirements of
engine and hence able to look after of the maintenance of engine
4. Know Air cleaning, Fuel, Cooling, Lubrication, Valves, Ignition and Governor systems.
5. Select Tractor or farm equipment as per requirements
6.
Know all the systems of tractor MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17453 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principle
Concept
Facts
Use of I. C. Engines in farm equipments, Us eof tractor for farming
activities, maintenance of tractors and farm equipment.
Acceleration, Speed control, Braking, Maintenance schedules,
Trouble shooting
Systems in Tractors anf Farm Equipments such as Ignition system,
Braking system, Lubricating system, Cooling system, Transmission
sytem
Farm Power, I. C. Engine, Petrol Engine and Diesel Engine, Tractor,
Ignition,
Sources of Farm Power, Tractors, I C Engines, I C Engine and Tractor
Systems
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17453 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic
Hours Marks
1. Sources of Farm Power
Classification of sources of farm power, The characteristics, advantages and
disadvantages of different sources of power, Classification of biogas plants,
Different components of biogas plants, Floating drum type biogas plant, Fixed
04
08
06
10
08
16
drum type biogas plant, Pre-requisites of biogas system, Difference between
floating gas holder type & fixed drum type biogas plant, Ways of collection of
solar radiations, Classification of wind mills, Performance of wind mills.
2. I. C. Engine
Different types heat engines, Classification internal combustion engine in
different ways, Different parts of I. C. engine components & their construction,
Terms related to I. C. engines, Solved Problems, Working of four stroke cycle
engine, Working of two stroke cycle engine, Difference between two stroke and
four stroke engine, Difference between Diesel Engine and Petrol Engine.
3. I. C. Engine Systems
3.1 Valves, Firing Order & Firing Interval
Different parts in Valve operating system, The different valve arrangements
used in the engines, Large size flywheel for single cylinder engines, Poor
balance of single cylinder engines, Valve operating mechanism, Valve
Clearance, Valve timing diagram, Firing Order (F.O.), Firing Interval (F.I.)
3.2 Ignition System of Tractor
Spark ignition system, Battery ignition system, Components battery ignition
system, Capacity of Battery, Battery charging, Magneto ignition system
with neat diagram, Difference in Battery Ignition and Magneto Ignition,
Effect of ignition advance and ignition retard, Need of spark advance and
retard mechanism.
3.3 Governors & Methods of Governing
Need of governor, Governing Systems, Hit & Miss System, Throttle
System, Difference between Hit & Miss System and Throttle System of
governing, Construction and working of Centrifugal Governor (Watt
governor) and Pneumatic Governor, Governor Regulation, Governor
Hunting, Difference between Fly wheel and Governor.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17453 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. I. C. ENGINE SUPPORTING SYSTEMS
4.1 Air Cleaning System of I.C. Engine
Need of air cleaning system, Different types of air cleaners, Oil soaked
element type of air cleaner, Dry type air cleaner, Oil bath type of air
cleaner Pre- cleaner.
4.2 Fuel System of I.C. Engine
Requirements of a diesel fuel supply and injection mechanism, Systems of
fuel injection (Air injection method AND Direct or Solid injection
method), Fuel supply system in spark ignition system, Carburetor and its
functions, Functions of carburetor, working of simple carburetor,
components of carburetor and their function, Fuel supply system in diesel
engine, Turbocharger.
4.3 Cooling System
Purpose of Cooling, Air cooling, Water cooling its types, components &
functions
4.4 Lubrication System of I.C. Engine
Needs of lubrication, Theory of lubrication, Classification of lubricants,
Functions of engine oils, Types of lubrication systems, Splash Lubrication
System, Pressure/Forced feed lubrication system, Main Parts of Lubrication
System, Crank Case Ventilation.
08
18
5. Tractor
Introduction, Classification of tractor and adoptability. Factors affecting
selection of Tractor. General idea about different makes, models, in different
H.P. ranges of tractors.
02
06
6. Study of transmission systems
6.1. Clutch
Main functions of clutch, Essential features of clutch, Principle of operation
of clutch, Different types of clutch, Working of single plate clutch system.
Different parts of clutch system, Working of duel plate clutch system, Clutch
adjustment, Trouble shootings.
6.2 Gear Box
Need of gear box in tractors, Principle of gearing, Different types of gear
box available on tractors, Sliding mesh gear box, Constant mesh gear box,
Synchromesh gear box, Trouble shootings.
6.3 Differential and Final Drive
Necessity and function of differential unit in a tractor, Principle of
operation of differential unit, Operational details of differential unit,
Transmission efficiency of differential. Differential lock. Final drive
mechanism.
10
18
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17453 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
7. Study of Supporting systems of tractor
7.1 Brakes
Classification of brakes, Internal expanding shoe brake, Brake pedal free
play, External contracting shoe brake, Disc brakes, Principle of operation of
hydraulic brake, Working of hydraulic brake system.
7.2 Steering Geometry
Qualities of steering system, Ackerman steering, Steering geometry, Main
08
18
02
06
48
100
parts of steering system, Working of steering system, Steering ratio, Power
Steering.
7.3 Hydraulic System
Merits of hydraulic system over mechanical system, Basic characteristics of
fluids, basic components of hydraulic system. Working of hydraulic system,
Types of hydraulic system, Position control, Draft control, Mixed control
8. Tractor Power Outlets
Hitching of implements to tractor, Power Take Off (PTO) shaft. Different
types of PTO, Belt pulley.
Total
Practicals:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Identify various parts of I. C. Engines and know their functions.
2. Operate the I. C. Engine under various conditions which occur on the farm.
3. Identify tractor parts and know their functions.
4. Know how to operate tractor as per the requirement on the farming jobs.
Motor Skills:
1. Ability to draw sketches of the parts of I. C. Engine and Tractor
2. Operate the tractor under different conditions for its appropriate use on farm
3. Ability to identify faults in I. C. Engines/tractors
4. Able to identify the places for lubrication and lubricate the machines efficiently and
effectively
List of Practicals:
1. Demonstration of different systems of an IC engine; Students to identify Engine parts and
functions, working principles etc.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17453 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2. Operation of two and four stroke engines.
3. Demonstration of Valve system, valve timing diagram and valve setting procedure.
4. Demonstration fuel system and air cleaning system of IC engine and familiarization with
its parts/components, students to identify functions
5. Demonstration of cooling system of tractor engine and familiarization with its
parts/components.
6. Demonstration of lubrication of tractor engine and familiarization with its
parts/components.
7. Introduction to transmission system and components
8. Demonstration of clutch system and trouble shooting.
9. Demonstration of different types of gear box, differential and final drive system and
trouble shooting.
10. Demonstration of brake systems and trouble shooting.
11. Study hydraulic system in tractor.
12. Visit to Tractor repair workshop & spare part agencies.
List of Assignments:
Collection of information broacher, service manual/Operators manual from various dealers
of the different makes of the Tractor companies and study the specifications of the same.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
1
SC. Jain &
CR.Rai
Farm tractor maintenance &
repair second Reprint, 1999
2
S. B. Patil
Farm Power, First Reprint, 2011
3
AM Michael and
TP Ojha
4
Jagdiswar Sahay
5
JB Liljedahl & et
al.
6
C. P. Nakra
Principles of Agril. Engineering
Vol-I 2nd Edn
Elements of Agril. Engineering,
- Fourth Edition 2004
Tractor and their power unit, 4
authors books (1st Edition, 1997)
Farm machines & Equipment
Edition 1990.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
Standard Publishers Distributors,
New Delhi
Aditi Prakashan, At/Po: Bhadole,
Dist: Kolhapur-416 112,
Jain brothers, 16/873 East Park Road
Karol Bagh, New Delhi 110005
Standard publishers Distributors,
New Delhi
CBS Publishers and Distributors,
New Delhi
Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 1962, Nai
Sarak Delhi.
17453 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Diploma in Agricultural Engineering
Course Code
: AU
Semester/Year
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Agricultural Economics and Business Management
Subject Code
: 17454
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
--
03
100
--
--
--
100
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Seasonal Work (SW).
Rationale:
The subject is very important to understand Economics of Agriculture and also the
Agricultural Business aspects to prepare the students for agri business. This deals with importance
of Agriculture in India’s Economy. It deals with all the aspects of the business such as Accounting,
Marketing, Finance, Planning, and Organisation.
Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Know all aspects of Agricultural Business.
2. Understand the organisation structure.
3. Able to select the financial mode for business operation.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17454 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Agribusiness : An Overview
1) Meaning and definition
2) System of Agribusiness
a) Agricultural Input Sector
b) Production Sector
c) Processing Manufacturing Sector
d) Distribution- Marketing Sector
3) Structural Agribusiness
Breakdown of the Input, Farm & Product Market Sector
a) Farm Supplies
 Seed
 Fertilizer & Chemicals
 Machinery & Equipments
 Petroleum
 Transportation
 Feed
 Others
b) Farming
 Types of farming: Individual, Contractual
and Community Farming,
c) Processing
 Industrial
 Food: Supermarkets, Moll, Restaurants,
Institutions
 Retail
 Other
Topic 2. Functions of Management :
 Planning
1. Definition of Planning
2. Function of Planning
3. a. Types of Plans
b. Planning Process
 Purpose
 Objectives
 Policies
 Procedure
 Practices
c. Characteristics of Sound Plan
d. Steps in Planning
 Gathering facts
 Analyzing the Facts
 Forecasting Change
 Setting Goals & Results
 Organizing
 Meaning
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
Hours Marks
08
20
20
40
17454 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13



Topic



‘G’ Scheme
 Legal Structure
a. The sole Proprietorship
 Creating a sole Proprietorship
 Advantages & disadvantages
b. The Partnership
 Types of Partnerships
 Advantages and Disadvantages
c. The Corporation
 Types of Corporation
 Characteristics of Corporation
(Limited, Liability, Continuity of Operation, Tax
Aspects, Estate Planning)
d. Co-operative Society
e. Govt. Sector
Directing:
 Meaning
 Objectives
a) Personal Management
b) Finding or Recruiting People
c) Selecting the right person
d) Job Orientation
e) Compensation & Fringe Benefits
f) Evaluating Performance
g) Training & Development
h) Promotion & Advancement
i) Termination & dismissal
Motivating
 Meaning
 Different Ideas for Managing & Motivating
People
a) Masllow’s Need Hierarchy
b) Motivators & Hygienic Factors
Meaning & Concept of Controlling, Ordering, Leading,
Supervision, Communication
3 Financial management of Agribusiness
Importance of financial statement
Balance sheet and Income statement
Meaning, concept ,importance, preparation of balance and income
statement,
Preparation of income statement and profit and loss statement
Meaning, concepts and calculation of profit and loss, Study of
different financial ratios : Capital turn over ratio, Rate of return on
investment, Net farm income, Net return to total capital
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
08
16
17454 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Topic: 4 Agro - based Industries.
 Importance, need, Classification and types of Agro-based
Industries.
 Study of sugar industry, cotton industry, Dal Mills, Rice Mills and
Fruit and Vegetable Processing industry.
 Study of procedures and constraints in Agro industry.
 Marketing in Agro based Industries:
 Meaning of marketing, definition, concepts and difference between
Marketing and Selling,
 Market cost, Price Spread, Market Margin and Marketing
efficiency.
 Study of Future and e - Marketing
 Marketing Mix
 4 P’s of Marketing
 Market Segmentation :Meaning Role and Methods
 Price Policy: Meaning, objectives, pricing methods and prices at
various stages.
Total
12
24
48
100
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
1
V.P.S. Arora
2
S. Subha Reddy and
P.Raghu Ram
3
Rais Ahmad
4
J. Price Gittinger
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Agribusiness Management
Conceptual Overvide
Agricultural Finance and
Management
Agribusiness and Rural
Management
Economics Analysis of
Agricultural Projects
31
Publisher
Manual of arora
Oxfordand and IBH
Publishing, New Delhi
Mittal Publishing, New
Delhi
Manual of Gittinger
17454 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Agriculture Engineering
Course Code : AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Manufacturing Technology
Subject Code : 17047
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
04
--
--
50#
--
[email protected]
100
Rationale:
Manufacturing process is a basic technology course for mechanical engineering. It enhances
the skills which the students have acquired in workshop practice. The technician should be
introduced to the basic processes of manufacturing. The course will help the student to get
familiarize with working principles and operations like with various patterns, molding, casting,
fabrication, turning, drilling, brazing etc.
The basic knowledge of these processes will be helpful to select most suitable processes for
conversion of raw material into finished product as per the requirement.
General Objectives:
Student will be able to develop:

Know and identify basic manufacturing processes for manufacturing different
components.

Operate and control different machine tools and equipments.

Manufacture job as per specified dimension.

Inspect the job.

Adopt the safety practices.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17047 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory: Theory to be taught during practical hours.
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: PATTERN MAKING
1.1 Pattern making materials (wood, plastics, rubbers, plasters, waxes)
1.2 Types of patterns:
Single piece pattern, Split pattern, Match plate pattern, Sweep pattern, Skeleton pattern
1.3 Pattern making allowances:
Shrinkage, draft, machining, distortion, rapping
1.4 Core prints:
Horizontal, vertical, hanging, balancing, wing Colour coding for patterns and core boxes.
Topic 2: MOULDING
2.1 Moulding Sand
2.2 Types: Green, Dry, Loam, Facing, Backing, System, parting, Core sand
2.3 Properties of Moulding sand
2.4 Moulding Processes: Green sand, Dry sand, Machine and Shell Moulding
Topic 3: CASTING
3.1 Casting Principle and operation
3.2 Die casting methods: Hot chamber die casting method, Cold chamber die casting method
3.3 Melting furnace for ferrous metals: Cupola furnace: Construction and operation, zones,
capacity, Temperature range
3.3 Melting furnace for non ferrous metals
3.4 Electric furnace for steel: Direct arc furnace, High frequency induction furnace
3.5 Defects in casting: Causes and remedies, inspection & testing of casting
Topic 4: FABRICATION
4.1 Classification.
4.2 Arc welding: Principle, Applications, Shielded metal arc welding, Sub-merged arc welding
4.3 TIG/MIG Welding
4.4 Resistance welding: Spot, Projection, Seam, Percussion
4.5 Gas welding: Techniques, Types of flames, Welding defects.
1.6 Soldering and Brazing: Types, Principle and Application
Topic 5: METAL TURNING PROCESS ( LATHE MACHINE )
5.1 Types of lathes: Light duty, Medium duty and Heavy duty geared lathe, CNC lathe
5.2 Specifications
5.3 Basic parts and their functions
5.4 Operations and tools – Turning, parting off, Knurling, facing, Boring, drilling, threading, step
turning, taper turning
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
 To develop the skill of manufacturing patterns and their allowances.
 To know and identified different molding methods for different casting methods.
 To understand the molding processes.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17047 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Motor Skills:
 To prepare a pattern making job for casting and moulding.
 To operate lathe machine and to know about speed, feed, depth of cut and to perform
different turning operations.
 To fabricate component by using welding.
List of Practicals:
1. One simple wooden and thermocole Pattern Job of maximum 4 students per group, each
group should make different type of pattern.
2. One turning job on lathe containing the operations like facing, plain turning, step turning,
grooving, chamfering.
3. Demonstration and assignment on types of molding sands.
4. One composite welding job having two different joints. With preparation of joints (Batch
of four students per job.)
5. Industrial Visit to TIG / MIG welding setup and write report
6. Demonstration on molding processes.
List of Assignments:
 Workshop diary must be maintained by the instructor/lecturer during practical sessions
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
S. K. Hajra Chaudary,
1
Bose, Roy
Title
Publisher
Elements of workshop Technology Volume I & II
Elements of workshop Technology Volume I & II
Processes and Design for
Manufacturing
Production Technology - Volume I
& II
Media Promoters and
Publishers limited
2
B.S. Raghuvanshi
--
3
D. L. Wakyl
4
O. P. Khanna and Lal
5
P. L. Jain
Principles of Foundry Technology
--
6
W.A.J. Chapman
Workshop Technology – Volume I , II
& III
--
Prentice Hall
--
7. CDs, PPTs Etc.:
 Various PPT’s and Transparencies related practical.
8. IS, BIS and International Codes:
9. Websites:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17047 AU4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN CHEMICAL ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : CH
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO
SUBJECT TITLE
2
3
4
5
6
7
Physical Chemistry and Materials of
Construction
Electrical and Electronics
Plant Utility
Fluid Flow Operation
Chemical Process Technology-II
CAD Software
Professional Practices-II
**
Industrial Training (Optional)
1
Abbrev
iation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
PCM
17423
03
--
02
03
100
40
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
EAE
PUT
FFO
CPT
CSO
PPT
17424
17425
17426
17427
17039
17040
04
03
03
03
---
-------
02*
02
04
04
02
03
03
03
03
03
---
100
100
100
100
---
40
40
40
40
---
--50#
50#
---
--20
20
---
-------
-------
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
10
10
10
10
20
16
--
19
--
500
--
100
--
--
--
200
--
TOTAL
SW
(17400)
50
50
Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 35 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 850
@ - Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, * - Practicals of Electrical & Electronics at alternate week.
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as sessional work
(SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR, TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
 For CAD software subject MSBTE should decide the contents of the practical every year through identified experts and ensure that these practicals only
performed in the institute.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Chemical Engineering
Course Code : CH
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Physical Chemistry and Materials of Construction
Subject Code : 17423
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Different chemicals are used in industries to manufacture a desired product. Various
reactions are used for manufacturing desired chemicals. These processes depend upon basic
concepts of thermodynamics. Contents of this subject will enable the students to understand
thermodynamic concepts which are required during kinetic study.
Storage tank, material handling equipment and reactors require careful selection of material
of construction. The material of construction should be compatible with chemicals to be handled.
The content of this subject will enable the students in understanding types of corrosion,
classification of engineering materials and criteria for selection of material of construction.
General Objectives:
Students should be able to:
1. Understand basic concepts of thermodynamics & it’s laws.
2. Determine degree of freedom of a given system.
3. Understand concepts of adsorption and its application in chemical industry.
4. Select material of construction for specific chemicals.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17423 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Use of first, second and third law of
thermodynamic
Corrosion Prevention methods
Procedure
Concept
Facts
Selection of material based on
properties of chemicals
Intensive and extensive properties,
chemical and physical adsorption
Electrode potential, passivity of
material, inhibitors
State of matter
Storage material and chemicals
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17423 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
1.1 Theory: marks)
 Scope of thermodynamics
Chapter
1
2
3
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Thermodynamics
Specific Objectives:
 Differentiate between intensive & extensive properties
 State applications of laws of thermodynamics
Contents:
1.2
Concepts of thermodynamics
(08 Definitions
: System, Surroundings, Boundary
 Homogeneous & Heterogeneous systems
 Types of thermodynamic systems Isolated system, open system, closed system
 Intensive & extensive properties
 Thermodynamic states
Equilibrium state, Non equilibrium state
Standard states -solid, liquid & gases
1.2
Thermodynamic processes
(06 marks)
 Isothermal process, Adiabatic process, Isobaric process,
Isochoric process, Cyclic process.
 Reversible & Irreversible process.
 Difference between Reversible & irreversible process
Internal energy.
1.3
Basic laws of thermodynamics (10 marks)
 pressure, volume, work and their expressions
 Statement of First law of thermodynamics
 Definition and Expression of Enthalpy of system,
Adiabatic & isothermal expansion of Gasses.
 Statement of Second law of thermodynamic
 Statement of third law of thermodynamics, , Zeroth law
Topics 2: Phase Rule
Specific Objectives:
 Determine degree of freedom of given system
 State phase rule
Contents:
 Phase rule statement, Phase components
 Degree of freedom
 Derivation of phase rule
 The water system, the sulphur system
Topics 3: Adsorption & Colloids
Specific Objectives:
 Give example of adsorption
 Describe adsorption isotherm
Contents:
3.1 Adsorption
(12 Marks)
 Definition, example, Mechanism of adsorption
 Types of adsorption
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
Hours
Marks
10
24
04
10
10
20
17423 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
4
‘G’ Scheme
Physical adsorption, chemical adsorption, difference
between physical & chemical adsorption
 Adsorption isotherm: Freundlich adsorption isotherm,
Langmuir adsorption isotherm
 Application of adsorption
3.2 Colloids :
(08 Marks)
 Definition
 Types of colloidal system Lyophilic, Lyophobic colloids (solution) its
characteristics & comparison
 Methods of preparation of colloids (solution)
Topics 4: Corrosion
Specific Objectives:
 State types of corrosion
 Corrosion prevention and control methods
Contents:
4.1 Types of corrosion
(14 Marks)
 Definition
 Types of corrosion
 Dry corrosion – Formation of protective films,
Growth of oxidation film.
 Wet corrosion
 Meaning of the terms Electrode potential,
Electrochemical series, Galvanic cell, Galvanic series,
potential difference
 Process of corrosion.
 Effect of temperature on corrosion
 Specific types of corrosion such as Uniform corrosion,
pitting corrosion, galvanic corrosion, oxidation
corrosion, inter granular corrosion, selective corrosion,
erosion corrosion, fretting corrosion
4.2 Corrosion prevention and control
(10 Marks)
 Corrosion prevention methods Use of high purity metals
Use of alloy additions, Special heat treatment
 Corrosion protection methods
Use of inhibitors, Electro-chemical protection,
protective coatings
 Effect of pH value on corrosion
 Caustic embrittlement
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
12
24
17423 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
‘G’ Scheme
Topics 5 : Material of construction and their properties
Specific Objectives:
 Select compatible material for storage of chemicals
Contents:
5.1 Common Materials
(14 Marks)
 Classification of engineering materials
 Selection of material of construction based on properties
of chemicals.
 Commonly used material of construction – composition
of materials and its specific use : cast iron, carbon steel
– mild steel, stainless steel – SS304, SS316, SS314,
alloys of aluminium, PVC, Teflon, Polypropylene,
Polyethylene
5.2 Special Materials
(08 Marks)
 Lining and its importance
 Rubber lining, Glass lining, Lead lining, Plastic lining
Total
12
22
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1) Verify the laws and characteristics.
2) Analyze given solution and study its thermodynamic properties.
3) Understand the set up of experiment.
Motor Skill:
1) Observe the completion of reaction.
2) Handle various laboratory regents.
3) Accurately measure proper quantity of various chemicals.
List of Practicals:
1) To measure the heat of combustion off methyl alcohol and ethyl alcohol.
2) To determine the heat of neutralization of acid and alkali.
3) Determination of melting point of solid substance.
4) Determination of boiling point of liquid.
5) Purification of solids by crystallization(potassium chloride and potassium chlorate)
6) Verification of the freundrich isotherm in adsorption of acetic acid, benzoic acid by
activated charcoal.
7) Determination of partition coefficient.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
B. S. Bahal,
01 G. D. Tuli,
Arun Bahal
J. M. Coulson & J. F.
02
Richardson
03 Contributors
B.R.Puri, L.R.Sharma,
04
Madan s, Puthania
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Publisher
Essential of Physical Chemistry
S. Chand
Chemical Engineering Vol. 6
Asian Books Pvt. Ltd.
Engineering Chemistry
Wiley India
Principles of Physical chemistry S.Chand & company
6
17423 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Chemical Engineering/ Plastic Engineering
Course code : CH / PS
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Electrical and Electronics
Subject Code : 17424
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02*
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
* - Practicals of Electrical & Electronics at alternate week.
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Most of the equipments used in chemical industry are electrically powered. A minor
electrical faults can be attended by a shop floor chemical engineer. This subject of electrical engg.
addresses the fundamental concepts and operating principles of electrical appliances. It will enable
the students in better handling and commissioning of the equipments.
The second section of the subject deals with the basic of semiconductor devices and their
circuits necessary for the electronic control gadgets. It provides the information about logic gates,
digital displays, small signal amplifiers and power supplies. This will help the students in building
skills of effective handling of electronic control equipments.
General Objectives: Student will be able to develop:

Awareness of Electrical Safety.

Recognize Electrical fault in Chemical Plant.

Recognize fault in power supply, display & control panel.

Understand working of basic semiconductor devices.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17424 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
To develop awareness in the basic of electrical engg. and electronics and their applications.
Working of Motors,
Transformers, Power
Calculations
Basic electrical
wiring, seletion
of furnace
Working of half
wave and full wave
rectifier, single
stage CE amplifier,
Zener regulator,
gain of amplifier
Verification of
truth tables AND,
OR, NOT, EX-OR,
NAND, NOR,
universal gates,
Demorgan’s laws
Principle of AC/DC
motor, transformer,
auto transformer,
induction, dielectric &
resistive heating
Breakdown of
junction, two, three,
four layer devices,
light emitting diode,
LCD, recfifier,
amplifier
Demorgan’s theorem,
universal gates
Concept
Concepts of single
phase and three phase
supply, EMF,
armature voltage, field
current, mutual
induction
Energy leveles,
doping, diode,
rectification,
voltage regulation,
amplification
Seven segment digital
display, logic gates
Facts
AC fundamentals,
electromagnetic
induction, electric
power and energy
Principal
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Semiconductor, P-N
junction, transistors,
Boolean algebra
8
17424 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Section- I
Electrical Engineering
Topic and Content
Hours
Marks
07
10
06
10
05
08
06
10
Topic 1: Basic Fundamentals
Specific Objectives:
 State principle of electromagnetic induction.
 Calculate electrical power and energy from given data.
Contents:
 Ohm’s Law – Simple problems on Ohm’s Law
 Types of supply – A.C. & D.C., definition, representation &
comparison.
 Principle of electromagnetic induction.
 Concept of single Phase & Three Phase A.C. supply, comparison.
 Electrical power, energy – definition, equation, simple problems.
 Power factor & its importance
Topics 2: D.C. Motor
Specific Objectives:
 Draw electrical circuit diagram of D.C. shunt motor.
 Draw diagram & explain armature voltage speed control method.
Contents:
 Working principle, construction, different parts – their material &
application.
 Types of D.C. motor – Electrical circuit of D.C shunt & series motor.
 Speed control of D.C Shunt & Series motor.
 Necessity of starter & its principle.
 Applications of D.C. motors related to chemical plant.
Topics 3: A.C. Motor
Specific Objectives:
 Draw electrical circuit diagram of R – Split single phase induction motor.
 State any four parts & their material used for three phase induction motor.
Contents:
 Three phase induction motor – working principle, construction &
application.
 Construction, working & application of following single phase
induction motors.
R – Split, C – Split.
Topics 4: Transformer
Specific Objectives:
 Compare core type & shell type transformer.
 Define voltage ratio, current ratio & transformation ratio of single phase
transformer.
Contents:
 Working principle of transformer, Elementary theory of an ideal
transformer.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
17424 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Construction of core & shell type transformer, comparison.
 EMF equation (No Derivation), simple problems.
 Transformation ratio – simple problems.
 Autotransformer – Concept, advantages, limitations, applications.
Topics 5: Electrical Wiring & Safety
Specific Objectives:
 State the necessity of fuse.
 State the necessity of earthing.
Contents:







Types of wires – V.I.R. , P.V.C. ,T.R.S., Specifications as per IS code.
Fuse – Necessity, kit-kat & HRC fuse - construction, working.
Circuit breakers – MCCB, ELCB, principle & application.
Electrical wiring – one lamp controlled by single way switch, two
lamp controlled by two single way switches
(independently), stair
case wiring, godown wiring.
Lamps – Incandescent lamp, fluorescent lamp, mercury vapour &
sodium vapour lamp - construction, application.
Electrical safety – Safety precautions, Instruction for restoration of
persons suffering from electric shock.
Earthing – Need, Types – plate & pipe
Total
08
12
32
50
Hours
Marks
12
20
06
08
Section- II
Electronics
Topic and Content
Topic 1: Semiconductor Electronic Devices
Specific Objectives:
 Draw V-I characteristics of different devices.
 State the symbols of different components.
Contents:
1.1
------------------------------------------------------ 12 Marks
 Resistor, inductor, capacitor – definition, symbols & applications.
 Conductors, semiconductors, Insulators – definition, energy band
diagram, examples.
 Semiconductors classification – Intrinsic and Extrinsic – N type & P
type, definition, charge carrier.
 PN junction diode – construction, symbol, working, forward & reverse
bias V-I characteristic, applications.
 Light emitting diode – Construction, symbol, working principle,
applications.
 Junction breakdown.
 Zener diode - Construction, symbol, working principle, reverse bias
V-I characteristic, applications.
1.2 Power devices (08 marks)
SCR - Construction, symbol, working principle, Applications.
TRIAC - Construction, symbol, working principle, Applications.
Topics 2: Bipolar Junction Transistor
Specific Objectives:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17424 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Draw output characteristics of CE configuration.
 Describe working of transistor amplifier.
Contents:
 BJT types – NPN & PNP , their symbols & construction,
 Working of a NPN transistor.
 Transistor characteristics – Common emitter configuration.
 Single stage CE amplifier – circuit diagram & working.
 Power amplifier – Concept & types.
 Applications of transistor.
Topics 3: Power Supply
Specific Objectives:
 Draw block diagram of power supply.
 Describe working of different rectifier circuits.
Contents:
 Power supply – Necessity, block diagram.
 Rectifier – Types, Half wave, Full wave (center tapped & bridge type)
- Circuit diagram, working, waveforms & their comparison.
 Filter - Need & types – shunt capacitor, series inductor, LC & π type,
circuit diagram.
 Voltage regulator - Need, principle of zener shunt regulator.
Topics 4: Digital circuits
Specific Objectives:
 State symbols of different logic gates.
 Use NAND / NOR gate as universal gates.
Contents:
 Digital signal, Negative & positive logic.
 Boolean algebra.
 Logic gates – AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, EX-OR , Symbols,
logic expressions ,truth table.
 De- Morgan,s theorems – statement, proof using truth table.
 Universal gates – definition, NAND, NOR.
Digital display – Types of LED & LCD display
Total
07
12
07
10
32
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:


Correlate speed of the motor with its other parameters.
Identify the simple faults in electrical and electronics systems.
Motor Skills:
 Use various tools and components for different electrical applications.
 Handle various electronic test and measuring equipments.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17424 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Practicals:
Section-I
1) To verify ohm’s law.
2) To measure electrical Power in Single phase AC circuit.
3) To plot the Speed & Armature voltage characteristics of DC shunt motor.
4) To plot the Speed & field current characteristics of DC shunt motor.
5) To determine transformation ratio of single phase transformer.
6) To prepare wiring for one lamp controlled by Single way switch.
Section-II
1) To operate the various laboratory equipments & measuring instruments like power Supply,
CRO, DMM.
2) To plot forward & reverse characteristics of Silicon Diode.
3) To measure percentage line regulation of Shunt Zener regulator.
4) To measure voltage gain of single stage common Emitter amplifier at 1 khz.
5) To verify the truth tables of various logic gates.
6) To verify De - Morgan, s First theorem.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
1
B.L. Theraja
2
S.L. Uppal
3
N.N. Bhargava,
S.C. Gupta
4
5
B.L. Theraja
R.P. Jain
6
B.D.Arora
Title
Electrical Technology Vol. 1 & 2
Electrical Power
Basic Electronics & Linear
N.N. Bhargava, Technical Teachers
Circuits
Basic Electronics ( Solid State)
Modern Digital Electronics
Electrical Wiring & Estimation
Costing
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
Publisher
S.Chand & Company Ltd.
Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
Technical Teachers
Training Institute
S.Chand & Company Ltd.
Tata Mc Graw Hill, Delhi.
R.B. Publications
17424 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Chemical Engineering
Course Code : CH
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Plant Utility
Subject Code : 17425
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
This subject covers the requirement of different utilities for the process plant, along with its
generation and its effective utilization. Main utilities required for process plants are water, steam,
air & refrigerants. Steam & non- steam heating media are important for conversion of raw material
to products in reactors & to elevate the temperature in the chemical processes. Refrigeration is
important to maintain the temperature in the process plant. Compressed air, process air is used in
processes & instrument air is used in pneumatic devices & controls.
General Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1. State the principles involved during water treatment, generation of steam and refrigeration
cycles.
2. Select the different equipments used to run the process plant with different utilities.
3. Understand basic calculation involved in steam generation, psychometric operation and
refrigeration.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17425 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To control the different parameters of utility section
Water treatment, steam Generation
Procedure
Principle
Principle of Phase Change
For steam
Carnot Cycle for
refrigeration
Concept
Latent heat, refrigeration
Sensible heat, humidity, COP
Facts
Air, Water, Steam, Refrigerant
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
17425 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Content:
Topic and Contents
Chapter 1 : Water
Specific Objectives:
 Describe the methods of water treatment
 Explain the problem occurred in Boiler feed water
Contents:
1.1
( 08 Marks)
 Sources of water, hard and soft water,
 Requisites of industrial water and its uses
 Methods of water treatment- Chemical softening, Demineralization
1.2
( 12 Marks)
 Resins used for water softening
 Reverse osmosis and membrane separation
 Problems in boiler feed water & its treatments- Scale & sludge
formation, Corrosion, Priming & foaming, Caustic embrittlement
Chapter 2 : Refrigeration
Specific Objectives:
 State the different properties of Refrigerants
 Describe the different Refrigeration system
Contents:
2.1
( 12 Marks)
 Definition of Ton of refrigeration and coefficient of performance.
 Refrigeration cycles
 Different methods of refrigeration used in industry- Vapour
compression, Vapor absorption, Air refrigeration.
( 12 Marks)
 Different refrigerants- Lithium bromide (eco-Friendly)
Monochlorodifluoro methane (R-22), Carbon di oxide, Ammonia.
Secondary refrigerants: Brine,water and air: Properties and
applications of above.
 Simple calculation of C.O.P.
Chapter 3 : Steam and Steam Generation
 Calculate Enthalpy of different types of steam
 Explain Principle, construction & working of Boiler.
Contents:
3.1
( 12 Marks)
 Properties of steam
 Problems based on enthalpy calculation for wet steam, dry saturated
steam, superheated steam
3.2
( 18 Marks)
 Types of steam generator / boilers: water tube & fire tube Solid fuel
fired boiler, waste gas fired boiler, Waste heat boiler. Fluidized bed
boiler
 Scaling, trouble shooting, preparing boiler for inspection
 Boiler mountings and accessories: principle of operation, construction
and working. ( water level indicator, pressure gauge, steam trap,
pressure reducing valve, economizer, preheater, super heater)
 Boiler Act
Chaper 4 : Psychrometry
Specific Objectives:
 State properties of air-water system
Hours
Marks
10
20
11
24
14
30
08
16
2.2
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
17425 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Describe Humidification & Dehumidification process
Contents:
 Properties of Air-water vapours.
 Use of humidity chart
 Equipment used for humidification, Evaporative cooling, spray ponds,
cooling towers , their Construction ,working and application
Chapter 5 : Air
Specific Objectives:
 State the applications of air.
 Explain the process of getting instrument air
Contents:
 Use of Compressed air, process air and instrument air
 Single, multistage compression, Interstage coolers
 Process of getting instrument air.
Chapter 6 : Non steam heating system
Specific Objectives:
 State the temperature ranges of Non steam heating system
 Explain Principle, Construction & Working of Non steam heating
system.
Contents: Principle, construction and working of :
 Thermic fluid heater
 Types of thermic fluid and their temperature ranges.
Total
03
06
02
04
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Analysis of water.
2. Calculation of humidity & use of humidity chart
3 Calculation of heat load in cooling tower
4. Interpretation of steam data using steam table.
Motor Skills:
1. Handling of pH meter, TDS meter
2. Handling of thermo pack or boiler
3. Handling of Reverse Osmosis system
4 Handling of cooling tower
List of Practicals:
1. To determine the alkalinity of water.
2. To determine the hardness of water.
3. To determine the pH using pH meter.
4. To determine humidity by using whirling psychrometer/sling psychrometer.
5. To observe the operations of boiler / thermo pack using simulator.
6. To determine outgoing temperature of water from any cooling tower.
7. To analyse RO water based on TDS, pH & hardness
8. To measure different pressures of compressed air.
9. To read / interpret different properties of steam using steam table.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
17425 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
P. L. Balleney
Thermal Engineering
Khanna Publisher, New
Delhi
02
S.T. Powel
Industrial Water Treatment
McGraw Hill, Newyork
03
Jain & Jain
Engineering Chemistry
--
04
B.K. Sarkar
Thermal Engineering
--
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17425 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Chemical Engineering
Course Code : CH
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Fluid Flow Operation
Subject Code : 17426
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Knowledge of measurement of fluid flow and various fluid transportation machinery is
useful to transport different process fluids. The knowledge of this subject helps in installation of
different fluid transportation machinery. Principals of Fluid Flow operations are useful in
understanding mass transfer and heat transfer operation.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to
1. Understand the concept of viscosity.
2. Calculate mass and volumetric flow rates.
3. Understand the principles of different flow meters.
4. Install and calculate the flow rate of fluid with different flow meters in closed pipe line.
5. Understand working of different types of valves
6. Understand the principle and working of different fluid flow machinery.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17426 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Operate and maintain various fluid flow meters and pumps in closed pipe
lines for any type of fluid
Procedure
Method of operating flow meter
Principle
Properties of
fluids
Concept
Method of operating flow meter
Equation of continuity
Bernoulli’s Theorem
Volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate.
Volumetric flow rate, mass flow rate
Facts
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17426 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Chapter
1
2
Topics and Contents
Introduction to Fluids :
Specific Objective
 Calculate pressure using U tube manometer.
 Compare Newtonian & Non Newtonian fluid.
 State Newton’s law of Viscosity.
1.1 Properties of fluids
 Density & viscosity (absolute & Kinematic)
 Vapor pressure & partial pressure
 Atmospheric pressure
 Vacuum
 Absolute pressure
1.2 Principle of Hydrostatic Equilibrium
 Pressure exerted by a liquid column
 Various types of manometers such as U tube, Well
type and inclined leg manometer
 Pressure measurement by U-tube manometer and
problem based on the same.
1.3 Types of fluids
 Ideal and actual fluids
 Compressible and incompressible fluids
 Newton’s law of viscosity
 Newtonian and Non-Newtonian fluids with example
of each type.
Flow of Fluids (Incompressible & its measurement)
Specific Objectives
 Calculate the volumetric flow rate using orifice meter and
Venturi meter.
 Calculate the frictional losses due to expansion and
contraction.
 State Hagen Poiseulli’s equation.
2.1 Volumetric and Mass flow rate ( 16 marks)
 Concept of volumetric and mass flow rate
 Interconversion of the above two
 Average velocity
 Mass velocity
 Point velocity
 Equation of continuity
 Derivation of equation of continuity
 Numericals based on above sub- topics
2.2 Reynolds Number
 Definition
 Reynolds experiment
 Concept of laminar, turbulent and transition flow
 Critical velocity
 Formula for Reynolds Number and Numericals.
2.3 Bernoulli’s equation
 Various types of energies by liquid
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
Hours
Marks
07
12
20
40
17426 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Derivation of Bernoulli’s equation
 Friction factor correction
 Work done by pump
 Kinetic Energy correction
 Numerical
2.4 Friction
(12 marks)
 Concept of friction in fluid flow
 Types of friction- Form ,skin: Definition.
 Relation between pressure drop, wall friction and
shear stress
 Shear stress distribution in pipes
 Relation between average velocity and maximum
velocity for laminar flow
 Derivation of Hagen Poiseuille’s equation
 Problems on above topics
2.5 Friction in pipes
 Fanning’s friction factor in Laminar and Turbulent
flow
 Friction factor chart
 Friction losses due to sudden expansion and sudden
contraction
2.6 Measurement of fluid flow
(12 Marks)
 Variable head meter and variable area meter
 Construction working principle, discharge coefficient,
calibration, relative advantages and disadvantages,
problems onOrifice meter, Venturimeter

3
4
Rotameter construction, principle, concept of variation
in flow area, calibration
 Pitot tube, construction, advantages and formula to
calculate point velocity
Pipe, fittings & valves
Specific Objectives
 List the different types of fittings & valves.
 State equivalent length of pipe fitting, frictional losses
in pipe fittings.
3.1 Pipe & Pipe Fittings
 Standard sizes of pipes, wall thickness, Schedule
number & Material of construction
 Various types of fittings
 Equivalent length of pipe fittings
3.2 Classification of valves
 Construction, working, advantages of Globe, Gate,
Plug, Ball ,Diaphragm, Needle, Control valve, Non
return valve, Safety valve
3.3 Construction, working and application of Rupture disc.
Transportation of Fluids
Specific Objectives
 Calculate the NPSH of the centrifugal pump.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
07
16
14
32
17426 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

Compare centrifugal pump and positive displacement
pump.
 State the range of pressure developed by fan, blower
and compressor.
4.1 Pumps
( 12 marks)
 Classification
 Positive displacement pumps, their types,
Reciprocating pump (single acting, double acting,
duplex, triplex piston, plunger), gear pump,
Diaphragm pump, Screw pump, Characteristics
curves.
4.2 Centrifugal pump
(10 Marks)
 Construction, various parts, development of pressure,
air binding, priming, suction head, and discharge head,
cavitation, NPSH etc.
 Characteristics curve of Centrifugal pump
4.3 Fans, blowers & compressors:
( 10 marks)
 Specific applications of each equipment
 Range of pressure developed by each type
 Centrifugal blower
 Reciprocating Compressor
Vacuum generating equipment Principle , construction and
working of Vacuum pump, Jet ejectors
Total
48
100
Practical:
Intellectual Skills
1. Interpret data and result.
2. Calculate various parameters.
3. Identify errors and method of minimizing.
Motor Skills
1. Handle Equipment
2. Measure accurately various parameters.
Lists of Practicals:
1. Understand the phenomenon of viscosity, pressure gradient by demonstration.
2. Verify Reynolds experiment and calculate the Reynolds number at the end of laminar
regime and beginning of turbulent regime.
3. Perform experiment based on Bernoulli’s theorem and prove that the summation of
pressure head, kinetic head and potential head is constant.
4. Estimate the fanning friction factor at different flow rate and draw friction factor chart.
5. Calculate the coefficient of discharge of a venturimeter and prepare calibration curve.
6. Calculate the coefficient of discharge of an orifice meter and prepare calibration curve.
7. Calibrate the rotameter and plot the calibration curve.
8. Determine head loss due to sudden expansion and contraction.
9. Calculate equivalent length of bend, globe valve and gate valve.
10. Plot and understand the characteristic curves of a centrifugal pimp by using centrifugal
pump test rig.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17426 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Assignments: Any Four
Sr.
Assignments
No.
1 Calculate pressure at a specific point inside a liquid surface.
2 Conversion of pressure exerted in terms of various liquids columns.
3 Conversion of volumetric flow rate into mass flow rate. Calculating a average velocity,
mass velocity.
4 5 Problems based on equation of continuity.
5 Problems based on Bernoulli’s equation.
6 Problems based on Reynolds’s number.
7 Problems based on calculating friction factor for Laminar and Turbulent flow.
8 Calculating pressure drop over certain length of pipe using above parameters.
9 Equivalent of different pipe fitting having these pipe fittings.
10 Calculating volumetric flow rate by Orificemeter, Venturimeter and Rotameter.
11 Calculating H.P. of pump for transporting liquid from one point to other point.
Learning Resources:
Book:
Sr. No.
Author
1
McCabe, Smith
2
Badger & Banchero
3
Richardson & Coulson
4
P. Chattopadhyay
Title
Unit Operations of Chemical
Engineering
Introduction to Chemical
Engineering
Chemical Engineering
Volume-I
Unit Operations of Chemical
Engineering
Publisher
McGraw Hill
McGraw Hill
Pergamon Press
Khanna Publication
Websites: www.flowmaster.com
www.pipeflow.co.uk
www.radcoind.com
www.vlab.co.in
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17426 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Chemical Engineering
Course Code : CH
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Chemical Process Technology-II
Subject Code : 17427
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
There are different type of Chemical industries like Small, Medium and Large Scale.
Diploma students should able to operate and Control manufacturing process of various Chemicals.
From this subject student will get knowledge of manufacture of chemicals like alcohol, phenol, oil,
Soap, paper etc.
General Objectives:
The students will be able to
1. Know about Raw materials, Physical & Chemical Properties with Chemical reaction for
the manufacture of various Chemicals.
2. Know manufacturing process of various chemicals
3. Understand uses of various Chemicals.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17427 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principle
Concept
Facts
Enable to operate & control Manufacture process of given Product
Method for
manufacturi
ng of
polymer
Method for
manufacturin
g of Alcohol
of Chemicals
Polymerization
Addition and
condensation
Method of
Hydrogenation
of Oil
Method for
manufacturi
ng of
phenol
Method for
manufacturi
ng of Soap
Fermentation
Hydrogenation
Oxidation
Saponification
Decomposition
Addition of
Hydrogen
Addition of
Oxygen
Fatty acid
and glycerin
Chemicals, Unit operation, Equipment, Unit Process
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17427 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Chapter
1
2
Topic and Contents
Alcohol
Specific Objectives :
 Describe manufacturing processes of alcohol with
reaction
 Draw flow sheet/ block diagram
Content:
Raw Materials , Reactions, Flow sheet/Block diagram,
manufacturing process of products & their uses
 Ethyl alcohol by Corn &Molasses
 Acetic Acid by Oxidation of Acetaldehyde
 Butanol by Oxo process from Propylene
Paint
Specific Objectives:
 State constituents of paint with function
 Describe manufacturing processes of paint
 State uses of Varnishes & Lacquers
Content:
 Properties of raw materials of paint & their functions
 Manufacturing of paint
 Constituent of Pigments
-White pigment
- Black pigment
- Blue pigment
- Red pigment
 Varnishes - Oil & Sprit and their Uses
 Lacquers - Definition &Uses
Oil, Soap & Detergent
Hours
Marks
06
16
05
12
08
20
Specific Objectives:
 State Extraction process of oil
 State Hydrogenation of oil
 Describe manufacturing processes of soap & Detergent
 Explain cleansing action of soap
3
Content:
3.1 Oil
08 Marks
 Definitions - Acid value , Iodine value, Saponification value
of oil
 Extraction of Oil by solvent process
 Hydrogenation of Oil
3.2 Soap
06 Marks
 Classification of Cleansing Compounds
 Manufacturing of Soap by
- Batch Saponification Process
- Continuous Hydrolysis &
Saponification
 Cleansing action of Soap
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17427 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
3.3 Detergents
06 Marks
 Manufacturing of detergents by
- Sulfated Fatty Alcohols
- Alkyl-Aryl Sulfonates
Pulp and Papers
4
5
6
Specific Objectives:
 Describe manufacturing processes of Pulp & paper with
reaction
 To draw flow sheet
Content:
Raw Materials , Reactions, Flow sheet/Block diagram,
manufacturing process of product & their uses
 Pulp by Sulfate (Kraft) process & Sulphite process
recovery of Chemicals
 Paper from pulp
 Rayon (viscous rayon ) form cellulose
Polymer
Specific Objectives:
 State meaning of polymerization
 Describe manufacturing processes of polymer with
reactions
Content:
 Polymerization - Definition of
(08 Marks)
Polymerization, Methods of
Polymerization – Addition & Condensation
 Raw Materials, Reactions, Flow sheet / Block diagram,
manufacturing process of product &their uses
(16 Marks)
- Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) by Emulsion polymerization
- Polyethylene by Ziegler process Low high medium
pressure
- Polystyrene from Benzene & Ethylene Styrene Polyester
- Polyester by polymerization of DMT PTA
& ethylene glycol
Phenol
Specific Objectives:
 Describe manufacturing processes of Phenol with reaction
 To draw flow sheet
Content:
Raw Materials, Reactions, Flow sheet/Block diagram,
manufacturing process of phenol &their uses
a) Cumene Peroxidation Process
b) Toluene Oxidation Process
c) Rasching Process
d) Chlorobenzene-Caustic hydrolysis
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
05
12
15
24
09
16
48
100
17427 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical’s:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
a. Select suitable process of manufacturing
b. Select proper process condition for getting maximum yield
Motor Skills:
a. Work on manufacturing plant
b. Set proper temperature and pressure condition
c. Set controlling steps in manufacturing process
List of Practical’s:
1) Estimate the strength of glacial acetic acid by conductometric titration.
2) Determine Iodine value of given oil sample by titration method.
3) Determine the saponification value of given lubricating oil sample by KOH titration.
4) Determine the acid value of given lubricating oil sample by KOH titration.
5) Calculate the hiding power of given sample of paint.
6) Calculate the percentage of thinner in a given sample of oil paint.
7) Prepare phenol formaldehyde resin on the laboratory scale by using phenol and
formaldehyde raw material.
8) Prepare the soap by batch saponification process and analyze the moisture content of
laboratory made soap.
9) Prepare ethyl acetate from ethyl alcohol and acetic acid by esterification and determine its
density and boiling point.
Mini Project (any Three):
1) Compare moisture content of any three branded Washing Soap in Market (with respect to
composition of each soap). Compare with TFM.
2) Compare Hiding power of any three branded Paints in Market, Viscosity, %Thinner
3) Compare any three refined Oil available in market (with respect to acid value,
saponification value)
4) Collect information about different types of papers & compare their parameters w.r.t. GSM,
folding strength
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
Name of Book
No.
Dryden Outline of Chemical
1
Technology
2
3
4
Shreve Chemical Process
Industries
Chemical Process Organic
Synthesis
Handbook of Industrial
Chemistry VOL. II
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Name of Author
M. Gopala Rao
George Austin
P. H. Groggins
Davis. K. H
28
Name of Publisher
East West Publishers
1997, New Delhi.
Mc Graw Hill
Publication
1984, Auckland
Mc Graw Hill 1958,
Auckland.
C.B.S Publication
2004, New Delhi
17427 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Chemical Engineering
Course Code : CH
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : CAD Software
Subject Code : 17039
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
02
--
--
--
--
25#
25
Rationale:
Drawing is the language of engineers. It conveys the meaning for construction and erection
of Chemical Plant. Now a days computer has become an effective tool for preparing drawing
through the software CAD. This subject provides sufficient practice to make use of CAD and draw
required drawings.
General Objective:
After studying the subject students will be able to

Draw process equipments.

Draw and modify various objects

Draw plant layout
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17039 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Concept
Use CAD for preparing drawings.
Method of using appropriate commands.
Commands for specific drawing.
Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
CAD Software
30
17039 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Practical
Sr. No.
1
Name of Topic
Practice of basic commands such as draw, modify etc. (Related
commands should be covered in practical period)
Hours
04
2
Draw symbols as per IS 3232
04
3
Draw flow diagram for given chemical process (any four )
12
4
Redraw the given Plant , Equipment layout and Utilities line diagram
12
Note:
1. Give different process for drawing of flow sheet.
2. For practical number 4, teacher has to provide drawing.
3. Printout of each CAD sheet will be part of Teamwork.
Learning Resources:
Sr. No.
Author
Title
Engineering Drawing and
Graphics Auto CAD
Publisher
01
K Venugopal
02
M.V. Joshi
V.V Mahajan
Process Equipment Design
1997 Mac Milan India Ltd.
03
M Gopala Rao
Dryden Outline of Chemical
Technology
East West Publishers 1997,
New Delhi.
04
Indian standard
IS 3232
Govt. of India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
New Age Publication
17039 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Chemical Engineering
Course Code : CH
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17040
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Engineering diploma holders are basically intended to work in industries. Their placements
and selection for the jobs is based on the campus interview conducted by respective companies.
Since the candidate is supposed to work and carry out actual engineering practices in the industries,
his confidence, attitude and ability to communicate with the subordinates is usually tested apart
from his technical subject knowledge.
To facilitate this and boost his capabilities the subject of professional practices aims to
provide ample opportunities to the students. To accomplish this, industrial visits, lectures by
professionals/experts, seminars and group discussions are planned during the semester.
Objectives:
1. To acquire information and data of different industry
2. To deliver the information and the knowledge required to develop awareness about latest
trends in chemical industry.
3. To interact with fellow people and present their views.
4. To prepare report on industrial visit and expert lectures.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17040 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Prepare notes on the learned and present a seminar
Reading the process flow diagram, operating manuals,
schedules & more importantly learning from the concerned
personnel
Principle
Understanding the process, knowledge of equipments
involved in the process, piping and instrumentation
Facts
Preparing for powerpoint presentation
Procedure
Industry visited and present infrastructure there
Guidelines for implementing professional practices

In order to implement contents of professional practice effectively it is necessary for the
department to plan the activities for full semester. Minor modifications may be done if
required. Following are guidelines for the same.

Activities to be guided and monitored by the faculty of the concerned department only.

Involve students in related activities to a great extent to develop learning to learn skills.

Arrange industrial visits and expert lectures on convenient days. Periods of PP may be
allocated to concerned faculty members whose periods may be lost.
Ensure to carry out all activities suggested.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17040 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Activities:
Contents
1. Industrial Visits
Industrial visits to be arranged and report of the same to be submitted by individual
students to form the part of the term work. The report to contain information in respect
to
a. Raw material required
b. Finished product to be produced
c. Capacity of the plant
d. Utilities required and their consumption
e. Man power requirement
f. General costing
g. Various equipments, unit operations and unit processes involved
h. Storage and handling of material
i. General layout of the plant
Visits to any two of the following.
a. Visit to ethanol plant
b. Visit to rubber tyre retreading unit
c. Visit to electroplating industry
d. Visit to a fertilizer industry
e. Visit to a plastic industry
2. Lectures
Lectures by professionals / industrial experts / academicians
Two sessions to be held on the following topics
a. Industrial filtration
b. Mixing and agitation
c. Fluid transportation and handling
d. Cooling and refrigeration
e. Steam generation
f. Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
3. Seminars
Seminar based on information search to be organized from any three of the following
areas
a. Protection of environment
b. Safety practices in chemical industries
c. General maintenance in chemical plant
d. Water purification
e. Non conventional energy sources
4. Group Discussion
The student should discuss in a group of 6 – 8 and write a brief report on the same.
Group discussion to be monitored by faculty members. The following topics to be
discussed
a. Selection of pumping devices
b. Treatment of boiler feed water
c. Selection of filtration equipments
d. Fine chemicals and their applications
5. Student Activities
The group of 3 – 4 students will perform any one of the following activities
a. Comparative statement of prices and specifications
b. Information regarding specifications of different pumps and motors
c. Create data base of past students
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
Hours
12
06
10
12
08
17040 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
d. Collect information regarding material of construction for pipe fittings,
pumps and its components
e. Collect information regarding various chemical industries in the vicinity of
the institute.
f. Collect information regarding specifications of common engineering
materials
Total
48
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr. No.
Title
1.
Fourth semester subjects reference books
2.
Journals and magazines - IEEE Journals, IT technologies.
3.
Local news papers and events
4.
Apprenticeship Training Scheme:- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
2. Websites:
1. http://www.wikipedia.com
2. http://www.seminarforyou.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17040 CH4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : COMPUTER ENGINEERING GROUP
COURSE CODE : CO/CD/CM/CW
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS FOR CO/CM/CW/IF ( 8 SEMESTERS FOR CD)
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies
$
Computer Hardware &
β
Maintenance
Computer Network
Microprocessor and
β
Programming
Object Oriented Programming β
Computer Graphics
Professional Practices-II β
Abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
EST
17401
01
--
02
01
50#*
20
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
CHM
17428
03
--
02
03
100
40
25#
10
--
--
[email protected]
10
CNE
17429
03
--
04
03
100
40
50#
20
--
--
[email protected]
10
MAP
17431
03
--
02
03
100
40
25#
10
--
--
[email protected]
10
OOP
CGR
PPT
17432
17056
17042
TOTAL
03
-04
03
100
40
50#
20
-01
-02
---50#
20
---03
------14
-19
-450
-200
--Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
-----
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
200
10
10
20
--
SW
(17400)
50
50
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 33 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 900
@ - Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* - Online Examination,
β - Common to IF
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as sessional
work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Credit, Ecosystem
3
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Computer Engineering Group
Course Code
: CO/CD/CM/CW/IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Computer Hardware & Maintenance
Subject Code
: 17428
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The aim of the subject is to teach the basic working of the computer motherboard,
peripherals and add-on cards. The subject helps the students to do the maintenance of the
Computer, peripherals and its add-on cards. The students will be able to select the proper peripheral
as per their specification and requirement. This is the core technology subject. The pre-requisite of
the subject is Microprocessor. The subject is practical oriented and will develop the debugging
skills in the students.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1. Debug and repair the faults in system.
2. Assemble the system.
3. Load the operating system and device drivers in the system.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17428
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedures
Understand the architecture of PC, use different techniques to troubleshoot the
PC problems using preventive measures and repairing.
Learning
architectural
details
Principles
Logic of
components
Concepts
Motherboard, drives,
formatting, latency,
landing zone, HDD.
Facts
AT.ATX
motherboard, AGP,
PCI Port etc
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
-
Write everything down
Do the easy stuff first
Check for operator error
Check the software
Check external signals
Run diagnostic programs.
Rules of
troubleshooting
Repairing the different
Components of PC by
using different
methods.
Rules of repairing
Error codes, memory package, styles and structures,
memory signals, memory manager, disk manager EZDrive, DMI, SCSI, Video adapter etc.
Problems of system
boards, display
problems
8
Tools for repairing
the faults, types of
tests.
17428
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Sr.
No
1
2
Theory
Motherboard & Its Component
Specific Objectives
 To Understand the various components of Motherboard.
 To Know about the different memories in PC & their usage.
 To Understand the selection of different components of PC.
1.1 CPU – Concept like address lines, data lines, internal registers.
1.2 Modes of operation of CPU – Real mode, IA-32 mode, IA-32
Virtual Real Mode.
1.3 Process Technologies, Dual Independent Bus Architecture, Hyper
Threading Technologies & its requirement.
1.4 Processor socket & slots.
1.5 Chipset basic, chipset Architecture, North / South bridge & Hub
Architecture.
1.6 Latest chipset for PC
1.7 Overview & features of PCI, PCI –X, PCI express, AGP bus.
1.8 Logical memory organization conventional memory, extended
memory, expanded memory.
1.9 Overview & features of SDRAM, DDR, DDR2, DDR3.
1.10 Concept of Cache memory:
1.11 L1 Cache, L2 Cache, L3 Cache, Cache Hit & Cache Miss.
1.13 BIOS – Basics & CMOS Set Up.
1.14 Motherboard Selection Criteria.
Storage Devices & Interfacing.
Objective
 To understand the Recording techniques in storage devices.
 To understand the working of storage devices.
2.1 Recording Techniques: FM, MFM , RLL, perpendicular recording
2.2 Hard Disk construction and working.
2.3 Terms related to Hard Disk.
Track, sector, cylinder, cluster, landing zone, MBR, zone recording,
write pre-compensation.
2.4 Formatting: Low level, High level & partitioning.
2.5 FAT Basics: Introduction to file system, FAT 16, FAT 32, NTFS,
2.6 Hard Disk Interface: Features of IDE, SCSI, PATA, SATA, Cables
& Jumpers.
2.7 CD ROM Drive: Construction, recording.(Block diagram)
2.8 DVD: Construction, Recording. (Block Diagram)
2.9 Blue-ray Disc specification.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
Hrs.
Marks
12
24
08
24
17428
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3
4
5
6
‘G’ Scheme
Display Devices & Interfacing
Objective
 To understand the construction and working of display devices
like CRT, LCD.
 To understand the Interfacing of above devices to PC.
3.1 CRT: - Block diagram & working of monochrome & colour Monitor
3.2 Characteristics of CRT Monitor :DOT Pitch, Resolution, Horizontal Scanning frequency, Vertical
scanning frequency, Interlaced Scanning, Non-Interfaced scanning,
Aspect ratio.
3.3 LCD Monitor: - Functional Block Diagram of LCD monitor,
working principle, Passive matrix, Active matrix LCD display.
3.4 Touch Screen Display – The construction and working principle
3.4 Plasma Display Technology: - Construction & working principle.
3.5 Basic Block Diagram of Video Accelerator card
Input and Output Devices
Objective
 To understand the construction and working of Input /Output
Devices.
 To understand the Interfacing of the above peripherals.
4.1 Keyboard: Types of key switches: Membrane, Mechanical, Rubber
dome, Capacitive, optoelectronic and interfacing.
4.2 Mouse: Opto-mechanical, optical ( New design)
4.3 Scanner: Flat Bed, Sheet-fed, Handheld: Block diagram of flat Bed
and specifications, OCR, TWAIN, Resolution, Interpolation.
4.4 Modem: Internal and External: Block diagram and specifications.
4.5 Printer: Printer Characteristics, Dot matrix, Inkjet, Laser: block
diagram and specifications.
Power Supplies
Objective
 To understand the working of SMPS.
 To understand the power problems.
5.1 Block diagram and working of SMPS.
5.2 Signal description and pin-out diagram of AT and ATX connectors
5.3 Power supply characteristics: Rated wattage, Efficiency, Regulation,
Ripple, Load regulation, Line regulation.
5.4 Power problems: Blackout, Brownout, surges and spikes.
5.5 Symptoms of power problems.
5.6 Protection devices: circuit breaker, surge suppressor.
5.7 Uninterrupted Power Supply, ONline and OFFline UPS, working of
UPS: Block diagram, advantages and disadvantages, Ratings
Interfaces
Objective
 To understand the ports of PC.
 To understand interfacing techniques of devices to ports
6.1 SCSI, SCSI cables and connectors, SCSI drive configuration.
6.2 USB features.
6.3 RS 232 : (Voltages and 9 pin description)
6.4 Centronics (interface diagram, important signals and timing
waveform)
6.5 Firewire features
6.6 Blue tooth
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
06
12
06
12
04
08
06
12
17428
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
7
‘G’ Scheme
PC Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Tools.
Objective
 To understand the preventive maintenance of PC
 To understand the diagnostic tools of PC
7.1 POST: POST sequence, Beep codes, visual display codes.
7.2 Preventive maintenance: Active, Passive, periodic maintenance
procedure.
7.3 Diagnostic Tools: logic Analyzer, logic probe.
7.4 Diagnostic software for trouble shooting PC.
BGA workstation and its applications for reballing of north bridge
and south bridge
Total
06
08
48
100
PRACTICAL:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
 Understanding basic hardware of computer
 Fault finding of input/output devices.
 Troubleshooting of input/output devices
 Proper connection of input/output devices.
Motor Skills:
 Proper handling of Computer System Hardware.
List of Practical:
01. Identify and draw the motherboard layout of Intel i3 processor and understand connection
and layout of the H67 or P67chipset.
02. Perform Basic Input/output System (BIOS) setting and configuration setup using
Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS).
03. Format, partition and install a Hard Disk Drive (HDD) and format a pen drive.
04. Understand layout, characteristics and functions of different components of Hard
Disk Drive (HDD) as a storage device.
05. Install Video Graphics Array (VGA) or Super Video Graphics Array (SVGA) display
cards.
06. Install and understand the working of printer.
07. Install and understand the working of Input/output devices such as scanner and modem.
08. Connect Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) and identify different parts of SMPS.
Understand the working of SMPS and Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).
09. Use diagnostic software to identify installed computer peripherals and test their working
condition.
10. Find faults related to Monitor, CPU, Hard disk, Printer and other peripherals.
11. Form a pico net using Bluetooth devices and transfer data.
12. Assemble PC and install an operating system.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17428
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Scott Muller
Upgrading & Repairing PCs
Pearson
02
Mark Minasi
The Complete PC Upgrade &
Maintenance guide
Wiley India
03
Barry Press and
Maricia Press
PC Upgrade and Repair
Wiley India
04
Begelow
Bigelow’s Troubleshooting,
Maintaining & Repairing PCs
Tata McGraw Hill
05
Mike Meyers Scott
Jernigan
Managing & Troubleshooting PCs
Tata McGraw Hill
06
D.Balasubramanian
Computer Installation & Servicing
Tata McGraw Hill
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17428
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Computer Engineering Group
Course Code
: CO/CD/CM/CW
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Computer Network
Subject Code
: 17429
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The world in the information era has become network centric. A Computer networks has
been growing with rapid technological progress. Computer communication through networking
becomes essential part of our life. We can manage many application like Air Line Reservation,
Railway Reservation, E-banking, E-Governance, On-Line shopping, E-learning etc. by clicking
mouse button from our own place. Because of this, world become the global village. By
considering importance of networking towards all aspects of our life, we here introduce basic
concept of networks, network classification, network topologies, network devices, Transmission
media, Network reference models, concept of TCP/IP.
This knowledge explores the student for understanding current network management
technology.
Objectives:
To develop following skills:
Intellectual Skills:
 Understand network & can identifying benefits of networks.
 Understand and describe communication media.
 Compare different types of Topology.
 Compare different types of network devices.
 Compare OSI and TCP/IP protocol suite.
 Configuration of TCP/IP
Motor Skills:
1. Able to handle Computer Network.
2. To develop a small Computer Network.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 15/06/2012
13
17429
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Apply the basic principle of computer network in the application
for network management, network troubleshooting, etc.
Follow step by step procedure to install TCP/IP Protocols and
TCP/IP configuration.
Principle of TCP/IP reference model
Principle
Principle of OSI reference model
Concepts
Fact
Types of
Topology
Computer
Network and
Benefits
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 15/06/2012
Types of Network
Devices
Classification of
Network
14
Types of
Transmission
Media
Network
Features
17429
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents: Theory
Topic
1
2
3
Content
Hours
BASIC NETWORK CONCEPTS
Objectives: Basic Concept of Network.
 Classification of Network.
 Benefits of Network.
1.1 Fundamentals of Computer Network- Definition Need of
Computer Network, Applications, Component of Computer
Network.
08
1.2 Network Benefits- Sharing Information(File Sharing, E-mail)
- Sharing Resources (Printer Sharing, Application Services)
- Facilitating Centralized Management-Managing Software,
Maintaining the Network, Backing up data
1.3 Computer Network Classifications- Classification of Network by
their Geography.-PAN, CAN, LAN, MAN, WAN
1.4 Classification of Network by their Component Role--Peer-to-Peer
Network, Server-Based Network, Types of server
NETWORK TOPOLOGIES AND NETWORKING DEVICES
Objectives: Topology Concepts.
 Different types of Topology.
 Network Control Devices.
2.1 Network Topologies - Introduction, Definition, Selection
Criteria, Types of Topology- i) Bus ii) Ring iii) Star iv)
10
Mesh v) Tree vi) Hybrid.
2.2 Network Control / Connecting Devices - Need of Network
Control devices, Role of Network Control devices in a
Network, Connectors, Hub, Repeater, Bridges, Switches,
Router, Gateway, Modem.
2.3 Network software: NIC Device Driver, client-server
software eg. telnet, ftp
TRANSMISSION MEDIA
Objectives: Concept of Guided and Unguided Transmission Media.
 Types of Guided Media.
 Types of Unguided Media.
3.1 Introduction – Need of Transmission Media, Selection Criteria.
3.2 Types of Transmission Media- 1) Guided Media: Cable
Characteristics, Types of Cable-Twisted Pair Cable, Co-axial
10
Cable, Fiber Optic Cable. 2) Unguided media: Types of
Communication Band-Microwave Communication, Radio wave
Communication, Satellite Communication, Infrared
Communication.
3.3 Latest Technologies in Wireless Network-Bluetooth Architecture,
Wi-Fi, Wi- Max.
3.4 Cellular (Mobile) Telephone – Band in Cellular Telephony, Calls
using Mobile Phones, Transmitting receiving / Handoff operations.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 15/06/2012
15
Marks
20
20
20
17429
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
OSI Reference Model
Objectives: Concept of Reference Model.
 OSI Reference Model Concept.
 Layers of OSI Reference Model.
4.1 Introduction– Layered Architecture , Peer-to- Peer ProcessesInterfaces between Layer, Protocols, Organization of the Layers,
Encapsulation.
4.2 Layers of the OSI Reference Model (Functions of each Layer &
Protocols used) – Physical Layer, Data-Link Layer, Network
Layer, Transport Layer, Session Layer, Presentation Layer,
Application Layer.
TCP / IP SUITE
Objectives: TCP/ IP Model Concept.
 Defining/functioning of different Layers of TCP / IP suite.
5.1 Introduction –Addressing mechanism in the Internet
5.2 IP Addressing – IP Address classes, classless IP addressing,
Subnetting, supernetting, Masking,
5.3Layered Structure of the TCP / IP Model – Host-to-Network,
Internet, Transport, Application
5.4 TCP / IP Protocol Suite : Host-to-Network-SLIP and PPP, Internet
Layer-ARP,RARP and IP: Introduction, IPv4, IPv6 ( Header
Format), Difference between IPv4 & IPv6.
Transport Layer- TCP and UDP ( Frame Format,port
addresses),
Application Layer- FTP, SMTP, DNS.
5.5 Comparision between OSI and TCP / IP Network Model.
Total
4
5
08
18
12
22
48
100
List of Practical:
Sr. No.
Title of Experiment
No. of Hours
1
To observe Components of Network in your Computer Network
Lab. (To know your Network Lab.)
04
2
To understand network features
04
3
4
To connect and understand different Transmission Media and
Network Control devices.
To Prepare a Straight Cable and Network Cross over Cable and test
by Line Tester.
04
04
5
To install a network interface card
04
6
To Connect Computers in Star Topology using Wired Media and
any Network control Device..
06
7
To connect two hubs/switch by creating crossover connection
04
8
To Configure Peer-to-Peer Network.
06
9
To Share Printer and Folder in Network.
04
10
To Install TCP/IP Protocols (Version 4 and version 6) and configure
advanced features of TCP/IP Protocols.
04
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 15/06/2012
16
17429
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
11
12
13
14
‘G’ Scheme
Install Wireshark software to capture packet and Configure it to
capture Ethernet packet. Verify Ethernet frame structure and its 48
bit address.
To Run Basic TCP/IP Utilities and Network Commands with all
options.(Ping, Ping ::1, ipconfig, Tracert, Netstat, Wireshark, ARP,
NBTSTAT.EXE, WINIPCFG.EXE),capture TCP, UDP,IP, ARP,
ICMP, Telnet, FTP packets using Wireshark packet sniffer software
To understand Subnet Masking and create two subnets
06
06
04
To visit server room and prepare report on
1. Proxy Server
2. Server Configuration
3. Router Configuration
4. Firewall Configuration
5. Network setup details (Topology, Back up, IP range,
network software, UPS)
TOTAL
04
64
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
1
2
3
Title
Data Communications and
Networks
Data Communications and
Networking (Forth Edition)
Complete Reference
Networking
Author
Publisher
Achyut S. Godbole
Tata McGraw Hill
Behrouz A. Forouzan
Tata McGraw Hill
Craig Zacker
Tata McGraw Hill
4
Computer Networking
Tularam M Bansod
Dreamtech Press
5
Networking + Certification
(Second Edition)
Microsoft Press
PHI(Prentice-Hall of India
Private Limited)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 15/06/2012
17
17429
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Computer Engineering Group
Course Code : CO/CD/CM/CW/IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Microprocessor and Programming
Subject Code : 17431
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Microprocessor is brain of computer. Intel family is widely used all over the world. 8085 is
the 8-bit CPU and 8086 is the 16-bit CPU. 8086 is the base of all upward developed processors. It
is more powerful and efficient computing machine. It overcomes all major limitations of the
previous processors. It is able to get interfaced with 8-bit, 16-bit systems. IBM PC is introduced in
1980 with 10MB hard disk, one double side double density floppy disk drive, KBD, monitor and
asynchronous communications adapter.
This subject covers Basics of 8085, architecture of 8086 along instruction set. It also covers
assembly language programming with effective use of procedure and macros. This will act as base
for the advanced assembly language programming for next generation microprocessors.
General objectives:
Students will be able to:
1. Understand the execution of instructions in pipelining and address generation.
2. Write syntax of given instructions.
3. Apply instructions in Assembly Language Program for different problem statements.
4. Use the procedures and macros in assembly language programming.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17431
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedures
Principles
Concepts
Facts
Enable students to design 8086 based Assembly Language Programs and
efficient Assembly Language Program using procedures and macros.
8086
Microprocessor
Operations
Coding, assembling,
syntax error removal
Principle of writing
Statements
Principle of
digital design
Hardware
Debugging, logical
error removal,
execution of program
Assembler, Linker,
Debugger, Editor
Addressing modes
Software instruction
syntax rules, logic
development
Microprocessor, Signals, Registers, Buses, Stack, Memory
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17431
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory
Name of Topics
Topic 1: Basics of Microprocessor
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Draw the architecture of 8085
 Define the functions of different pins of 8085
 Identify status of different flags
1.1 Evolution of Microprocessor and types
1.2 8085 Microprocessor,
 Salient features
 Pin description,
 Architecture of 8085 - Functional Block diagram,
 Register organization,
Topic 2 :16 Bit Microprocessor: 8086
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Define the functions of different pins
 Draw functional block diagram of 8086
 Understand the operating modes of 8086
2.1 8086 Microprocessor,
 Salient features
 Pin descriptions
 Architecture of 8086 - Functional Block diagram
 Register organization,
 Concepts of pipelining,
 Memory segmentation
 Physical memory addresses generation.
2.2 Operating Modes of 8086
 8284 Clock Generator
 8288 Bus Controller
 74LS245 Bi-directional Buffer
 74LS373 Octal Latch
 Minimum Mode operation and its timing diagram
 Maximum Mode operation and its timing diagram
Topic 3 : Instruction Set of 8086 Microprocessor
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Understand the different types of instructions
 Identify the addressing modes of instructions
 State the operation of an instructions
3.1 Machine Language Instruction format,
addressing modes
3.2 Instruction set, Groups of Instructions
 Arithmetic Instructions
 Logical Instructions
 Data transfer instructions
 Bit manipulation instructions
 String Operation Instructions,
 Program control transfer or branching Instructions
 Process control Instructions
Topic 4 :The Art of Assembly Language Programming
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
Hours Marks
04
08
12
24
10
20
04
08
17431
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Know the program development steps
 Use the different program development tools
 Illustrate the functions of assembler directive and operators
4.1 Program development steps
 Defining problem,
 Writing Algorithms
 Flowchart
 Initialization checklist
 Choosing instructions
 Converting algorithms to assembly language programs.
4.2 Assembly Language Programming Tools
 Editors
 Assembler
 Linker
 Debugger.
4.3 Assembler directives and Operators
Topic 5: 8086 Assembly Language Programming.
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Write a appropriate programs using editor
 Run program using assembler and linker
 Debug program using debugger
5.1 Model of 8086 assembly language programs
5.2 Programming using assembler  Arithmetic operations on Hex and BCD numbers - Addition,
Subtraction, Multiplication and Division
 Sum of Series
 Smallest and Largest numbers from array
 Sorting numbers in Ascending and Descending order
 Finding ODD/EVEN numbers in the array
 Finding Positive and Negative Numbers in array
 Block transfer
 String Operations - Length, Reverse, Compare, Concatenation, Copy
 Count Numbers of ‘1’ and ‘0’ in 8/16 bit number
 BCD to Hex and Hex to BCD number conversion
Topic 6 : Procedure and Macro in Assembly Language Program
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Understand the purpose of procedure and macros
 Use procedure and macros
6.1 Procedure
 Defining Procedure - Directives used, FAR and NEAR
 CALL and RET instructions.
 Reentrant and Recursive procedures.
 Assembly Language Programs using Procedure
6.2 Defining Macros.
 Assembly Language Programs using Macros.
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
12
24
06
16
48
100
17431
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual skills:
 Use of programming language constructs in program implementation.
 To be able to apply different logics to solve given problem.
 To be able to write program using different implementations for the same problem
 Study different types of errors as syntax semantic, fatal, linker & logical
 Debugging of programs
 Understanding different steps to develop program such as
 Problem definition
 Analysis
 Design of logic
 Coding
 Testing
 Maintenance (Modifications, error corrections, making changes etc.)
Motor Skills:
 Proper handling of Computer System.
Practicals:
List of Practical:
1. Identify the Assembly Language programming tools like Assembler, linker, debugger,
editor.
2. Write an Assembly Language Program to add / subtract two 16 bit numbers.
3. Write an ALP to find sum of series of numbers.
4. Write an ALP to multiply two 16 bit unsigned/ signed numbers.
5. Write an ALP to divide two unsigned/ signed numbers (32/16 , 16/8, 16/16, 8/8 )
6. Write an ALP to add / Sub / multiply / Divide two BCD numbers.
7. Write an ALP to find smallest/ largest number from array of n numbers.
8. Write an ALP to arrange numbers in array in ascending/ descending order.
9. Write an ALP to perform block transfer data using string instructions / without using string
instructions.
10. Write an ALP to compare two strings using string instructions / without using string
instructions.
11. Write an ALP to display string in reverse order, string length, Concatenation of two strings.
12. Write an ALP to convert Hex to Decimal, Decimal to Hex.
Learning Resources
1. Books
Sr.
No.
1.
Name of Book
Microprocessor & interfacing
(programming & hardware)
Revised Second Edition
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Author
Douglas V. Hall
22
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
17431
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2.
Microprocessor Architecture,
Programming and Applications with
the 8085
Ramesh S. Gaonkar
Penram International
Publishing (India)
3.
The 8088 and 8086 Microprocessors
Walter A. Triebel, Avtar
Singh
Pearson Publications
4.
The 8086.8088 Family, Design,
Programming, and Interfacing
John Uffenback
PHI
2. Websites:
www.intel.com
www.pcguide.com/ref/CPU
www.CPU-World.com/Arch/
www.techsource .com / engineering- parts/microprocessor.html
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17431
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Computer Engineering Group
Course Code
: CO/CD/CM/CW/IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Object Oriented Programming
Subject Code
: 17432
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The ability to organize & process information is key to success in modern age. Object
Oriented Programming has become the most preferred approach for software projects. It offers a
new and powerful way to cope up with complexity of real world problems. Among the OOP
languages available, C++ is one of the most widely used language.
Instead of viewing program as a series of steps to be carried out, OOP approach views it as
a group of objects that have certain properties & can take appropriate actions.
Object Oriented Concepts like inheritance, polymorphism, data abstraction and
encapsulation etc. requires knowledge of C++, which also acting as base for programming
languages like Java, Object Oriented Modeling & Designing (OOMD), VC++.
Objectives:
To develop following skills:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Understand the concepts of OOP.
2. Implement programs based on OOP concepts.
3. Understand basic fundamentals of C++.
4. Develop small software applications using C++.
Motor Skills:
1. Proper Handling of Computer System.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17432
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Develop any Software Application using C++
Application
Procedures
Concepts
Facts
Coding
OOP Features
Debugging
(Error Removing)
Execution of
Program
Syntax Rules
Semantics Rules
Logic
Development
Operators, Keywords, Input Expressions, Output Expressions
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17432
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic
No
1
2
3
4
5
Contents
Principles of Object Oriented Programming
Objectives:
 State OOP’s basic Concepts.
 Difference between OOP & POP.
 C++ Programming structure.
1.1 Its need & requirement, Procedure Oriented Programming (POP)
verses Object Oriented Programming (OOP), Basic concepts of
Object Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Languages,
Applications of OOP.
1.2 Beginning with C++: What is C++? , keywords, variables,
constants basic data types, operators, scope resolution operator,
memory management operators, console input/output, structure
of C++ program.
Classes & Objects:
Objectives:
 Defining classes & objects.
 Declaring & using static data member & static member
function, friend function.
 Programs based on classes & objects.
2.1 Structures in C++.
2.2 Class & Object: Introduction, specifying a class, access specifies,
defining member functions, creating Objects, memory allocations
for objects.
2.3 Array of Objects, Object as function arguments.
2.4 Static data members, static member function, friend Function
Constructors & Destructors
Objectives:
 State Concepts of constructor & destructor, types of
constructor.
 Programs based on constructor & destructors
3.1 Concepts of Constructors, Types of constructors:
Default, Parameterized, Copy.
3.2 Overloaded Constructors :Multiple Constructors in a Class,
Constructors with default arguments.
3.3 Destructors.
Inheritance: Concept of Reusability
Objectives:
 Concept of Inheritance & its types.
 Types of Visibility modes.
 Programs based on Inheritance.
4.1 Introduction, defining a derived class, visibility modes &
effects.
4.2 Types of Inheritance : Single, multilevel, multiple,
hierarchical, hybrid
4.3 Virtual base class, abstract class, constructors in derived class.
Pointers in C++
Objectives:
 Declare Pointer & Pointer arithmetic.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
Hours
Marks
06
12
08
20
08
14
08
20
10
18
17432
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
6
‘G’ Scheme
 Pointer to Arrays, string & Object.
 “this” pointer concept.
5.1 Concepts of Pointer: Pointer declaration, Pointer operator,
address operator, Pointer arithmetic.
5.2 Pointer to Array: Searching, Insertion, deletion
5.3 Pointer to String: Searching, finding length, comparisons,
concatenation, reverse
5.4 Pointer to Object: Pointer to Object, this pointer, Pointer to
derived class.
Polymorphism
Objectives:
 Polymorphism concept & its types.
 Program for overloading operators & functions.
6.1 Introduction, Types of polymorphism: Compile time, Run time
6.2 Compile time Polymorphism: Function overloading, operator
overloading: Overloading unary and binary operators, Rules for
operator overloading.
6.3 Run time polymorphism: Virtual functions, rules for virtual
functions, pure virtual function.
Total
08
16
48
100
List of Practical:
Sr. No.
Title of Experiment
1
Write a program to Input & Output data for exchanging values of two variables.
2
Develop a program to declare a class ‘person’ having data members name, age &
salary. Accept and display this data for one object.
3
Write a program to declare a class ‘employee’ having data members name and age.
Accept and display the data for three objects.
4
Write a program to show how static member is shared by multiple objects of the same
class.
5
Develop a program to find out the mean value of a given number using friend
function.
6
Develop a program to print student details of ‘stud’ class using constructor and
destructor
7
Write a program to find prime number using default argument in constructor
8
Write a program to find out the payroll system using single level inheritance.
9
A. Write a program to find student details using multiple inheritance.
B. Write a program to compute total marks of student using virtual base class.
10
Write a program to evaluate the largest number of an array using pointer
11
Write a program to search a character in a string using pointer.
12
Write a program to input and display code and price for two items using pointer to
object.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17432
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
13
Write a program to display roll_no and name of student using ‘this’ pointer.
14
Write a program to using function overloading to calculate volume of cube, cylinder &
rectangular box
15
Write a program to overload unary ‘--‘ operator
16
Write a program to display the output using the virtual function.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
Title
Publisher
1
E Balagurusamy
Object oriented Programming with C++
Mc Graw Hill
2
Rajesh K. Shukla
Object oriented Programming in C++
Wiley India
3
B. M. Harwani
C++ for Beginners
SPD
4
Robert Lafore
Object Oriented Programming in C++ (4th
edition)
Pearson
2. CDs, PPTs Etc.:
www.vikaspublishing.com/teachermanual.aspx (PPTs available)
www.pearsoned.co.in/prc (After Registration resources are available)
3. Websites:
www.cplusplus.com
www.learncpp.com
www.sourcecodesworld.com
www.softeam.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17432
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Computer Engineering Group
Course Code : CO/CD/CM/CW
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Computer Graphics
Subject Code : 17056
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
--
--
50#
--
[email protected]
75
Rationale:
In recent trend, every computer system interacts with the user through a graphical user
interface. User can understand the information in both textual and graphical format. Computer
Graphics is the study of techniques to improve communication between human and machine.
Computer Graphics is one of the most existing, rapidly growing computer fields. The word
Computer Graphics means pictures, graphics or scene drawn with the help of a computer system.
After studying this subject, a learner will be able to work with 2-dimensional, 3-dimensional
graphics, multimedia and animation techniques. It is also useful in many fields such as Engineering
drawing, graphics, architectural design, video games and animations.
General Objectives:
To develop following skills:
Intellectual Skills:
 Specifically develop the logic and algorithms for developing basic graphics software.
 Use of programming language constructs in program implementation.
 To be able to apply different logics to solve given problem.
 To be able to write program using different implementations for the same problem
 Study different types of errors such as syntax, semantic, fatal, linker & logical
 Debugging of programs
 Understanding different steps to develop program such as
o Problem definition
o Analysis
o Design of logic
o Coding
o Testing
o Maintenance (Modifications, error corrections, making changes etc.)
Motor Skills:
 Ability to handle keyboard efficiently.
 Ability to use input and output devices.
 Ability to execute C programs.
 Ability to handle computer system carefully.
 Ability to understand Color combinations.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17056
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principles
Concepts
New tool for the Artist & Animator using graphics
Hardware & Software
Coding and Debugging
Execution of program
Principles of Computer Graphics to convey the information in the graphics
form on the display screen.
Concept of
windowing &
clipping
Concept of
drawing natural
objects
Concepts of
implementing
Transfer Technique
Concept of Line, Circle &
Polygon generation
Fact
Graphical function of C
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17056
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Content:
Topic
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Contents
Basics of Computer Graphics
Objectives :
Demonstrate text mode and graphics mode.
1.1 Raster scan display:
1.2 Primitive operations: - moveto, lineto
1.3 Graphics file formats: Basics, advantages, disadvantages
– BMP – GIF – JPEG – TIFF – PCX
1.4 Graphics Mode Functions- Text mode, Graphic mode
Shapes, colors,
Line, circle, and polygon.
Objectives:
Draw Lines using various algorithms.
Generate circle with various algorithms.
Draw polygons and demonstrate their filling procedures
2.1 Basic concepts in line drawing, Line drawing algorithms: DDA
algorithms, Bresenham’s algorithm
2.2 Circle generating algorithms: Symmetry of circle, DDA circle drawing
algorithm, Bresenham’s circle drawing algorithm,
2.3 Polygons – Types of polygons, inside –outside test, Polygon filling: Flood
fill, Scanline algorithm.
Transformations
Objectives:
Demonstrate 2D transformation techniques
Demonstrate 3D transformation techniques.
3.1 2D Transformation: Scaling, Reflection, Shearing, Rotation,
Translation, Rotation about an arbitrary point
3.2 3D Transformation: Scaling, Rotation, Translation, Rotation about
arbitrary axis
Windowing & clipping
Objectives:
Operate on various clipping algorithms.
Summarize the different transformations.
4.1 Line clipping: Cohen-Sutherland Line clipping algorithm,
Midpoint subdivision algorithm (06 Marks)
4.2 Polygon clipping: Sutherland – Hodgeman Polygon clipping algorithm.
Curves and Fractals
Objectives:
Draw various curves
Predict various fractal types.
5.1 Curve generation: Arc generation using DDA algorithm,
Interpolation, Approximation, B-Spline, Bezier curves:
5.2 Curves Fractals: Hilbert’s Curve, Koch curve, Fractal lines, Fractal
Surfaces.
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
Hours
02
04
04
03
03
16
17056
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Practical:
Sr.
No.
No. of
Hours
Title of Experiment
Implement DDA algorithm and Bresennham’s algorithm for line
drawing.
Implement DDA algorithm and Bresennham’s algorithm of circle
drawing.
1
2
02
02
3
Implement Flood fill algorithm for Polygon filling.
02
4
Implement scan-line algorithm for polygon filling.
02
5
Write Program for 2-D transformations -> scaling, Rotation
03
6
Write Program for 2 D transformations -> shearing and Translation
program
03
7
Write and implement program for rotation about an arbitrary point
03
8
Implement Cohen- Sutherland algorithm for line clipping.
03
9
Implement midpoint subdivision algorithm for line clipping.
03
10
Implement Sutherland-Hodgeman algorithm for polygon clipping.
03
11
Write a program to draw a curve using Bezier’s algorithm
03
12
Write a program to draw fractal lines.
03
List of Practical oriented Projects:
1) Oral geometry insertion for character animation (Develop a system to create an animated
mouth in head geometry)
2) Online storyboarding system (Create a system that will keep still images, text
descriptions, sample animations, sample audio for each scene of an animation)
Learning Recourses:
1. Books:
Sr. No
01
02
03
04
Book Title
Computer Graphics
Fundamentals of Computer
Graphics- 3rd Edition
Computer Graphics (With
CD)
Computer Graphics
Author
Publication
M.Pauline Baker &
Donald Hearn
Pearson
Peter Shirley
SPD – AK Peters
Rajesh Maurya
Wiley India
Apurva Desai
PHI
2. Websites:
1) http://www.graphics.cornell.edu/online/tutorial/
2) www.graphics.standard.edu
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17056
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
3) www.cmp.uea.ac.uk/research
4) www.computerarts.co.uk
3. Magazines:
1) Computer Graphics World
2) In-plant Graphics
3) Computer Arts
Demo lectures with power point presentations using LCD projector should be arranged to develop
programming concepts amongst students.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17056
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Computer Engineering Group
Course Code : CO/CD/CM/CW/IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17042
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Our world is witnessing a measure change in communication pattern with expansion of
industrial sphere, as industries demanding more competitive and challenging students.
To create multicultural working professionals, student must have positive attitude,
confidence, and ability to communicate in addition to basic technological skill.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to diploma
holder to undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. The semester is planned
with expert lectures, seminar on technical topics and soft skills, group discussion along with mini
project.
Objectives:
Intellectual Skills:
Students should be able to:
1. Acquire the knowledge from different resources.
2. Present a given topic effectively in a seminar and build a stage-daring.
3. Interact with colleague through group discussion.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17042
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To manage and present information effectively, build stage daring, working
with team members and execute project successfully.
Procedure
Search information
on internet, journals,
and books
Use of power point for
presentation, observing
group discussion
Identify guest lectures
from industry,
professional consultancy
Principle
Use of appropriate
styles, key word
phrases
Group formation,
mechanism, time
allocation techniques
Principles of coding,
use of GUI, menus and
login controls
Initiating
communication,
leadership
Converting ideas into
output, modeling,
designing
Concept
Fact
Organizing data,
report
Information, Seminar, Group Discussion, Project and Guest Lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17042
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
Activity
1
2
3
4
Name of Activity
Lectures by professional, industrial experts to be organized from
following or any other suitable technical areas.
[Any two]: 1. Advanced technical writing skill
2. SAP modules and career.
3. Career trends in computer / IT field
4. Intelligent computer system.
5. Advanced trends in hardware technology.
6. Advanced programming languages in IT field.
7. Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
Information Search:Form group of 6 students. Information should be collected from
internet, news papers, journals, book etc.
Each student should submit write-up about 8-10 pages from following
allocated topic or any other suitable topic suggested by teacher.
1. Human machine interface
2. Dynamic languages
3. Robotic surgery
4. Virtual keyboard
5. Wireless USB
6. Concept of cloud computing
7. Bubble sensing
8. Blu – ray disc
9. Or any other suitable topic
Seminar:Form a group of 6 students and deliver seminar on any one of the
following technical topic or any other suitable subject topic suggested by
teacher for 10 minutes. Seminar should be presented in power point
presentation. Students should draw notes about 8-10 pages on respected
topic.
1. Trouble shooting methods for various computer peripherals.
2. Viruses / antivirus and firewalls [checkpoints]
3. Protocols suits: - SLIP and PPP, ARP, IP- V6, ICMP-V6, TCP &
UDP [each protocol may be separate topic].
4. Stream classes in C++.
5. Exception handling in C++.
6. Pointers in C++.
7. Interrupts useful for microprocessor programming.
8. Or any other suitable topic.
Group Discussion:Form a group of 6 students. Teacher should allocate a topic from the
following list or any other suggested topic and do the group discussion
for 10 minutes.
1. Is china a threat to the Indian software industry?
2. Education is only business in these days.
3. Is male and female equal in all aspects?
4. Opinion about reservation in education sector.
5. Boom in retail sector?
6. Whether software is dominant over hardware or vice-versa?
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
Hours
04
06
16
12
17042
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
‘G’ Scheme
7. Or any other topic.
Mini Projects / Activities:Form a group of 6 students. Teacher should allocate a topic for mini
project from the following topics or any other suggest topic and develop
the mini project.
1. Web site development system.
2. Database management system project
3. Animation project using C and C++.
4. System project using front end and back end.
5. Game designing.
6. Assembly of computer system and installation of application
software.
Total
10
48
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr. No.
Title
1.
Fourth semester subjects reference books
2.
Journals and magazines – IEEE Journals, IT technologies.
3.
Local news papers and events
4.
Apprenticeship Training Scheme:- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
2. Websites:
1. http://www.wikipedia.com
2. http://www.seminarforyou.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
17042
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
38
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN FASHIONION & CLOTHING TECHNOLOGY
COURSE CODE : DC
DURATION OF COURSE : SIX SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies $
Colouration of Textiles
Knitted Fabric Design &
Technology
Clothing Production
Machinery & Equipment
Indian Western Costume
CAD in Textile Design
Professional Practices-II
Industrial Training
Abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
EST
COT
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
TW (9)
Max
Min
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
17401
17458
01
03
---
02
04
01
03
50#*
100
20
40
-50#
-20
---
---
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
10
KFD
17459
03
--
02
03
100
40
--
--
25#
10
[email protected]
10
CPM
17460
04
--
04
03
100
40
50#
20
--
--
[email protected]
10
IWC
CTD
PPS
ITR
17461
17049
17050
17051
TOTAL
04
---15
------
-02
03
**
17
03
-----
100
---450
40
-----
----100
------
----25
------
[email protected]
[email protected]
-175
-10
20
---
SW
(17400)
50
50
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 32 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks: 800
@ Internal Assessment, # External Assessment, #* Online Examination,
No Theory Examination, $ Common to All Conventional Diploma,
** Industrial training for six weeks to be completed during summer break after Fourth semester. Assessment to be done in Fifth Semester
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Termwork, SW- Sessional Work.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subject are to be converted out of 100 marks as
sessional work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/AU/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects, pollution
control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept of Carbon credit
and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and resultant
of forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Fact
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest, Water,
Food, Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources, effects,
prevention
Classification
of pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon Credit,
Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13


‘G’ Scheme
Threats to biodiversity
Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc.
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fashion & Clothing Technology
Course Code : DC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Colouration of Textiles
Subject Code : 17458
Teaching & Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
To introduce students to the basic information on commercial dyes and dyeing techniques
and Machinery used in industry for dyeing fibres yarn and fabrics. Students will develop an
understanding for various traditional modern method of printing and finishing
Objective:
To make the students well versed with theoretical aspects as well as industrial procedures at
various stages of wet processing such as Dyeing, Printing & Finishing.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17458 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
CONTENTS: Theory
Chapter
1
2
3
Contents
Preparation of fabrics:
Specific objectives:
Students will be able to understand
 Importance and Objects of preparatory processes before
textile colouration.
 Method of evaluation for preparatory processes.
1.1 Introduction to wet processing of textiles,
1.2 Impurities in grey fabric,
1.3 Importance of preparation of fabrics,
1.4 Mechanical cleaning of fabrics,
- Objects of shearing & cropping and singeing.
- Introduction to shearing, cropping & singeing machines
used in industry.
1.5 Object of Grey Inspection, Inspection machines, Criteria for
rejection,
1.6 Objects of wet preparatory processes viz. desizing, scouring,
bleaching and mercerization.
1.7 Enzymatic method of desizing & scouring of cotton.
1.8 Evaluation of efficiency of desizing & scouring.
1.9 Bleaching of cotton with Hydrogen peroxide.
- Measurement of whiteness index using CCM.
Dyeing process & machinery:
Specific objectives:
Students will be able to understand
 Procedure for dyeing different textile substrates.
 Working of important dyeing machinery.
2.1 Definition of dye, pigment, percentage shade, exhaustion,
expression.
2.2 Dye selection for various textile substrates,
2.3 Important steps involved in dyeing of cellulosics with direct,
sulphur, vat and reactive dyes and azoic colours.
2.4 Dyeing of polyester with disperse dye by HTHP & Thermosol
method,
2.5 Dyeing of P/C blend,
2.6 Concept of dyeing cotton with natural dyes,
2.7 Working of Jigger, Winch and Padding Mangle.
Printing Methods:
Specific objectives:
Students will be able to understand
 Difference between dyeing and printing.
 Various styles and methods of printing.
 Procedure for printing different textile substrates
3.1 Objects,
3.2 Difference between dyeing & printing,
3.3 Important print paste ingredients & their functions,
3.4 Introduction to Direct, discharge and resist style of printing
on cotton with reactive & on polyester with disperse dyes.
3.5 Methods of printing
- Tie & dye,
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
Hours
Marks
12
24
12
24
10
20
17458 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
- Batik,
- Block printing,
- Screen printing.
Printing Machines
Specific objectives:
Students will be able to understand
 Working of printing machinery.
 Modern print effects used in garment industry.
4.1 Working of table printing,
- Flat bed printing,
- Rotary printing,
4.2 Advantages & limitations.
4.3 Specialty prints:
- Flock printing,
- Pearl printing,
- Foam prints,
- Foil printing.
4.4 Concept of Ink jet printing technique.
Evaluation of fastness properties
Specific objectives:
Students will be able to understand
 Method for evaluation of fastness properties.
 Norms for fastness properties.
5.1 Importance of evaluating fastness properties of dyed and
printed textiles,
5.2 General method for evaluating
- Wash fastness
- Rubbing fastness,
- Perspiration fastness,
- Light fastness and
- Sublimation fastness.
TOTAL
4
5
10
20
04
12
48
100
NOTE - Complete syllabus is restructured and sub topics are detailed. O additions & deletions are
made
Practical:
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Practicals
Identification of textile fibres by burning and solubility test.
Desizing of cotton fabric using enzymatic method.
Scouring of cotton fabric using alkali and enzymes.
Bleaching of cotton fabric using Hydrogen peroxide and measurement of
whiteness index on CCM.
Dyeing of cotton with direct dye.
Dyeing of Cotton with reactive dye.
Dyeing of cotton with Vat dye.
Dyeing of cotton with Sulphur dye.
Dyeing of cotton with Natural dye.
Determination of colour fastness to washing.and rubbing.
Traditional printing using azoic colours – Batick and tie and dye.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
17458 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
12
13
14
15
16
‘G’ Scheme
Direct style of printing on cotton using reactive dyes.
Discharge style of printing on reactive dyed cotton fabric.
Direct style of printing on polyester using disperse dye.
Foam printing & pearl printing on garments.
Visit to process house
Note: Each above practical for 3 hrs.
References:
Author
V. A. Shenai
V. A. Shenai
V. A. Shenai
V. A. Shenai
Title
Textile Fibres
Technology of
Dyeing
Technology of
Printing
Technology of
Finishing
Year of
Publication
1996
Place of
Publication & & Publisher
Sevak Publications , 306, Shree Hanuman
Industrial Estate, G. D. Ambedkar Road,
Wadala, Mumba-31
1996
---Do----
1996
---Do----
1996
---Do----
J. T. Marsh
Textile Finishing
1986
B.I. Publication, New Delhi.
Nalankilli
Textile Finishing
1998
Digital Impressions, 288-N, Salem, Main
Road, Komarpalayam 638 183
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17458 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fashion & Clothing Technology
Course Code : DC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Knitted Fabric Design & Technology
Subject Code : 17459
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
25#
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 100 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Knitted fabrics due to its stretchable and favorable properties are in good demand and it is
expected to rise day by day. Knitted fabrics find uses for under garments, sports wear, summer and
winter dresses, etc. to large extent. This sector is now diversifying into synthetics, domestic fabric,
carpets, technical and geotextiles.
General Objectives:
The student will be able to,
a. Understand Warp & Weft Knitting machine.
b. Identify different knitted structures.
c. Understand pattern cutting & sewing of knitted garments.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To manufacture fabric by knitting process
Procedure
Warp knitting: Basic warp knit, Face and back, Under lap and
overlap
Weft knitting: Basic weft knit, Single jersey, Rib knit,
Interlock knit, Purl knit.
Principle
Intermeshing of loop
Concept
Facts
Yarns , Needles, Cams, Cylinder, Knitting m/c.
Hand knit fabrics & winter wears are being used since age.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Detailed Contents:
Chapter
No.
1
2
3
Contents
Topic 1. Introduction of Knitting Process
Specific objective: The student will able to
 To define knitting process
 To interpret the difference between woven & knitted
fabric.
 Classify different knitting machine.
Content:1.1) Definition of warp &weft knitting.
1.2) Various ways of fabric manufacture
1.3) Reasons for the growth of knitting
1.4) Properties of knits as compared to woven
1.5) Definition of basic terms in knitting (Course, Wales, Stitch
Length, Needle Loop, Face Loop, Back loop, Course Length)
1.6) Classification of weft knitting machines
Topic 2. Weft knitting – Single jersey m/c.
Specific objective: The student will able to
 Identify different parts of knitting and their function
 Describe intermeshing process for knitting
 Identify type of knitted fabric
Content:
2.1) Different zones in circular weft knitting(creel, knitting, take
up zone)
2.2) Details of creel zone
- Types of creel, their advantage & disadvantage,
- Details of positive feeder – function & its types
- Concept of multifeeder machines
2.3) Details of knitting zone
- Functional elements of knitting machine
- Types of needle & its comparison
- Knitting action of different needles
- Sinker & its function
- Cylinder :Gauge, pitch, Diameter
- Cams
- Feeder, feeder density
2.4) Details of take-up zone
- Fabric spreader
2.5) Single jersey fabric
- Structure, Loop Diagram
- Knitting cycle for single jersey machine
- Characteristic features of single jersey fabric
Weft knitting Machines-double jersey
Specific objectives: The student will able to
 Classify different type of knitted fabrics.
 Operate knitting machine.
 Interpret different knitted fabric structure for appropriate
use
 Select the procedure of knitted fabric production.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
Hours
Marks
04
10
05
12
05
12
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Content:
3.1) Types of double jersey fabric (Rib, Interlock, Purl )
3.2) Rib knitting machine-Structure, loop diagram, machine
features, Needle arrangement, trick arrangement, knitting
cycle.
3.3) Interlock machine- Structure, loop diagram, machine features,
needle & trick arrangement, Cam arrangement.
3.4) Purl knitting machine- loop diagram, needle arrangement,
principle of needle transfer.
3.5) Characteristic of Rib, interlock & purl fabrics
Weft knitted fabrics-design aspects
Specific objective:-The student will able to
 Represent the knitted fabric on paper.
 Draw different knitted fabric structure.
 Differentiate the knitted fabrics.
 Estimate yarn required for knitted fabric.
Content:
4.1) Basic structure of weft knitted fabrics.
4
5
6
4.2) Different types of stitches like knit, tuck, miss, purl, Loop
diagram of tuck & float stitch, Effect of tuck & float stitch on
fabric.
4.3) Representation of stitches on point paper (verbal, line
diagram, symbolic, diagrammatic notation)
4.4) Concept of design, needle order and cam order with example
4.5) Derivates of single jersey fabric- La-coste, cross tuck, satin,
jersey blister, thick fleece
4.6) Derivatives of Rib structure-milano rib, double pique, pique
poplin, evermonte
4.7) Derivatives of Interlock structures- punto- di -roma, ottoman
rib, texi pique.
Weft knitting – Jacquard & advanced knitting
Specific objective:-The student will able to
 Identify different knitted structure.
 Select appropriate technique for knitted fabric.
Content:
5.1) Need of jacquard with example
5.2) Concept of Relanit technique
5.3) Concept of stripper with example
5.4) Concept of plush (pile) fabric.
5.5) Concept of fleecy fabric
5.6) Stitch length and its importance
Weft knitting – Quality and calculations.
Specific objective: The student will able to
 Calculate knitting production in Kg/Day or Meters/day
 Estimate yarn requirement for a particular production
 Calculate no. of machine required for designed output
Content :
6.1) Weft knit fabric Defects(Causes & Remedies)
6.2) Tests for weft knit Quality
6.3) Concept of Spriality & Barre
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
04
12
05
10
04
12
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
7
8
‘G’ Scheme
6.4) Production calculations
GSM Calculation
Tightness factor
Warp Knitting……………………………… 14 marks
Specific objective : The student will able to
 Describe the process of warp knitting
 Compare different knitting technologies.
 To differentiates flat knitting and circular knitting.
 To understand mechanism of flat knitting.
Content:7.1) Warp knitting – General, Loop structure of warp knit fabric,
compersion between warp & weft knitting.
7.2) Elements of warp knitting - Raschel machine
Passage of yarn through knitting machine - Raschel machine
Knitting cycle for warp knit fabric.- Raschel machine
7.3) Warp knitting - Fabric structure, chain notation, Single bar
fabric structures, Applications of warp knit fabrics
Sub topic:-7.1 Flat Bed knitting………………………8 marks
7.1.1) Introduction of flat knitting
7.1.2) Types and classification
7.1.3) Knitting elements
7.1.4) Yarn path in flat knitting machine Knitting cycle
Knit Wear Tech. - Only related to knitted Garment
Construction
Specific objective: The student will able to
 To understand pattern making for knitted fabric.
 To understand procedure of garmenting.
Content:
8.1) Pattern making, block pattern
8.2) Fabric spreading
8.3) Cutting of fabric – objects & methods
8.4) Production of sample garment
8.5) Fitting problems & correction for patterns with and without
darts
8.6) Study of Planning, drawing and reproduction of the knit
garment.
Total
13
22
08
10
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1) The functions of knitting mechanisms.
2) Different knitted fabric structures.
3) The designs of needles and cams.
Motor Skills:
1) Identify different knitted fabric structures.
2) Draw diagrams of needles and cams.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Practical’s:
1) Study of passage of yarn through Single jersey circular knitting m/c.
2) Study of passage of yarn through flat knitting m/c.
3) Study of passage of yarn through double jersey machine..
4) Introduction of fabric analysis single jersey fabric
5) Fabric analysis of single jersey knitted fabric
6) Fabric analysis of double jersey knitted fabric - Rib.
7) Fabric analysis of double jersey knitted fabric - Interlock
8) Fabric analysis of single jersey knitted fabric-derivative
9) Study of effect of stitch length on knitted fabric.
10) Visit to a modern knitting unit
11) Visit is a garment manufacturing unit.
List of Assignments:
1. Find the needle order & cam order for different knitted structure.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Title
No
1
2
3
Knitting Technology
Introduction to clothing
manufacture
The Tech. of clothing
manufacture
Author
David Spencer
Terry Cooklin
Havold carr & Barbara
Lathan
4
Warp knit engineering.
A Reisfeld
5
Warp knitting production
S. Raj
6
Warp knitting Technology
D. F. Paling
7
Knitting Technology
D. B. Ajgaonkar
8
Knitting Technology
Iyer & Mervinger
Place of Publication
& Publisher
Woodhead Publishing - UK
Om book Services
New-Delhi
Blackwell Science
Ltd . UK
Blackwell Science
Ltd . UK
Varlag mellinadtext
Heidelberg GMBH
Columbine Press
Ltd, Manchester
Universal Publishir
Mumbai
Om book Services
New-Delhi
2. CDs, PPTs, Models, Charts etc. :
3. IS, BIS and International Codes:
1. Reference: ASTM D 3882-85 for fabric skewness.
2. Reference: AATCC 178-1994 for barre.
4. Websites:
1. http://www.shimaseiki.com/
2. http://www.kern-liebers.com/
3. http://www.groz-beckert.com/
4. http://www.knittingindustry.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fashion & Clothing Technology
Course Code : DC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Clothing Production Machinery & Equipment
Subject Code : 17460
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
Two tests each of 25 marks are to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional work (SW).
Rational:
The Garments manufacturing process require numerous machineries for their manufacture.
Also certain super-specialized machineries are used in this filed. This subject introduces these
machineries and uses, their assemblies & parts in detail.
General Objectives:
To impart knowledge in students about garment production Machinery & its detail,
including parts & accessories.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents: Theory
Chapter
1
2
3
4
Contents
Marker Making & Spreading
Specific Objectives: to know marker planning & spreading process
in mass production
Fabric Packages
 Types of fabric packages,
 Effect of type on spreading method.
Marker Making
 Definition,
 Types of marker( block, continuous, half garment, whole
garment, single size, multiple size(sectional, interlocked,
mixed size)
 Factors affecting marker efficiency and quality,
 Equipments used for making a marker.(Manual,
pantograph, Computerized)
Spreading
 Definition
 Types of spread(Single, multiple, stepped ply) and forms of
spreading,(One way, face to face and two way)
 Requirements for fabric spreading- methods (Manual,
Spreading carriage, automatic spreading).
 Equipments.
Cutting Machines
Specific Objectives: to understand construction & working of
various cutting m/cs
 Introduction, Types & requirements of quality cutting
 Portable knifes (straight knife, round knife)
 Stationary knives (band knife, die cutting machine)
 Specialised Knives – Notchers , drills ,
 Defects in cutting & their remedies.
Needles
Specific Objectives: to know various parts & types of sewing m/c
needles
 Types
 Parts
 Functions
 Needle size.
 Defects due to faulty needles
Sewing Machine
Specific Objectives: to understand the basic parts & their function
in sewing m/cs
 Basic parts
 Needle
 Bobbin shuttle
 Loopers
 Loop spreader
 Threading figure
 Throat plate
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
Marks
Hours
14
08
16
10
10
05
16
12
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
6
7
‘G’ Scheme
 Tongue chaining plate
 Takeoffs device
 Tension setter
 Feed systems
 pressure foot,
 feed dog
 Reverse feed
 Stitch length selection
 SNLS machine-Study of work aids for sewing
Over Lock Machines
Specific Objectives: to know the construction & working of over
lock m/c
 Types of Machine
 Threading Diagram
 Needle Height
 Feed dog Height Angles
 Position of upper & Lower Knife, Loopers
Flat Lock Machine
Specific Objectives: to know the construction & working of flat
lock m/c
 Types
 Threading steps with diagram
 Stitch sequence
 Needle height
 Differential feed ratio
 Loopers
Work Aid & Fusing, Pressing m/cs
Specific Objectives: to understand concept of work aids &
attachments. Also to the fusing & pressing for the apparels.
 Attachments of sewing machine
 Rollers
 Guides
 Folders,
 Compacting pressure foot
 Hemmer
 Placket making
 Pocket making attachments
 Collar turning machine
 Garment folding machine
Fusing
 Objectives & Requirements
 Types (Fabrics used and Resins)
 Requirements(Time, Temperature, Pressure)
 Equipment(electric iron, movable flat beds, conveyor,
carasol)
 Methods of application of resin
Pressing Machines
 Terms(Under, Mouldings, Top Pressing)
 Types (Dry, Steam, High Pressure Steam)
 Accessories (Ironing Board, Sleeve Board, Bucks)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
10
08
06
05
16
10
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Equipments (Mechanical, Steam, Tunnel
Modern Sewing Machines
Specific Objectives: to understand modernization in sewing m/cs
& to learn some modern m/cs.
 Computer aid
 Button hole, button sewing,
 Bar tack,
 Blind stitch machine.
 Sewing problems e.g. Seam puckering
TOTAL
8
Sr. No.
12
06
100
64
Practical
1
Study the various types & sizes of needles used for different machines & different
fabric.
4 Hrs
2
Study the major parts of sewing machines
8 Hrs.
3
Study of sewing threads.
4 Hrs.
4
Study the 3-thread, 4-thread & 5-thread over lock sewing machine 8 Hrs.
5
Study feed of the arm machine
8 Hrs.
6
Study the attachments for sewing machine
8 Hrs.
7
Study the various types of cutting machines
4 Hrs.
8
Study the buttonhole & button stitch m/c
8 Hrs.
9
Study the marker planning, fabric spreading, drawing marker & cutting for any one
type of basic garment.
8 Hrs.
10
Study of vacuum pressing table
4 Hrs.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Author
Year of
Publication
Title
Place of
Publication & Publisher
Harold Carr &
Barbara Latham
The Technology of
clothing Manufacture
1994
Om book Service. England
R.M. & Webster J.
Stitches & Seams
1998
Manchester, England
Shaeffer Claire
Sewing for Apparel
Industry
2001
Prentice Hall, New Jarsey,
USA
Singer cy De cross
Sewing Lingerie
1991
Incorporated USA
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
17460 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fashion & Clothing Technology
Course Code : DC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Indian Western Costume
Subject Code : 17461
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
--
03
100
--
--
--
100
NOTE:

Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.

Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rational:
In India as well as in the western countries, there is vast enhancement and diversities in the
dimension of costumes which depend on religion, climate, attitude, ethical values, social lifestyle
and prosperity.
General Objectives:
The student will be able to,
Learning the costume fundamentals their transition relating to major civilizations of the
world.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
17461 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Understand to develop the basic embroidery and costumes
for style variations.
Procedure
Traditional costumes, embroideries methods and their world affairs
approaches for broadening the vision about application procedure
Principle
Principles of transfer techniques of costumes and embroidery them to
have verse knowledge.
Concept
Conceptualization of various traditional costumes followed by all over
the India and western countries .
Facts
Locality affects variation in Indian & western costumes.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17461 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
CONTENTS: Theory
Chapter
1
2
Name of the Topic
History of western costume
Specific Objectives:
 Students will be able to history of western costume
 Students will be able to men’s of western costume
 Students will be able to women’s of western costume
 Students will be able to accessories of western costume
Contents:
1.1 Europe costume in 20th century
 Men’s wear
 Women’s wear
 Accessories
1.2 Baltic costume
 Men’s wear
 Women’s wear
 Accessories
1.3 Asia costume
 Men’s wear
 Women’s wear
 Accessories
1.4 Byzantine costume
 Men’s wear
 Women’s wear
 Accessories
History of Western Costume
Specific Objectives:
 Students will be able to history of western costume
 Students will be able to men’s of western costume
 Students will be able to women’s of western costume
 Students will be able to accessories of western costume
Contents:
2.1 French costume in 20th century
 Men’s wear
 Women’s wear
 Accessories
2.2 American costume in 20th century
 Men’s wear
 Women’s wear
 Accessories
2.3 Japanese costume
 Men’s wear
 Women’s wear
 Accessories
2.4 China costume
 Men’s wear
 Women’s wear
 Accessories
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
Hour
Marks
10
20
12
20
17461 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
History of Indian costume
Specific Objectives:
 Students will be able to history of Indian costume
 Students will be able to men’s of Indian costume
 Students will be able to women’s of Indian costume
 Students will be able to accessories of Indian costume
3
4
Contents:
3.1 Introduction to historic costumes
 Male costumes during 200 B.C.
 Female costumes during 200 B.C.
 Male costumes during 100 A.D.to 1100 A.D.
 Female costumes during 100 A.D. to 1100 A.D
3.2 Indus valley civilization costumes
 Male attire
 Female attire
3.3 Mauryan and Sunga period costumes
 Male attire
 Female attire
3.4 Gupta period costume
 Male attire
 Female attire
3.5 Mughal period costume
 Male attire
 Female attire
Regional Costumes and Jewelry in India
Specific Objectives:
 Students will be able to men’s of Indian costume
 Students will be able to women’s of Indian costume
 Students will be able to accessories of Indian costume
Contents:
4.1 Kashmir costume
 Male costumes
 Female costumes
 Jewelry
4.2 Punjab costume
 Male costumes
 Female costumes
 Jewelry
4.3 Rajasthan costume
 Male costumes
 Female costumes
 Jewelry
4.4 Gujarat costume
 Male costumes
 Female costumes
 Jewelry
4.5 Bengal costume
 Male costumes
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
10
20
12
15
17461 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Female costumes
 Jewelry
4.6 Karnataka costume
 Male costumes
 Female costumes
 Jewelry
Indian Traditional Regional Embroidery
Specific Objectives:
 Students will be able to Indian traditional embroidery
 Students will be able to Indian fabrics, stitches
 Students will be able to Indian motifs, colors
5
6
Contents:
5.1 Kashmiri of Kashmir
 Motifs
 Colors
 Fabric
 Stitches
5.2 Kantha of Bengal
 Motifs
 Colors
 Fabric
 Stitches
5.3 Kasuti of Karnataka
 Motifs
 Colors
 Fabric
 Stitches
5.4 Phulakari of Punjab
 Motifs
 Colors
 Fabric
 Stitches
5.5 Kathiawar and Kutch of Gujarat
 Motifs
 Colors
 Fabric
 Stitches
Costumes for Special Purpose
Specific Objectives:
 Students will be able to theatre costumes
 Students will be able to sports costumes
 Students will be able to factors influencing costume
changes
 Students will be able to world affairs
Contents:
6.1 Theatre costume
 Fabric
 Accessories
6.2 Sports costume
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
10
12
10
13
17461 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Fabric
 Accessories
6.3 Factors influencing costume changes
 Style
 Religion
 Climate
 Attitude
 Lifestyle
6.4 World Affairs
 Economical
 Geographical
 Socio-political
Total
64
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
Motor Skills:
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
1
G.S. Ghurge
Indian Costumes
2
Savithri Pandit
Indian Embroidery
3
Contini Mila
Fashion from Ancient Egypt to the
present day
4
Shailaja D. Naik
Traditional Embroideries Of India
5
Barfoot Audrey
Everyday costumes in Britain
6
Pistolese, Rojara
History & Fashion
Mahajan Publishers,
Ahmedabad
Mahajan Publishers,
Ahmedabad
West Duxbury
Manchester
A.P.H.Publishing
Corporation, New Delhi
Woodhead Publishing
Cambridge,U.K.
Woodhead Publishing
Cambridge,U.K.
2. CDs, PPTs, Models, Charts etc. :
3. IS, BIS and International Codes:
4. Websites:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17461 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fashion & Clothing Technology
Course Code : DC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : CAD in Textile Designing
Subject Code : 17049
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
02
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
25
Rational:
This subject will give specific application of the developed concept in developing textile
design. Innovation, creation with the help of high performance tool of CAD will help the user to
transfer his creativity within no time.
General Objectives:
Students will learn different concepts and application of those concepts in developing textile
designs. How ideas are formed and implemented in the process of design development, Human
skills and computer skills will be utilized for the formation of innovative designs as per the
requirement of current market trends are concerned. History to modern design trends will be
exposed to the students. Students will have hands on experience of developing designs for men,
women and kids as well as home textiles.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17049 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Detailed contents of Theory topics to be taught during practical hours:
Topic No.1 * Selection of thread spacing & thread diameter in the warp and weft directions for
shirting, sarees and home textiles.

Selection of colours of warp and weft as per the end use

Select the weaves as per the requirements

Observe simulation & modify it if necessary
Topic No.2 * Use of different tools for design development in printing

Image development and colour processing for printed design

Development of half-tone design

Development of different designs for various end uses in printing.
Topic No.3 * Use of software for creating various woven & printed designs and storing the same
for development of design library for further reference.
Practice:
Sr. No.
1
2
3
Practical
A) Development of textile design with weaving software (12 hrs)
1) Development of stripes shirting design
2) Development of checks shirting design
3) Development of extra warp design
4) Development of extra weft design
5) Development of saree design with body border and pallov
6) Development of home textiles
B) Development of textile design with print software (12 hrs.)
1) Development of ladies dress material design
2) Development of all over scarce design
3) Development of kinds wear design
4) Development of shirting design – stripes
5) Development of shirting design checks
6) Development of home textiles
C) Preparation and development of design library for woven & printed design. (8 hrs.)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17049 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
References:
Books:
Author
Title
Year of
Publication
Place of Publication &
Publisher
V.A. Shenal
Wonder weaves System
1989
Universal Publishers, Mumbai
Grovisicki
Ned graphics
1988
Manchester, UK
Nisbet
Colorado International rued
1996
Thianville Paris
Cooklin Gerry
The Design Scope company
1992
Kempen
V.A. Shenal
Design deskpru
1990
Universal Publishers,
Mumbai
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17049 DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fashion & Clothing Technology
Course Code : DC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17050
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or competitive
tests.
While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability to
communicate and their attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert lectures,
seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so that there will be
increased participation of students in learning process.
Objectives:
Student will be able to:
1. Acquire information from different sources.
2. Prepare notes for given topic.
3. Present given topic in a seminar.
4. Interact with peers to share thoughts.
5. Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17050DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Present a seminar on identified topic related to new technology
Procedure
Searching information
from Journals, internet
and market
Preparing Power Point
Presentation text for the
topic
Principle
Principle of searching
information
Principle of Power Point
Presentation
Facts
Technical Journals,
Internet
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Computer, Power Point
Presentation Software
31
17050DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
‘G’ Scheme
Activities
Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same shall be
submitted by the individual student, to form a part of the term work.
The industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries :
1) Garment industry
2) Apparel marketing
3) Apparel merchandising
4) Garment chemical processing industry
5) Quality Testing laboratories of Garments in industries or
reputed organizations
6) Fashion Merchandising
7) Fashion Marketing
8) Manufacturing organizations for observing various manufacturing
processes of Yarn & Fabric Production.
9) Knitting Industry.
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert lectures to be organized
from any two of the following areas:
1) Interview Techniques.
2) Modern machines in garmenting
3) Applications of CAD/CAM in fashion & apparel manufacturing.
4) Testing of fabrics for apparel manufacturing.
Information Search:
Information search can be done through manufacturer’s catalogue,
websites, magazines, books etc. and submit a report any one topic.
Following topics are suggested:
1) Different types of needles.
2) CAD/CAM Software.
3) Accessories for Garments.
4) Apparel production process.
5) Fashion Designing.
6) Fashion Merchandising.
Seminar:
Seminar topic shall be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each
student shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar
(Presentation time – 10 minutes)
Mini Project / Activities: (any one)
1) Stitching a trouser /woman’s wear/kid’s wear with own pattern
cutting.
2) Development of different design on a CAD Software.
3) Collection of different accessories used for garments
32
14
06
08
08
12
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Hours
48
17050DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fashion & Clothing Technology
Course Code : DC
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Industrial Training
Subject Code : 17051
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
**
--
--
--
--
--
--
** Industrial training for six weeks to be completed during summer break after Fourth
semester. Assessment to be done in Fifth Semester
Objectives:
 Experience the industrial environment for textile industrial processes, equipment &
practices.
 Collect data about Plant lay out, equipment and machines-specifications and working
available in different sections and collect data.
 Experience operation of machines and process parameters of spinning and weaving
departments for the target production and collect data.
 Appreciate factory utilities – power water illumination men and material movement,
pollution control, industrial safety etc.
 Carryout the material testing at different stages of yarn and fabric production for quality.
 Experience maintenance schedules of all the equipment and collect information on the
effects of negligence of maintenance.
 Diagnose problems and find solutions to problems related with operation, and maintenance
of equipment.
 Study the organization structure, job description, job specifications, promotional schemes,
motivational strategies, etc.
 Collect data on production incentives, methods study and time & motion studies.
 Critical study of all activities with a view to find the areas for improvement.
 Devise solution to problem areas.
 Collect information / data for project work and seminars.
However, the detailed list of areas of study, working and data collection has been prepared
and is enclosed in 3.5 – Specific area of study and working. The student should regularly refer to
this list and accordingly choose the areas and acquire the knowledge information and skills.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17051DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
GUIDE LINES FOR INPLANT TRAINING
GENERAL INFORMATION OF THE ORGANISATION:
1. History and Organization.
2. Types of Garment produced.
3. Quantity of Garments produced Per Day
4. Buyer’s Information
5. Market: Local / Export.
6. Lay out of all departments with dimensions.
7. Process Flow Chart.
GENERAL OBSERVATION OF THE FOLLOWING DEPARTMENTS:
Training:
1. Who is head?
2. Training duration
3. Psycho motor Activities
4. Hand eye co-ordination Activities
Merchandising:
1. Who is head?
2. People / designations involved in- their roles and responsibilities
3. Documents maintained
4. Duties of merchandiser
5. Types of samples to be sent to buyer to get approval.
Production Planning & Control
1. Who is head?
2. People / designations involved in- their roles and responsibilities
3. Documents maintained
4. Responsibilities
5. Planning of material required to in house including wastages and allowances
Fabric Store:
1. Who is head?
2. People / designations involved in- their roles and responsibilities
3. Documents maintained
4. Type of Fabric used- Technical specifications if so.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17051DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
5. Fabric Inspection, Classification of faults.
6. Shade sorting
7. Fabric grading systems- four point/ ten point
8. Quality levels- Acceptation and rejection
Sampling & CAD:
1. Who is head?
2. People / designations involved in- their roles and responsibilities
3. Documents maintained
4. Study of Manual / CAD System of pattern making.
5. Types of machines in Sampling Dept.
6. Types of samples prepared.
Cutting Department:
1. Who is head?
2. People / designations involved in- their roles and responsibilities
3. Documents maintained
4. No. and types of machines in Cutting Dept.- their technical specification,
5. Study of Manual and Automatic Cutting Machine.
6. Study of Fabric Laying and Cutting Process.
7. Production per shift.
8. Bundling, ticketing, relaying
Sewing Department:
1. Who is head?
2. People / designations involved in- their roles and responsibilities
3. Documents maintained
4. No. and types of machines in Sewing Dept.- their technical specification like Speed &
Efficiency.
5. No. of lines set and active
6. No. of machines per line.
7. Type of machines in the line.
8. Shift wise productivity and ancillary labor.
9. Transportation of Material.
10. Various production systems followed- linear, skill center
11. Observations at various modules- front, back, collar, cuff, assembly and special operations.
12. Quality inspection at various stages.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17051DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Embroidery:
1. Who is head?
2. People / designations involved in- their roles and responsibilities
3. Documents maintained
4. No. and types of machines in Embroidery Dept.- their technical specification like Speed &
Efficiency.
Finishing (Checking, Button Sewing & Buttonhole, Inspection, Washing, Pressing, Packing,
Dispatch):
1. Who is head?
2. People / designations involved in- their roles and responsibilities
3. Documents maintained
4. No. and types of machines in Finishing Dept.- their technical specification like Speed &
Efficiency.
5. Defects in Garments and Solutions.
6. Type of pressing- form/ flatbed pressing
7. Type of packing for Local and Export.
8. Type of Storage/ Warehousing/ Dispatch
Quality Control Department:
1. Study of Testing Machines, Calibration of machines.
2. Department wise Quality Assurance activities, various studies, Audit.
3. Quality Parameters obtained.
4. Norms followed.
5. Quality Management Programs like TPM, KAIZEN etc.
Finance department:
The following information can be gathered if possible. If the management is reluctant to
supply the information, do not to insist upon.
1. Wages and fringe benefits given to the worker of various department.
2. Method of depreciation used for cost purpose.
3. Administrative charges.
4. Cost of Fabric.
5. Cost for Garment Production.
6. Method of Costing.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17051DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
7. Electricity Cost.
8. Factory Overhead Charges
Industrial Engineering Department:
1. Plant layout- frequency of changing
2. Fire handling systems.
3. Water requirements and Water supply system.
4. Generator – Capacity / Type.
5. Electrical units consumed per day
6. Types of wastage.
7. Price of waste obtained in various departments.
8. Control and elimination of wastage.
Personnel & human resources department:
1. Duties / responsibilities of various levels of workers.
2. Welfare schemes of workers / staff.
3. Labor handling.
4. Workload of various categories of workers.
5. Sanitation and other human right facilities provided.
ASSESSMENT STRATEGY
a) Report of the industrial training shall be prepared by each student on the basis of his/her
actual work done, during the six weeks industrial training.
b) This report should be submitted in typed and bound form within 1 month after completion
of the industrial training.
c) Industrial training should be assessed equally by external and internal examiners for the oral
exam assessment.
d) Industrial training should be assessed by internal examiner only for term work assessment.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
17051DC4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
COURSE CODE : DE
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
FULL TIME / PART TIME : FULL TIME
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies
$
Industrial Measurements β
Principles of Analog
Communication
Microprocessor
Linear Integrated Circuits β
Visual Basic
β
Professional Practices-II β
Abbrev
iation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
EST
IME
17401
17434
01
03
---
02
02
01
03
50#*
100
20
40
---
---
---
---
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
10
PAC
17439
03
--
02
03
100
40
25#
10
--
--
[email protected]
10
MIC
LIC
VBA
PPS
17443
17445
17043
17044
TOTAL
03
-02
03
100
40
25#
10
-04
-02
03
100
40
50#
20
-01
-02
--------03
------15
-15
-450
-100
--Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
------
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
200
10
10
10
20
--
SW
(17400)
50
50
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 30 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 800
@- Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* - Online Theory Examination,
β - Common to ET / EJ / EN / EX / IE / IS / IC / EV / MU / IU / ED / EI
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as sessional work
(SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Fact
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Credit, Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: ET/EN/EX/EJ/IE/IS/IC/DE/EV/MU/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Industrial Measurements
Subject Code
: 17434
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The science of instrumentation system plays vital role in the development of technology. An
electronic system has prime importance in the field of instrumentation. Most of the physical
parameters can be converted into electrical signal with the use of transducers. The obtained
electrical signal can be conditioned, processed, displayed and controlled with the use of advanced
control system.
With the background of measuring instruments, this subject deals with measurement of
different physical parameters like temperature, pressure etc. covering the entire gamut of industrial
measurement. Different types of transducers used for measurement of different physical quantities
with their construction, working principle, advantages, and disadvantages are studied through this
subject.
General Objectives:
After studying this subject the students will be able to:
1) Understand the nature and working of instrumentation system used in industrial & general
applications.
2) Classify the physical parameters with their proper units
3) Understand the concepts of different types of transducers
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17434 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Selection of suitable transducer for measurement
of specific physical parameter
Application
Measurement of Pressure, Flow, Level, Temperature,
Humidity and Speed.
Procedure
PRESSURE
Principle
Deformation, Diff.
Pressure,
Resistive,
Inductive. Effect
FLOW
Variable head
Variable area
Faraday’s law, Ultrasonic
effect, Bernoulli’s
Theorem`
LEVEL
Doppler
Ultrasonic
Radiation, Air purge
effect
TEMPERATURE
First law of
Thermodynamics,
Seeback, Peltier effect,
Temp.coeff. of Resist.
Concept
Transducers for different physical parameters
Facts
Different physical quantities such as, Pressure, Level,
Temperature, Humidity and Speed.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
17434 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Contents:
Topic
No
Theory
Hrs.
Marks
08
16
08
20
Transducers:
Specific Objectives:
 Draw and describe the block diagram of Instrumentation
system.
 Compare different Transducers
 Draw and describe different Electronic Transducers.
Contents

1
Instrumentation System:
Block diagram of Instrumentation system: Function of each
block, Explanation of basic instrumentation systems
 Transducer:
Need of Transducer:
Classification of transducers: Active and Passive, Analog and
Digital, Primary and Secondary.
 Electrical Transducers:
Resistive transducers- Linear & Angular potentiometers
Capacitive transducer
Inductive transducer –LVDT, RVDT ( As a displacement
transducer)
Piezoelectric transducer
(Principle of operation and applications of above)
 Selection criterion of transducers
Pressure measurement
 Draw and describe the non-elastic and elastic pressure
transducers.
 Draw and describe electronic pressure transducers.
 Write procedure of calibration of elastic pressure gauges
using dead weight tester.
Contents

2




Pressure:
Definition
Types - Absolute, Gauge, Atmospheric, Vacuum( Definition,
Units)
Classification of Pressure measuring devices
Non elastic pressure transducer:
U tube
Inclined Tube
Well type manometer
Elastic pressure transducer:
Bourdon Tube
Bellows
Diaphragm
Capsule
Electronic pressure transducers:
Bourdon tube with LVDT
Diaphragm with Strain gauge
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
17434 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Calibration of pressure gauge using dead weight tester
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Flow Measurement
 List 0f different types of flow.
 List of different types of flow measuring transducers.
 Draw and describe construction and working of different
Flow measuring transducers.
Contents
3
 Flow:
Definition
Types of Flow –Laminar, turbulent , Reynolds number
 Classification of flow measuring transducers :
Variable head flow meter- Venturimeter, orifice plate meter
Variable area flow meter – Rota meter
Electromagnetic Flow meter
Ultrasonic flow meter- Time difference and Doppler Type
06
14
08
16
10
20
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Level Measurement
 State the need of level measurement.
 List of different level measuring methods.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Level
measuring transducers.
Contents
4
 Level:
Definition
Need of level measurement
 Classification of level measurement methods:
Float type – linear & rotary potentiometer ( Contact type)
Capacitive type (Contact type)
Ultrasonic type (Non-contact type)
Radiation type (Non-contact type)
RADAR type (Non-contact type)
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Temperature measurement
 List different temperature measuring scales and its
conversions.
 List different temperature measuring transducers.
 Draw the construction and describe working of different
temperature transducers.
5
Contents
 Temperature :
Definition and units
First law of thermodynamics
Different temperature scales & their conversions
 Classification of temperature measuring transducers:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17434 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Filled system type thermometer.
Bimetallic thermometer
Thermistors
RTD - (PT-100) , 2 /3/4 wire systems ( circuit diagram only )
Thermocouple - Seeback & Peltier effect , Types J, K, R , S, T
etc. ( Based on material, temperature ranges)
Pyrometer - Optical, Radiation
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Special Transducers and Measurements
 List different types of humidity and its units.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Humidity
transducers.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Speed
measuring transducers.
Contents

6
Humidity:
Definition
Types - Absolute, relative
 Humidity measurement devices:
Psychrometer - Dry & wet Bulb thermometer type
Hygrometer- hair type , capacitive , resistive type
 Speed
Definition
Classification of speed measurement methods
Photoelectric pick-up (Non contact type)
Magnetic pick-up (Non contact type)
 pH Measurement
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Total
08
14
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
 Selection of transducer based on application.
 Interpretation of results.
Motor Skills:
 Connection of different transducers with measuring system.
 Measurement of various physical parameters using transducers.
 Observation and plotting the characteristics.
List of Practicals:
Sr. No.
Title of the Experiment
1
Measure displacement using LVDT
2
Measure weight using strain gauge pressure transducer with cantilever setup
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17434 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
‘G’ Scheme
Measure pressure using Bourdon tube pressure gauge
Calibrate pressure gauge using Dead weight pressure gauge tester
Determine the rate of flow of liquid in pipe using Rotameter
Calculate flow through pipe using orifice meter
Measure temperature of liquid using Resistance Temperature Detector (PT 100)
Measure temperature of liquid using thermocouple
Observe and interpret humidity of air using wet and dry bulb Hygrometer
Measure speed of motor using non contact type photo electric tachometer.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
Title
Publisher
01
A.K.Sawhney
Electrical and Electronic
Measurements and Instrumentation
Dhanpat Rai & Sons.
02
S.K.Singh
Industrial Instrumentation & Control
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
03
D. Patranabis
Principles of Industrial Instrumentation
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
Rangan Mani
Sharma
Instrumentation Systems and Devices
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
05
Bela Liptak
Kriszta Venczel
Process Measurement
Instrument Engineers Handbook
Chilton Book Co.
06
B.C.Nakra
K.K.Chaudhry
Instrumentation Measurement and
Analysis
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi.
04
2. CD/ PPTs etc.:
 www.proprofs.com/webschool
 www.osvn.com
3. Websites
 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
 www.youtube.com/ “here type name of instrument”
 www.controlnet.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17434 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Diploma in Digital Electronics
Course Code
: DE
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Principles of Analog Communication
Subject Code
: 17439
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Electronic Communication plays vital role in day to day activities. Development of
communication Technology has increased its application in allied field of electronics including
telephony, telegraphy, satellite , Mobile, RADAR, industrial controls, online application like
internet banking, ATM machine, Wireless network, optical communication, Mobile communication
system.
Analog communication is a foundation for all advanced subjects in communication
engineering.
This subject will focus on the operation of analog transmission and reception techniques.
This subject also deals with pulse modulation and their different types.
Study of Elements of Electronics, Electronic Devices and Circuits is prerequisite for Analog
communication subject.
General Objectives:
The student will able to
1. Know different electronic communication systems.
2. Understand concept of modulation and demodulation of AM / FM.
3. Understand the operation of AM/ FM transmitter and receiver.
4. Understand the operation of TV transmission and receptions.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17439 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principles
1) Radio broadcasting systems
2) TV System
Block and circuit Diagrams of AM, FM, PAM, PWM, PPM Radio and TV
Transmitter / Receiver
Transmitting and Receiving
Antennas, Transmission Lines
and Wave Propagation
Carrier Signal modulating
signal, modulation,
AM, FM,
Concept
Fact
Amplitude modulation
Frequency modulation
Demodulation,
Super heterodyne,
De-emphasis,
AGC, Image
Frequency,
Tracking
Polarization,
Propagation,
Characteristic
impedance,
SWR, Radiation
Pattern
Noise, Bandwidth, Wavelength, Amplifier, Oscillator Frequency,
Amplitude, Phase, TV Receiver, Transistor Radio Receiver, Antennas
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
17439 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Contents:
Topic
No
1
2
Theory
Electronic Communication and Modulation Techniques
Specific Objectives:
 Able to draw block diagram of electronic communication system
 Identify types of electronic communication systems.
 Describe different types of modulation.
Contents:
1.1
Basics of electronic communication
[04]
 The importance of electronic communication.
 Definition: Analog, Digital and Baseband signal
 Elements of basic electronic communication system (Draw block
diagram and explain each block.)
 Concept of transmission bandwidth.
 Noise and types of noise
1.2
Basics of Modulation
[08]
 Need for modulation
 Types: AM, FM, PM: Definition
1.3
Amplitude Modulation
 Modulation index-definition, its effect on modulated signal
 Mathematical equation of amplitude modulated wave & its
meaning, concepts of side band (SSB,DSB), vestigial sideband
(VSB)
 Bandwidth requirement
 Representation of AM signal in time & frequency domain
 Power relations in AM wave, simple numerical
 Circuit diagram and working of BJT/FET modulator.
1.4
Frequency modulation
[08]
 Deviation ratio, maximum deviation ratio, mathematical
representation of FM & its meaning
 Representation of FM signal in time domain & frequency domain
 Bandwidth requirements
 Concept of Pre-emphasis & De-emphasis
 Generation of FM -Reactance modulator, varactor diode
modulator, Armstrong method
 FM signal generation using ICs 566,564
1.5
Pulse Modulation Techniques
[04]
 Need of Pulse Modulation
 PAM, PWM, PPM- Block diagram, waveforms, advantages &
disadvantages & their comparison.
 Generation of PAM transistorized circuit, Generation of PWM,
PPM using IC 555.
Wave Propagation
Specific Objectives:
 Understand theory of electromagnetic radiation.
 State different types of wave propagation.
 Define the various atmospheric layers
 Define the terms maximum usable frequency, critical
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
Hrs.
Marks
12
24
06
10
17439 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3
4
‘G’ Scheme
frequency, skip distance & fading.
Contents:
 Fundamental of electromagnetic waves, Transverse
electromagnetic wave,
 Types of Wave Propagation
 Ground Wave.
 Sky wave, ionosphere & its effect.
 Space Wave, Duct propagation
 Troposphere scatter propagation
 Concept of actual height & virtual weight
 Critical frequency, skip distance & fading, maximum usable
frequency.
Antennae
Specific Objectives:
 Define antenna.
 Understand the term related with the antenna.
 Understand the structure, radiation pattern & application of
different antennae.
Contents:
3.1 Antenna fundamentals :
[04]
 Resonant antenna and Non-resonant antennas
 Definition : Radiation pattern ,polarization, bandwidth, beam
width, antenna resistance, directivity & power gain, antenna gain
3.2 Dipole antenna
[04]
 Half wave dipole antenna (Resonant Antenna) & its Radiation
pattern.
 Folded dipole antenna & its radiation pattern.
 Radiation pattern for Dipole Antenna of different length.
3.3 Structure, radiation pattern & application of antennas.
[04]
 Loop antenna.
 Yagi-Uda antenna
 Micro wave antenna – Dish antenna & Horn antenna
 Microstrip antennas- Rectangular, circular and square
Radio Receiver
Specific Objectives:
 State super heterodyne principle
 Compare TRF & super heterodyne receivers.
Contents:
4.1. AM Receiver :
[12]
 Block diagram of Tuned Radio Frequency receiver and its
working with waveforms.
 Block diagram of super heterodyne receiver
 RF Section and Characteristics of AM radio receiver
sensitivity, selectivity, fidelity.
 Image frequency and its rejection
 Frequency changing and tracking.
 Demodulation of AM signal.
 Diode detector, practical diode detector.
 Need of AGC & its types – simple, delayed.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
06
12
08
20
17439 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
6
‘G’ Scheme
4.2 FM receiver :
[08]
 Block diagram and explanation of FM Super heterodyne radio
receiver
 Circuit diagram and working of slop detector and Balanced slop
detector
 PLL as FM demodulator.
TV Fundamentals
Specific Objectives:
 Define various terms used in TV system
 Explain Tri-colour theory and Grassman’s Law
 Draw and understand composite video signal wave-forms
 State CCIR-B standards for TV system
5.1
[10]
 Concept: Aspect ratio, image continuity, interlace scanning,
scanning periods – horizontal and vertical, vertical resolution,
horizontal resolution.
 Vestigial sideband transmission, bandwidth for Colour signal,
brightness, contrast, viewing distance, luminance, Hue,
saturation, compatibility. Colour theory, primary colours and
secondary colours Grassman’s law, additive Colour mixing
subtractive Colour mixing.
5.2
[08]
 Composite Video Signal - Pedestal
height, Blanking pulse,
Colour burst, Horizontal sync pulse details, Vertical sync pulse
details, Equalizing pulses, CCIR B standards for Colour signal
transmission & reception.
TV Transmitter and Receiver
Specific Objectives:
 Describe TV camera tube and colour picture tube
 Explain the function of Color TV transmitter and receiver.
Contents:
6.1
[08]
 Introduction to TV camera tube, principle and working of
Vidicon
Plumbicon
Solid State camera based on CCD.
 Color Picture tube, principle and working of
PIL
6.2
[08]
 Block diagram of Colour TV transmitter.
 Block Diagram and operation of color TV receiver (PAL D,
NTSC, and SECAM type)
Block diagram of MATV, CATV, HDTV and CCTV and their
applications
Total
08
18
08
16
48
100
Practical:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Interpret the results of output waveforms
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17439 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Motor Skills:
1. Testing and observing the waveforms at various stages
2. Fault finding
List of Practical’s
1. Observe and draw the waveform of AM & calculate modulation index of AM
2. Observe and draw the waveform of FM & calculate modulation index of FM
3. Observe and draw the waveforms of FM modulator using IC 566.
4. Observe the wave forms at various points in AM receiver. Trouble shooting and fault
finding in AM receiver.
5. Observe & Plot the graph of RF Characteristics of Radio Receiver: Selectivity,
Sensitivity, Fidelity.
6. Generate PAM and observe the waveforms of PAM
7. Generate PWM, PPM and observe the waveforms of PWM, PPM using IC’s.
8. Plot the radiation pattern of Dipole & Yagi-Uda antenna.
9. Plot the radiation pattern of basic microstrip patch antenna.
10. Trace: a) chroma section, b) picture tube, c) video amplifier of TV receiver
11. Voltage analysis of: a) chroma section, b) picture tube c) Video amplifier,
12. Voltage analysis of:
a) Vertical Section b) Horizontal Section c) Power supply of TV receiver.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
George Kennedy,
Bernard Davis,
SRM Prasanna
Electronic Communication
Systems
TATA Mc-Graw Hill 5th
Edition
02
Louis E Frenzel
Communication Electronics
TATA Mc-Graw Hill 5th
Edition
03
V Chandra Sekar
Analog Communication
Oxford University Press
A.M Dhake
Tata McGraw-Hill
R.R Gulati
New Age International
04
05
Television & Radio
Engineering
Modern TV Practice
(4th edition )
Web Sites:
1. en.wikipedia.org
2. www.masd .k12.pa.us ( Electromagnetic Spectrum)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17439 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
3. www.staff.ncl.ac.uk ( modulation & demodulation)
4. circuitdiagram.net/am-radio-receiver.html (AM radio receiver circuit diagram)
5. http://www.circuitdiagram.org/am-radio-receiver-with-mk484.html
6. www.circuitstoday.com/single-chip-fm-radio-circuit
List of equipments
1. CRO, Function generator, spectrum analyzer, DMM
2. AM,FM,PAM,PWM,PPM Modulation/ Demodulation trainer kits
3. Transmission line trainer kit/ Coaxial cable e.g. (RG174)—100mtrs.
4. Antenna demonstration kit/ Antenna for measuring its parameters
5. Radio and Television receiver trainer kits
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17439 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Diploma in Digital Electronics
Course Code
: DE
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Microprocessor
Subject Code
: 17443
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Microprocessor plays important role in computer based application and is heart of the
system. The Microprocessors along with memory and I/O’s constitute a complete system for
industrial application. Since most of the peripherals are 8 bit in nature and hence the 8 bit processor
8085 is introduced in microprocessor curriculum. It covers comprehensive study of architecture,
programming and interfacing.
Microprocessor and its programming require the background information of principles of
digital electronics. By completing this module student can write high level language program for
peripheral controlling mechanism in embedded system.
General Objectives:
The student will be able to
 Understand the architecture of 8-bit microprocessor.
 Learn instruction set and programming.
 Learn to interpret peripherals and its interfacing.
 Implement minimum system design.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
17443 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
p
Interfacing of Peripherals, Minimum System Implementation, and
industrial applications
Procedure
Algorithms, flowcharts, assembly Language Program, and Interfacing
Techniques
Principles
De-multiplexing, Timing
and Control, Serial I/O
Memory and I/O Mapping, Subroutine
Concept
Microprocessor
Architecture,
Microcomputer system
Interrupts, Instruction set, Peripherals
Fact
Memory, ALU, Combinational and Sequential devices, ADC, and DAC
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
17443 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic
No
Contents
Hours
Marks
08
16
12
24
08
12
08
16
08
20
8 Bit Microprocessor - 8085
1
2
3
4
5
Specific Objectives:
 Comprehend Components and terminology of computer
system and microprocessor based system
 Describe Architecture of 8 bit processor
Contents:
 Introduction to 8 bit microprocessor and Microcomputer,
system buses
 Salient features of 8085
 8085 microprocessor architecture-Register section, ALU,
Interrupt control, Serial I/O control, Timing and control and
pin description
 De-multiplexing of low order Address/Data bus, and
generation of control signals
8085 Instructions and Programming
 Develop assembly language program.
Contents:
 Instruction format, Addressing modes, 8085 Instruction Set
 Machine Cycle and Timing diagram
 Assembly language programming
Subroutine and Interrupts
 Comprehend stack, subroutine and interrupts
Contents :
 Stack and subroutine, time delay subroutine
 Interrupts- Necessity of interrupts, interrupt handling, Types
of interrupts, Vector Interrupt locations, Interrupt control
instructions (EI,DI RIM and SIM), Priority of interrupts,
Polling of interrupts, Pending interrupts
Memory and I/O Interfacing
 Interface various memory chips with 8085
Contents:
 Memory interfacing: RAM/ ROM Memory map.
 I/O Interfacing Techniques- I/O mapped I/O, memory
mapped I/O
 Serial I/O lines – SOD and SID
 Comparison of I/O mapped I/O and memory mapped I/O.
Programmable Peripheral Devices
 Draw and describe peripheral programmable devices and
interfaces
Contents:
 Programmable Peripheral Interface IC 8255-Block diagram,
Pin Description, operating modes, simple I/O programs
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17443 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

Programmable I/O ports and Timer IC 8155-Block diagram,
Pin Description, operating modes of timer and I/O ports,
simple programs on timer operations only
 Features of 8355, Block Diagram and Pin Description
 Comparison of features of 8155 and 8255 and 8355 ICs
Data transfer Techniques and Interfacing the Peripherals
 Classify data transfer techniques.
 Implement minimum system
6
Contents:
 Types of data transfer techniques
 DMA controlled data transfer.
 Interfacing of Peripherals 8255, 8155, 8355
 Interring of LED, Seven Segment Display, DIP Switches,
ADC, DAC, Stepper Motor using PPI.
 Minimum system based on 8085, 8155, and 8355
Total
04
12
48
100
Practical:
Intellectual Skills:
 Select peripheral and interface to provide the solution for minimum system.
 Develop algorithm, flowchart, Assembly language program and execution
Motor Skills:
 Load and execute the program in user memory of microprocessor kit.
 Observe the result in specific memory locationand registers.
 Develop logic for practical applications of microprocessor.
List of Practicals:
1) Assembly language programs for addition and subtraction of 8 bit /16 bit numbers.
2) Assembly language program for block transfer.
3) Assembly language program to multiply two 8 bit numbers using add and shift techniques.
4) Find one’s and two’s compliment of a given number and exchange the lower and upper
nibble of a byte.
5) Sort odd and even bytes from given 10 bytes and Find Largest and smallest numbers from
given block.
6) Arrange given block in Ascending and descending order
7) Assembly language program to transmit / receive 8 bit serial data using SID and
SID
lines.
8) Interface simple switches and LEDs using 8255 and develop water level controller using
8085.
9) Generation of square wave using 8155 timer
10) Assembly language program to interface ADC/DAC with 8085.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17443 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
1
Ramesh S. Gaonkar
Microprocessor Architecture,
Programming and Applications with
8085
2
B.Ram
Fundamentals of Microprocessors
and Microcomputers
Danpat Rai publications
3
Aditya P. Mathur
Introduction to Microprocessor
Tata Mcgraw Hill
4
Shridhar Ghosh
0000 to 8085
--
Penram International
2. CDs, PPTs etc:
http://www.slideshare.net/saumitra5552001/8085-paper-presentation-presentation
http://yesnarayanan.blogspot.com/2008/07/8085-ppt.html
http://yesnarayanan.blogspot.com/2008/12/8085-microprocessor-tutorials.html
http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/vishesh_0802-236980-8085-entertainment-pptpowerpoint/
3. Websites:
1) www.8085 projects.info
2) www.topsite.com/best/8085
3) www.enow.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17443 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: ET/EN/EX/EJ/IE/IS/IC/DE/EV/MU/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Linear Integrated Circuits
Subject Code
: 17445
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Modern age technology has developed on high density and high speed electronics circuits.
Integrated circuits are basis of these high density circuits enabled to reduce size, weight and cost of
equipments. They have intrinsic features such as low power consumption, low noise and ease of
design.
Today the growth of any industry depends upon electronics to great extent. Contents of this
subject are the basic building blocks of different analog circuits.
Basic operating and designing principle of such a large collection of circuits establishes a
foundation for understanding new development in the electronics field, instrumentation and power
control. This subject acquaints student with general analog principles and design methodologies
using integrated circuit for system design.
Prerequisites various devices and circuits studied in elements of electronics and electronic devices
and circuits. Prospects- LSI, MSI, VLSI.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to:

Understand working principle of Op-Amp and IC555

Develop electronics circuits using timer IC555 and Op-Amp
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17445 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13

‘G’ Scheme
Analyze the response of frequency selective circuits such as PLL with respect to the
incoming signal.
Learning Structure:
Application:
Develop simple analog circuits using Op-Amp and timer circuits. Trouble
shooting of these circuits, in the area communication and instrumentation
amplifier.
Procedure:
Operation for
inverting noninverting amplifier
adder, subtractor
Response of
Active filters
Principle:
Operational amplifier
circuit, inverting noninverting and
differential
Timers using
IC-555, comparator
using IC-741, PLL
Concept:
Operational Amplifier, Linear and non-linear circuits
Fact:
Amplifers, timers, filters, Multivibrators and Oscillators
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17445 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents: Theory
Topic
1
2
3
Content
Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp):
Specific Objectives :
 Draw labeled block diagram of Op-Amp
 Specify and define Different parameters of Op-Amp
 Interpret ideal transfer characteristics of Op-Amp
Contents:
 Importance of Op-Amp:
Block diagram of Op-Amp and function of each block with the
circuit such as balanced, Unbalanced, differential amplifiers
with simple current source, level shifter and complementary
push-pull amplifier. Equivalent Circuit, Circuit Symbols And
Terminals. Op-Amp IC-741 pin diagram and function.
 Parameters of Op-Amp:
Input offset voltage, Input offset current, Input bias current,
differential input resistance, Input capacitance, Input voltage
range, offset voltage adjustment range, Common Mode
Rejection Ratio (CMRR), Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio
(SVRR), large signal voltage gain and transfer characteristics,
supply voltages, supply current, output voltage swing, output
resistance, slew rate, gain bandwidth product, output short
circuit current.
Op-Amp Configuration:
Specific Objectives: Students will be able to
 Differentiate open and close loop configuration.
 Identify inverting and non-inverting configuration.
 Construct integrator and differentiator.
2.1 Open loop and closed loop configuration of Op-Amp,
its comparison. Virtual ground, virtual short concept.
Open loop configuration – Inverting , Non-inverting
Close loop configuration – Inverting, non- inverting,
differential amplifier, unity gain amplifier (voltage
follower), inverter(sign changer)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
Marks
12
10
12
18
12
22
[08]
2.2 Inverting and non-inverting configuration of
[10]
Adders (summing amplifier, scaling Amplifier, averaging
amplifier) Subtractor.
Basic Integrator
Basic Differentiator
Basic concept of frequency compensation of Op-Amp and
Offset nulling.
Numerical based on designing of above circuit.
Applications of Op-Amp:
Specific Objectives:
 Compute component values for instrumentation amplifier.
 Explain IC LM-324
 Explain different applications of Op-Amp.
3.1 Need for signal conditioning and signal processing.
Hours
[ 08]
17445 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Circuit diagram, operation, derivation of output voltage
Equation. advantages and applications of Instrumentation
amplifier.
Pin diagram pin functions and specifications of IC LM 324
Voltage to current converter (with floating load, with grounded
load) Current to voltage converter.
3.2 Sample and hold circuit.
4
5
[16]
Logarithmic and antilogarithmic amplifiers (using Diodes)
Analog divider and analog multiplier
Comparator: Circuit diagrams and operation of
 Zero crossing detector,
 Schmitt trigger,
 Window detector,
 Phase detector,
 Active peak detector,
 Peak to peak detector
Filters:
Specific Objectives:
 Distinguish the types of filter
 Explain active and passive filter
 Explain different parameters of filter.
Contents:
 Introduction to filters ,Classification of filters,
 Concept of passive and active filters
 Merits and demerits of active filters over passive filters
 Ideal and actual characteristics, terms: - cut off frequency, Pass
band, Stop band, center frequency, roll off rate, BW, Q-factor,
first order and second order Butterworth filters, order of filter,
Low pass filter, high pass filter, band pass filter ( wide band
pass , narrow band pass filter) Band reject filter(wide band
reject, narrow band reject filter), all pass filter. Numerical
based on design of different filters.
Timers
Specific Objectives:
 Draw block diagram of IC 555
 Understand industrial applications of IC 555 ,565
5.1 Introduction to timer IC 555
[10]
 Block diagram of IC 555 and its pin diagram and function of
each pin.
 Concepts of different timer circuits used in industries: water
level controller, Touch plate switch, frequency divider.
 Numericals based on timers.
5.2 Phase Lock Loop
 Principle of operation, block diagram of PLL.
[08]
 Applications of PLL as multiplier, FM demodulator.
 Pin diagram and pin functions of IC 565(PLL)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
10
16
10
18
17445 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Oscillators:
Specific Objectives:
 Explain concept of oscillators
 Explain different types of oscillators
 Develop multivibrators and oscillators for given values.
Contents:
 Concept of oscillators,
 Types of oscillators: Phase shift oscillators, Wien bridge
oscillators using IC-741
 Types of Multivibrators: Monostable, Astable, Bistable using
IC-555 and IC-741. Schmitt trigger, voltage controlled
oscillator (VCO) using IC-555.
Total
6
08
16
64
100
Practical:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Interpret the waveforms.
2. Find faults in circuits.
Motor Skill:
1. Testing and Measurement.
List of Practicals:
Sr. No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Title of the Experiment
Determine the op-amp parameters:
 Input Offset Voltage (Vio)
 Output Offset Voltage (Voo)
 Common mode rejection ratio (CMRR)
Determine the gain of Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier using op-amp and
compare it with theoretical gain.
Verify the operation of Adder and Subtractor circuit using op-amp IC 741.
Verify the working of active integrator and differentiator circuits using op-amp IC 741
for following inputs:
 Sine waveform
 Square waveform
 Rectangular waveform
Assemble V to I converter and I to V converter using IC 741 and measure the
respective output.
Verify the working of following comparator circuits using op-amp IC 741 and draw the
input-output waveforms
 Zero crossing detector
 Active peak detector
Assemble first order low pass Butterworth filter using op-amp and plot the frequency
response and determine its cutoff frequency.
Assemble Astable multivibrator circuit using IC 741. Plot the output waveform and
determine the frequency of oscillations and duty cycle.
Assemble Monostable multivibrator circuit using IC 555. Plot the output waveform
and determine the on-time.
Assemble Schmitt trigger circuit using IC 555. Plot the output waveform and
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17445 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
11
12
‘G’ Scheme
determine UTP and LTP
Assemble Instrumentation amplifier circuit using IC 324 and determine the overall
gain.
Verify the operation of frequency Multiplier using PLL IC 565 and determine the
output frequency.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
Title
Publisher
01
K.R. Botkar
Integrated Circuit
Khanna
02
Ramakant Gayakwad
Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuit
PHI
03
Serigo Franco
04
Willam D. Stanley
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Design with Operational Amplifier and
Analog Integrated Circuit
Operation Amplifier with Linear
Integrated Circuit
30
Tata-McGraw Hill
Person
17445 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electronics Engineering and Video Engineering Group
Course Code : ET/EJ/IE/IS/EN/EX/IC/MU/EV/DE/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Visual Basic
Subject Code : 17043
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
25
Rationale:
Today’s most of the electronically operated devices, integrated circuits, controllers,
equipments, gadgets are run by specific drivers/software. To understand design, develop and write
drivers programming knowledge is required. To run the devices software has to be user friendly.
New approach is to use graphical user interface. Graphical user interface can be implemented using
visual software’s.
Traditionally visual basic is the most popular, versatile, suitable, simple and commonly used
visual programming language to write efficient, compact and portable interfaces, drivers/
software’s.
The subject will enable the students to inculcate visual programming concepts and
methodology used to write, debug, compile and execute simple visual basic programs using
different powerful data types, built in visual controls and integrated visual basic environment (IDE)
provided by Microsoft visual studio. Students will be exposed to event driven programming and
bottom up approached used in objects oriented programming.
Students will understand how a complex interface can be easily implemented in visual basic
with almost no programming expertise.
This course will lay the basic foundation of visual programming which will enable students
to develop simple to complex programmable systems interfaces in the real world of work
General Objectives
Students will able to.
1. Learn visual programming development environment, concepts and methodology.
2. Use essential components (visual tools ) of Visual software’s
3. Develop the skill of visual basic programming to build custom standalone applications
4. Develop applications with Multiple documents interface ( MDI) using common dialog,
menus and graphics
5. Use ADO for database connectivity with different databases.
6. Create simple reports using data report, Seagate crystal reports and integrating it with
visual basic
7. Develop applications using class modules
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17043 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To develop the skill of visual Basic Programming to build software/program
 Text editors, device drivers, hardware control
 Operating system utilities
 Simple to complex academic applications
 GUI based applications
 Database applications (client server based)
Procedures
Programming using
Visual Basic, Menu
driven graphics using
methods
Principles
Design principles of
forms,
common
dialog box, MDI,
Graphics
Concepts
Data types, procedures,
functions, toolbox,
buttons, forms, dialog
boxes, menus, project
check box, status bar,
tab control etc.
Facts
Objects, variables,
constants, Arrays
collections,
Arguments, control
Flow statements,
operators, Library
functions images.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Creating and using the
ActiveX controls
Principles of creation
of active X control,
properties of active X
controls.
ActiveX controls, Events,
property pages, interface
wizard.
Active X control interface
wizard, command button,
Radio button checkbox,
class, modules
32
Programming with
Active data objects.
Principles of DAO, ADO,
database connectivity, data
controls, use, its events and
properties
Database,
record
set, rows, column,
tables, visual data
manager,
Data
controls
Data, Connection,
command, record,
cursor, cursor
location, cursor
types, lock types etc.
17043 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory
Name of Topics
Hours
Topic 1] Introduction to Visual Environment
Specific Objectives:
 Familiar with IDE of Visual basic
 Use concepts of object based language
 Use basic elements of visual interface
 Use properties, events and methods at design time and runtime
02
 Create objects, place them on forms
Contents:
1.1 Concepts of visual programming, object, features, properties, methods, events.
1.2 Environment of VB – Menu bar, toolbar, project explorer, toolbox, properties
window, form designer, form layout, immediate window.
1.3 Concept of project, elements of projects, form, their properties, methods and events.
Topic 2] Introduction to Visual Basic
Specific Objectives:
 Use different data types
 Use powerful features of arrays and collections
 Write procedures and functions
 Call procedures and functions
 Differentiate between procedure and functions
02
 Use library functions for math and string operations
 Use Inputbox and Msgbox functions
Contents:
2.1 Data types, variables, constants, arrays, collections
2.2 procedures, Arguments, function, return values, control flow statements, loop
statements, Nested control structures, exit statement
2.3 Math operators & formulas, logical operators, string functions, special functions
available in VB like Input Box ( ), Message Box ( ) , Format ( ).
Topic 3] Controls and Events
Specific Objectives:
 Use basic controls
 Select appropriate controls for given data
 Set properties of different basic controls
 Call methods and events of basic controls
 Demonstrate the use of each control with simple examples
02
Contents:
3.1 Basic controls: Text box, list Box , Combo Box , Scroll Bar, frame , Option button,
checkbox, command button, OLE controls
3.2 File, Drive, directory, Picture box, Image and timer controls .Designing a form
using controls, concepts of event & properties, changing properties (runtime &
design time) Important events of each control & creating applications using
controls.
Topic 4] Advance Controls & Events
Specific Objectives:
 Add extrinsic controls in an application
 Use common dialog box control and its properties such open, save as, font,
03
color, print and help
 Use rich text box to design simple ms-word like application
 Use and create explorer like utilities using tree view and list controls
 Familiar with windows common controls
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17043 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
4.1 Common Dialog Box controls, The Tree view and List, View controls, the rich
textbox controls
4.2 Windows common controls – status Bar, Tab control, image list control, Important
properties, changing properties at design or run time, event handling.
Topic 5] Module, Class Module, Mdi, Menu Graphics
Specific Objectives:
 Write class modules
 Define functions and procedures in class module
 Access functions and procedures from class module
 Use multiple document interface
 Design menu based applications such as notepad editor
 Work with graphic functions and methods
Contents:
5.1 Concept of module, class module, using class module to define functions,
procedures, variables and accessing them using objects
5.2 MDI- MDI form and child form, Creation and use in
5.3 Menu: Creating own menu using menu editor, popup menu.
5.3 Graphics: Basic controls – Line & shape control , line method, circle method, Pset
method, RGB ( ) Functions, Paint picture ( ) method, Load picture ( ) function.
Topic 6] Database and Report
Specific Objectives:
 Create database
 Use ADO and its properties, methods and events
 Select appropriate concepts such as back-end and front-end
 Make database connectivity with different databases
 Generate report using Data Report and Crystal Report
Contents:
6.1 Concept of database, Record, Record set, Data control & its important properties
6.2 validating data, entering data, visual data manager.
6.3 Programming with ADO ( Active data objects ), using ADO Objects at design timeconnection, command, record set , parameter, Creating & closing a connection;
executing a command,
6.4 Using ADO Objects at run time, attaching visual controls to record set at run time,
Using delete, save, search, update exit, new, add, methods.
6.5 Report generation using data report and crystal report
Total
03
04
16
TERM WORK:Sr
No.
1
2
3
4
Name of the Experiments
a) Study and Understand Visual
Basic Environment
b) Develop VB Project which
accepts User Name & Password
using three forms Login Form1
and Form2 to accept data, and
Form3 to display data.
Design simple calculator to perform mathematical function using Control array like Windows
Calculator.
Design GUI to Find Resistor Value from it’s color code.
Display student data using structure in loop. Implement it using Class module & Procedures
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17043 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
‘G’ Scheme
Demonstrate list boxes features with sorted list and selected item transfer facility.
a) Design Color box using RGB function to observe color change using H- scroll bar.
b) Design project to demonstrate file, folder & drive controls to explore drive & folders.
Design GUI for Testing AC series Circuit
Practice Experiment / Exercise
a) Design project to implement Common Dialog box controls such as open, save, Color, Font,
Printer & Help
b) Design a menu structure like notepad using menu editor
Design MDI application with 4 child forms & arrange forms with cascade, Tile Horizontal,
Tile Vertical arrangements
Design student database project using ADO connectivity in design time and runtime and MS
access as backend database engine, with basic features such as add, edit, update, save, cancel,
delete feature and generate Report using Data Report / Crystal Report
Develop mini VB Project
Reference Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
MSDN library on Line
Reference
02
Evangelos Petroustus
Mastering VB6
WILEY India
03
Steven Holzner
Visual basic 6
Dream Tech. Press
04
Content Development
Group
05
Mohammed Azam
Visual Basic 6.0
Programming
Programming with visual
basic 6.0
06
Nel Jerka
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
--
The complete referenceVB6
35
From Microsoft MSDN Library
Tata McGraw Hill
Vikas Publishers
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
17043 DE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code : ET/EJ/EN/EX/IE/IS/IC/DE/EV/MU/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17044
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or competitive
tests.
While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability to
communicate and attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert lectures,
seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so that there will be
increased participation of students in learning process.
Objectives:
To develop the following skills:
Intellectual skills:
1) Analyze information from different sources.
2) Prepare reports.
Motor skills:
1) Present given topic in a seminar.
2) Interact with peers to share thoughts.
3) Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Present a seminar on identified topic related to new technology
Procedure
Searching information
from Journals, internet
and market
Preparing Power Point
Presentation text for the
topic
Principle
Principle of searching
information
Principle of Power Point
Presentation
Facts
Technical Journals,
Internet
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Computer, Power Point
Presentation Software
37
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
Activity
1
2
3
4
5
Content
Hours
Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student to form a part of the term work.
Minimum two industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas/
industries :
i) Electronic equipment manufacturing unit
ii) Resistance Welding unit
iii) Industrial automation unit
iv) Sugar mill, Paper mill, Cement Industry.
v) Railway station control room.
vi) Telephone Exchange.
vii) Any other suitable Industry.
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert to be organized from any of
the following areas (Any three)
i) Cyber laws.
ii) Fiber optics communication system
iii) Disaster management
iv) Atomic energy
v) Industrial Safety
vi) Computer security systems/Ethical hacking.
vii) Any other suitable topic
viii) Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
Information Search :
Information search can be done through manufacturers, catalogue, internet,
magazines; books etc. and submit a report on one of the
following topics:
i) GPS
ii) Market survey for motors used in electronic application
iii) Electronic billing system.
iv) Elevators installation and maintenance
v) Any other suitable areas
Seminar :
Seminar topic should be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each
student shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar
(Presentation time – 10 Minutes)
Group Discussion:
The students should discuss in group of six to eight students and write a brief
report on the same as a part of term work. The topic of group discussion may
be selected by the faculty members.
Total
16
08
06
10
08
48
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
01
Author
NRDC, Publication Bi
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Invention Intelligence
38
Publisher
National Research Development
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Monthly Journal
02
03
04
05
‘G’ Scheme
Journal
Corporation, GOI.
How things works
DK Publishing
encyclopedia
Innovation mgmt.& new
Trott
Pearson Education
product development
Basic Managerial Skills
E.H. McGrath, S.J.
PHI
for All – Ninth Edition
Apprenticeship Training Scheme:- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
DK Publishing
2. Web sites
www.engineeringforchange.org
www.wikipedia.com
www.slideshare.com
www.teachertube.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
39
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
40
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING GROUP
COURSE CODE : EE/EP
DURATION OF COURSE : SIX SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
FULL TIME / PART TIME : FULL TIME
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies $
Elements of Mechanical
Engineering
Industrial Instrumentation
D.C. Machines & Transformers
Industry Electrical Systems-I
Transmission and Distribution of
Electrical Power
Professional Practices-II
abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
EST
17401
01
--
02
01
50#*
20
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
EME
17413
02
--
02
02
50
20
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
IIN
DMT
IES
17414
17415
17416
04
04
03
--01
02
02
02
03
03
03
100
100
100
40
40
40
50#
50#
--
20
20
--
--25#
--10
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
10
20
TDE
17417
04
--
--
03
100
40
--
--
--
--
--
--
PPT
17038
Total
--03
------18 01 13
-500
-100
-25
Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
---
[email protected]
175
20
--
SW
(17400)
50
50
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 32 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 850
@ - Internal Assessment, # External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* Online Examination,
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as sessional work
(SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR, TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
25
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment.
2. Know key issues about environment.
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation.
4. Know aspects about improvement methods.
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Credit, Ecosystem
3
17401 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources
 Definition
 Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources
 General description of forest resources
 Functions and benefits of forest resources
 Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber extraction,
Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources
 Hydrosphere: Different sources of water
 Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water
 Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06
 Categories of mineral resources
 Basics of mining activities
 Mine safety
 Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:
 Food for all
 Effects of modern agriculture
 World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electrical Engineering Group
Course Code : EE / EP
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Elements of Mechanical Engineering
Subject Code : 17413
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
02
--
02
02
50
--
--
[email protected]
75
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work. (SW)
Rationale:
Electrical engineering is the basic engineering branch. Electric power supply is needed for
running of mechanical and the chemical process equipment for which different electric motors are
used, so in mech industry, the electrical engineer has to take care of various electrical installations
with its maintenance.
The electrical engineer has to look after various aspects related to electrical engineering in
respect of mechanical equipment. (Boilers, Steam turbine, steam engines)
There are the equipments that are used for generation of electrical power.
The content on boiler, steam turbine, and stem engine will enable the electrical engineer to
adopt appropriate electrical engineering support for the efficient use of these equipments.
Topics on air compressors and pumps, turbine also provide necessary guide line in respect of
electrical engineer. For trouble free working of these equipment with saving ion energy
consumption.
General Objectives:
Students should be able to
1. Know the function of different mechanical equipment along with their location.
2. Understand working of high pressure boilers and steam turbine and thermal power plant.
3. Know the operation and control of fuel and steam supply.
4. Enlist sources of waste heat from boiler, IC engine.
5. Describe internal combustion engine.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17413 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principles
Concepts
Facts
Understand, analyze and apply various aspects of mechanical engineering
in practice. Application area in relation with construction and working of
IC engine, steam turbine, air compressor and pumps.
Knowledge of maintenance.
Construction, Faults finding and remedial
measures and analysis of IC engine,
working of turbine, boiler and pumps
Engine testing, Power
generation and power
consumption.
Laws for impulsive force . Laws of
thermodynamics, Principle of centrifugal
action, Conversion of heat energy into
mechanical into electric.
Efficiency of engine,
Newtons laws, Vertex
flow, Steam Table
Process, Power generation, pressure rise,
Temperature rise.
Power generation, Heat
energy loss, power
consumption.
Steam power plant, I.C. engine, Air compressor, Pumps, Hydro power
plant, Wind Turbine
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
17413 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Hours
Topic 1: Boilers, Steam turbines, Steam engine
Specific Objectives:
 Calculate the properties of two phase system by using steam table
 Explain construction & working of boilers
 Identify the heat losses & malfunctioning of boilers
Contents:
1.1 Construction and working of critical and super critical boilers.
10
1.2 Boiler efficiency
1.3 Boiler Act (for remedial measure).
1.4 Classification of turbines.
1.5 Impulse and reaction turbine.
1.6 Power developed by turbine.
1.7 Different power losses in turbine.
Topics 2: I.C. Engines
Specific Objectives:
 Calculate performance of engine
 Identify the malfunctioning Causes
Contents:
2.1 Classification of I.C. engines.
06
2.2 Testing and performance of I. C. engines.
 Break power
 Indicated power
 Frictional power
2.3 Fault finding and remedial action.
2.4 Starting motor of I.C. engine.
Topic 3: Air Compressor
Specific Objectives:
 Know the working principles of air compressor
 Identify Methods of energy saving
 Identify the fault & suggest remedies
Contents:
3.1 Introduction
08
3.2 Definition : Compression ratio, Compressor capacity, Free air
Deliver, swept volume.
3.3 Reciprocating and rotory air compressor, their working and
Construction.
3.4 Methods of energy saving in compressor.
3.5 Fault finding and remedial action.
Topic 4: Pumps
Specific Objectives:
 Selection of pumps for various applications
 Know the construction & working of pumps
 Identify the trouble shooting of IC engines
08
Contents:
4.1 Classification of pumps.
4.2 Type of pumps and their working.
4.3 Power required to run the pump.
4.4 Fault finding and remedial action.
Total
32
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
Marks
16
10
12
12
50
17413 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Understand vapour process of steam boilers & different mountings & accesories
2. Analyze the performance of pumps& turbines
Motor Skills:
1. Use pressure & temp measuring device
2. Operate I C Engine & know the working of dynometers
List of Practicals:
(1)Write a report on visit to Sugar factory/steam power plant consisting of
(a)Working of boiler (b) Working of turbine (c) Foundation of boiler.
(2) Write a report on visit to Sugar factory/steam power plant to observe
(a) Operation of condenser (b) Operation of cooling tower.
(3) To determine brake power of single cylinder diesel engine by conducting trial on it.
(4) To determine overall efficiency of a centrifugal pump by conducting a trial test on it and
observe foundation of pump.
(5) Observe the operation of air compressor for identification of sources of air leakage.
(6) Observe the operation of reciprocating pump and identify types of faults and suggest
remedial measures.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
1
Domkundwar V. M
A Course In Thermal Engg.
Dhanpat Rai & Co.
2
R. K. Bansal
Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic
Machine
Laxmi Publication
3
T. S. Rajan
Basic Mechanical Engg.
New Age International
4
Dr. Kripal Singh
Automobile Engineering
Standard Publishers
Distributers
5
R. S. Khurmi
A Text Book Of Thermal
Engineering
S Chand & Co. Ltd
6
C. M. Agrwal
Atext Book Of Thermal Engg
Wiley Precise Text Book
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
10
Publisher
17413 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electrical Engineering Group
Course Code
: EE/EP
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Industrial Instrumentation
Subject Code
: 17414
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
A diploma engineer is required to work in various capacities such as development,
innovation & maintenance engineer, in today’s highly automated industrial environment. Therefore
the basic knowledge of industrial instrumentation and control is a necessary prerequisite.
He should be conversant with the basic principles of transduction of physical variables into
electrical signals, signal conditioning circuits, basic data acquisitions systems.
General Objectives:
1. Identify different components of instrumentation system.
2. Understand different qualitative parameters of instruments.
3. Identify appropriate transducers for different physical variables.
4. Understand different signal conditioning circuits.
5. Understand different Data Acquisition System types and their use.
6. Design of complete system for measurement of process variables.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17414 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
principle
concepts
Facts
Design of instrumentation system for typical process variables.
Various factors to be considered while selecting transducer, signal
conditioning circuits, data acquisition systems in the design of
instrumentation system.
Construction and
working principles of
different transducers.
Concept of
calibration
Working of different
signal conditioning
circuits.
First order, second
order instrument
responses.
Static and dynamic characteristics of
measurements
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
Data Acquisition
Systems, principle of
ratiometric conversion.
Concept of
signal
conditioning
A-to-D and Dto-A
conversion
Transducers for different physical
variables
17414 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Detailed Content
Topic 1: Introduction to Instrumentation System
Specific Objectives:
 State basic block diagram of instrumentation system.
 Identify static and dynamic characteristics of instruments
Contents:
1.1 Basic instrumentation system
 Basic block diagram of generalized Instrumentation system
 Need of each block.
1.2 Static characteristics of instruments
 Accuracy and measurement uncertainty
 Precision, repeatability and reproducibility
 Tolerance
 Range and span
 Linearity
 Sensitivity, resolution
 Zero drift ,sensitivity drift
 Hysteresis effect
 Dead zone
1.3 Dynamic characteristics of instruments
 Characteristic equation of an instrument in general form
 Zero order, first order and second order representation of instruments
 Response of first, second order instruments to step, ramp and sinusoidal
inputs
 Dynamic error, settling time
1.4 Calibration
 Principles of calibration
 Calibration chain and traceability
Topics 2: Transducers
Specific Objectives:
 Classify the transducers on the basis their application
 Select appropriate transducer as per application

Contents:
2.1: Transducers
 Transducers: Definition, classification of electrical transducers.
2.2: Measurement of strain
 Definition of stress and strain
 Operation of resistance strain gauge
 Construction of bonded metal foil strain gauge
 Strain gauge circuits: Wheatstone bridge full bridge configuration,
temperature compensation
2.3 Measurement of Force and Torque
 Force measurement using load cell
 Types of load cells: column type and beam type
2.4 Measurement of torque using torque cell
2.5 Temperature Measurement
 Thermistor-working principle, characteristics, sources of error
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
Hours
Marks
08
16
20
32
17414 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

Thermocouple- Seebeck effect, Cold Junction compensation (CJC), CJC
by electronic means, thermocouple types and their ranges.
 Resistance thermometer (RTD): working principle, characteristics
ranges of common RTD elements, self heating effect, advantages of
platinum resistance thermometer, three wire and four wire
configurations.
2.6 Displacement measurement
 Linear variable differential transformer (LVDT)- working principle,
characteristics, null voltage phase sensitive demodulation.
 Rotary motion measurement using optical rotary encoder
2.7 Pressure measurement
 Definition of pressure and its units
 Absolute, differential and gauge pressure
 Absolute pressure measurement using bourdon tube gauge
 Diaphragm type pressure transducer using four element strain gauge
rosettes.
2.8 Flow measurement
 Difference between mass flow rate and volumetric flow rate
 Volumetric flow rate measurement using electromagnetic flow meter,
turbine type flow meter and hot wire anemometer
2.9 Measurement of magnetic field
 Hall effect and hall effect transducer
 Measurement of ac current by hall effect transducer
2.10 Level measurement
 Float type, capacitive and ultrasonic level measurement.
2.11 Rotational velocity
 Optical sensing, inductive and magnetic type pulse pickups
 Analog tachometers (DC and AC)
3. Signal Conditioning Circuits
Specific Objectives:
 Draw basic block diagram of OP-AMP
 Identify different applications of OP-AMP in signal conditioning
circuits.
Contents:
3.1. Operational Amplifier and its characteristic parameters
 Block diagram and features of OPAMP (all stages) Circuit Symbols
and Terminals. OPAMP IC’s: 741 pin diagram and pin function.
 Ideal op-amp: electrical characteristics. Ideal voltage transfer curve.
 Definitions of parameters of op-amp: Input offset voltage, Input offset
current, Input bias current, Differential input resistance, Input
capacitance, CMMR, SVRR, large signal voltage gain, output voltage
swing, output resistance, slew rate, gain bandwidth product, output short
circuit current.
3.2 OP-AMP basic circuits
 Open loop and closed loop configuration of op-amp, its comparison.
Virtual ground concept
 Open loop configuration
 Close loop configuration: Inverting, non- inverting, differential
amplifier, unity gain amplifier (voltage follower),inverter(sign changer),
Adders, Subtractor, Integrator, Differentiator
 Instrumentation amplifier (using one two and three op-amps)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
12
16
17414 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

Voltage to current converter (with floating load, with grounded load),
Current to voltage converter.
 Sample and hold circuit (IC LF 398 , Pin diagram, specification and pin
functions)
 Concept of comparator: zero crossing detector, Schmitt trigger, window
detector,
 Phase detector, active peak detector, peak to peak detector
 Classification of filters, Concept of passive & active filters
 Survey of commercially available op-amps (Any Three)
Topic 4. Data Acquisition System
Specific Objectives:
 Draw generalized block diagram of data acquisition system (DAS)
 State different types of DAS
 State various techniques of input signal conditioning in DAS
 State working principle of analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog
conversion.
Contents:
4.1 Generalized Data acquisition system
 Generalized Data acquisition system: Block diagram. & explanation.
 Signal conditioning in DAS, Ratio metric conversion, Logarithmic
conversion
 DAS Types-Single channel, multi-channel DAS only block diagram.
4.2 Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion
 Study of different techniques of Analog to Digital convertors ADC and
Digital to Analog converters DAC only working principle.
Topic 5. Operation of Instrumentation System
Specific Objectives
08
12
16
24
64
100
 State different factors to be considered in transducer selection
 Draw block diagrams and circuit diagrams for instrumentation system
for different physical variables.
Contents:
5.1
Transducer selection
 Points to be considered while selecting a transducer for its intended
applications.
5.2
Working of Instrumentation system for
 Temperature Measurement by RTD, thermistor, Thermocouple.
 Force measurement using load cell.
 Pressure measurement using diaphragm type transuder.
 Speed measurement by non-contact type transducer
 Displacement measurement by LVDT.
 Rotary motion using optical encoder.
 Flow measurement by turbine flow meter.
 Liquid level measurement by resistive sensor.
 AC current RMS indication using Hall Effect transducer.
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
17414 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1) Selection of transducer for given physical variable.
2) Analysis of the transducer characteristics.
3) Selection of signal conditioning circuit.
Motor Skills:
Testing and calibration of the given instrument.
List of Practicals:
1. Measure output voltage and Displacement in LVDT and draw a graph to verify the
characteristics of Output Voltages Vs Displacement
2. Measure output Voltage and Force in Strain Guage nd draw graph to verify the
characteristics of Force Vs Output Volatage
3. Verify the relation between the output voltage and temperature by using a RTD (PT 100)
thermistor and Thermocouple
4. Use a Level measuring transducer to measure level and output voltage & verify the
characteristics of the transducer.
5. Plot the graph and verify the characteristics of LDR/Photo diode and photo transistor
6. Pressure measurement using diaphragm type Pressure gauge
7. Verify the function of OPAMP as inverting/non inverting amplifier, adder, subtractor.
8. Verify the function of OPAMP as comparator, Schmitt trigger
9. Plot characteristics of primary and secondary current for a current transformer.
10. Measure angular velocity using optical tachometer.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
Title
Publisher
1
Alok Barua
Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation
Wiley India
2
H.S.Kalsi Tata
Electronic Instrumentation
McGraw Hill
3
William Dunn
4
5
6
Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentation and
process control
Electrical and Electronics
A.K.Sawhney
Measurement and Instrumentation (19th Edition)
Modern electronic instrumentation and
Cooper Helfrick
measurement techniques
Ramakant
Op-AMPs and linear integrated circuits ( 4th
Gaikwad
Edition)
McGraw-Hill
Dhanpat Rai & co
Prentice Hall
Prentice –Hall
India
2. IS, BIS and International Codes:
ISO/IEC 17025 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration
laboratories.
3. Websites:
1. Free video lectures by Prof. Alok Barua, IIT Kharagpur
2. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/2347/Industrial-Instrumentation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
17414 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electrical Engineering Group
Course Code : EE /EP
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : D. C. Machine and Transformer
Subject Code : 17415
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
This subject is intended to teach the student facts, concepts, principles and procedures for
the operations, testing and maintenance of electric machines such as dc motors, generators and
transformers. Students will also be able to analyze characteristics of electric machines and
transformers.
These machines are used in power system for generation, transmission & distribution,
utilization systems and also in traction systems. Knowledge gained by the students will be used in
the study of technological subjects such as power system operation & control, utilization system,
switchgear & protection, testing and maintenance of electrical equipment and modern electric
traction.
The students will be able to know the use of transformer in measurement, use of CT‘s and
PT’s in control circuits, fault locations etc. The knowledge and skill gained by the student will be
used while working as technicians in discharging technical functions such as electrical supervisor,
testing engineer and procurement engineer.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to1. Understand the laws governing the operation of electrical machines.
2. Understand the working principles of different DC machines and transformer.
3. Know the constructional details of the DC machines and transformer.
4. Know the areas of application of the various dc machines and different types of
transformers.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17415 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedures
Applications in power system for generation,
transmission & distribution, utilization systems and
also in traction systems.
Performance and
characteristics of
DC motors
Performance of
transformer &
different tests on it
Construction and operation
Construction and
operation of DC
motors
Single
phase
Types of DC motors
Principles
Concepts
Facts
Three
phase
Special
Classification of transformers
Working Principle and
construction of DC
machines
Working Principle and
construction of Transformer
Dynamically induced
emf.
Statically and Mutually
induced emf
Various parameters in an electric circuit such as R, L, C and power
factor. Faradays laws of electromagnetic induction. Lenz’s law, cork
screw rule, thumb rule, Flemings right and left hand rule.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17415 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: DC Generators
Specific Objectives:
 Identify the different parts of DC Machines.
 Identify different types of DC generators from connection diagram.
Contents:
1.1
Introduction
 Principle of operation of DC generator
 Fleming’s right hand rule
1.2
Construction of DC machine
 Parts and functions
 Different materials used for different parts.
1.3
E.m.f. equation of generator (derivation)
 Numericals on e.m.f. equation
1.4
Types of DC generators
 Connection diagrams of different types of DC generators
 Applications of DC generators
Topics 2: DC Motors
Specific Objectives:
 Plot different characteristics of DC motors.
 Control the speed of DC motors.
 Determine the efficiency of DC motor.
 Select DC motor for particular industrial applications.
Contents:
2.1
Introduction
 Principle of operation of DC motor
 Fleming’s left hand rule
 Back e.m.f. and its significance
 Voltage equation and power equation of DC motor
 Types of DC motors
2.2
DC Motor Torque and Speed
 Armature torque (derivation)
 Shaft torque
 Brake horse power
 Numericals on torque and speed.
2.3
Efficiency of DC Motor
 Losses in DC motor
 Power stages
 Efficiency of DC motor
 Condition for maximum efficiency
 Numericals on efficiency.
2.4
DC motor characteristics
 Torque verses armature current
 Speed verses armature current
 Speed verses torque
 Selection of motors for particular applications.
2.5
Speed control of DC series motor
 Flux control method
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
Hours
Marks
06
08
12
18
17415 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Armature resistance control method (No numerical)
DC motor starters
 Necessity of DC motor starters
2.7
Brushless DC Motor
 Introduction
 Working
 Applications
Topic 3: Single Phase Transformer.
Specific Objectives:
 Draw phasor diagram of transformer for different load conditions.
 Perform various tests on transformers
 Evaluate parameters of transformer under different loading conditions.
 Determine regulation and efficiency of single-phase transformer.
Contents:
3.1
Introduction
 Principle of operation
 Faradays law of electromagnetic induction.
3.2
Construction of single phase transformer.
 Magnetic circuit
 Electric circuit
 Dielectric circuit
3.3
Types of transformers
 Shell type and core type- their comparison
 Step up and step down transformer
 Amorphous Core type Distribution Transformer
3.4
EMF equation of transformer
 Derivation
 Voltage transformation ratio
 Numericals on above.
3.5
Ideal transformer
 Characteristics of ideal transformer.
 Phasor diagram
3.6
Practical Transformer
 Transformer on no load-phasor diagram
 Leakage reactance
 Transformer on load- phasor diagram
 Numericals on above.
3.7
Equivalent circuit of transformer
 Equivalent resistance and reactance
 Numericals on above.
3.8
Voltage regulation and Efficiency of transformer
 Why transformer rating is in KVA?
 Voltage regulation of transformer
 Losses in transformer
 Efficiency of transformer
 Condition for maximum efficiency
 All day efficiency
 Numericals on above.
3.9
Tests on Single phase Transformer
 Polarity test
2.6
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
26
42
17415 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Direct loading test
 Open circuit test
 Short circuit test
 Voltage regulation and efficiency based on OC & SC tests.
 Numericals on above.
3.10 Parallel operation of transformer
 Advantages of parallel operation of transformer.
 Conditions for parallel operation of transformer.
 Load sharing with equal turn ratio
 Concept of load sharing with unequal turn ratio
 Numericals on above.
Topic 4: Three Phase Transformer.
Specific Objectives:
 To identify different parts of three-phase transformer.
 To identify polarity and phases of three-phase transformer.
 To select three-phase transformer for particular applications.
Contents:
4.1
Introduction
 Bank of three single phase transformer
 Single unit of three phase transformer
 Construction, different parts and their functions
 Types of transformer cooling
 Three phase transformers connections as per IS:2026 (part IV)1977
 Three phase to two phase conversion (Scott Connection)
 Comparison between Distribution transformer and Power
transformer
4.2
Selection of transformer as per IS: 10028 (Part I)-1985
 Criteria for selection of distribution transformer
 Criteria for selection of power transformer
4.3
Parallel operation of three phase transformer
 Conditions for parallel operation
Specification of three-phase distribution transformer as per IS:1180 (part
I)-1989
4.5
Tests on Three-phase Transformer
 Polarity test
 Phasing out test
4.6
Three- phase auto transformer
 Construction
 Operation
 Application
Topic 5: Special Transformers.
Specific Objectives:
 To use various special transformers for particular applications..
Contents:
5.1
Single phase auto transformer
 Construction and working
 Comparison with two winding transformer
 Advantages and disadvantages of auto transformer
12
16
08
16
4.4
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
17415 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
5.2
5.3
5.4
‘G’ Scheme
 Applications of auto transformer
Instrument Transformers
 Current transformer- construction, working and applications
 Potential transformer- construction, working and applications
Isolation transformer
 Features and applications
Single phase welding transformer
 Features and applications.
Total
64
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. To understand the concepts of DC machines and transformers.
2. To identify different parts and windings of DC machines and transformers.
3. Ability to test, plot and verify the characteristics.
4. Ability to interpret the test results.
Motor Skills:
1. To draw the circuit diagram.
2. To measure different parameters using different meters.
3. To connect different meters according to circuit diagram.
4. To follow sequence of operations.
5. To measure the values and note down the readings.
6. To operate DC machines and transformers.
List of Practicals:
1. Observe and identify different constructional parts of D. C machine and identify
different windings by resistance measurement.
2. Start a D. C shunt motor and reverse its direction of rotation.
3. Control the speed of D.C series motor by flux control and armature resistance control.
4. Perform load test on D. C series motor and plot its performance characteristics.
5. Perform brake test on D. C shunt motor and plot speed – Torque characteristics.
6. Determine transformation ratio, regulation and efficiency of single phase transformer by
direct loading.
7. Perform open circuit and short circuit test on single phase transformer and determine
equivalent circuit constants, regulation and efficiency.
8. Perform parallel operation of single phase transformer and determine the load sharing.
9. Visit a transformer manufacturing unit /repairing workshop and observe the
constructional details of a three phase distribution transformer and identify various
parts.
10. Perform polarity test and phasing out test on a three phase transformer.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
1.
2.
Author
V. N. Mittle & Arvind
Mittal
D. P. Kothari &
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Basic Electrical Engineering
Electrical Machines
22
Publisher
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd. New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
17415 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
I. J.Nagrath
Ltd. New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill Education Pvt.
Ltd. New Delhi
3.
S. K. Bhattacharya
Electrical Machines
4.
V. K. Mehta & Rohit
Mehta,
Principles of Electrical
Machines
S.Chand and Co.Ltd., New Delhi
5.
K. Murungesh Kumar
DC Machines and Transformers
Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.
New Delhi.
7
Tarnekar &
Kharabanda.
B. L. Theraja
8
Edward Hughes
9
M. N. Bandyopadhyay
Laboratory Course in Electrical
Engineering
Electrical Technology
Electrical and Electronics
Technology
Electrical Machines theory and
practice
6.
S.Chand and Co.Ltd., New Delhi
S.Chand and Co.Ltd., New Delhi
ELBS Publication.
PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New
Delhi
2. CDs, PPTs, Models, Charts etc.:
Videos1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RAc1RYilugI
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ue6S8L4On-Y&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=d_aTC0iKO68&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xi7o8cMPI0E&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VucsoEhB0NA&feature=related
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=A951LRFRL_M&feature=related
3. IS, BIS and International Codes:
 IS: 2026 (Part IV)-1977 Indian standard specification for power transformers PART IV
Terminal markings, tappings and connections
 IS: 10028 (Part I )-1981 Indian standard code of practice for selection, installation and
maintenance of transformers, PART I selection
 IS: 1180 (Part I)-1977 Indian standard specification for power transformer
4. Websites:
 www.standardsbis.in/
 www.bis.org.in/
 www.youtube.com/watch
 www.google.co.in
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17415 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electrical Engineering Group
Course Code : EE/EP
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Industrial Electrical Systems - I
Subject Code : 17416
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
01
02
03
100
--
25#
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
A diploma engineer is required to work as supervisor & knowledge worker in different
organizations and is responsible to provide electrification. Maintain supply prepare design,
estimates, read drawing, IE rules, data tables, specification, for all types electrical installation,
Provision & maintaining
earthing
& all protective devices like MCCB,ELCB etc. Also
Knowledge of maintenance, LT Lines, transformers, types of cables & wires are essential. Hence
this core subject has been included at fourth semester in this curriculum.
General Objectives:
The Students will be able to: 1. Read & interprets Electrical Installation drawings.
2. Understand & apply IE rules.
3. Make use of data tables & specification of wire, cables, LT lines & Distribution
Transformer, MCCB, ELCB.
4. Understand principles & procedures of earthing.
5. Know basic terms to prepare design & estimate of installation.
6. Understand & apply procedures for contracts & tenders.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17416 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application:
Estimating & costing of Residential, Commercial & Industrial Electrical Installation and prepare
tendering documents, Testing of Electrical Installation and Evaluation & billing of executed work
Procedure:
Testing of Electrical
Installation as per IS
Tender & Tendering
documents
Execution of work as per plan
To prepare the
schedule of
Material
Costing of Material,
Labour, Overhead,
contingencies
Circuit design and wiring
design procedure for each type
of Installation
Selection of Rating and Size of conductor &
Conduit, main switch, Distribution board, Bus bar
etc., Selection & Rating of protective devices &
ear thing of Installation, Selection & Rating of
Accessories required for Installation
Position of equipment in Installation,
Deciding the path of wiring cable and
conduit & ear thing
Principles
Design consideration of Electrical Installation, Principles of circuit design for
each type of Installation, Principles of execution of work
Concepts
Residential, commercial and Industrial wiring, Lighting and
power circuit, wires, cables, overhead and underground wiring,
earthing
Facts
Electrical Engineering Drawing, IE rules applicable to Residential, Commercial &
Industrial Installation, General rules & Guidelines for Residential, Commercial &
Industrial Installation, Data tables of conductor, Material and Accessories, Various
plans & diagrams related to electrical Installation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17416 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topics and Contents
1. Drawings and IE rules
Specific Objectives
 Understand different types of electrical Installation
 Know and read Electrical drawings & symbols
 Know IE rules
---------------------------------------------------------------------------- Classification of electrical installations
 General requirements of electrical installation
 Reading & interpretation of electrical engineering drawings & symbols
related to installations
 Representation of different types of diagrams, such as schematic, circuit,
wiring diagram and its single line representation as per IS code.
 IE rules related to electrical installation
2. Service connections
Specific Objectives
 Select appropriate method for service connection
 Differentiate between various service connections
 Concept of service connection
 Types of service connections and their features
 Methods of installation of service connection
 Differentiate between underground and overhead service connection
 Service connection for 11 KV H. T. Consumer
3. Electrification of residential Installation
Specific Objectives
 Select wires and wiring methods as per the requirement
 Prepare comparison chart of various wiring accessories
 Use given guidelines for residential installation
 Calculate total electrical load
 Types of wires and wiring methods as per IS No.
 General rules and guidelines for installation of residential electrification
and positioning of equipments
 Calculation of total electrical load in the residential installation
 Procedure for the design of number of sub circuits
 Method of drawing single line diagram
 Selection of type of wire and wiring method
 Load calculation and selection of size of wire by considering overload and
future expansion
 Determine length of batten and length of wire
 Selection of rating for main switch, distribution board ,MCB,ELCB, and
wiring accessories
 Purpose of earthing and types of earthing
 Determine length and size of earth wire
 Prepare list of material for residential installation with their costing
 Total estimation and costing of overall residential installation with proper
cost of material , labour charges , contingencies charges
 Determine per point charges
 Wiring diagram for residential installation: Single Line and multiline
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
Hours Marks
04
10
04
10
12
24
17416 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
representation.
4. Electrification of Commercial Installation
Specific Objectives
 Difference between residential and commercial installation
 Prepare comparative chart for different ratings, size & other technical
specifications from manufactures/ dealers.
 Use given guideline for commercial installation
 Collect various specifications of wiring material
 Concept of commercial installation
 Difference between residential and commercial installation
 Difference between wires and cables
 Types of cables required for commercial installations according to size and
core
 General requirements and selection factors for commercial installation
 Load calculation and selection of size of service connection and nature of
supply
 Decide number of lighting and power sub circuits as per the IE rule
 Decide size of wire/cable required for every sub circuit
 Decide length of wire required for every sub circuit
 Draw the single line diagram
 Decide ratings of wiring accessories, main switch, bus bar MCB, ELCB
etc.
 Decide proper method of earthing for commercial installation
 Prepare list of material for commercial installation with their costing
 Draw the single line diagram
 Find out the estimation chart with proper cost of material , cost of labour,
contingencies charges and profit margin
 Draw the circuit diagram
4. Electrification of Industrial Installation
Specific Objectives
 Based on criteria for selection decide if the installation is industrial
installation
 State difference between power wiring and actual industrial wiring
 Guideline for industrial installation
 Calculate detail estimate and costing of industrial installation











Concept of industrial load
Concept of motor wiring circuit and single line diagram
Guidelines about power wiring and motor wiring
Design considerations of electrical installation in small
industry/factory/workshop
Machine current calculations
selection of size for wires , cables required for the machines and its
controlling unit
Decide length and size of cable required for the every industrial load
Decide ratings of wiring accessories, main switch, bus bar MCB, ELCB
etc. for every industrial load.
Decide proper method of earthing for industrial installation
Prepare list of material for industrial installation with their costing
Find out the estimation chart with proper cost of material , cost of labour,
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
12
20
12
24
17416 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
contingencies charges and profit margin
 Draw the circuit diagram
6. Contracts, Tenders and Execution
Specific Objectives
 Draft tender documents
 Fill tender documents following appropriate procedure and be present
and act as per the requirements and rules while opening of the tender.
 Prepare billing
 Concept of contract and tenders
 Types of contracts and contractors
 Types of tenders
 Requirements of valid contract and good contractor
 Tender notice
 Procedure for submission and opening of tenders
 Comparative statements for selection of contractors
 Principles of execution of work
 Billing of executed works.
Total
04
12
48
100
Tutorials:
1. Electrical installation scheme for small bungalow or house. Draw wiring diagram and
prepare detailed estimation and costing.
2. Electrical installation scheme for commercial building/ floor mill. Draw wiring diagram and
prepare detailed estimation and costing.
3. Electrical installation scheme for small industry/factory/workshop/agriculture pump . Draw
single line diagram and prepare detailed estimation and costing. Draw the circuit diagram
Assignments:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Identify and apply different designing methods as per the requirements
2. Select proper ratings
3. Ability to analyse and select appropriate methods for estimation and costing
Motor Skills:
1. Drawing skill.
2. Measuring dimensions
List of Assignments: Problems & sheets on following topics.
1) Electrical estimation & design of residential consumers (for flats/Bungalows/Row houses)
2) Electrical estimation & design of Commercial consumers (for Malls/Colleges/Hospitals,
Banks)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17416 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
3) Electrical estimation & design of Agricultural consumers (Pump jets/submersible pump)
4) Electrical estimation & design of small & medium Industrial consumers.
5) Electrical Installation & layout preparation of your college campus.
6) Preparation of a NIT (Notice Inviting Tender)
Note: Estimations be made for loads up to 100 KVA
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Name of the Author
Title of the book
Name of the Publisher
1
J.B.Gupta
Electrical Installation Estimating &
costing
S.K.Kataria & sons New
Delhi
2
Raina Bhattachraya
Estimating dsign & costing
New Age
3
Allasappan &
Ekambarm
Estimating design & costing
Tata McGraw hill
4
S L Uppal
Estimating & costing
Khanna Publiser
5
Surjit Singh
Electrical Estimating & costing
Dhanpat Rai & co.
2. ISO, IS, BS standards, Data Sheets, IE Rules Handbook
IS/International code: IS5909, 7733, 2174, 732, 4648
3. Charts, Models, CDs, Transparencies,
4. Websites:
http://www.bestestimatepro.com/
bieap.gov.in/estimatingandcosting.pdf
http://indiacatalog.com/web_directory/electrical/electrical.html
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17416 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electrical Engineering Group
Course Code : EE / EP
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Transmission & Distribution of Electrical Power
Subject Code : 17417
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
--
03
100
--
--
--
100
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Electrical Diploma Engineers should know Transmission Voltages, Distribution Voltage.
They should be able to identify various components & there functions. They will be able to
measure system performance. They will use this knowledge in studying Switchgear & Protection
on completing the study of Generation, Transmission, Distribution, Switchgear, Protection &
utilization of electrical energy, Students will be work as electrical engineer in power industry.
General Objectives: Student will be able to: 1. Know various types of Transmission & distribution system.
2. Identify various components & know their functions.
3. Know types of conductors used in transmission and distribution circuits
4. Know the effect of changes in parameters on performance of the lines
5. Draw substation layout as per the requirements.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17417 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Student will use this knowledge to study switchgear & protection. On completion of
the course student will be able to work as supervisor / Technician in power Industry,
manufacturing Industry & Public utility.
Performance of
transmission
line
Procedure to draw
phasor diagram & to
find sending end terms
Performance of
distribution line Voltage
drop calculation
Procedure
Short
transmission
line
Principles
Concepts
Facts
Medium
transmission
line
Long
transmission
line
Single
Phase
Distribution
line
Three
Phase
Distribution
line
Types of AC Distribution system
Criteria for Classification of A.C.
Distribution System
Types of transmission line
Criteria for classifying
transmission line
Concept of Distributed R, L &C
for transmission line
Concentrated & distributed load,
voltage drop per unit length.
A.C. Generators, Motors, Transformers, Fuses, P.F.
improving equipment’s i.e. synchronous condensers.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17417 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Basic Transmission
Specific Objectives:
 Draw single line diagram of a given transmission network
 Classify the lines based on their length, voltage rating
Contents:

Single Line Diagram of Transmission & Distribution of Electric
supply system.
 Meaning of Primary & Secondary Transmission and its Standard
Voltage level used in India.
 Classification of Transmission Lines according to voltage level,
Length of Transmission line, Type of Supply Voltage & Method of
Construction.
 Advantage of High Voltage for power transmission
Topics 2: Transmission Line Components
Specific Objectives:
 Identify the main Components of Transmission & Distribution Line.
 Select size and type of conductor for transmission line based on its
rating
 Calculate string efficiency
Contents:
Overhead Conductors: ----------------------------------------------- 04 marks
Hours
Marks
04
08
14
24



Properties of Conducting Material.
Comparison of Copper & Aluminum as a Conducting Material.
Different types of Conductor such as Copper, All Alluminium
Conductor (AAC), Alluminium Conductor Steel Reinforced (ACSR),
All Alluminium Alloy Conductor (AAAC), Bundled Conductor, Steel
Conductor and their applications.
 Trade Names of various types of conductors.
 Stranded Conductor: Advantages & Disadvantages.
Underground Cables: ------------------------------------------------ 04 Marks
 Introduction & requirements.
 Classification of cables.
 Cable conductors.
 Cable construction.
 Cable insulation, Metallic sheathing & mechanical protection.
 Comparison with overhead lines
 Cable laying and Cable Joining
Line supports: ----------------------------------------------------- 06 marks
 Requirements of Supporting Structures
 Types of Supporting Structure:
 Poles: RCC Pole, RSJ (Rail Pole), Steel Tubular Pole their
specification, method of erection and their comparison based of Cost,
Life, Tensile strength, Insulating properties, maintenance, Weight,
transportation and handling.
 Steel Tower: Specifications, Material used, single circuit, double
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17417 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
circuit, Voltage levels.
 Advantages, Disadvantages & Application of Steel Tower.
Line Insulators : ------------------------------------------------------- 10 marks
 Electrical, Mechanical, Chemical, Thermal & General Properties of
Insulating Material.
 Selection of material for line insulators, standard dielectric strengths
of insulating materials used.
 Types of Insulators used in Transmission and Distribution: Pin type,
Suspension type, Strain type, Shackle type, Stay Insulator and their
Applications.
 Causes of Insulator failure.
 String Insulator: Constructional features and applications.
 Self Capacitance, Shunt Capacitance & Factor ‘K’ or ‘M’, Effect of
factor ‘K’: Definition and effect on voltage distribution in the units of
the string.
 Distribution of Potential over a string of Three Suspension Insulator.
 Define String Efficiency and develop its Mathematical Expression
(Simple Numericals)
 Methods of Improving String efficiency.
Topics 3: Transmission Line Parameters
Specific Objectives:
 Use appropriate method for reducing skin effect
 Prepare schedule for transposition of line
Contents:
 Concept of R, L & C of Transmission Line, State their Effect on
performance of Transmission line ( No Derivation & Numericals)
 Skin Effect: Meaning of the term, its dependence on conductor size
and configuration and material, Methods used to reduce the skin
effect.
 Proximity Effect: Meaning of the term, its effect on performance of
line, methods of reducing the effect.
 Ferranti Effect
 Phenomenon of Corona, Disruptive Critical Voltage and Visual
Critical Voltage, Conditions affecting Corona, Power loss due to
Corona, Methods of reducing Corona, Advantages & Disadvantages of
Corona.
 Concept of Transposition of Conductors and its necessity.
Topics 4: Performance of Transmission Line
Specific Objectives:
 Determine performance of the line based on efficiency and regulation
 Representation of line based on A, B, C ,D constants
Contents:
 Classification of Transmission line according to distance such as
Short, Medium & long Transmission Line.
 Definition of efficiency & Regulation of Transmission line.
 Effect of Power Factor on Transmission efficiency and Regulation,
Draw Vector diagram for Lag, Lead & Unity Power factor.
 Derivation of Regulation Short Transmission line.
 Numericals on 1-phase & 3-phase Short Transmission line:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
08
12
10
20
17417 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Calculate Efficiency & Percentage Regulation.
Analysis of Short transmission line: Equivalent Circuit & Vector
Diagram (No Mathematical Treatment)
 Analysis of Medium transmission line: Equivalent Circuit with
Nominal ‘T’ , Nominal ’π’, and End Condenser Method , its Phasor
diagram ( No Mathematical Treatment)
 Concept and Basic Equations of generalized circuit constants ‘A’,
’B’, ’C’, ’D’ ( No Derivation and Numericals)
Topics 5: Extra High Voltage Transmission
Specific Objectives:
 Understand the concept of HV Transmission
 Know the use of HV Lines for Transmission and National Grid
 Compare EHV A.C and HV D.C lines for performance
Contents:
 Definition of EHV line, Its necessity and Importance.
 Advantages, Limitations and Applications of Extra High Voltage AC
(EHVAC) Transmission Line.
 Advantages, Limitation & Application of High Voltage DC (HVDC)
Transmission Line.
 Layout of HVDC Transmission Line: Monopolar, Bi-Polar & HomoPolar
 HVDC Transmission Line Routes in India,
 Comparison of EHVAC & HVDC Transmission line.
Topics 6: A.C Distribution System
Specific Objectives:
 Decide type of distributer to be used based on requirements
 Determine performance of Distributer with given parameters
Contents:





Components of Distribution System.
Classification of distribution System
Requirements of an ideal Distribution System.
Meaning of Primary & Secondary Distribution System with their
voltage level and Number of conductors.
 Comparison between Feeder & Distributor.
 Factors to be considered while designing Feeder & Distributor.
 Types of different distribution Scheme such as Radial, Ring, and Grid.
Layout, Advantages, Disadvantages & Applications.
 Numericals on 1-phase A.C Distribution System to Calculate Voltage
drop & Voltage at sending end / Receiving end with Power factor
referred to Voltage at receiving end.
Topics 7: Primary and Secondary Distribution Sub-Station
Specific Objectives:
 Identify components of sub stations with their ratings
 Identify components from single line diagram
Contents:
 Definition and Classification of Sub-Station according to Nature of
duty, Application (Service) , Construction
 Site Selection for Sub-Station.
 Advantages, Disadvantages & Applications of Indoor & Outdoor SubStation.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
06
08
12
16
10
12
17417 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13




‘G’ Scheme
Single Line diagram (layout of ) 33/11KV Sub-Station.
Single Line diagram (layout of) 11KV/400V Distribution
Transformer.
Symbols & Functions of components of 33/11KV Sub-Station:
Incoming Feeder, Busbar, Power Transformer, Lightning Arrester,
Earth Switch Insulator (No Load Switch), Circuit Breaker, Horn Gap
Fuse, Instrumental Transformer (CT & PT), Control Panel, Control
Room and Outgoing Line,
Symbols & Functions of 11KV/400V Distribution Transformer SubStation: Functions of Incoming line, AB Switch, Drop down Fuse,
Distribution Transformer, Cross Brasing, Anti climbing device,
Danger board, Sub Station Earthing and Distribution box.
Total
64
100
NOTES:
1. Visit to 33 / 11 KV Substation.
2. Visit to11KV/400V Distribution Substation in Campus.
3. Observe Samples of ACSR Conductors and Insulators.
These visits may be arranged under Professional Practice.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
1.
2.
Author
5.
V.K.Mehta
V. Kamraju
S.Sivanagaraju
S.Satyanarayana
Soni,Gupta,
Bhatnagar
S.L.Uppal
6.
J.B.Gupta
3.
4.
Title
Principles of Power System
Electrical Power Distribution System
Electrical Power Transmission and
Distribution
Publisher
S.Chand
Mc.GrawHill
Pearson
A Course in Electrical Power
Dhanpat Rai
A Course in Electrical Power
Transmission and Distribution of
Electrical Energy
S.K.Khanna
S.K.Khanna
2. IS, BIS and International Codes:
1. IS 2713 (Part I, II, III) – 1980 for Specifications of Tubular Steel poles for
Over Head Power Lines.
2. Standard Clearances as per BS: 162-1961 and BS: 159-1957
3. IS 398-1961 – Technical data of AAC and ACSR Conductors.
4. IS 398 (Part -4)-1994 - Technical data of AAAC
3. Websites:
1. Sonaversity _ org 2. www.animations.physics.unsw.edu.au 3.phy-clips
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17417 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electrical Engineering Group
Course Code : EE / EP
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17038
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or competitive
tests.
While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability to
communicate and attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert lectures,
seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so that there will be
increased participation of students in learning process.
Objectives:
Student will be able to:
1. Acquire information from different sources.
2. Prepare notes for given topic.
3. Present given topic in a seminar.
4. Interact with peers to share thoughts.
5. Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17038 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principles
Facts
Present a seminar on identified topic related to new technology,
prepare reports
Searching information
from Journals, internet
and market
Preparing Power Point
Presentation text for the
topic
Principle of searching
information and preparing
report
Technical Journals,
Internet
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Principle of Power Point
Presentation
Computer, Power Point
Presentation Software
37
17038 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
Activity
01
02
03
04
05
‘G’ Scheme
Contents
Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student, as part of the term work.
The industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas / industries :
i)
Visit to HT Sub Station (Compulsory)
ii)
Visit to Transformer Manufacturing Industry
iii)
Visit to Electronics Industry
iv)
Visit to Design Office of MSEDCL, MSEGENCOL
v)
Visit to Industry to observe:a)Function of DAS and Data logger
b) Electrical quantities, non-electrical quantities by recorder.
vi)
Adarsh Gram
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert / Student Seminars based
on information search, expert lectures to be organized from any of the
following areas:
i)
Interview Techniques.
ii)
Effect of Transmission and Distribution Losses on cost of
Energy Generation
iii)
Recent Trends in Transformer Manufacturing
iv)
Electrical Safety in Industry
v)
Applications of D. C. Motors : Present and Future Trends
vi)
Any other suitable topic
Information Search:
Information search can be done through manufacturers, catalogue, internet,
magazines; books etc. and submit a report.
Following topics are suggested :
i)
Recent Trends in Insulation Material and Insulators
ii)
Electrical Wiring Accessories
iii)
Non Conventional Energy Sources with focus on solar energy
iv)
Elevators installation and maintenance
v)
Any other suitable areas
Seminar:
Seminar topic should be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each
student shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar
(Presentation time – 10 minutes)
Mini Projects:
A group of 6to8 students be formed for group discussion;
1. Prepare a report on Electrification of multi storied building
2. Market Survey of Power Converters on the basis of Rating, Cost,
Efficiency, Battery quality
38
16
08
08
08
08
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Hours
48
17038 EE,EP4
w.ef. Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar. The report, the delivery of the
seminar and actual experience in training will be evaluated as term work and will be given
marks out of 50.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
39
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING GROUP
COURSE CODE : EJ/ET/EX/EN/ED/EI
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS for ET/EN/EX/EJ and 8 SEMESTERS for ED/EI
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
FULL TIME / PART TIME : FULL TIME
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
SUBJECT TITLE
Abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
TH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Environmental Studies
Industrial Measurements
Analog Communication
Power Electronics
Linear Integrated Circuits
Visual Basic
Professional Practices-II
$
β
β
β
β
EST
IME
ACO
PEL
LIC
VBA
PPT
17401
17434
17440
17444
17445
17043
17044
TOTAL
TU
PR
EXAMINATION SCHEME
PAPER
HRS.
TH (1)
Max
Min
PR (4)
Max
Min
OR (8)
Max
01
-02
01
50#* 20
--03
02
03
100
40
--03
02
03
100
40
25#
10
03
02
03
100
40
25#
10
04
-02
03
100
40
50#
20
01
02
-------03
-----15
-15
-450
-100
-Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
---------
TW (9)
Min
Max
Min
---------
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
200
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
--
SW
(17400)
50
50
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 30 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 800
@- Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* - Online Theory Examination,
β - Common to DE / EV / MU
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as sessional
work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Fact
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Credit, Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: EJ/EX/ET/EN/IS/IC/IE/IU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Industrial Measurements
Subject Code
: 17434
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The science of instrumentation system plays vital role in the development of technology. An
electronic system has prime importance in the field of instrumentation. Most of the physical
parameters can be converted into electrical signal with the use of transducers. The obtained
electrical signal can be conditioned, processed, displayed and controlled with the use of advanced
control system.
With the background of measuring instruments, this subject deals with measurement of
different physical parameters like temperature, pressure etc. covering the entire gamut of industrial
measurement. Different types of transducers used for measurement of different physical quantities
with their construction, working principle, advantages, and disadvantages are studied through this
subject.
General Objectives:
After studying this subject the students will be able to:
1) Understand the nature and working of instrumentation system used in industrial & general
applications.
2) Classify the physical parameters with their proper units
3) Understand the concepts of different types of transducers
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17434 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Measurement of Pressure, Flow, Level, Temperature,
Humidity and Speed.
Procedure
Principle
Selection of suitable transducer for measurement
of specific physical parameter
PRESSURE
Deformation, Diff.
Pressure, Resistive,
Inductive. Effect
FLOW
Variable head
Variable area
Faraday’s law,
Ultrasonic effect,
Bernoulli’s Theorem`
LEVEL
Doppler
Ultrasonic
Radiation, Air purge
effect
TEMPERATURE
First law of
Thermodynamics,
Seeback, Peltier
effect, Temp.coeff. of
Resist.
Concept
Transducers for different physical parameters
Facts
Different physical quantities such as, Pressure, Level,
Temperature, Humidity and Speed.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
17434 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Contents:
Topic
No
Theory
Hrs.
Marks
08
16
08
20
Transducers:
Specific Objectives:
 Draw and describe the block diagram of Instrumentation
system.
 Compare different Transducers
 Draw and describe different Electronic Transducers.
Contents

1
Instrumentation System:
Block diagram of Instrumentation system: Function of each
block, Explanation of basic instrumentation systems
 Transducer:
Need of Transducer:
Classification of transducers: Active and Passive, Analog and
Digital, Primary and Secondary.
 Electrical Transducers:
Resistive transducers- Linear & Angular potentiometers
Capacitive transducer
Inductive transducer –LVDT, RVDT ( As a displacement
transducer)
Piezoelectric transducer
(Principle of operation and applications of above)
 Selection criterion of transducers
Pressure measurement
 Draw and describe the non-elastic and elastic pressure
transducers.
 Draw and describe electronic pressure transducers.
 Write procedure of calibration of elastic pressure gauges
using dead weight tester.
Contents

2




Pressure:
Definition
Types - Absolute, Gauge, Atmospheric, Vacuum( Definition,
Units)
Classification of Pressure measuring devices
Non elastic pressure transducer:
U tube
Inclined Tube
Well type manometer
Elastic pressure transducer:
Bourdon Tube
Bellows
Diaphragm
Capsule
Electronic pressure transducers:
Bourdon tube with LVDT
Diaphragm with Strain gauge
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
17434 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Calibration of pressure gauge using dead weight tester
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Flow Measurement
 List 0f different types of flow.
 List of different types of flow measuring transducers.
 Draw and describe construction and working of different
Flow measuring transducers.
Contents
3
 Flow:
Definition
Types of Flow –Laminar, turbulent , Reynolds number
 Classification of flow measuring transducers :
Variable head flow meter- Venturimeter, orifice plate meter
Variable area flow meter – Rota meter
Electromagnetic Flow meter
Ultrasonic flow meter- Doppler Type
06
14
08
16
10
20
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Level Measurement
 State the need of level measurement.
 List of different level measuring methods.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Level
measuring transducers.
Contents
4
 Level:
Definition
Need of level measurement
 Classification of level measurement methods:
Float type – linear & rotary potentiometer ( Contact type)
Capacitive type (Contact type)
Ultrasonic type (Non-contact type)
Radiation type (Non-contact type)
RADAR type (Non-contact type)
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Temperature measurement
 List different temperature measuring scales and its
conversions.
 List different temperature measuring transducers.
 Draw the construction and describe working of different
temperature transducers.
5
Contents
 Temperature :
Definition and units
Different temperature scales & their conversions
 Classification of temperature measuring transducers:
Gas Filled thermometer.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17434 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Bimetallic thermometer
Thermistors
RTD – (PT-100) , 2 wire systems ( circuit diagram only )
Thermocouple – Seeback & Peltier effect , Types J, K, R , S, T (
Based on material, temperature ranges)
Pyrometer - Optical, Radiation
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Special Transducers and Measurements
 List different types of humidity and its units.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Humidity
transducers.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Speed
measuring transducers.
Contents

6
Humidity:
Definition
Types - Absolute, relative
 Humidity measurement devices:
Psychrometer - Dry & wet Bulb thermometer type
Hygrometer- hair type ,
 Speed
Definition
Classification of speed measurement methods
Photoelectric pick-up (Non contact type)
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of
working principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and
applications.
Total
08
14
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
 Selection of transducer based on application.
 Interpretation of results.
Motor Skills:
 Connection of different transducers with measuring system.
 Measurement of various physical parameters using transducers.
 Observation and plotting the characteristics.
List of Practicals:
Sr. No.
1
2
3
Title of the Experiment
Measure displacement using LVDT
Measure weight using strain gauge pressure transducer with cantilever setup
Measure pressure using Bourdon tube pressure gauge
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17434 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
‘G’ Scheme
Calibrate pressure gauge using Dead weight pressure gauge tester
Determine the rate of flow of liquid in pipe using Rotameter
Calculate flow through pipe using orifice meter
Measure temperature of liquid using Resistance Temperature Detector (PT 100)
Measure temperature of liquid using thermocouple
Observe and interpret humidity of air using wet and dry bulb Hygrometer
Measure speed of motor using non contact type photo electric tachometer.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
Title
Publisher
01
A.K.Sawhney
Electrical and Electronic
Measurements and Instrumentation
Dhanpat Rai & Sons.
02
S.K.Singh
Industrial Instrumentation & Control
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
03
D. Patranabis
Principles of Industrial Instrumentation
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
Rangan Mani
Sharma
Instrumentation Systems and Devices
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
05
Bela Liptak
Kriszta Venczel
Process Measurement
Instrument Engineers Handbook
Chilton Book Co.
06
B.C.Nakra
K.K.Chaudhry
Instrumentation Measurement and
Analysis
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi.
04
2. CD/ PPTs etc.:
 www.proprofs.com/webschool
 www.osvn.com
3. Websites
 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
 www.youtube.com/ “here type name of instrument”
 www.controlnet.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17434 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: EJ/EX/ET/EN/IS/IC/IE/IU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Analog Communication
Subject Code
: 17440
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Electronic Communication plays vital role in our lives. Development of communication
Technology has increased its application in allied field of electronics including Telephony,
telegraphy, satellite , Mobile, RADAR, industrial controls, online application like internet banking,
ATM machine, Wireless network, optical communication, Mobile communication system.
Analog communication is a foundation for all advanced subjects in communication
engineering. This subject will focus on the operation of analog transmission and reception
techniques. This subject also deals with pulse modulation and their different types.
Study of Elements of Electronics, Electronic Devices and Circuits is prerequisite for Analog
communication subject.
General Objectives:
The student will able to
1. Know different electronic communication systems.
2. Understand concept of modulation and demodulation of AM / FM.
3. Understand the operation of AM/ FM transmitter and receiver.
4. Understand the concept of radio wave propagation.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17440 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
TV System
Cable Television System
Mobile Communication
Satellite Communication
Radar Engineering
Procedure
Block Diagram of AM, FM, PAM, PWM, PPM Transmitter / Receiver
Principles
Transmitting and
Receiving Antennas,
Transmission Lines and
Wave Propagation
Concept
Fact
Carrier Signal modulating
signal, modulation, AM,
FM, and Pulse Modulation
Amplitude modulation (High
level and low level modulation)
Frequency modulation
(Armstrong Method)
Demodulation,
Super heterodyne,
De-emphasis,
AGC, Image
Frequency, Tracking
Polarization,
Propagation,
Characteristic
impedance,
SWR, Radiation
Pattern
Noise, Bandwidth, Wavelength, Amplifier, Oscillator Frequency, Amplitude,
Phase, TV Receiver, Transistor Radio Receiver, Antennas
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
17440 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Contents:
Topic
No
1
2
Theory
Basics of Electronic Communication.
Specific Objectives:
Student will be able to Draw block diagram of electronic communication system
 Identify types of electronic communication systems.
 Draw electromagnetic spectrum.
Contents:
 The importance of electronic communication.
 Definition: Analog signal, Digital signal, Baseband signal
 The elements of basic electronic communication system
(Draw block diagram and explain each block.):
 Noise in communication system and types
 Types of electronic communication. Simplex, Duplex- full /
half.
 The electromagnetic spectrum.
 Concept of transmission bandwidth.
Modulation Techniques
Specific Objectives:
 State the importance of modulation.
 Explain the process of different modulation techniques.
 Compute the modulation index.
 Differentiate between CW and pulse modulation techniques.
Contents:
2.1 Basics of Modulation
[04]
 Need for modulation
 Types: AM, FM, PM. Definition ,waveforms
2.2 Amplitude Modulation
[06]
 Modulation index-definition, its effect on modulated signal,
simple numerical.
 Mathematical representation of amplitude modulated wave &
its meaning., concepts of side band (SSB,DSB)
 Bandwidth requirement
 Block diagram of AM transmitter and its operation
 Representation of AM signal in time & frequency domain
 Power relations in AM wave, simple numerical
 Circuit and operation of AM modulators using BJT/FET
2.3 Frequency modulation
[08]
 Deviation ratio, maximum deviation ratio, mathematical
representation of FM & its meaning
 Representation of FM signal in time domain & frequency
domain
 Bandwidth requirements and simple numerical
 Concept of Pre-emphasis & De-emphasis
 Generation of FM -Reactance modulator, varactor diode
modulator, Armstrong: circuit diagram and its working
 FM signal generation using ICs 566,564
2.4 Pulse Modulation Techniques.
[06]
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
Hrs.
Marks
04
06
12
24
17440 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme


3
4
Need of Pulse Modulation
PAM, PWM, PPM- Block diagram, waveforms, advantages &
disadvantages & their comparison.
 Generation of PAM transistorized circuit, Generation of
PWM, PPM using IC 555.
Radio Receiver
Specific Objectives:
 State super heterodyne principle
 Compare TRF & super heterodyne receivers.
 Explain the terms Automatic Frequency Control (AFC) and
Automatic Gain Control (AGC).
Contents:
3.1. Radio Receiver Types:
[08]
 Block diagram of Tuned Radio Frequency receiver and its
working with waveforms.
 Block diagram of AM superheterodyne receiver and its
working with waveforms.
 RF Section and Characteristics of AM radio receiver
Sensitivity, selectivity, fidelity.
 Image frequency and its rejection, Double spotting
 Frequency changing and tracking.
3.2. Demodulation of AM signal.
[04]
 Diode detector, practical diode detector.
 Need of AGC & its types – simple, delayed.
3.3 FM receiver :
[06]
Block diagram and explanation of FM Super heterodyne radio
receiver with waveforms.
Circuit diagram and working of limiter
3.4 FM detector Types :
[06]
 Balanced slope detector
 Phase Discriminator
 Ratio detector.
 PLL as FM demodulator.
Topic.4 Transmission line
Specific Objectives:
 Explain the theory of transmission line in general.
 Calculate characteristics impedance of transmission line.
 Define the terms standing wave, SWR, VSWR.
 Analyze the properties of impedance matching stubs.
Contents:
4.1 Fundamentals of transmission line.
[04]
 Equivalent circuit of transmission line (general, RF
equivalents.)
 Characteristics impedance and its method of calculation,
simple Numerical.
 Losses in transmission line.
4.2 Standing waves
[08]
 With load terminals open circuited & short circuited
 SWR, VSWR, Reflection coefficient, simple Numerical.
 Quarter wave & half wave length line.
 Impedance inversion by quarter wave length line.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
14
24
08
18
17440 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
6
‘G’ Scheme
 Quarter wave transformer & impedance matching
 Properties of line of various lengths.
4.3 Impedance Matching
[06]
 Stub: single & double.
 Baluns
Wave Propagation
Specific Objectives:
 Explain the theory of electromagnetic radiation.
 State different types of wave propagation.
 Define the various atmospheric layers
 Define the terms maximum usable frequency, critical
frequency, skip distance & fading.
Contents:
5.1 Fundamental of electromagnetic waves , Transverse
electromagnetic wave, polarization
[04]
5.2 Types of Wave Propagation
[08]
 Ground Wave.
 Sky wave, ionosphere & its effect.
 Space Wave , Duct propagation
 Troposphere scatter propagation
 Concept of actual height & virtual weight
 Critical frequency, skip distance & fading, maximum usable
frequency.
Antennas.
Specific Objectives:
 Define antenna.
 Define the term related with the antenna.
 Draw the structure, radiation pattern of antennas.
 State application of different antennas.
Contents:
6.1 Antenna fundamentals :
[04]
 Resonant antenna and Non-resonant antennas
 Definition : Radiation pattern ,polarization, bandwidth, beam
width, antenna resistance, directivity & power gain, antenna
gain
6.2 Dipole antenna
[04]
 Half wave dipole antenna (Resonant Antenna) & its Radiation
pattern.
 Folded dipole antenna & its radiation pattern.
 Radiation pattern for Dipole Antenna of different length.
6.3 Structure, radiation pattern & application of antennas.
[08]
 Loop antenna.
 Telescopic antenna.
 Yagi-Uda antenna
 Micro wave antenna – Dish antenna &Horn antenna
 Microstrip patch antennae- Rectangular, square and circular
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
04
12
06
16
48
100
17440 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Interpret the output results
Motor Skills:
1. Testing and observing the waveforms at various stages
2. Fault finding
3. Measurement of different parameters like sensitivity, selectivity, fidelity
4. Small circuit development
List of Practical’s
Sr.
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Title of the Experiment
08
Observe and draw the waveform of AM and calculate modulation index of AM.
Observe and draw input / output waveforms of AM detector.
Observe and draw the waveform of FM and calculate modulation index of FM.
Observe and draw the waveforms of FM modulator using IC 566.
Observe and draw the waveforms of FM demodulator using IC 564 / IC 565.
Observe the waveforms at various points in AM receiver. Trouble shooting and fault
finding in AM receiver.
Observe and plot the graph of RF characteristics of Radio Receiver: Sensitivity &
Fidelity
Generate PAM and observe the waveforms of PAM.
09
Generate PWM, PPM and observe the waveforms of PWM, PPM using IC’s.
10
Plot the radiation pattern of dipole and Yagi-Uda antenna.
Measure the characteristic impendence of co-axial cable. Find the impendence and
VSWR.
Visit to the Radio Transmitter station and write a Transmitter specification.
06
07
11
12
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
01
George Kennedy,
Bernard Davis,
SRM Prasanna
Electronic Communication Systems
TATA Mc-Graw Hill 5th
Edition
02
Louis E Frenzel
Communication Electronics
TATA Mc-Graw Hill 5th
Edition
03
V Chandra Sekar
Analog Communication
Oxford University Press
04
Roddy Collen
Electronic Communication
Prentice Hall India
05
Wayne Tomasi
Electronic Communication Systems
Pearson
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
Publisher
17440 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2. Websites:
1) en.wikipedia.org
2) www.masd .k12.pa.us ( Electromagnetic Spectrum)
3) www.staff.ncl.ac.uk ( modulation & demodulation)
4) circuitdiagram.net/am-radio-receiver.html (AM radio receiver circuit diagram)
5) http://www.circuitdiagram.org/am-radio-receiver-with-mk484.html
6) www.circuitstoday.com/single-chip-fm-radio-circuit
List of equipments:
1. CRO, Function generator, spectrum analyzer, DMM
2. AM,FM,PAM,PWM,PPM Modulation/ Demodulation trainer kits
3. Transmission line trainer kit/ Coaxial cable e.g. (RG174) -100mtrs.
4. Antenna demonstration kit/ Antenna for measuring its parameters
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17440 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: ET/EN/EX/EJ/DE/ED/EI/IS/IC/IE/IU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Power Electronics
Subject Code
: 17444
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Day by day the change in Electronics Industry is dynamic. The role of Diploma engineers
changed over the years. Engineers should have concepts of industrial electronics. Electronic control
circuits have major role in Industries for which study of power devices is essential.
Concepts of electronic devices and circuits along with their applications are necessary.
Industrial electronic is the foundation subject to study industrial drives, and advanced industrial
electronics.
Objectives:
Students will be able to:
1. Understand construction and operating principle of various power electronic devices.
2. Study construction and operation of controlled rectifiers, choppers and inverter and
industrial control circuits.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
17444 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principle
Concepts
Facts
Applications of Power Devices used in Industrial Electronics, Different
Industrial Control Circuits, and Choppers, Inverters, UPS, SMPS,
Battery charger, Low power DC Flasher, Light dimmer circuit.
Operation of
Power Devices
& their Turn
ON-Off
V-I Characteristics
of Power Devices.
Operation
of Polyphase
Rectifiers
Operation
of
Controlled
Rectifiers
Operation of
Choppers
and
Inverters
Operation of
Industrial
Control
circuits
Operating principles of all Controllers, Rectifiers,
Choppers and Inverters.
Power Electronic Devices, Control Rectifiers, Poly-phase Rectifiers,
Choppers, Inverters and Control Circuits
Power Devices, Triggering Circuits, Turn OFF Circuits, Control
Rectifiers, Poly-phase Rectifiers, Choppers, Inverters and Converters etc.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
17444 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic
No
1
2
3
Contents
Power Electronics
Specific Objectives:
 Realize construction, working principle of different Power
Devices.
 To select proper power device for particular applications.
Contents:
 Introduction to power electronics.
 Power transistor: Construction, Operating Principle, V-I
characteristics and Uses of power transistors.
 Power MOSFET- Construction, Operating Principle, V-I
characteristics and Uses of Depletion and Enhancement type
power MOSFET.
 IGBT- Construction, Operating Principle, V-I characteristics
and Uses of IGBT.
Thyristor Family Devices
Specific Objectives:
 Classify different power devices.
 Identify thyristors and triggering devices.
 Describe the operation of thyristor.
 Interpret V-I characteristics of different power devices.
Contents:
 SCR: Construction, Operating Principle with Two transistor
analogy, V-I characteristics, Latching Current (IL) and
Holding Current (IH). Applications of SCR, LASCR, SCS,
GTO and TRIAC.
 Thyristor family devices LASCR,SCS, GTO and TRIAC:
Construction, Operating Principle, V-I characteristics and
applications.
 Triggering Devices- Construction, Operating Principle, V-I
characteristics and applications of UJT, PUT, SUS, SBS and
DIAC.
Turn ON and Turn OFF methods of SCR
Specific Objectives:
 Classify Turn ON and Turn OFF circuits.
 Compare low power and high power triggering circuits
Contents:
 Concept of Turn ON mechanism of SCR: High Voltage
triggering, thermal triggering, Illumination triggering, dv/dt
triggering Gate triggering of SCR.
 Gate trigger circuits –Resistance triggering circuit, Resistance
Capacitance triggering circuit (Operation, applications and
limitations)
 SCR triggering using UJT, PUT-Relaxation Oscillator circuit
and Synchronized UJT triggering circuit: (Operation and
applications).
 Pulse transformer used in triggering circuit (Operation and
applications).
 Concept of Turn OFF mechanism and methods of - Class A-
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
Hours
Marks
04
10
10
20
08
16
17444 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
4
5
6
‘G’ Scheme
Series resonant commutation circuit,
Class B-Shunt resonant commutation circuit,
Class C-Complimentary Symmetry commutation circuit
Phase controlled Rectifiers
Specific Objectives:
 Draw and explain concept of phase control.
 Draw and interpret the phase control waveforms.
 Derive the expression of average voltage of control
rectifier.
 Solve the numerical examples on control rectifier.
Contents:
 Concept of phase control. (Firing Angle α and conduction
angle Ø)
 Circuit diagram, working, equations for and Waveforms of
VDC of following rectifiers.
 Single phase half wave controlled rectifier with R, RL load.
Effect of freewheeling diode.
 Single phase centre tapped full wave controlled rectifier with
R, RL load. Effect of freewheeling diode.
 Single phase Bridge type full wave controlled rectifier with R,
RL load. Effect of freewheeling diode.
 Basic three phase half wave uncontrolled and controlled
rectifier.
 Need and Uses of Polyphase rectifier.
Converters
Specific Objectives:
 Understand the concept of Chopper.
 Realize the concept of Inverter.
 Explain operation of Chopper and Inverter.
 List different applications of Chopper and Inverter.
Contents:
 Concept of Choppers
 Chopper: basic circuit and its operation using MOSFET
 Step Up and Step down Chopper using MOSFET basic
circuits.
 Inverters-Need of an inverter, Classification of inverters
Important applications of inverter.
 Working principle of single phase half bridge inverter.
 Definitions of performance parameters of inverter.
Industrial Control Circuits.
Specific Objectives:
 Understand the concept of Industrial Control Circuits.
 Draw the Circuit diagram and explain working of
Industrial control circuits.
 Draw the Block diagram and explain working of SMPS
and UPS.
Contents:
Circuit diagram, working and applications of :
 Low power DC flasher.
 Light dimmer circuit using DIAC-TRIAC.
 Electronic timer using SCR.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
16
24
04
14
06
16
17444 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13






‘G’ Scheme
Battery charger using SCR.
Emergency Lighting System.
Temperature Controller using SCR.
Speed Control of fan using TRIAC.
Block diagram and Concept of UPS.
Block diagram and Concept of SMPS.
Total
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1) Selection of proper devices and instruments.
2) Interpretation of characteristics under various conditions.
Motor Skills:
1) Make accurate measurements.
2) Adjust proper firing angle.
3) Observe and draw the output waveforms
4) Conduct test on control circuits.
List of Practicals:
1) Plot output characteristics of power transistor.
2) Plot V-I characteristics of IGBT.
3) Determine the break over voltage using of DIAC.
4) Determine latching current and holding current using I-V characteristics of SCR.
5) Effect of variation of R, C in R and RC triggering circuits on firing angle of SCR.
6) Effect of variation of R in UJT Triggering technique.
7) Draw the output waveforms of three phase half wave Rectifier using diodes.
8) Draw the output waveform of half wave controlled rectifier with resistive load and
determine load voltage.
9) Draw the output waveform of full wave controlled rectifier with resistive load, resistiveInductive load, freewheeling Diode and determine load voltage.
10) Determine the effect of firing angle using DIAC and TRIAC on output power (using
different loads such as bulb, motor or heater).
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17444 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No
Author
Title
Publisher
Power Electronics and Its
Applications
Fundamentals of Power
Electronics
Penram International
Publishing (India) Pvt. Ltd.
ISTE Learning materials
centre.
M D Singh
K B Khanchandani
Power Electronics
Tata McGraw-Hill
Muhammad H. Rashid
Power Electronics Circuits
Devices and Applications
Prentice Hall of India
01
Alok Jain
02
S. K. Bhattacharya
03
04
2. Websites:
www.vikaspublishing.com
www.scitechpublications.com
www.tatamegrahill.com
www.Phindia.com
www.pearsoned.co.in
www.wileyindia.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17444 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: ET/EN/EX/EJ/IE/IS/IC/DE/EV/MU/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Linear Integrated Circuits
Subject Code
: 17445
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Modern age technology has developed on high density and high speed electronics circuits.
Integrated circuits are basis of these high density circuits enabled to reduce size, weight and cost of
equipments. They have intrinsic features such as low power consumption, low noise and ease of
design.
Today the growth of any industry depends upon electronics to great extent. Contents of this
subject are the basic building blocks of different analog circuits.
Basic operating and designing principle of such a large collection of circuits establishes a
foundation for understanding new development in the electronics field, instrumentation and power
control. This subject acquaints student with general analog principles and design methodologies
using integrated circuit for system design.
Prerequisites various devices and circuits studied in elements of electronics and electronic devices
and circuits. Prospects- LSI, MSI, VLSI.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to:

Understand working principle of Op-Amp and IC555

Develop electronics circuits using timer IC555 and Op-Amp
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17445 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13

‘G’ Scheme
Analyze the response of frequency selective circuits such as PLL with respect to the
incoming signal.
Learning Structure:
Application:
Develop simple analog circuits using Op-Amp and timer circuits. Trouble
shooting of these circuits, in the area communication and instrumentation
amplifier.
Procedure:
Operation for
inverting noninverting amplifier
adder, subtractor
Response of
Active filters
Principle:
Operational amplifier
circuit, inverting noninverting and
differential
Timers using
IC-555, comparator
using IC-741, PLL
Concept:
Operational Amplifier, Linear and non-linear circuits
Fact:
Amplifers, timers, filters, Multivibrators and Oscillators
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17445 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents: Theory
Topic
1
2
3
Content
Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp):
Specific Objectives :
 Draw labeled block diagram of Op-Amp
 Specify and define Different parameters of Op-Amp
 Interpret ideal transfer characteristics of Op-Amp
Contents:
 Importance of Op-Amp:
Block diagram of Op-Amp and function of each block with the
circuit such as balanced, Unbalanced, differential amplifiers
with simple current source, level shifter and complementary
push-pull amplifier. Equivalent Circuit, Circuit Symbols And
Terminals. Op-Amp IC-741 pin diagram and function.
 Parameters of Op-Amp:
Input offset voltage, Input offset current, Input bias current,
differential input resistance, Input capacitance, Input voltage
range, offset voltage adjustment range, Common Mode
Rejection Ratio (CMRR), Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio
(SVRR), large signal voltage gain and transfer characteristics,
supply voltages, supply current, output voltage swing, output
resistance, slew rate, gain bandwidth product, output short
circuit current.
Op-Amp Configuration:
Specific Objectives: Students will be able to
 Differentiate open and close loop configuration.
 Identify inverting and non-inverting configuration.
 Construct integrator and differentiator.
2.1 Open loop and closed loop configuration of Op-Amp,
its comparison. Virtual ground, virtual short concept.
Open loop configuration – Inverting , Non-inverting
Close loop configuration – Inverting, non- inverting,
differential amplifier, unity gain amplifier (voltage
follower), inverter(sign changer)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
Marks
12
10
12
18
12
22
[08]
2.2 Inverting and non-inverting configuration of
[10]
Adders (summing amplifier, scaling Amplifier, averaging
amplifier) Subtractor.
Basic Integrator
Basic Differentiator
Basic concept of frequency compensation of Op-Amp and
Offset nulling.
Numerical based on designing of above circuit.
Applications of Op-Amp:
Specific Objectives:
 Compute component values for instrumentation amplifier.
 Explain IC LM-324
 Explain different applications of Op-Amp.
3.1 Need for signal conditioning and signal processing.
Hours
[ 08]
17445 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Circuit diagram, operation, derivation of output voltage
Equation. advantages and applications of Instrumentation
amplifier.
Pin diagram pin functions and specifications of IC LM 324
Voltage to current converter (with floating load, with grounded
load) Current to voltage converter.
3.2 Sample and hold circuit.
4
5
[16]
Logarithmic and antilogarithmic amplifiers (using Diodes)
Analog divider and analog multiplier
Comparator: Circuit diagrams and operation of
 Zero crossing detector,
 Schmitt trigger,
 Window detector,
 Phase detector,
 Active peak detector,
 Peak to peak detector
Filters:
Specific Objectives:
 Distinguish the types of filter
 Explain active and passive filter
 Explain different parameters of filter.
Contents:
 Introduction to filters ,Classification of filters,
 Concept of passive and active filters
 Merits and demerits of active filters over passive filters
 Ideal and actual characteristics, terms: - cut off frequency, Pass
band, Stop band, center frequency, roll off rate, BW, Q-factor,
first order and second order Butterworth filters, order of filter,
Low pass filter, high pass filter, band pass filter ( wide band
pass , narrow band pass filter) Band reject filter(wide band
reject, narrow band reject filter), all pass filter. Numerical
based on design of different filters.
Timers
Specific Objectives:
 Draw block diagram of IC 555
 Understand industrial applications of IC 555 ,565
5.1 Introduction to timer IC 555
[10]
 Block diagram of IC 555 and its pin diagram and function of
each pin.
 Concepts of different timer circuits used in industries: water
level controller, Touch plate switch, frequency divider.
 Numericals based on timers.
5.2 Phase Lock Loop
 Principle of operation, block diagram of PLL.
[08]
 Applications of PLL as multiplier, FM demodulator.
 Pin diagram and pin functions of IC 565(PLL)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
10
16
10
18
17445 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Oscillators:
Specific Objectives:
 Explain concept of oscillators
 Explain different types of oscillators
 Develop multivibrators and oscillators for given values.
Contents:
 Concept of oscillators,
 Types of oscillators: Phase shift oscillators, Wien bridge
oscillators using IC-741
 Types of Multivibrators: Monostable, Astable, Bistable using
IC-555 and IC-741. Schmitt trigger, voltage controlled
oscillator (VCO) using IC-555.
Total
6
08
16
64
100
Practical:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Interpret the waveforms.
2. Find faults in circuits.
Motor Skill:
1. Testing and Measurement.
List of Practicals:
Sr. No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Title of the Experiment
Determine the op-amp parameters:
 Input Offset Voltage (Vio)
 Output Offset Voltage (Voo)
 Common mode rejection ratio (CMRR)
Determine the gain of Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier using op-amp and
compare it with theoretical gain.
Verify the operation of Adder and Subtractor circuit using op-amp IC 741.
Verify the working of active integrator and differentiator circuits using op-amp IC 741
for following inputs:
 Sine waveform
 Square waveform
 Rectangular waveform
Assemble V to I converter and I to V converter using IC 741 and measure the
respective output.
Verify the working of following comparator circuits using op-amp IC 741 and draw the
input-output waveforms
 Zero crossing detector
 Active peak detector
Assemble first order low pass Butterworth filter using op-amp and plot the frequency
response and determine its cutoff frequency.
Assemble Astable multivibrator circuit using IC 741. Plot the output waveform and
determine the frequency of oscillations and duty cycle.
Assemble Monostable multivibrator circuit using IC 555. Plot the output waveform
and determine the on-time.
Assemble Schmitt trigger circuit using IC 555. Plot the output waveform and
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17445 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
11
12
‘G’ Scheme
determine UTP and LTP
Assemble Instrumentation amplifier circuit using IC 324 and determine the overall
gain.
Verify the operation of frequency Multiplier using PLL IC 565 and determine the
output frequency.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
K.R. Botkar
Integrated Circuit
Khanna
02
Ramakant Gayakwad
Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuit
PHI
03
Serigo Franco
04
Willam D. Stanley
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Design with Operational Amplifier and
Analog Integrated Circuit
Operation Amplifier with Linear
Integrated Circuit
31
Tata-McGraw Hill
Person
17445 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electronics Engineering and & Video Engineering Group
Course Code : ET/EJ/IE/IS/EN/EX/IC/MU/EV/DE/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Visual Basic
Subject Code : 17043
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
25
Rationale:
Today’s most of the electronically operated devices, integrated circuits, controllers,
equipments, gadgets are run by specific drivers/software. To understand design, develop and write
drivers programming knowledge is required. To run the devices software has to be user friendly.
New approach is to use graphical user interface. Graphical user interface can be implemented using
visual software’s.
Traditionally visual basic is the most popular, versatile, suitable, simple and commonly used
visual programming language to write efficient, compact and portable interfaces, drivers/
software’s.
The subject will enable the students to inculcate visual programming concepts and
methodology used to write, debug, compile and execute simple visual basic programs using
different powerful data types, built in visual controls and integrated visual basic environment (IDE)
provided by Microsoft visual studio. Students will be exposed to event driven programming and
bottom up approached used in objects oriented programming.
Students will understand how a complex interface can be easily implemented in visual basic
with almost no programming expertise.
This course will lay the basic foundation of visual programming which will enable students
to develop simple to complex programmable systems interfaces in the real world of work
General Objectives
Students will able to.
1. Learn visual programming development environment, concepts and methodology.
2. Use essential components (visual tools ) of Visual software’s
3. Develop the skill of visual basic programming to build custom standalone applications
4. Develop applications with Multiple documents interface ( MDI) using common
dialog, menus and graphics
5. Use ADO for database connectivity with different databases.
6. Create simple reports using data report, Seagate crystal reports and integrating it with
visual basic
7. Develop applications using class modules
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17043 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To develop the skill of visual Basic Programming to build software/program
 Text editors, device drivers, hardware control
 Operating system utilities
 Simple to complex academic applications
 GUI based applications
 Database applications (client server based)
Procedures
Programming using
Visual Basic, Menu
driven graphics using
methods
Principles
Design principles of
forms,
common
dialog box, MDI,
Graphics
Concepts
Data types, procedures,
functions, toolbox,
buttons, forms, dialog
boxes, menus, project
check box, status bar,
tab control etc.
Facts
Objects, variables,
constants, Arrays
collections,
Arguments, control
Flow statements,
operators, Library
functions images.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Creating and using the
ActiveX controls
Principles of creation
of active X control,
properties of active X
controls.
ActiveX controls, Events,
property pages, interface
wizard.
Active X control interface
wizard, command button,
Radio button checkbox,
class, modules
33
Programming with
Active data objects.
Principles of DAO, ADO,
database connectivity, data
controls, use, its events and
properties
Database,
record
set, rows, column,
tables, visual data
manager,
Data
controls
Data, Connection,
command, record,
cursor, cursor
location, cursor
types, lock types etc.
17043 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory
Name of Topics
Hours
Topic 1] Introduction to Visual Environment
Specific Objectives:
 Familiar with IDE of Visual basic
 Use concepts of object based language
 Use basic elements of visual interface
 Use properties, events and methods at design time and runtime
02
 Create objects, place them on forms
Contents:
1.1 Concepts of visual programming, object, features, properties, methods, events.
1.2 Environment of VB – Menu bar, toolbar, project explorer, toolbox, properties
window, form designer, form layout, immediate window.
1.3 Concept of project, elements of projects, form, their properties, methods and events.
Topic 2] Introduction to Visual Basic
Specific Objectives:
 Use different data types
 Use powerful features of arrays and collections
 Write procedures and functions
 Call procedures and functions
 Differentiate between procedure and functions
02
 Use library functions for math and string operations
 Use Inputbox and Msgbox functions
Contents:
2.1 Data types, variables, constants, arrays, collections
2.2 procedures, Arguments, function, return values, control flow statements, loop
statements, Nested control structures, exit statement
2.3 Math operators & formulas, logical operators, string functions, special functions
available in VB like Input Box ( ), Message Box ( ) , Format ( ).
Topic 3] Controls and Events
Specific Objectives:
 Use basic controls
 Select appropriate controls for given data
 Set properties of different basic controls
 Call methods and events of basic controls
 Demonstrate the use of each control with simple examples
02
Contents:
3.1 Basic controls: Text box, list Box , Combo Box , Scroll Bar, frame , Option button,
checkbox, command button, OLE controls
3.2 File, Drive, directory, Picture box, Image and timer controls .Designing a form
using controls, concepts of event & properties, changing properties (runtime &
design time) Important events of each control & creating applications using
controls.
Topic 4] Advance Controls & Events
Specific Objectives:
 Add extrinsic controls in an application
 Use common dialog box control and its properties such open, save as, font,
03
color, print and help
 Use rich text box to design simple ms-word like application
 Use and create explorer like utilities using tree view and list controls
 Familiar with windows common controls
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17043 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
4.1 Common Dialog Box controls, The Tree view and List, View controls, the rich
textbox controls
4.2 Windows common controls – status Bar, Tab control, image list control, Important
properties, changing properties at design or run time, event handling.
Topic 5] Module, Class Module, Mdi, Menu Graphics
Specific Objectives:
 Write class modules
 Define functions and procedures in class module
 Access functions and procedures from class module
 Use multiple document interface
 Design menu based applications such as notepad editor
 Work with graphic functions and methods
Contents:
5.1 Concept of module, class module, using class module to define functions,
procedures, variables and accessing them using objects
5.2 MDI- MDI form and child form, Creation and use in
5.3 Menu: Creating own menu using menu editor, popup menu.
5.3 Graphics: Basic controls – Line & shape control , line method, circle method, Pset
method, RGB ( ) Functions, Paint picture ( ) method, Load picture ( ) function.
Topic 6] Database and Report
Specific Objectives:
 Create database
 Use ADO and its properties, methods and events
 Select appropriate concepts such as back-end and front-end
 Make database connectivity with different databases
 Generate report using Data Report and Crystal Report
Contents:
6.1 Concept of database, Record, Record set, Data control & its important properties
6.2 validating data, entering data, visual data manager.
6.3 Programming with ADO ( Active data objects ), using ADO Objects at design timeconnection, command, record set , parameter, Creating & closing a connection;
executing a command,
6.4 Using ADO Objects at run time, attaching visual controls to record set at run time,
Using delete, save, search, update exit, new, add, methods.
6.5 Report generation using data report and crystal report
Total
03
04
16
TERM WORK:Sr
No.
1
2
3
4
Name of the Experiments
a) Study and Understand Visual
Basic Environment
b) Develop VB Project which
accepts User Name & Password
using three forms Login Form1
and Form2 to accept data, and
Form3 to display data.
Design simple calculator to perform mathematical function using Control array like Windows
Calculator.
Design GUI to Find Resistor Value from it’s color code.
Display student data using structure in loop. Implement it using Class module & Procedures
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17043 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
‘G’ Scheme

Demonstrate list boxes features with sorted list and selected item transfer facility.
a) Design Color box using RGB function to observe color change using H- scroll bar.
b) Design project to demonstrate file, folder & drive controls to explore drive & folders.
Design GUI for Testing AC series Circuit
Practice Experiment / Exercise
a) Design project to implement Common Dialog box controls such as open, save, Color, Font,
Printer & Help
b) Design a menu structure like notepad using menu editor
Design MDI application with 4 child forms & arrange forms with cascade, Tile Horizontal,
Tile Vertical arrangements
Design student database project using ADO connectivity in design time and runtime and MS
access as backend database engine, with basic features such as add, edit, update, save, cancel,
delete feature and generate Report using Data Report / Crystal Report
Develop mini VB Project
Reference Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
MSDN library on Line
Reference
02
Evangelos Petroustus
Mastering VB6
WILEY India
03
Steven Holzner
Visual basic 6
Dream Tech. Press
04
Content Development
Group
05
Mohammed Azam
Visual Basic 6.0
Programming
Programming with visual
basic 6.0
06
Nel Jerka
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
--
The complete referenceVB6
36
From Microsoft MSDN Library
Tata McGraw Hill
Vikas Publishers
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
17043 EXT4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code : ET/EJ/EN/EX/IE/IS/IC/DE/EV/MU/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17044
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or competitive
tests.
While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability to
communicate and attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert lectures,
seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so that there will be
increased participation of students in learning process.
Objectives:
To develop the following skills:
Intellectual skills:
1) Analyze information from different sources.
2) Prepare reports.
Motor skills:
1) Present given topic in a seminar.
2) Interact with peers to share thoughts.
3) Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Present a seminar on identified topic related to new technology
Procedure
Searching information
from Journals, internet
and market
Preparing Power Point
Presentation text for the
topic
Principle
Principle of searching
information
Principle of Power Point
Presentation
Facts
Technical Journals,
Internet
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Computer, Power Point
Presentation Software
38
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
Activity
1
2
3
4
5
Content
Hours
Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student to form a part of the term work.
Minimum two industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas/
industries :
i) Electronic equipment manufacturing unit
ii) Resistance welding unit
iii) Industrial automation unit
iv) Sugar mill, Paper mill, Cement Industry.
v) Railway station control room.
vi) Telephone Exchange.
vii) Any other suitable Industry.
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert to be organized from any
of the following areas (Any three)
i) Cyber laws.
ii) Fiber optics communication system
iii) Disaster management
iv) Atomic energy
v) Industrial Safety
vi) Computer security systems/Ethical hacking.
vii) Any other suitable topic
viii) Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
Information Search :
Information search can be done through manufacturers, catalogue, internet,
magazines; books etc. and submit a report on one of the
following topics:
i) GPS
ii) Market survey for motors used in electronic application
iii) Electronic billing system.
iv) Elevators installation and maintenance
v) Any other suitable areas
Seminar :
Seminar topic should be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each
student shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar
(Presentation time – 10 Minutes)
Group Discussion:
The students should discuss in group of six to eight students and write a
brief report on the same as a part of term work. The topic of group
discussion may be selected by the faculty members.
Total
16
08
06
10
08
48
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
01
Author
NRDC, Publication Bi
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Invention Intelligence
39
Publisher
National Research Development
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Monthly Journal
02
03
04
05
‘G’ Scheme
Journal
Corporation, GOI.
How things works
DK Publishing
encyclopedia
Innovation mgmt.& new
Trott
Pearson Education
product development
Basic Managerial Skills
E.H. McGrath, S.J.
PHI
for All – Ninth Edition
Apprenticeship Training Scheme:- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
DK Publishing
2. Web sites
www.engineeringforchange.org
www.wikipedia.com
www.slideshare.com
www.teachertube.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
40
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
41
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN ELECTRONICS & VIDEO ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : EV
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
FULL TIME / PART TIME : FULL TIME
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
SUBJECT TITLE
Abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
TH
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Environmental Studies
$
Electronic Instrumentation
Radio Reception
TV Signal Transmission System
Linear Integrated Circuits β
Visual Basic
β
Professional Practices-II β
EST
EIN
RRE
TVS
LIC
VBA
PPT
17401
17435
17437
17441
17445
17043
17044
TOTAL
TU
PR
EXAMINATION SCHEME
PAPER
HRS.
TH (1)
Max
Min
PR (4)
Max
Min
OR (8)
Max
01
-02
01
50#* 20
---03
-02
03
100
40
25#
10
-03
-02
03
100
40
25#
10
-03 02
-03
100
40
---04
-02
03
100
40
50#
20
-01
02
--------03
------15 02 13
-450
-100
--Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
TW (9)
Min
Max
Min
---------
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
200
10
10
10
10
10
10
20
--
SW
(17400)
50
50
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 30 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 800
@- Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* - Online Theory Examination,
β - Common to ET / EJ / EN / EX / IE / IS / IC / EV / DE / IU / ED / EI.
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as sessional work
(SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Environment,
Ecosystem
Fact
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Classificati
on of
pollution
Conservation of
biodiversity
Natural
Resources
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Credit, Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts and
their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Diploma in Electronics & Video Engineering
Course Code
: EV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Electronic Instrumentation
Subject Code
: 17435
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Instrumentation is an emerging field used in data detection, acquisition, analysis and control
in industrial applications. Analog and digital instruments are mainly used to determine different
process parameters. These instruments present the desired information in visual indication either in
analog or digital form. Further, instrumentation deals with conversion of different physical
parameters into electrical signal using various transducers.
This subject presumes that the students are familiar with basic utilization of measuring
instruments. The era of this subject consists of the information about concepts, principles and
procedures of analog and digital electronic measuring instruments and measuring techniques. With
the help of transducers measuring instruments different physical parameters like temperature,
pressure etc. are measured. Different types of transducers used for measurement of different
physical quantities with their construction, working principle, advantages, and disadvantages are
studied through this subject.
General Objectives:
The Students will be able to:
1. Understand the principle & operation of different measuring instruments.
2. Select the instrument for the measurement of specific electrical parameter.
3. Understand the procedure for fault finding in electronic systems.
4. Understand the nature and working of instrumentation system used in industries.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17435 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Measure different electrical and physical quantities using various electronic measuring
instruments and transducers.
Procedure
Selection of proper instruments for measurement
of respective quantity, measurement with
selected analog or digital instruments
Principle
Working Principle &
operation of multimeter,
CRO & Signal generator
Concept
Ammeter, Voltmeter, Signal
generator, Oscilloscope
Analog Instruments
Facts
Principle & operation
of LCR meter,
Analyzers
Principle & operation
Frequency
counter,
wave generator
Temperature
Flow
Classification
of
different
transducers for different physical
quantities
Digital Instruments
Units of measurement, characteristics of
instruments,
electronic
measurement,
measuring instruments & system
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Measurement of Temperature and Flow
8
Different physical quantities like
Temperature, Flow, and Displacement
etc.
17435 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Contents:
Topic
No.
Theory
Hrs.
Marks
06
10
06
12
06
12
Basics of Measurement:
Specific Objectives:
 Define measurement and instrument.
 Classify various instruments.
1
Contents
 Classification of Instruments: Absolute, Secondary
Instruments
 Definitions of Static characteristics of Instruments:
Accuracy, Precision, Sensitivity, Resolution, Static error,
Reproducibility, Drift, Dead Zone
 Definitions of dynamic characteristics of Instruments:
Speed of response, Lag, fidelity, Dynamic error
 Types of Errors- Gross, Systemic, Random
 Units of measurement of fundamental quantity
Analog DC and AC Meters
 Draw the constructional diagram of PMMC meter.
 State the working principles of different types of DC/AC
Voltmeter/Ammeter and list their specifications.
 Describe the working of analog multimeter
Contents
 Classification of analog ammeter and voltmeter
 Working principle and construction of PMMC instruments
 Analog DC Ammeter: Shunt resistor type, Ayrton Shunt type
 Analog DC Voltmeter: Multiplier voltmeter
 Analog AC Voltmeter (No derivation)- Half Wave rectifier
type, Full wave rectifier type, Multirange type
 Analog AC Ammeter
Digital Meters:
 Draw block diagram and describe operation of different
digital meters.
 State the applications of digital meters
2
3
Contents
 Concepts of ADC & DAC ( Review) (No marks)
 Advantages and Disadvantages of Digital Instruments and
comparison with analog instruments
 Block diagram, operation and applications of
Digital Frequency meter
Digital Voltmeter
DMM
LCR –Q meter
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
17435 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
4
5
6
‘G’ Scheme
Oscilloscope
 Draw the basic block diagram and describe the function of
each block of CRO.
 List and describe different applications of CRO.
Contents
 CRO: Basic Block diagram and function of each block
 Function of delay line
 Explanation of waveform generation
 Applications of CRO:
Time & frequency measurement
Voltage measurement
Lissagous patterns for Phase and Frequency measurement
 Concept, block diagram and Operation of: Single beam dual
trace & Dual beam Dual Trace CRO
 Block diagram, operation and applications of digital storage
oscilloscope (DSO)
Topic 5: Signal generator and Wave Analyzer
 Draw block diagram of signal generator and waveform
analyzer and their working
 Test the faults and rectify the faults in T.V. using pattern
generator.
 Draw block diagram of harmonic distortion analyzer and
describe its working.
Contents
5.1 Signal generators:
10 Marks
 Definition and need of signal generator
 Block diagram, operation and applications of :
AF and RF type signal generator
Function generator
Square and Pulse generator
Video pattern generator
5.2 Wave analyzer:
10 Marks
 Definition and need of waveform analyzer
 Block diagram, operation and applications of :
Frequency selective wave analyzer
Harmonic distortion analyzer
Logic analyzer
Spectrum analyzer
Transducers
Specific Objectives:
 Draw and describe the block diagram of Instrumentation
system.
 Compare different Transducers
Contents
 Instrumentation System:
Block diagram of Instrumentation system: Function of each
block, Explanation of basic instrumentation systems
 Transducer:
Need of Transducer:
Classification of transducers: Active and Passive, Analog and
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
08
08
08
16
20
14
17435 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
7
‘G’ Scheme
Digital, Primary and Secondary.
 Electrical Transducers:
Resistive transducers- Linear & angular potentiometers
Capacitive transducer
Inductive transducer –LVDT ,RVDT ( As a displacement
transducer)
Piezoelectric transducer
(Principle of operation and applications of above)
Special Transducers and Measurements
 Draw the construction and describe working of flow
transducers.
 Draw the construction and describe working of
Temperature measuring transducers.
Contents
 Flow:
Definition
 Classification of flow measuring transducers:
Electromagnetic Flow meter
Ultrasonic flow meter- Time difference and Doppler Type
 Temperature :
Definition and units
 Classification of temperature measuring transducers:
Thermistors
RTD – (PT-100) , 2 /3/4 wire systems (circuit diagram only)
Thermocouple – Seeback & Peltier effect, Types J, K, R, S, T etc.
(Based on material , temperature ranges)
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and
applications.
Total
06
16
48
100
Practical
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
 Selection of instruments based on applications
 Interpretation of results.
 Selection of transducer based on application.
Motor Skills:
 Selection of proper instrument with respect to parameter and range
 Proper connections and interfacing
 Testing of basic electronic circuits using these instruments
 Connection of different transducers with measuring system.
 Measurement of various physical parameters using transducers.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17435 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Practicals:
(Attach a separate sheet in the Manual covering the specifications of instrument/ equipment
studied)
1. Draw the block diagram of Function generator. Indentify the blocks from circuit. Test and
verify function outputs as per specifications.
2. Understand the front panel controls of Dual trace CRO and to Measure frequency, voltage,
phase difference (by time measurement) using CRO.
3. Measure time period and frequency of sine, square and triangular waves using CRO.
Measure frequency and phase difference of unknown signals with the help of Lissagous
pattern by using CRO.
4. Prepare the fault finding flow chart for Power supply using multimeter.
5. Measure frequency, voltage and modulation index of a signal from AF/RF standard signal
generator using CRO.
6. Study different output patterns obtained from Pattern generator and use of these patterns to
test the performance of different sections of T.V.
7. Draw the layout and test the circuit of PA system.
8. Displacement measurement using LVDT.
9. Flow measurement using electromagnetic flowmeter/ultrasonic flowmeter.
10. Temperature measurement using RTD (PT-100).
11. Temperature measurement using Thermocouple (using any one from R, J, K)
Learning Resources:
User’s manuals of various instruments.
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
02
A.D. Helfrick
W.D. Cooper
Kalsi .H.S.
03
A.K Sawhney
04
S K Singh
05
D. Patranabis
06
Rangan Mani & Sharma
01
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Publisher
Modern electronic instrumentation
& Measurement techniques
Electronic Instrumentation
Electrical & Electronic
Measurements & Instrumentation
Industrial Instrumentation and
Control
Principles of Industrial
Instrumentation
Instrumentation Systems and
Devices
PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New
Delhi.
Tata Mc-Graw Hill
12
Dhanpat Rai & Sons
Tata McGraw Hill Education
Private Limited, New Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
Tata McGraw Hill
Publishing Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
17435 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2. CD/ PPTs etc:
 www.proprofs.com/webschool
 www.osvn.com
3. Websites
 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
 www.youtube.com/ “here type name of instrument”
 www.controlnet.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17435 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Diploma in Electronics & Video Engineering
Course Code
: EV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Radio Reception
Subject Code
: 17437
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Radio reception is important part of wireless communication system. It is necessary for
students to understand the concepts of radio receiver and other related equipments and process of
generation, radiation and propagation of radio waves.
The subject contains concept of radiation and propagation of radio waves, Transmission
lines, Antennas, characteristics and operation of AM and FM radio receivers.
The study of this subject will be useful in understanding various telecommunication system
such as TV receivers, Satellite & Radar systems and mobile communication.
General Objectives:
Students will able to
1) Understand propagation of electromagnetic waves
2) Understand basic principles of transmission lines.
3) Understand construction working principle &operation of various types of antennas.
4) Understand block diagram of AM & FM radio receivers and their operation.
5) Understand alignment procedure for AM & FM radio receiver.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
17437 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Principle
Concept
Understand operation ,testing, troubleshooting and maintenance of Radio Receivers
Understand wave propagation in wired and wireless communication
Conduct preliminary test, signal substitution
test, voltages analyze method, Ohmic test, wave
form analysis method
Propagation &
reception of
electromagn
etic waves
Radiation
mechanism of
Ground waves
Sky waves,
Space waves,
Troposphere
Scatter
propagation
Facts
Types of
antennas
Super
heterodyne
principle
Image frequency,
Intermediate
frequency.
Diode
characteristics
& principles
of filtering
Demodulation
technique
AM & FM
receiver,
AM and FM
transmission
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Perform IF / RF alignment
Diode
rectifier
15
Standing waves,
Characteristics
Impedance,
Transmission
lines
RF and AF
alignment
Tuned
circuit.
17437 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Contents:
Topic
No
1
2
3
Theory
Wave Propagation
Specific objectives:
Students will be able to
 Explain the concept of electromagnetic waves.
 Explain different types of radio wave propagation.
Contents:
 Fundamental of electromagnetic waves.
 Definition of radiation, reception, attenuation, absorption &
polarization.
 Propagation of waves: Ground waves, Sky waves: ionosphere
& its effects, actual height, virtual height, skip distance,
critical frequency, max usable frequency, Space wavesfading, Tropospheric scatter propagation.
Transmission Line
Specific objective:
 To state understand various characteristics of transmission
line and losses.
Contents:
2.1
[10]
 Basic principle of transmission line.
 Equivalent circuit representation of transmission line.
 Characteristics impedance of transmission line.
 Losses in transmission line.
2.2
[08]
Standing waves:
 SWR
 VSWR
 Reflection coefficient.
 Quarter & half wave length lines.
 Reactance properties of transmission line.
Antenna
Specific objective:
 To explain construction, working principle, operation and
characteristics of various antennas.
 To plot radiation pattern of antenna
Contents:
3.1 Basics of antenna.
[12]
 Electromagnetic radiation.
 Hertzian Dipole.
 Resonant antenna, radiation pattern and antenna length
calculation.
 Non resonant antenna (directional antenna).
 Definition: Antenna gain, effective radiated power,
directivity, power gain (ERP), antenna resistance, bandwidth,
beam width and polarization.
3.2
[12]
 Directional high frequency antenna: Dipole arrays, Folded
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
Hrs.
Marks
08
16
12
18
10
24
17437 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
dipole antenna, Yagi uda antenna
UHF & microwave antenna: Focal feed parabolic reflector,
Cassegrain feed parabolic reflector, Horn antenna.
 Wideband & special purpose antenna: Loop antenna, Phased
array
AM Radio Receiver.
Specific objective:
 Explain operation TRF and super heterodyne receivers.
 Define characteristics of AM radio receiver.
 State the procedure for alignment of TV receiver
 To understand concept of AGC.
Contents:
4.1 AM Receiver
[12]
 Block diagram of tuned radio receiver and its working.
 Block diagram of superhyterodyne receiver, function of each
block and its working.
 Characteristics of AM radio receiver: Sensitivity, Selectivity.
Adjacent channel selectivity, image signal rejection ratio
Frequency changing & tracking.
4.2 A M Receiver Alignment
[12]
 Choice of intermediate frequency used for different
application.
 circuit diagram, operation and input and output voltages of
practical diode detector.
 Alignment of AM radio receivers: Necessity of alignment. RF
alignment, IF alignment, Selectivity, sensitivity, fidelity,
dynamic range of radio receiver, simple AGC circuit
FM Radio Receiver
Specific objective:
 To draw block diagram of FM radio receiver.
 To explain types of FM demodulators circuit.
 To state necessity of alignment of radio receiver and
procedure of RF & IF alignment carried out in AM radio
receivers.
Contents:
[18]
Block diagram & operation of FM radio receiver, Circuit diagram &
operation of amplitude limiter, Circuit diagram and operation FM
Demodulators: Slope detector, Balance slope detector, Foster see lay
detector, Ratio detector, PLL based FM demodulator, concept of
AFC.
Total

4
5
10
24
08
18
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed
Intellectual skills
1. To incept, analyze & record transmission line properties.
2.
To study directional pattern of any or given antenna using field strength meter.
3.
To apply AM input from AM generator to the radio receiver.
4.
To identify the different stages of AM radio receiver.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17437 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
5.
To identify components & follow the instruction as given.
6.
To analyze & record voltages at different test points of AM radio receiver.
7.
To analyze frequency adjustment of RF & IF stage.
8.
To locate the fault by logical analysis of symptoms.
9.
To verify the output of each stage with standard values.
Motor Skills
1. Installing and testing of experimental set up and tabulate the reading.
2. Skill to connect the instrument plots the directional pattern of antenna on polar paper.
3. Skill to draw the layout of AM radio receiver.
4. Skill to measure the voltages at the different test point using DMM as per procedure.
List of Practical:
1. To measure parameters and attenuation of transmission line
2. To measure frequency characteristics and stationary waves of transmission line.
3. To plot directional pattern of given antenna.
4. To observe different section & draw layout of AM radio receiver and to measure the
voltages of different section of transistorized AM radio receiver.
5. To observe different section & draw layout of FM radio receiver and to measure the
voltages of different section of transistorized FM radio receiver.
6. To calculate bandwidth & plot graph between output voltages & input freq. of ratio
detector.
7. To plot the sensitivity characteristics curve of AM radio receiver.
8. Observe input and output waveforms of ratio detector.
9. IF alignment in AM radio receiver.
10. To observe symptoms, do logical analysis and rectify the fault in AM radio receiver.
11. To observe symptoms, do logical analysis and rectify the fault in FM radio receivers.
List of Assignments:
1. List antenna specifications :Antenna gain, effective radiated power, Directivity for YagiUda antenna, Dish antenna and Loop antenna
2. State Frequency Band allotted to AM radio Broad casting station. List AM program and
allotted frequency band.
3. State Frequency Band allotted to FM radio Broad casting station. List FM program and
allotted frequency band.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17437 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
List of Equipments:
1. CRO, Signal generator, DMM.
2. Transmission line trainer kit, Antenna parameter trainer kit, AM radio receiver, FM radio
receiver.
Learning Recourses:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Title
Author
Publisher
01
Electronics Communication
Systems
George Kennedy
Mc Graw – Hill Book Co.
Ltd. Singapore.
02
Analog Communication
V. Chandra Sekar
Oxford University Press
03
Communication Electronics
Frenzil
Mc Graw – Hill Book Co.
Ltd. Singapore
04
Electronics Communication
Systems
Wayne Tomasi
Pearson
2. Web sites:
www.csus.edu/indiv/n/ngw/EEE-272/Antenna.ppt
www.emergencyradio.ca/course/lesson-6%20Antenna.ppt
www.emergencyradio.ca/course/lesson-7%20propagation%201010.ppt
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17437 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Diploma in Electronics & Video Engineering
Course Code
: EV
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: TV Signal Transmission System
Subject Code
: 17441
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
02
--
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Transmission plays an important role for processing of signals. The signals are transmitted
in different ways i.e. wire communication, wireless communication and wavelength
communication.
This subject deals with the concept of the TV signal transmission for analog and digital TV
system depending on the techniques for processing the signal is being transmitted from the
transmitter, CVS & CCVS.
The topic CVS signals useful to understand the basic concept of TV signal generation &
transmission.
Thus student will learn different requirement of signal for TV transmission. For learning
this subject student should know the concept of analog & digital signals as well as electromagnetic
spectrum.
Thus students will be aware the subject of TV Receiver in further Semester.
General Objectives.
Students will able to:
 Understand the basic concepts of TV Transmitter.
 Analyze the details of CVS & CCVS signals.
 Study the details of color burst signals.
 Visualize the concept of color theory.
 Understand function of B/W & color TV transmitter for PAL system.
 Understand the transmission of digital TV signal.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
17441 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principle
Application in Television Broadcasting stations, Program Recording and Mixing
at studios before Transmission.
Analyze Composite
video Signal with details
of Horizontal and
blanking
Period
Interlace scanning in T.V.
for picture continuity,
Horizontal and Vertical
scanning


Concept
Fact



Analyze Colour
Composite Video
Signal with PAL
Burst signal
Colour difference signal,
colour signal band width
and its accommodation in
total band width of T.V.
Helmholtz law and theory of
light,
Electromagnetic spectrum of
visible light.
Structure of picture frame
Image continuity,
Persistence of vision
Visible light spectrum,
Human eye structure.
Aspect Ratio, Scanning
in T.V. system
Resolution in TV
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
PAL colour
Transmitter
Block diagram
Mixing of
colours: Additive
and Subtractive
Mixing of colour
lights.
Primary and secondary
Colours of Spectrum.
21
Digital TV and
HDTV
transmission
technique.
Block diagram of
monochrome T.V.
Transmission and digital
TV signal transmission.
Digital Modulation
Techniques,
Basics of AM, VSB and
FM Transmission and
Modulation Techniques.
17441 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic
No
1
2
3
Contents
T.V. Fundamentals
Specific Objectives:
 Understand the fundamentals of TV transmission
 Understand the different requirements for TV signal
 Understand the purpose of VSB transmission.
Contents:
1.1 Perception of vision & Gross Structure, Concept of persistence of
vision, Application of persistence of vision for motion pictures and
television, aspect ratio, image continuity, Interlace scanning,
scanning periods, horizontal resolution, vertical resolution, Kell
factor, Concept of gross structure of TV system and perceiving
image continuity in TV system, aspect ratio, scanning, H and V
Resolution, kell factor, progressive and interlace scanning,
bandwidth for TV signal, interlace error.
[14]
1.2 Vestigial side band transmission for T.V. Signal, VSB transmission,
Diagrammatic representation of VSB, Bandwidth for color signal,
brightness, contrast, viewing distance, luminance.
[04]
Composite Video Signal
Specific Objectives:
 Draw the CVS for TV signal.
 List the standards used for TV Signal transmission.
 Designate band allocation for TV Transmission.
Contents:
2.1
[10]
 Pedestal height, Blanking pulses (H& V) Color Bust, Horizontal
sync. Pulse details, vertical sync. Pulse details, Equalization
Pulses, D.C. Level
 Diagrammatic representation of CVS: Purpose of blanking
pulses, pedestal height. Details of H blanking period and purpose
of each time allocation. Purpose of Colour Burst Signal and its
placement. Details of V blanking period. Requirement of
serrated V-Sync pulses Purpose of equalizing pulses.
 CCIR- B standards for colour signal transmission, List CCIR-B
standards for PAL Colour TV, T.V. channel allocation for bandI and band- III- Different channel allocation & their comparison,
Purpose of channel allocation. [08]
Monochrome T.V. Transmitter
Specific Objectives:
 Explain the modulation techniques used for TV signal
Transmission.
 Describe the function of different camera tubes.
 Explain the function of monochrome TV transmission.
Contents:
3.1 Audio and video signal transmission, FM for sound signal and AM
for Picture signal, Positive and negative modulation with proper
waveform and comparison [04]
3.2 Camera tubes, Block schematic of Silicon Diode Array, Videocon
camera and its working, Schematic diagram of CCD Camera and its
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
Hours
Marks
08
18
10
18
10
16
17441 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
4
5
‘G’ Scheme
working, Block diagram of Colour camera and its function.
[08]
3.3 Block diagram of monochrome T.V. Transmitter, Block diagram of
B/W TV Transmitter and function of each block.
[04]
Colour Theory
Specific Objectives:
 Explain fundamentals of Colour Theory
 Analyze human eye response to different colours.
 Visualize the concept of mixing of colours.
Contents:
4.1
[10]
 Visible light spectrum, Nature of light, Draw visible light
spectrum.
 Human eye response to different colours. Construction of Human
eye.
 Color theory:- Primary and Secondary colors, Additive and
Subtractive Mixing, Grassman’s Law of colour mixing., Hue,
Saturation, Luminance and Chrominance Signal.
 Colour Difference signal: Compatibility of colour signal
transmission and factors to be considered for compatibility,
Purpose of colour difference signals. Generation of colour
difference signals with the help of block diagram, Elimination of
(G –Y) Signal. Bandwidth of colour difference signal.
4.2
[08]
 Frequency interleaving, Utilization of interleaved space for colour
signal transmission, Choice of colour sub-carrier frequency,
Calculation of colour sub-carrier frequency, Factors influencing
the choice of colour sub-carrier, Weighted colour vectors U and
V, Concept of over-modulation of colour signals, Requirement of
weighted factors, Calculations of weighted factors, Phasor
diagram for weighted and unweighted primary and secondary
colours.
 Block Diagram and concept of Quadrature Amplitude
Modulation. Block diagram and working of QAM for PAL
system.
PAL Transmitter
Specific Objectives:
 Explain the basic principles of PAL Transmitter
Contents:
5.1 PAL – V switching
[06]
 Elimination of differential phase error in PAL system,
Advantages of PAL system, Describe concept of PAL-V
switching and its purpose with the help of phasor diagram,
requirement of PAL burst or swinging burst signal,
specifications of PAL burst signal. Selection of exact PAL
colour sub-carrier frequency Factors influencing to select exact
PAL colour sub-carrier frequency.
5.2 Bandwidth for transmitted PAL colour resultant
[04]
 Placement of PAL colour signal in VSB of TV Transmission,
selection of bandwidth for colour signal over luminance signal,
Suppressed colour sub-carrier transmission.
5.3 Colour composite video signal
[08]
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
08
18
06
18
17441 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme

6
Draw CCVS and label it, Block diagram of PAL Encoder and
function of each block with output waveforms, Block diagram of
PAL Transmitter and function of each section.
Digital TV Transmission
Specific Objectives:
 Explain the basic fundamentals of Digital TV Transmission
 Explain the concept of HDTV transmission.
Contents:
6.1
[06]
 Concept of digital TV Transmission, Basic block diagram of
digital TV signal transmission and its working. Characteristics of
Digital TV Signal. Advantage & Disadvantage of digital TV
Transmission
6.2
[06]
 Features of HDTV Transmission& channel, Features of High
Definition Signal. Block diagram of HDTV signal transmitter
and it’s working. Characteristics of HD Signals and System
Total
06
12
48
100
Practical:
Intellectual Skills:
 Select measuring instruments on the basis of range, least count, precision and accuracy
required for measurement.
 Record and analyze the observations.
 Interpret the results from observations and calculations.
Motor Skills:
 Proper handling of instruments.
 Measuring voltages and current at different stages accurately.
 Observe the phenomenon and to list the observations in proper tabular form.
 Follow proper procedure while performing the experiment.
 Observe, Draw and Analyze the waveforms at different stages.
List of Experiments:
(For class size 60, batch size 20 experiments shall be conducted in cyclic order with group of 4 to 5
students.)
1. To observe, draw and analyze the output CVS waveform of pattern generator for
monochrome bar pattern.
2. To observe, draw and analyze the output CVS waveform of pattern generator for
monochrome Chessboard pattern.
3. To observe, draw and analyze the output CVS waveform of pattern generator for Colour
bar pattern.
4. To observe, draw and analyze the output CVS waveform of pattern generator for Colour
cross edge and colour dot patterns. (Horizontal and Vertical Sync pulses to be analyzed.)
5. To observe and analyze the video camera output signal on CRO.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17441 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
6. To perform video recording and transmit the signal through transmission link and observe
the same on TV receiver.
7. Visit to Doordarshan Kendra to understand the concept of C.T.V. transmission. Write a
report of it.
 Students should observe how synchronizing pulses are inserted.
 Students should observe the switching of different cameras at studio.
 Students should understand the concept of relay or retransmission of same
programme.
 Students should observe and understand the mixing of audio and video signals
before transmission.( Function of Combining Network)
List of Assignments:
1)
A) Persistence of vision and its use for image continuity.
B) Explanation of gross structure of TV
C) Horizontal and vertical resolution and their use in calculation of No. of lines and video
bandwidth.
D) Total bandwidth of channel and its distribution in VSB.
2) A) Representation of composite video signal for one or two horizontal line for a given pattern
of frame.
 Concept of composite video signal for horizontal lines and explanation & functioning
of each part of that.
 Vertical blanking details their requirements and need for serration and equalizing
pulses.
3)
A) Camera functioning and working.
B) Different types of camera tubes and their working.
4) A) Terms related to Monochrome and colour T.V. and their explanation. E.g. Brightness,
luminance, Hue, contrast etc.
B) Mixing of colours, Grass man’s law
C) Compatibility and its factors for Monochrome and colour TV.
5) A) Colour difference signals and their requirement.
B) Positive and negative modulation.
C) Elimination of (G-Y) signal.
D) Frequency interleaving and placing of colour sub-carrier signal in bandwidth.
6) A) Over-modulation of colour signals and how to over come from that.
B) Factors influencing choice of colour sub-carrier signal.
C) QAM for PAL system.
D) Phasor diagrams of weighted and unweighted colour signals.
7) A) Block diagram level study of monochrome T.V. Transmissions.
B) PAL V switching and its purpose.
8) A) Picture and sound transmission as AM & FM respectively Justify.
B) PAL Encoder block diagram and its working.
9) A) Study the concept of digital TV transmission.
B) Study the concept of HDTV transmission.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17441 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
Title
Author
Publisher
01
Television & Video Engg.
Dhake
Tata Mc grow Hill New Delhi
02
Modern T.V. Practice
R.R.Gulati
Wiley Eastern Ltd. London.
03
Colour T.V. Principle &
Practices
R.R.Gulati
New Age International Ltd.
Delhi.
04
Basic T.V. & Video System
Barnad Grobe
Mac- GRaw Hill Ltd., New York
05
Colour T.V. & Video
Technology
Maini
PHI Publication, New Delhi
2. Websites
1. http://assets.cambridge.org/97805218/96023/excerpt/9780521896023_excerpt.pdf2.
2. http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Television
3. http://www.ustudy.in/node/923
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17441 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: ET/EN/EX/EJ/IE/IS/IC/DE/EV/MU/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Linear Integrated Circuits
Subject Code
: 17445
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Modern age technology has developed on high density and high speed electronics circuits.
Integrated circuits are basis of these high density circuits enabled to reduce size, weight and cost of
equipments. They have intrinsic features such as low power consumption, low noise and ease of
design.
Today the growth of any industry depends upon electronics to great extent. Contents of this
subject are the basic building blocks of different analog circuits.
Basic operating and designing principle of such a large collection of circuits establishes a
foundation for understanding new development in the electronics field, instrumentation and power
control. This subject acquaints student with general analog principles and design methodologies
using integrated circuit for system design.
Prerequisites various devices and circuits studied in elements of electronics and electronic devices
and circuits. Prospects- LSI, MSI, VLSI.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to:

Understand working principle of Op-Amp and IC555

Develop electronics circuits using timer IC555 and Op-Amp
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17445 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13

‘G’ Scheme
Analyze the response of frequency selective circuits such as PLL with respect to the
incoming signal.
Learning Structure:
Application:
Develop simple analog circuits using Op-Amp and timer circuits. Trouble
shooting of these circuits, in the area communication and instrumentation
amplifier.
Procedure:
Operation for
inverting noninverting amplifier
adder, subtractor
Response of
Active filters
Principle:
Operational amplifier
circuit, inverting noninverting and
differential
Timers using
IC-555, comparator
using IC-741, PLL
Concept:
Operational Amplifier, Linear and non-linear circuits
Fact:
Amplifers, timers, filters, Multivibrators and Oscillators
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17445 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents: Theory
Topic
1
2
3
Content
Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp):
Specific Objectives :
 Draw labeled block diagram of Op-Amp
 Specify and define Different parameters of Op-Amp
 Interpret ideal transfer characteristics of Op-Amp
Contents:
 Importance of Op-Amp:
Block diagram of Op-Amp and function of each block with the
circuit such as balanced, Unbalanced, differential amplifiers
with simple current source, level shifter and complementary
push-pull amplifier. Equivalent Circuit, Circuit Symbols And
Terminals. Op-Amp IC-741 pin diagram and function.
 Parameters of Op-Amp:
Input offset voltage, Input offset current, Input bias current,
differential input resistance, Input capacitance, Input voltage
range, offset voltage adjustment range, Common Mode
Rejection Ratio (CMRR), Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio
(SVRR), large signal voltage gain and transfer characteristics,
supply voltages, supply current, output voltage swing, output
resistance, slew rate, gain bandwidth product, output short
circuit current.
Op-Amp Configuration:
Specific Objectives: Students will be able to
 Differentiate open and close loop configuration.
 Identify inverting and non-inverting configuration.
 Construct integrator and differentiator.
2.1 Open loop and closed loop configuration of Op-Amp,
its comparison. Virtual ground, virtual short concept.
Open loop configuration – Inverting , Non-inverting
Close loop configuration – Inverting, non- inverting,
differential amplifier, unity gain amplifier (voltage
follower), inverter(sign changer)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
Marks
12
10
12
18
12
22
[08]
2.2 Inverting and non-inverting configuration of
[10]
Adders (summing amplifier, scaling Amplifier, averaging
amplifier) Subtractor.
Basic Integrator
Basic Differentiator
Basic concept of frequency compensation of Op-Amp and
Offset nulling.
Numerical based on designing of above circuit.
Applications of Op-Amp:
Specific Objectives:
 Compute component values for instrumentation amplifier.
 Explain IC LM-324
 Explain different applications of Op-Amp.
3.1 Need for signal conditioning and signal processing.
Hours
[ 08]
17445 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Circuit diagram, operation, derivation of output voltage
Equation. advantages and applications of Instrumentation
amplifier.
Pin diagram pin functions and specifications of IC LM 324
Voltage to current converter (with floating load, with grounded
load) Current to voltage converter.
3.2 Sample and hold circuit.
4
5
[16]
Logarithmic and antilogarithmic amplifiers (using Diodes)
Analog divider and analog multiplier
Comparator: Circuit diagrams and operation of
 Zero crossing detector,
 Schmitt trigger,
 Window detector,
 Phase detector,
 Active peak detector,
 Peak to peak detector
Filters:
Specific Objectives:
 Distinguish the types of filter
 Explain active and passive filter
 Explain different parameters of filter.
Contents:
 Introduction to filters ,Classification of filters,
 Concept of passive and active filters
 Merits and demerits of active filters over passive filters
 Ideal and actual characteristics, terms:- cut off frequency, Pass
band, Stop band, center frequency, roll off rate, BW, Q-factor,
first order and second order Butterworth filters, order of filter,
Low pass filter, high pass filter, band pass filter ( wide band
pass, narrow band pass filter) Band reject filter (wide band
reject, narrow band reject filter), all pass filter. Numerical
based on design of different filters.
Timers
Specific Objectives:
 Draw block diagram of IC 555
 Understand industrial applications of IC 555 ,565
5.1 Introduction to timer IC 555
[10]
 Block diagram of IC 555 and its pin diagram and function of
each pin.
 Concepts of different timer circuits used in industries: water
level controller, Touch plate switch, frequency divider.
 Numericals based on timers.
5.2 Phase Lock Loop
 Principle of operation, block diagram of PLL.
[08]
 Applications of PLL as multiplier, FM demodulator.
 Pin diagram and pin functions of IC 565(PLL)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
10
16
10
18
17445 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Oscillators:
Specific Objectives:
 Explain concept of oscillators
 Explain different types of oscillators
 Develop multivibrators and oscillators for given values.
Contents:
 Concept of oscillators,
 Types of oscillators: Phase shift oscillators, Wien bridge
oscillators using IC-741
 Types of Multivibrators: Monostable, Astable, Bistable using
IC-555 and IC-741. Schmitt trigger, voltage controlled
oscillator (VCO) using IC-555.
Total
6
08
16
64
100
Practical:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Interpret the waveforms.
2. Find faults in circuits.
Motor Skill:
1. Testing and Measurement.
List of Practicals:
Sr. No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Title of the Experiment
Determine the op-amp parameters:
 Input Offset Voltage (Vio)
 Output Offset Voltage (Voo)
 Common mode rejection ratio (CMRR)
Determine the gain of Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier using op-amp and
compare it with theoretical gain.
Verify the operation of Adder and Subtractor circuit using op-amp IC 741.
Verify the working of active integrator and differentiator circuits using op-amp IC 741
for following inputs:
 Sine waveform
 Square waveform
 Rectangular waveform
Assemble V to I converter and I to V converter using IC 741 and measure the
respective output.
Verify the working of following comparator circuits using op-amp IC 741 and draw the
input-output waveforms
 Zero crossing detector
 Active peak detector
Assemble first order low pass Butterworth filter using op-amp and plot the frequency
response and determine its cutoff frequency.
Assemble Astable multivibrator circuit using IC 741. Plot the output waveform and
determine the frequency of oscillations and duty cycle.
Assemble Monostable multivibrator circuit using IC 555. Plot the output waveform
and determine the on-time.
Assemble Schmitt trigger circuit using IC 555. Plot the output waveform and
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17445 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
11
12
‘G’ Scheme
determine UTP and LTP
Assemble Instrumentation amplifier circuit using IC 324 and determine the overall
gain.
Verify the operation of frequency Multiplier using PLL IC 565 and determine the
output frequency.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
01
Author
Title
Publisher
K.R. Botkar
Integrated Circuit
Khanna
02
Ramakant Gayakwad
Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuit
PHI
03
Serigo Franco
04
Willam D. Stanley
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Design with Operational Amplifier and
Analog Integrated Circuit
Operation Amplifier with Linear
Integrated Circuit
32
Tata-McGraw Hill
Person
17445 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code : ET/EJ/IE/IS/EN/EX/IC/MU/EV/DE/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Visual Basic
Subject Code : 17043
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
25
Rationale:
Today’s most of the electronically operated devices, integrated circuits, controllers,
equipments, gadgets are run by specific drivers/software. To understand design, develop and write
drivers programming knowledge is required. To run the devices software has to be user friendly.
New approach is to use graphical user interface. Graphical user interface can be implemented using
visual software’s.
Traditionally visual basic is the most popular, versatile, suitable, simple and commonly used
visual programming language to write efficient, compact and portable interfaces, drivers/
software’s.
The subject will enable the students to inculcate visual programming concepts and
methodology used to write, debug, compile and execute simple visual basic programs using
different powerful data types, built in visual controls and integrated visual basic environment (IDE)
provided by Microsoft visual studio. Students will be exposed to event driven programming and
bottom up approached used in objects oriented programming.
Students will understand how a complex interface can be easily implemented in visual basic
with almost no programming expertise.
This course will lay the basic foundation of visual programming which will enable students
to develop simple to complex programmable systems interfaces in the real world of work
General Objectives
Students will able to.
1. Learn visual programming development environment, concepts and methodology.
2. Use essential components (visual tools ) of Visual software’s
3. Develop the skill of visual basic programming to build custom standalone applications
4. Develop applications with Multiple documents interface ( MDI) using common
dialog, menus and graphics
5. Use ADO for database connectivity with different databases.
6. Create simple reports using data report, Seagate crystal reports and integrating it with
visual basic
7. Develop applications using class modules
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17043 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To develop the skill of visual Basic Programming to build software/program
 Text editors, device drivers, hardware control
 Operating system utilities
 Simple to complex academic applications
 GUI based applications
 Database applications (client server based)
Procedures
Programming using
Visual Basic, Menu
driven graphics using
methods
Principles
Design principles of
forms,
common
dialog box, MDI,
Graphics
Concepts
Data types, procedures,
functions, toolbox,
buttons, forms, dialog
boxes, menus, project
check box, status bar,
tab control etc.
Facts
Objects, variables,
constants, Arrays
collections,
Arguments, control
Flow statements,
operators, Library
functions images.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Creating and using the
ActiveX controls
Principles of creation
of active X control,
properties of active X
controls.
ActiveX controls, Events,
property pages, interface
wizard.
Active X control interface
wizard, command button,
Radio button checkbox,
class, modules
34
Programming with
Active data objects.
Principles of DAO, ADO,
database connectivity, data
controls, use, its events and
properties
Database,
record
set, rows, column,
tables, visual data
manager,
Data
controls
Data, Connection,
command, record,
cursor, cursor
location, cursor
types, lock types etc.
17043 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory
Name of Topics
Hours
Topic 1] Introduction to Visual Environment
Specific Objectives:
 Familiar with IDE of Visual basic
 Use concepts of object based language
 Use basic elements of visual interface
 Use properties, events and methods at design time and runtime
02
 Create objects, place them on forms
Contents:
1.1 Concepts of visual programming, object, features, properties, methods, events.
1.2 Environment of VB – Menu bar, toolbar, project explorer, toolbox, properties
window, form designer, form layout, immediate window.
1.3 Concept of project, elements of projects, form, their properties, methods and events.
Topic 2] Introduction to Visual Basic
Specific Objectives:
 Use different data types
 Use powerful features of arrays and collections
 Write procedures and functions
 Call procedures and functions
 Differentiate between procedure and functions
02
 Use library functions for math and string operations
 Use Inputbox and Msgbox functions
Contents:
2.1 Data types, variables, constants, arrays, collections
2.2 procedures, Arguments, function, return values, control flow statements, loop
statements, Nested control structures, exit statement
2.3 Math operators & formulas, logical operators, string functions, special functions
available in VB like Input Box ( ), Message Box ( ) , Format ( ).
Topic 3] Controls and Events
Specific Objectives:
 Use basic controls
 Select appropriate controls for given data
 Set properties of different basic controls
 Call methods and events of basic controls
02
 Demonstrate the use of each control with simple examples
Contents:
3.1 Basic controls: Text box, list Box , Combo Box , Scroll Bar, frame , Option button,
checkbox, command button, OLE controls
3.2 File, Drive, directory, Picture box, Image and timer controls .Designing a form using
controls, concepts of event & properties, changing properties (runtime & design
time) Important events of each control & creating applications using controls.
Topic 4] Advance Controls & Events
Specific Objectives:
 Add extrinsic controls in an application
 Use common dialog box control and its properties such open, save as, font,
03
color, print and help
 Use rich text box to design simple ms-word like application
 Use and create explorer like utilities using tree view and list controls
 Familiar with windows common controls
Contents:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17043 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4.1 Common Dialog Box controls, The Tree view and List, View controls, the rich
textbox controls
4.2 Windows common controls – status Bar, Tab control, image list control, Important
properties, changing properties at design or run time, event handling.
Topic 5] Module, Class Module, Mdi, Menu Graphics
Specific Objectives:
 Write class modules
 Define functions and procedures in class module
 Access functions and procedures from class module
 Use multiple document interface
 Design menu based applications such as notepad editor
 Work with graphic functions and methods
Contents:
5.1 Concept of module, class module, using class module to define functions,
procedures, variables and accessing them using objects
5.2 MDI- MDI form and child form, Creation and use in
5.3 Menu: Creating own menu using menu editor, popup menu.
5.3 Graphics: Basic controls – Line & shape control , line method, circle method, Pset
method, RGB ( ) Functions, Paint picture ( ) method, Load picture ( ) function.
Topic 6] Database and Report
Specific Objectives:
 Create database
 Use ADO and its properties, methods and events
 Select appropriate concepts such as back-end and front-end
 Make database connectivity with different databases
 Generate report using Data Report and Crystal Report
Contents:
6.1 Concept of database, Record, Record set, Data control & its important properties
6.2 validating data, entering data, visual data manager.
6.3 Programming with ADO ( Active data objects ), using ADO Objects at design timeconnection, command, record set , parameter, Creating & closing a connection;
executing a command,
6.4 Using ADO Objects at run time, attaching visual controls to record set at run time,
Using delete, save, search, update exit, new, add, methods.
6.5 Report generation using data report and crystal report
Total
03
04
16
TERM WORK:Sr
No.
1
2
3
4
Name of the Experiments
a) Study and Understand Visual
Basic Environment
b) Develop VB Project which
accepts User Name & Password
using three forms Login Form1
and Form2 to accept data, and
Form3 to display data.
Design simple calculator to perform mathematical function using Control array like
Windows Calculator.
Design GUI to Find Resistor Value from it’s color code.
Display student data using structure in loop. Implement it using Class module & Procedures
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17043 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
‘G’ Scheme
Demonstrate list boxes features with sorted list and selected item transfer facility.
a) Design Color box using RGB function to observe color change using H- scroll bar.
b) Design project to demonstrate file, folder & drive controls to explore drive & folders.
Design GUI for Testing AC series Circuit
Practice Experiment / Exercise
a) Design project to implement Common Dialog box controls such as open, save, Color, Font,
Printer & Help
b) Design a menu structure like notepad using menu editor
Design MDI application with 4 child forms & arrange forms with cascade, Tile Horizontal,
Tile Vertical arrangements
Design student database project using ADO connectivity in design time and runtime and MS
access as backend database engine, with basic features such as add, edit, update, save, cancel,
delete feature and generate Report using Data Report / Crystal Report
Develop mini VB Project
Reference:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
MSDN library on Line
Reference
02
Evangelos Petroustus
Mastering VB6
WILEY India
03
Steven Holzner
Visual basic 6
Dream Tech. Press
04
Content Development
Group
05
Mohammed Azam
Visual Basic 6.0
Programming
Programming with visual
basic 6.0
06
Nel Jerka
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
--
The complete referenceVB6
37
From Microsoft MSDN Library
Tata McGraw Hill
Vikas Publishers
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
17043 EV4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code : ET/EJ/EN/EX/IE/IS/IC/DE/EV/MU/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17044
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Most of the diploma holders join industries. Due to globalization and competition in the
industrial and service sectors the selection for the job is based on campus interviews or competitive
tests.
While selecting candidates a normal practice adopted is to see general confidence, ability to
communicate and attitude, in addition to basic technological concepts.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to students to
undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. Industrial visits, expert lectures,
seminars on technical topics and group discussion are planned in a semester so that there will be
increased participation of students in learning process.
Objectives:
To develop the following skills:
Intellectual skills:
1) Analyze information from different sources.
2) Prepare reports.
Motor skills:
1) Present given topic in a seminar.
2) Interact with peers to share thoughts.
3) Prepare a report on industrial visit, expert lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
38
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Present a seminar on identified topic related to new technology
Procedure
Searching information
from Journals, internet
and market
Preparing Power Point
Presentation text for the
topic
Principle
Principle of searching
information
Principle of Power Point
Presentation
Facts
Technical Journals,
Internet
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Computer, Power Point
Presentation Software
39
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
Activity
1
2
3
4
5
Content
Hours
Industrial Visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same should be
submitted by the individual student to form a part of the term work.
Minimum two industrial visits may be arranged in the following areas/
industries :
i) Electronic equipment manufacturing unit
ii) Resistance Welding unit
iii) Industrial automation unit
iv) Sugar mill, Paper mill, Cement Industry.
v) Railway station control room.
vi) Telephone Exchange.
vii) Any other suitable Industry.
Lectures by Professional / Industrial Expert to be organized from any of
the following areas (Any three)
i) Cyber laws.
ii) Fiber optics communication system
iii) Disaster management
iv) Atomic energy
v) Industrial Safety
vi) Computer security systems/Ethical hacking.
vii) Any other suitable topic
viii) Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
Information Search :
Information search can be done through manufacturers, catalogue, internet,
magazines; books etc. and submit a report on one of the
following topics:
i) GPS
ii) Market survey for motors used in electronic application
iii) Electronic billing system.
iv) Elevators installation and maintenance
v) Any other suitable areas
Seminar :
Seminar topic should be related to the subjects of fourth semester. Each
student shall submit a report of at least 10 pages and deliver a seminar
(Presentation time – 10 Minutes)
Group Discussion:
The students should discuss in group of six to eight students and write a brief
report on the same as a part of term work. The topic of group discussion may
be selected by the faculty members.
Total
16
08
06
10
08
48
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
01
Author
NRDC, Publication Bi
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Invention Intelligence
40
Publisher
National Research Development
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
Monthly Journal
02
03
04
05
‘G’ Scheme
Journal
Corporation, GOI.
How things works
DK Publishing
encyclopedia
Innovation mgmt.& new
Trott
Pearson Education
product development
Basic Managerial Skills
E.H. McGrath, S.J.
PHI
for All – Ninth Edition
Apprenticeship Training Scheme:- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
DK Publishing
2. Web sites
www.engineeringforchange.org
www.wikipedia.com
www.slideshare.com
www.teachertube.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
41
17035
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
42
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY & ERECTION ENGINEERING (SANDWICH PATTERN)
COURSE CODE : FE
DURATION OF COURSE : 8 SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies $
Manufacturing Processes β
Fluid Mechanics & Machinery β
Welding Technology
Fabrication Processes
Processes Equipments
Professional Practices-II
Abbrev
iation
EST
MPR
FMM
WTE
FPR
PEQ
PPS
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
SW
(17400)
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
17401
17402
17411
17455
17456
17457
17048
01
03
04
03
03
04
--
--------
02
04
02
02
02
02
03
01
03
03
03
03
03
--
50#*
100
100
100
100
100
--
20
40
40
40
40
40
--
-25#
25#
25#
50#
---
-10
10
10
20
---
--------
--------
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
20
10
10
10
10
20
50
TOTAL
18
--
17
--
550
--
125
--
--
--
225
--
50
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 35 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 950
@ - Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, β - Common to ME / PG / PT/ MH /
MI/FG
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as
sessional work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR, TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
 For CAD software subject MSBTE decide the contents of the practical every year.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* - Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principles
Concept
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Credit, Ecosystem
3
17401 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general
public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
02
06
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Mechanical Engineering Group
Course Code : ME/PG/PT/MH/MI/FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Manufacturing Process
Subject Code : 17402
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
175
Rationale:
Diploma technician often comes across various types of basic manufacturing processes. He /
she is required to select, operate and control the appropriate processes for specific applications. He /
she is also required to know about various cutting tools, latest improvements in manufacturing
processes. This is a core technology subject. The diploma technician should know how the raw
material gets processed through various processes and ultimately results into finished goods.
Hence it is essential that, he has understanding of basic manufacturing processes, machines, tools
and equipments. With sound knowledge of this subject, the diploma technician will be able to
handle and control practical situations more effectively and confidently.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1) Use the basic machine tools like lathe and drilling.
2) Produce and inspect the job as per specified dimensions.
3) Select the specific manufacturing processes for the desired output.
4) Adopt safety practices while working on various machines.
5) Explain the different types of plastic moulding processes.
6) Select the basic manufacturing process for different components to be machined.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17402 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Selection of process and process parameters for the given work
piece.
Procedure
To understand the use of Lathe, Drilling, Spot welding
machine, Plastic moulding machines.
Principle
Working principle of Forging, rolling, extrusion, press,
principle of metal flow, principle of metal cutting, plastic
moulding, principle of solidification, joining.
Concepts
Concept of Forging, rolling, extrusion, press, Single and
multipoint cutting tool, Lathe, drilling, casting, patterns,
plastic moulding, sand mould, welding, brazing & soldering.
Facts
Forging, furnaces, dies, rolling mills, extrusion methods,
press, dies, lathe, drilling machine, tools, operations,
Applications, patterns, plastic moulds, casting types, welding
types, brazing & soldering
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
17402 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Content
1:Forming Processes
Specific Objectives:
 To list basic manufacturing processes and write working principal
of different manufacturing processes like Drop forging, Rolling
and Extrusion
 To identify and select proper manufacturing process for a specific
component
Content
1.1 Drop forging:
06 Marks
Upset forging, press forging(die forging),open die & closed die forging,
forging operations
1.2 Rolling:
06 Marks
Principle of rolling, hot & cold rolling, Types of rolling mill, application of
rolling
1.3 Extrusion:
06 Marks
Direct & indirect extrusion, Advantages, disadvantages and Applications.
2. Press working:
Specific Objectives:
 To define Press working machine principal
 To state various classification of press machine.
 To state different operations performed on press machine and
their p[practical applications
Content
2.1 Press classification, press operations like punching/piercing, blanking,
notching, lancing
06 Marks
2.2 Die set components and types of dies
06 Marks
2.3 Forming Operations: Bending, drawing
04 Marks
3. Casting Processes:
22 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 To state different between pattern and model
 To list different types of pattern and their applications
 To state various types of pattern allowances.
 To state various types of casting processes.
Content
3.1 Pattern making:
06 Marks
Basic steps in making casting, Pattern : types, materials and allowances,
tools, color coding of patterns
3.2 Moulding:
06 Marks
Types of moulding sands, properties of sand, moulding methods, cores
and core prints, elements of gating system, bench moulding, floor
moulding, pit moulding, machine moulding.
3.3 Casting:
06 Marks
Furnaces: Construction and working of cupola furnace, electric arc
furnace. - Methods & applications of - Centrifugal casting, shell
moulding, investment casting, Casting defects - Causes & remedies.
3.4 Hot chamber and cold chamber die casting, Die casting defects - Causes &
remedies.
04 Marks
4. Welding
Specific Objectives:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
Hours
Marks
08
18
08
16
10
22
07
14
17402 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 To define Arc welding and Gas welding Principal.
 To state difference between soldering and brazing processes
Content
4.1 Introduction & classification of welding processes Gas welding, carbon arc welding, shielded metal arc welding, TIG
welding, MIG welding, plasma arc welding, resistance welding typesspot, seam projection. Electron beam welding, laser beam welding,
welding defects.
10 Marks
4.2 Introduction to soldering and brazing –
Process, fillers, heating methods & applications.
04 Marks
5. Machining Operations
Specific Objectives:
 To state the working principal of lathe and drilling machines.
 To list out various operations performed on lathe and drilling
machines
Content
5.1 Lathe Machine:
12 Marks
Introduction, classification and basic parts of center lathe & their
functions, Lathe operations like facing, plain turning, taper turning, thread
cutting, chamfering, grooving, knurling. Cutting tool nomenclature & tool
signature, cutting parameters.
5.2 Drilling Machine:
08 Marks
Introduction, classification, basic parts of radial drilling machine and their
functions, twist drill nomenclature, drilling machine operations like
drilling, reaming, boring, counter sinking, counter boring, spot facing.
Cutting parameters.
6. Plastic Moulding:
Specific Objectives:
 To state different properties of plastics
 To explain various plastic mauling methods like Injection, blow,
compression molding
Content
Introduction, Properties of plastics, types of plastics, plastic moulding
methods - compression moulding, injection moulding, blow moulding,
extrusion, vacuum forming and calendaring.
Total
10
20
05
10
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual skills:
1) Identify basic manufacturing processes like forging, rolling and extrusion, for required
component.
2) Specify need of pattern allowances.
3) Decide process parameters for different operations.
4) Decide tools required for a manufacturing process.
5) Identify a joining method for fabrication.
Motor Skills:
1) Operate lathe, drilling machine.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17402 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2) Set the tool and select the cutting parameters for machining operations.
3) Set the tools, job and decide cutting parameters.
4) Inspect various dimensions of jobs by using measuring instruments.
5) Make simple wooden / thermocole pattern.
List of Practical:
1) One turning job on lathe containing the operations like plain turning, step turning, taper
turning, grooving, knurling and chamfering.
2) One job using Spot welding machine. (Min. 4 spots on 0.5-1mm thick metal strip.)
3) One simple job on TIG / MIG welding setup or visit to TIG / MIG welding shop.
4) Moulding practice for any one pattern.
5) Industrial visit to observe plastic processing shop and report on the visit.
6) One composite job containing the operations like lathe with axial & across drilling (like
Nut- Bolt assembly or any other equivalent job).
7) Demonstration of eccentric turning using four jaw chuck.
Notes:
1] The workshop instructors should prepare specimen job in each shop as demonstration
practice before the student (as per the drawing given by subject teacher/ workshop
superintendent).
2] Theory behind practical is to be covered by the concerned subject teacher/ workshop
superintendent.
3] Workshop diary should be maintained by each student duly signed by respective shop
instructors.
4] Assignments are to be assessed by the concerned subject teacher/ workshop superintendent.
Guidelines for conducting Practical Examination for MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
1. The job drawing must be jointly decided by the External and Internal examiner prior to one
day in advance from the commencement of practical examination. Every student should be
supplied the copy of job drawing before examination.
2. Time for practical examination should be THREE HOURS.
3. Practical examination of the students shall consists of Turning job containing different
operations like Facing, straight Turning, Taper turning, Chamfering, Knurling , Threading,
Grooving. (Minimum 5 operations) Students will perform the job as per the drawing
provided to them.
4. Raw material size – Bar dia. 40 to 50 mm, length 80 to 100 mm.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
S. K. Hajra Chaudhary,
01
Bose, Roy
02
O. P. Khanna & Lal
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Elements of workshop
Technology-Volume I & II
Production Technology
Volume- I & II
11
Publisher
Media Promoters and
Publishers Limited
Production Technology
Volume- I & II
17402 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Dhanpat Rai Publications
04
W. A. J. Chapman, S. J.
Martin
O.P. Khanna
05
H.S. Bawa
06
P.C. Sharma
03
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
W. A. J. Chapman, S. J.
Volume –I,II
A text book of Foundry Tech.
Workshop Technology
Volume- I & II
Production Engineering
12
Viva Books (p) Ltd.
Dhanpat Rai Publications
Tata McGraw-Hill
S. Chand Publications
17402 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Mechanical Engineering Group
Course Code : ME/MH/MI/PG/PT/FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Subject Code : 17411
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Knowledge of fluid properties, fluid flow & fluid machinery is essential in all fields of
engineering. Hydraulic machines have important role in water supply, irrigation, power
generation and also in most of the engineering segments. This subject requires knowledge
of basic engineering sciences, applied mechanics, mathematics etc. The fundamentals of
this subject are essential for the subject “Industrial Fluid Power” in sixth semester.
General Objectives: The student will be able to
1) Define various properties of fluids
2) Measure pressure, velocity and flow rate using various instruments.
3) State continuity equation, Bernoulli’s equation and its applications.
4) Estimate various losses in flow through pipes.
5) Explain concept of impact of jet on various types of vanes.
6) Draw the construction, working of hydraulic pumps and turbines.
7) Evaluate performance of turbines and pumps.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17411FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
- Use of flow measuring devices
- Selection and of use pumps & turbine under specified conditions.
Procedure
-
Pressure Measurement
Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem
Determination of coefficient of friction
Determination of coefficient of discharge
Principles
- Continuity Equation, Bernoulli’s Theorem
- Laws of Fluid Friction, Darcy’s and Chezy’s Equation
Concepts
- Fluid properties
- Pressure
- Types of flow
- Impact of jet
Facts
- Pressure gauges, Manometers, Venturimeter, Pumps, Turbines
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Performance testing of
pumps & Turbines
-
14
Cavitation, Separation
Slip, Negative slip
Manometric head
Overall efficiency
Water hammer
Forms of Energy
Flow rate
17411FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topics and Contents
1. Properties of fluid and Fluid Pressure
Specific Objectives:
 Define fluid properties.
 Differentiate between fluid pressure intensity and pressure head.
 Solve numerical related to properties of fluid, fluid pressure and
manometers.
Contents:
1.1 Properties of Fluid
06 Marks
Density, Specific gravity, Specific volume, Specific Weight, Dynamic
viscosity, Kinematic viscosity, Surface tension, Capillarity, Vapour
Pressure, Compressibility
1.2: Fluid Pressure & Pressure Measurement
14 Marks
 Fluid pressure, Pressure head, Pressure intensity
 Concept of absolute vacuum, gauge pressure, atmospheric pressure,
absolute pressure.
 Simple and differential manometers, Bourden pressure gauge.
 Total pressure, center of pressure- regular surface forces on
immersed bodies in liquid in horizontal, vertical and inclined
position
2. Fluid Flow
Specific Objectives:
 State Bernoulli’s theorem and apply it to venturimeter, orifice and pitot
tube.
Contents:
 Types of fluid flows-Laminar, turbulent, steady, unsteady, uniform,
non uniform, rotational, irrotational.
 Continuity equation, Bernoulli’s theorem
 Venturimeter – C o n s t r u c t i o n , p r i n c i p l e o f w o r k i n g ,
coefficient of discharge, Derivation for discharge through
venturimeter.
 Orifice meter – Construction, Principle of working, hydraulic
coefficients. Derivation for discharge through Orifice meter
 Pitot tube – Construction, Principle of Working
3. Flow Through Pipes
Specific Objectives:
 State laws of friction and list various losses in flow through pipes.
 Solve numerical on laws of friction and list various losses in flow through
pipes.
Contents:
 Laws of fluid friction ( Laminar and turbulent)

Darcy’s equation and Chezy’s equation for frictional losses
 Minor losses in fittings and valves
 Hydraulic gradient line and total energy line
Hydraulic power transmission through pipe

4. Impact of Jets
Specific Objectives:
 Analyze explain the impact of jet on vanes in various conditions.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
Hours
Marks
12
20
10
14
10
14
06
10
17411FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Solve numerical on impact of jet on vanes in various conditions.
Contents:
 Impact of jet on fixed vertical, moving vertical flat plates.
 Impact of jet on curved vanes with special reference to turbines and
pumps
5. Hydraulic Turbines
Specific Objectives:
 Explain working principle of various hydraulic turbines.
 Calculate work done, power generated and various efficiencies of hydraulic
turbines.
Contents:
 Layout and features of hydroelectric power plant, surge tanks and its
need.
 Classification of hydraulic turbines and their applications.
 Construction and working principle of Pelton wheel, Francis and
Kaplan turbine.
 Draft tubes – types and construction, Concept of cavitation in
turbines,
 Calculation of Work done, Power, efficiency of turbine
6. Pumps
Specific Objectives:
 Explain working of centrifugal, reciprocating and multistage pumps.
 Explain the concept of cavitation in pumps.
 Calculate manometric head, work done and various efficiencies related to
the pumps.
 Select the pump for a given application.
6.1 Centrifugal Pumps
14 Marks
Contents:
 Construction, principle of working, priming methods and Cavitation
 Types of casings and impellers.
 Manometric head, Work done, Manometric efficiency, Overall
efficiency, NPSH.
 Performance Characteristics of Centrifugal pumps.
 Trouble Shooting.
 Construction, working and applications multistage pumps
 Submersible pumps and jet pump
10 Marks
6.2 Reciprocating Pump
 Construction, working principle and applications of single and
double acting reciprocating pumps.
 Slip, Negative slip, Cavitation and separation.
 Use of Air Vessels.
 Indicator diagram with effect of acceleration head & frictional head.
(No numerical on reciprocating pumps)
Total
12
18
14
24
64
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Select appropriate flow and pressure measuring devices for a given situation.
2. Analyze the performance of pumps and turbines.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
17411FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Motor Skills:
1. Use flow and pressure measuring devices.
2. Operate pumps and turbines.
List of Practicals:
1. Measure water pressure by using Bourdon’s pressure gauge and U-tube Manometer. Also
measure discharge of water by using measuring tank and stop watch.
2. Calibrate Bourdon’s pressure gauge with the help of Dead weight pressure gauge.
3. Verify Bernoulli’s theorem.
4. Determine Coefficient of Discharge of Venturimeter.
5. Determine coefficient of Discharge, Coefficient of Contraction and Coefficient of
Velocity of Sharp edged circular orifice.
6. Determine Darcy’s friction factor ‘f’ in pipes of three different diameters for four different
discharges.
7. Determine minor frictional losses in pipe fittings.
8. Determine overall efficiency of Pelton wheel by using Pelton wheel test rig.
9. Determine overall efficiency of Centrifugal Pump & plot its operating characteristics by
using Centrifugal pump test rig.
10. Determine overall efficiency of Reciprocating pump by using Reciprocating Pump test
rig.
Assignments
1. Information collection of Centrifugal, reciprocating, multistage pumps and submersible
pumps from local market and from internet. Comparison of various models
manufactured by different manufacturers. [The market survey is to be completed in a
group of (max.) three to four students and the report of the same is to be included as
part of term work.]
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No
Ojha, Berndtsson,
01 Chnadramouli
02 Som S K , Biswas G.
Modi P.N. Seth
03 S M
04 Subramanya K.
Title
Publication
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Oxford University Press
Introduction to Fluid Mechanics
and Fluid Machines 3rd Edition
Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics
including Hydraulic Machines
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic
Machines: problems and solution
Tata McGraw-Hill Co.
Ltd.
Standard Book House
New Delhi
Tata McGraw-Hill Co.
Ltd.
05 Product catalogues of various pump manufacturers
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17411FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fabrication Technology & Erection Engineering
Course Code : FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Welding Technology
Subject Code : 17455
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
To teach students to understand facts concepts principles and procedures of gas and arc
welding, brazing, soldering.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1. Make student familiar with gas welding process.
2. Understand phenomenon of manual metal arc welding.
3. Describe and use the welding arc & metal transfer mechanism.
4. Identify weld defects.
5. Use the knowledge of joint design and weld metallurgy
6. Compare various metal joining processes - welding, brazing & soldering.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17455 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Use different arc and gas welding methods to different metals
and parts.
Procedures
Welding equipments for
AC/DC Generators,
rectifiers, holders, safety
precautions.
Principles
Different arc welding
techniques, electrodes, types
of joints.
Gas welding techniques
different gas mixtures and
nozzles used, different
joints
MMAC, welding current,
speeds and electrodes.
Types of flames, flame
controls, filler metals
electrodes.
Concepts
Facts
Gas cylinders, regulators
torches, safety in welding.
Joining of different metal parts used in fabrication industry.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17455 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Details: Contents
Chapter
1
2
3
4
Description
Marks
Gas Welding
Theory
 Types of joints and terminology & symbols of welding
 Definition of gas welding.
 Oxy acetylene welding.
16
 Types of welding flames.
 Gas welding equipment.
 Gas welding techniques.
 Advantages & limitations of gas welding.
 Filler metals and fluxes
Manual Metal Arc Welding
Theory
 Electric arc definition
 Arc structure & mechanism, arc characteristics, arc stability,
arc blow
 Metal transfer mechanism-Free flight type, short circuit type
pulse transfer type
 Arc welding power sources both D.C. & A.C.
 Factor affecting 7 selection of power sources
 Polarity, current voltage, electrical travel, arc length
24
 Positions flat, horizontal vertical overhead
 Electrodes sizes, composition, coating, classification & coding,
manufacturing of electrodes, care & storage of electrodes
Practice:
 Straight line deposition - down hand
 But welding - down hand
 T-joint - down hand
 Straight-line deposition - Vertical
 But welding - Vertical
 T-joint - Vertical
Welding of Different Metals
Theory
 Weldability and factors affecting it.
 Welding of mild steel & iron- processes used & explanation of
metal arc welding.
 Welding of cast iron- processes used & explanation of metal
arc welding.
 Welding of alloy steels, stainless steels- processes used &
explanation of oxy acetylene welding.
 Welding of aluminum & other non-ferrous metals - processes
used & explanation of Tig welding.
Welding Metallurgy & Weld Defects
Theory:
 Solidification of metals in welding.
 Heat affected zone and structure of weld metal for M.S.,
Copper, and Aluminum etc.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
Hours
08
18
20
08
24
08
17455 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme



Effect of welding on properties of metals.
Heat treatment used in welding.
Weld defects.
 Types of defects & their causes
 Remedial Procedures
Brazing & Soldering
Theory:
 Definition of brazing & soldering
 Difference between brazing, soldering, welding
 Principle of brazing
 Filler metals, joint preparation & design
 application & limitations
 Processes, torch, furnace, vacuum, induction Dip. Resistance,
carbon arc etc. of brazing.
 Principle of soldering
 Soldering joint & design.
Total
5
16
06
100
48
Practicals:
Skill to be developed
Intellectual Skill:
1. Identify the joining methods of welding
2. Understand welding of different materials
3. Specify different arc welding parameters.
Moral Skill:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Edge preparation for making the welding joint
Cleaning of edges.
Use welding machine & equipment.
Set the tool, job & decide parameter of machines.
Inspect the dimensions of the job using measuring instruments
Evaluation of weld quality
Learning Resources:
Books:
Author
Title
Edition
Year of
Publication
Publisher &
Address
O.P. Khanna
Welding Technology
--
1994
Dhanpatrai & Sons
L. Little
Welding & Welding
Technology
10th
1986
TMC, New Delhi
Agarwal &
Maghani
Welding Engineering
--
--
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
--
17455 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fabrication Technology & Erection Engineering
Course Code : FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Fabrication Process
Subject Code : 17456
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
This subject will help the students to know the basic requirements of fabrication & the
orderly sequence in which a component is prepared for fabrication.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:

Know basic marking / measuring processes. Identify & select various marking /
measuring tools in sheet metal shops.

To know the methods used for straightening & stiffening in sheet metal works.

To know recent trends of materials in fabrication.

To know the layout employed for fabrication processes.

To know importance of surface cleaning prior to coating.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17456 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Alternative marking & measuring e g. Templates, weight / strength
ratio, Heat treatment methods & distortion control, design /
selection of layout, improve life of coatings.
Procedures
Theory & practical
Theory & practical
Principles
Tools in measurement &
marking works.
Application of applied
mechanics, strength of
materials, engineering
materials, process flow,
surface quality.
Concepts
Measurement terminology,
marking processes, datum
measurement, geometric
shapes, templates.
Stiffening, straightening,
composite materials, layout
& surface cleaning.
Facts
Measurements & marking processes, straightening, stiffening,
composite materials, layout & surface cleaning.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17456 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
THEORY:
Topic and Contents
1. Measurement
Introduction
--------------------------------------------------- 04 Marks
1. Definition and meaning of :
Quantity, measurement, metrology, measure
Precision & accuracy,
Repeatability,
Calibration,
Sensitivity & readability
2. Sources of error
3. Classification of measurements
Standards of measurements ------------------------------- 04 Marks
1. Introduction to standards
2. Line standard
3. End standard
4. Angular standard
Marking process ---------------------------------------------- 16Marks
1. Tools used in marking
2. Marking methods for large size plates
3. Use of chalk line for marking long straight line
4. Shop method of drawing an ellipse
5. Plotting ellipse using trammels
6. Shop method of drawing a circle
7. Method of marking out bolt holes for flanges
8. Marking out a bracket from a datum surface
9. Procedure for marking out instrument panel
10. Marking of holes in angle sections, channel sections, T- sections,
columns and beams
Instruments for datum measurements ----------------- 04 Marks
1. Vertical datum- plumb line
2. Horizontal datum- spirit level
3. Alignment testing- use of tensioned wire, surveyor’s level
Geometric shape ------------------------------------------- 08 Marks
1. Straightness testing- straight edge method, spirit level method
2. Flatness testing- comparison with flat circles, use of spirit level
3. Squareness testing- engineer’s square, block square
4. Roundness measurement – Diametral, circumferential confining
gauge, rotating on centres, assessment using a V-block, roundness
measuring machine
Templates
------------------------------------------------ 12 Marks
1. The need of templates
2. Materials used for templates
3. Information given on templates
4. Use of templates
• Templates for setting out sheet metal fabrications
• Templates for hopper plates
• Box templates
• Steel templates (ordinary and bushed)
5. Templates as means of checking
6. Templates as a means of marking hole positions
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
Marks
Hours
48
28
17456 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
7. Templates as means of to provide an economical arrangement of
layout for press-work
8. Templates as a guide for cutting processes
9. Protection and storage of templates and tools
10. Comparison of methods of direct marking and use of templates
2. Straightening Methods
Mechanical straightening
1. Manual
2. Machine straightening
Thermal methods
1. Hot shrinking
2. Use of heat strips
3. Use of heat triangles
4. Principle of hot straightening for structural sections
3. Stiffening of Fabricated Material
Methods of stiffening sheet metal
Reasons for stiffening
Stiffening of large panels
1. Use of applied stiffeners
2. Use of angle stiffeners
Need for web stiffeners
4. Composite Materials in Fabrication
Introduction to composite material
Classification of composites
Composition of composites
Processing of composites
Joining of composites
Applications
5. Surface Cleaning
Introduction
Need for coating & cleaning
Methods of surface cleaning
1. Chemical method
2. Mechanical method
3. Thermal method
4. Dry method
6. Factory / Workshop Layout
Introduction
Definition of Factory layout
Importance of layout
Essentials of layout
Types of layout
Factors influencing layout
Dynamics plant layout
Examples
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
08
04
12
04
08
04
12
04
12
04
100
48
17456 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical:
Skill to be developed;
Intellectual skills
1. Ability to read job drawings.
2. Ability to identify & select proper material & tools for marking / measuring.
Motor skills
1. Ability to set work piece for measurement on measuring instruments / devices.
2. Ability to inspect the job for confirming desired dimensions and shape.
3. Ability to recognize errors from mistakes and take remedial actions.
Practicals:
1. Demonstration and use of :
 Vernier calliper,
 Micrometer screw gauge,
 Vernier height gauge,
 Vernier depth gauge,
 Feeler gauge, radius gauge & screw pitch gauge
 Slip gauges,
 Universal Bevel Protractor,
 Sine bar
 Angle gauges,
2. Study of Engineer’s rule,
3. Study of Steel rule and tape (Layout preparation)
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher & Address
1
Kadam Manish J
Metrology & Quality Control
Everest Pub. House
2
Hume K.J.
Sharp G.H.
Practical Metrology
ELBS Macdonald & company
3
R. K. Jain
Metrology
Khanna Publications
4
Kenyon W. Pitman
Basic welding and fabrication
Pitman Pub. Ltd.
5
F.J. M. Smith/
Longman
Basic fabrication and welding
Engg
Longman Craft Studies.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17456 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fabrication Technology & Erection Engineering
Course Code : FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Process Equipment
Subject Code : 17457
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
Rationale:
It is intended that the students understand facts, concepts regarding construction and
working of process equipment used in the fabrication industry.
Objectives: The students will be able to1. Learn pressure vessel terminology.
2. Study design loads on process equipments.
3. Find stresses / thickness of vessels & dished ends.
4. Study of supports.
5. Design the process equipment.
6. Study & decide the materials & welding processes used in pressure vessel construction.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17457 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedures
Alternative marking & measuring e g. Templates, weight / strength
ratio, Heat How to design different components, study their stresses
and failures
Theory & practical class
with discussion
Principles
Study of different design
loads, study of stress
analysis, stress
concentration, joint
efficiency
Concepts
Thin / thick cylinder,
structural design, press
work, process flow, joining
media selection.
Facts
Theory & practical class
with discussion
Study of compositions, properties,
advantages, disadvantages and
comparisons of different materials
used in fabrication industry with
respect to weldability.
Determine weldability of
material selected
Pressure vessels, supports, dish ends, nozzles, flanges, saddles,
bolts etc. (Refer terminology of pressure vessels), weld processes &
material selection.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17457 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Marks
Hrs.
12
08
24
16
24
16
Stress concentrations, Nozzle reinforcement, placement and shape, fatique
concentration, stresses concentration in circular and elliptical opening.
Weld Design (Theory only)
16
08
Introduction, groove welds, fillet welds, plug weld, defects in welds, NDT of
welds, stress concentration factors, welding processes, welding symbols,
welded joints, bolted joints, vessel supports and attachments, gaskets.
Construction Materials
12
06
12
10
100
64
Pressure Vessels
Introduction, types, accessories & mountings, terminology.
Design of Pressure Vessels
Introduction, design approach, design pressure design temperature, dead load,
wind load, piping load, earthquake loads, and combination of design loads,
allowable stress range, general design criterion, stresses in ring, cylinder,
sphere, poisson ratio, dilation of pressure vessels, membrane stress, thick
cylinder, thick sphere, intersecting sphere, thermal stresses, ultra high
pressure vessel , multishell construction, discontinuity stresses in vessels,
stresses in bi-metallic joints, deformation and stresses in flanges and flanged
joints, gaskets, reinforced circular plates, stacked plates and built up plates.
Membrane Stress Analysis in Various Parts of Vessels
Cylindrical shell, spherical shell, hemispherical heads, semi ellipsoidal heads,
torispherical heads, conical heads (simple problems)
Supports skirts, support legs, support lugs, anchor bolts, saddles, stiffeners.
Design for thickness; shell, dish ends, nozzles, flanges, bolt size & numbers,
dilation & ligament efficiency.
Design Construction Features
General considerations, Non corrosive service, ferrous and non ferrous
materials for corrosive service, bolting material, selection of material for
hydrogen service, aluminum alloys, stainless steels, method of attaching
protective layers.
Note: Derivation / Proof of any formula is not expected
TOTAL
Assignments:
Eight assignments based on above theory content. Details of the assignments be written
Implementation Strategies:
The subject matter will be taught as per the teaching scheme for Theory and practical. The subject
teacher will prepare and provide learning material/handout for supplementing/ complementing
classroom instructions.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17457 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
References:
Books:
Author
Henry H.
Bednar
John F. Harvey
Eugene F.
Megyesy
---Joshi &
Mahajan
Edition
Year of
Publication
--
--
1st
1987
C.B.S. Pub. Delhi
--
1992
Press Vessel Handbook
Pub. Cl.
--
1992
ASME, New York
--
1980
ASME, USA
Unfired Pressure Vessels
--
1946
ASME, New York
Process Equipment
Design
--
1996
Macmillan, New Delhi.
Title
Pressure Vessel design
handbook
Theory and design of
pressure vessel
Pressure Vessel
Handbook
ASME Boiler & Pressure
Vessel Code
Boiler & Pressure Vessel
Code
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
Publisher & Address
--
17457 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fabrication Technology & Erection Engineering
Course Code : FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17048
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
The purpose of introducing Professional practices is to fulfill the need of students to stand in
today’s global market with knowledge and confidence. This can be achieved by arranging industrial
visits, expert lectures attitude to present them-selves, get alternative solutions and validation of the
selected alternatives, socially relevant activities, and modular courses. Professional Practices is
helpful in broadening technology base of students beyond curriculum. Model making exercises
allow students to think more creatively and innovatively and inculcating habit of working with their
own hands. Modular courses are introduced with a view of learning and acquiring higher
technology skills through industry experts and consultants from the respective fields.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1) Acquire information from different sources.
2) Prepare notes for given topics
3) Present seminar using power projection system.
4) Interact with peers to share thoughts.
5) Work in a team and develop team spirit.
Intellectual Skill:
Student will be able to1) Search information from various resources.
2) Prepare notes on selected topics.
3) Participate in group discussions.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17048 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Motor Skills:
1) Observe industrial practices during visits.
2) Prepare slides / charts for presentation in seminar.
3) Develop a model
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedures
Concepts
Facts
Gaining confidence in report writing and presentations skills in identified
contents of curriculum, apply knowledge in model making. Developing self
learning habbit.
Writing skill, expert lectures, seminars, industrial visit, material conversion
processes, brain storming technique.
Industry Institute Interaction, Team work, brain storming, information search.
Contents of identified topics, Industrial experts, models, equipments, machinery,
projection system, etc.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17048 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Content:
Topic & Content
1. Information Search:–
Information search be made through manufacturers catalogue, Hand books, magazines
journal and websites, and submit a report on any Two Topics in a group of 3 to 4
students, report size shall not be more than 10 pages.
Following topics are suggested, any other equivalent topics may be selected.
1. Present scenario of electric power generation in Maharashtra state /India.
2. Composite materials – Types, properties & application
3. Material handling equipments commonly used in industries.
4. Advances in Automobile engines.
5. Hydraulic steering systems of Automobile.
6. Mechanisms used to produce straight-line motion.
7. Mechanisms used for generating intermittent motion.
8. Advanced surface coating techniques like chemical vapor deposition, ion
implantation, physical vapor deposition.
9. Types of cutting tools- specification, materials and applications.
10. Booking of E-Tickets for Railways/Buses/Air travel.
11. Profiles of 2 multinational companies.
12. Engine lubricants, coolants and additives
13. Power steering, power windows
14. ABS(anti lock braking systems)
15. MPFI(multi point fuel injection) system
16. Role of MIDC, MSSIDC, DIC, Financial institutions in development of
industrial sector.
17. Solar energy systems - Components and their functions, applications
18. Design data book - Study and use of types of data.
2. Lectures by professionals/Industry ExpertsTwo lectures of two hour duration be arranged on any two topics suggested below or
any other suitable topics to acquire practical information beyond scope of
curriculum.
Students shall prepare a brief report of each lecture as a part of their term work.
1. Components of project Report.
2. Various loan schemes of banks, LIC and other agencies for education and other
purposes.
3. Use of plastics & rubbers in Automobiles industries.
4. Type of processes used to protect material surfaces from environmental effect.
5. Product life cycle.
6. Industrial application of mechatronics.
7. Special features of CNC machines
8. Gear manufacturing & gear teeth finishing processes.
9. Gear boxes-industrial & Automobile applications.
10. super-finishing operation &their industrial applications.
11. processing methods for plastic components.
12. Features of modern boilers
13. Strainers and filters –Types, functions and applications
14. Industrial drives-Types, components, comparison and applications.
15. Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
3. Seminars:
One seminar be arranged on the subjects related to 4 th semester. Or topics beyond
curriculum.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
Hours
10
06
06
17048 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Each student shall submit a report up to 10 pages and deliver the seminar.
batch size - 2-3 students.
Source of information - books, magazine, Journals, Website ,surveys,
Topics suggested for guidance1. Clutches - Types, Principles, working, & applications.
2. High pressure boilers.
3. Heat exchangers - Types, working applications.
4. Hydraulic turbines -Types, working & applications.
5. Hydraulic pumps - Types, working & applications.
6. Sensors -Types, principle & applications.
7. Super conductor technology - Types, principle & applications.
8. Semi conductors- Types, materials & applications.
9. Industrial brakes- Types, construction, working & applications.
4. Industrial visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same shall be submitted by each
student to form a part of the term work.
No of visits- At least one
Scale of industry- medium scale unit, large scale unit.
Group size- practical batch
Report-not exceeding 7 to 10 pages.
Purpose :
To study the profile of industry
To see the advanced manufacturing processes & machinery.
To observe working of CNC machines, work centres, flexible manufacturing
systems
To observe working in foundry, forging shop, press shop, heat treatment shop etc.
To observe chip less manufacturing machines & processes.
To study process sheets , quality control charts & production drawings, metallurgical
testing laboratory
To observe Tool room, standards room etc.
08
Following types of industries may be visited in & around the institute.
1. Foundry
2. Forging units
3. Sheet metal processing unit
4. Machine/ Automobile component manufacturing unit
5. Fabrication unit/ powder metallurgy component manufacturing unit.
6. Machine tool manufacturing unit.
7. Any processing industry like chemical, textile, sugar, agriculture, fertilizer
industries.
8. Auto workshop / four wheeler garage.
9. City water supply pumping station
10. Hydro electric power plant,
11. Wind mills, Solar Park
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17048 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
5. Socially Relevant Activities
Conduct any one activity through active participation of students and write the report.
Group of students- maximum 4
Report- Not more than 6 pages
List of suggested activities- (activities may be thought in terms of campus improvement)
1. Awareness about carbon credit
2. Anticorruption movement
3. Awareness about cyber crimes.
4. Developing good citizens.
5. Management of E- WASTE
6. Recycling of waste materials.
7. Accident prevention & enforcement of safely rules.
8. Awareness about pollution and pollution control.
9. (Any other relevant activity may be performed)
6. Mini Projects
Students, in a group of 4, shall perform any one activity listed below.
1. Model making out of card board paper, wood, thermocol, plastics, metal, clay
etc
a) Any new idea/principle converted into model
b) Mechanisms
c) Jigs/fixtures
d) Material handling device, etc.
2. Toy making with simple operating mechanisms
3. Layout of workshop/department/college
4. Experimental set up/testing of a parameter
5. Display board indicating different type of machine components like bearing,
fasteners, couplings, pipe fitting, valves, cams & followers, exploded views of
assemblies, type of welding equipment ,welding rods (drawings, photo graphs )
6. Any relevant project which will make students to collect information & work
with their own hands.
7. Students shall arrange exhibition of all mini projects in the class/hall and present
the task to the audience/ experts/examiners. The student shall submit a brief
report (Max. 5 pages) of the mini project.
OR
Modular course:
06
12
Modular courses on any one of the suggested or equivalent topic be undertaken by a
group of 15 to 20 students.
1. Advance features in CAD
2. Meshing of solid model using any suitable software
3. Developing Unfold Sheet or Hyperblank by using Blanking Software
4. CAM Software
5. Basics of PLC programming
6. Applications of mechatronics
7. Piping Technology
8. Modern packaging technology
9. Enterprise Resource Planning
10. Bio-pneumatic Robots
11. Bio-mimicry
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17048 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Author
NRDC, Publication Bi
Monthly Journal
Title
Invention Intelligence
Journal
Publisher
National Research
Development Corporation,
GOI.
How things works
DK Publishing
encyclopedia
Innovation mgmt.& new
Trott
Pearson Education
product development
Basic Managerial Skills for
E.H. McGrath, S.J.
PHI
All – Ninth Edition
Apprenticeship Training Scheme:- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
DK Publishing
2. Web sites
www.engineeringforchange.org
www.wikipedia.com
www.slideshare.com
www.teachertube.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17048 FE4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN FABRICATION TECHNOLOGY & ERECTION ENGINEERING
COURSE CODE : FG
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies $
Manufacturing Processes β
Fluid Mechanics & Machinery β
Welding Technology
Fabrication Processes
Processes Equipments
Professional Practices-II
Abbrev
iation
EST
MPR
FMM
WTE
FPR
PEQ
PPS
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
SW
(17400)
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
17401
17402
17411
17455
17456
17457
17048
01
03
04
03
03
04
--
--------
02
04
02
02
02
02
03
01
03
03
03
03
03
--
50#*
100
100
100
100
100
--
20
40
40
40
40
40
--
-25#
25#
25#
50#
---
-10
10
10
20
---
--------
--------
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
20
10
10
10
10
20
50
TOTAL
18
--
17
--
550
--
125
--
--
--
225
--
50
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 35 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 950
@ - Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, β - Common to ME / PG / PT/ MH /
MI/FG
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as
sessional work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR, TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
 For CAD software subject MSBTE decide the contents of the practical every year.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* - Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principles
Concept
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Fact
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Credit, Ecosystem
3
17401 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general
public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
02
06
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Mechanical Engineering Group
Course Code : ME/PG/PT/MH/MI/FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Manufacturing Process
Subject Code : 17402
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
175
Rationale:
Diploma technician often comes across various types of basic manufacturing processes. He /
she is required to select, operate and control the appropriate processes for specific applications. He /
she is also required to know about various cutting tools, latest improvements in manufacturing
processes. This is a core technology subject. The diploma technician should know how the raw
material gets processed through various processes and ultimately results into finished goods.
Hence it is essential that, he has understanding of basic manufacturing processes, machines, tools
and equipments. With sound knowledge of this subject, the diploma technician will be able to
handle and control practical situations more effectively and confidently.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1) Use the basic machine tools like lathe and drilling.
2) Produce and inspect the job as per specified dimensions.
3) Select the specific manufacturing processes for the desired output.
4) Adopt safety practices while working on various machines.
5) Explain the different types of plastic moulding processes.
6) Select the basic manufacturing process for different components to be machined.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17402 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Selection of process and process parameters for the given work
piece.
Procedure
To understand the use of Lathe, Drilling, Spot welding
machine, Plastic moulding machines.
Principle
Working principle of Forging, rolling, extrusion, press,
principle of metal flow, principle of metal cutting, plastic
moulding, principle of solidification, joining.
Concepts
Concept of Forging, rolling, extrusion, press, Single and
multipoint cutting tool, Lathe, drilling, casting, patterns,
plastic moulding, sand mould, welding, brazing & soldering.
Facts
Forging, furnaces, dies, rolling mills, extrusion methods,
press, dies, lathe, drilling machine, tools, operations,
Applications, patterns, plastic moulds, casting types, welding
types, brazing & soldering
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
17402 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Content
1:Forming Processes
Specific Objectives:
 To list basic manufacturing processes and write working principal
of different manufacturing processes like Drop forging, Rolling
and Extrusion
 To identify and select proper manufacturing process for a specific
component
Content
1.1 Drop forging:
06 Marks
Upset forging, press forging(die forging),open die & closed die forging,
forging operations
1.2 Rolling:
06 Marks
Principle of rolling, hot & cold rolling, Types of rolling mill, application of
rolling
1.3 Extrusion:
06 Marks
Direct & indirect extrusion, Advantages, disadvantages and Applications.
2. Press working:
Specific Objectives:
 To define Press working machine principal
 To state various classification of press machine.
 To state different operations performed on press machine and
their p[practical applications
Content
2.1 Press classification, press operations like punching/piercing, blanking,
notching, lancing
06 Marks
2.2 Die set components and types of dies
06 Marks
2.3 Forming Operations: Bending, drawing
04 Marks
3. Casting Processes:
22 Marks
Specific Objectives:
 To state different between pattern and model
 To list different types of pattern and their applications
 To state various types of pattern allowances.
 To state various types of casting processes.
Content
3.1 Pattern making:
06 Marks
Basic steps in making casting, Pattern : types, materials and allowances,
tools, color coding of patterns
3.2 Moulding:
06 Marks
Types of moulding sands, properties of sand, moulding methods, cores
and core prints, elements of gating system, bench moulding, floor
moulding, pit moulding, machine moulding.
3.3 Casting:
06 Marks
Furnaces: Construction and working of cupola furnace, electric arc
furnace. - Methods & applications of - Centrifugal casting, shell
moulding, investment casting, Casting defects - Causes & remedies.
3.4 Hot chamber and cold chamber die casting, Die casting defects - Causes &
remedies.
04 Marks
4. Welding
Specific Objectives:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
Hours
Marks
08
18
08
16
10
22
07
14
17402 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 To define Arc welding and Gas welding Principal.
 To state difference between soldering and brazing processes
Content
4.1 Introduction & classification of welding processes Gas welding, carbon arc welding, shielded metal arc welding, TIG
welding, MIG welding, plasma arc welding, resistance welding typesspot, seam projection. Electron beam welding, laser beam welding,
welding defects.
10 Marks
4.2 Introduction to soldering and brazing –
Process, fillers, heating methods & applications.
04 Marks
5. Machining Operations
Specific Objectives:
 To state the working principal of lathe and drilling machines.
 To list out various operations performed on lathe and drilling
machines
Content
5.1 Lathe Machine:
12 Marks
Introduction, classification and basic parts of center lathe & their
functions, Lathe operations like facing, plain turning, taper turning, thread
cutting, chamfering, grooving, knurling. Cutting tool nomenclature & tool
signature, cutting parameters.
5.2 Drilling Machine:
08 Marks
Introduction, classification, basic parts of radial drilling machine and their
functions, twist drill nomenclature, drilling machine operations like
drilling, reaming, boring, counter sinking, counter boring, spot facing.
Cutting parameters.
6. Plastic Moulding:
Specific Objectives:
 To state different properties of plastics
 To explain various plastic mauling methods like Injection, blow,
compression molding
Content
Introduction, Properties of plastics, types of plastics, plastic moulding
methods - compression moulding, injection moulding, blow moulding,
extrusion, vacuum forming and calendaring.
Total
10
20
05
10
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual skills:
1) Identify basic manufacturing processes like forging, rolling and extrusion, for required
component.
2) Specify need of pattern allowances.
3) Decide process parameters for different operations.
4) Decide tools required for a manufacturing process.
5) Identify a joining method for fabrication.
Motor Skills:
1) Operate lathe, drilling machine.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17402 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2) Set the tool and select the cutting parameters for machining operations.
3) Set the tools, job and decide cutting parameters.
4) Inspect various dimensions of jobs by using measuring instruments.
5) Make simple wooden / thermocole pattern.
List of Practical:
1) One turning job on lathe containing the operations like plain turning, step turning, taper
turning, grooving, knurling and chamfering.
2) One job using Spot welding machine. (Min. 4 spots on 0.5-1mm thick metal strip.)
3) One simple job on TIG / MIG welding setup or visit to TIG / MIG welding shop.
4) Moulding practice for any one pattern.
5) Industrial visit to observe plastic processing shop and report on the visit.
6) One composite job containing the operations like lathe with axial & across drilling (like
Nut- Bolt assembly or any other equivalent job).
7) Demonstration of eccentric turning using four jaw chuck.
Notes:
1] The workshop instructors should prepare specimen job in each shop as demonstration
practice before the student (as per the drawing given by subject teacher/ workshop
superintendent).
2] Theory behind practical is to be covered by the concerned subject teacher/ workshop
superintendent.
3] Workshop diary should be maintained by each student duly signed by respective shop
instructors.
4] Assignments are to be assessed by the concerned subject teacher/ workshop superintendent.
Guidelines for conducting Practical Examination for MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
1. The job drawing must be jointly decided by the External and Internal examiner prior to one
day in advance from the commencement of practical examination. Every student should be
supplied the copy of job drawing before examination.
2. Time for practical examination should be THREE HOURS.
3. Practical examination of the students shall consists of Turning job containing different
operations like Facing, straight Turning, Taper turning, Chamfering, Knurling , Threading,
Grooving. (Minimum 5 operations) Students will perform the job as per the drawing
provided to them.
4. Raw material size – Bar dia. 40 to 50 mm, length 80 to 100 mm.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
S. K. Hajra Chaudhary,
01
Bose, Roy
02
O. P. Khanna & Lal
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Title
Elements of workshop
Technology-Volume I & II
Production Technology
Volume- I & II
11
Publisher
Media Promoters and
Publishers Limited
Production Technology
Volume- I & II
17402 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Dhanpat Rai Publications
04
W. A. J. Chapman, S. J.
Martin
O.P. Khanna
05
H.S. Bawa
06
P.C. Sharma
03
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
W. A. J. Chapman, S. J.
Volume –I,II
A text book of Foundry Tech.
Workshop Technology
Volume- I & II
Production Engineering
12
Viva Books (p) Ltd.
Dhanpat Rai Publications
Tata McGraw-Hill
S. Chand Publications
17402 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Mechanical Engineering Group
Course Code : ME/MH/MI/PG/PT/FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Subject Code : 17411
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Knowledge of fluid properties, fluid flow & fluid machinery is essential in all fields of
engineering. Hydraulic machines have important role in water supply, irrigation, power
generation and also in most of the engineering segments. This subject requires knowledge
of basic engineering sciences, applied mechanics, mathematics etc. The fundamentals of
this subject are essential for the subject “Industrial Fluid Power” in sixth semester.
General Objectives: The student will be able to
1) Define various properties of fluids
2) Measure pressure, velocity and flow rate using various instruments.
3) State continuity equation, Bernoulli’s equation and its applications.
4) Estimate various losses in flow through pipes.
5) Explain concept of impact of jet on various types of vanes.
6) Draw the construction, working of hydraulic pumps and turbines.
7) Evaluate performance of turbines and pumps.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17411FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
- Use of flow measuring devices
- Selection and of use pumps & turbine under specified conditions.
Procedure
-
Pressure Measurement
Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem
Determination of coefficient of friction
Determination of coefficient of discharge
Principles
- Continuity Equation, Bernoulli’s Theorem
- Laws of Fluid Friction, Darcy’s and Chezy’s Equation
Concepts
- Fluid properties
- Pressure
- Types of flow
- Impact of jet
Facts
- Pressure gauges, Manometers, Venturimeter, Pumps, Turbines
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Performance testing of
pumps & Turbines
-
14
Cavitation, Separation
Slip, Negative slip
Manometric head
Overall efficiency
Water hammer
Forms of Energy
Flow rate
17411FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topics and Contents
1. Properties of fluid and Fluid Pressure
Specific Objectives:
 Define fluid properties.
 Differentiate between fluid pressure intensity and pressure head.
 Solve numerical related to properties of fluid, fluid pressure and
manometers.
Contents:
1.1 Properties of Fluid
06 Marks
Density, Specific gravity, Specific volume, Specific Weight, Dynamic
viscosity, Kinematic viscosity, Surface tension, Capillarity, Vapour
Pressure, Compressibility
1.2: Fluid Pressure & Pressure Measurement
14 Marks
 Fluid pressure, Pressure head, Pressure intensity
 Concept of absolute vacuum, gauge pressure, atmospheric pressure,
absolute pressure.
 Simple and differential manometers, Bourden pressure gauge.
 Total pressure, center of pressure- regular surface forces on
immersed bodies in liquid in horizontal, vertical and inclined
position
2. Fluid Flow
Specific Objectives:
 State Bernoulli’s theorem and apply it to venturimeter, orifice and pitot
tube.
Contents:
 Types of fluid flows-Laminar, turbulent, steady, unsteady, uniform,
non uniform, rotational, irrotational.
 Continuity equation, Bernoulli’s theorem
 Venturimeter – C o n s t r u c t i o n , p r i n c i p l e o f w o r k i n g ,
coefficient of discharge, Derivation for discharge through
venturimeter.
 Orifice meter – Construction, Principle of working, hydraulic
coefficients. Derivation for discharge through Orifice meter
 Pitot tube – Construction, Principle of Working
3. Flow Through Pipes
Specific Objectives:
 State laws of friction and list various losses in flow through pipes.
 Solve numerical on laws of friction and list various losses in flow through
pipes.
Contents:
 Laws of fluid friction ( Laminar and turbulent)

Darcy’s equation and Chezy’s equation for frictional losses
 Minor losses in fittings and valves
 Hydraulic gradient line and total energy line
Hydraulic power transmission through pipe

4. Impact of Jets
Specific Objectives:
 Analyze explain the impact of jet on vanes in various conditions.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
Hours
Marks
12
20
10
14
10
14
06
10
17411FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Solve numerical on impact of jet on vanes in various conditions.
Contents:
 Impact of jet on fixed vertical, moving vertical flat plates.
 Impact of jet on curved vanes with special reference to turbines and
pumps
5. Hydraulic Turbines
Specific Objectives:
 Explain working principle of various hydraulic turbines.
 Calculate work done, power generated and various efficiencies of hydraulic
turbines.
Contents:
 Layout and features of hydroelectric power plant, surge tanks and its
need.
 Classification of hydraulic turbines and their applications.
 Construction and working principle of Pelton wheel, Francis and
Kaplan turbine.
 Draft tubes – types and construction, Concept of cavitation in
turbines,
 Calculation of Work done, Power, efficiency of turbine
6. Pumps
Specific Objectives:
 Explain working of centrifugal, reciprocating and multistage pumps.
 Explain the concept of cavitation in pumps.
 Calculate manometric head, work done and various efficiencies related to
the pumps.
 Select the pump for a given application.
6.1 Centrifugal Pumps
14 Marks
Contents:
 Construction, principle of working, priming methods and Cavitation
 Types of casings and impellers.
 Manometric head, Work done, Manometric efficiency, Overall
efficiency, NPSH.
 Performance Characteristics of Centrifugal pumps.
 Trouble Shooting.
 Construction, working and applications multistage pumps
 Submersible pumps and jet pump
10 Marks
6.2 Reciprocating Pump
 Construction, working principle and applications of single and
double acting reciprocating pumps.
 Slip, Negative slip, Cavitation and separation.
 Use of Air Vessels.
 Indicator diagram with effect of acceleration head & frictional head.
(No numerical on reciprocating pumps)
Total
12
18
14
24
64
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Select appropriate flow and pressure measuring devices for a given situation.
2. Analyze the performance of pumps and turbines.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
17411FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Motor Skills:
1. Use flow and pressure measuring devices.
2. Operate pumps and turbines.
List of Practicals:
1. Measure water pressure by using Bourdon’s pressure gauge and U-tube Manometer. Also
measure discharge of water by using measuring tank and stop watch.
2. Calibrate Bourdon’s pressure gauge with the help of Dead weight pressure gauge.
3. Verify Bernoulli’s theorem.
4. Determine Coefficient of Discharge of Venturimeter.
5. Determine coefficient of Discharge, Coefficient of Contraction and Coefficient of
Velocity of Sharp edged circular orifice.
6. Determine Darcy’s friction factor ‘f’ in pipes of three different diameters for four different
discharges.
7. Determine minor frictional losses in pipe fittings.
8. Determine overall efficiency of Pelton wheel by using Pelton wheel test rig.
9. Determine overall efficiency of Centrifugal Pump & plot its operating characteristics by
using Centrifugal pump test rig.
10. Determine overall efficiency of Reciprocating pump by using Reciprocating Pump test
rig.
Assignments
1. Information collection of Centrifugal, reciprocating, multistage pumps and submersible
pumps from local market and from internet. Comparison of various models
manufactured by different manufacturers. [The market survey is to be completed in a
group of (max.) three to four students and the report of the same is to be included as
part of term work.]
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No
Ojha, Berndtsson,
01 Chnadramouli
02 Som S K , Biswas G.
Modi P.N. Seth
03 S M
04 Subramanya K.
Title
Publication
Fluid Mechanics and Machinery
Oxford University Press
Introduction to Fluid Mechanics
and Fluid Machines 3rd Edition
Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics
including Hydraulic Machines
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic
Machines: problems and solution
Tata McGraw-Hill Co.
Ltd.
Standard Book House
New Delhi
Tata McGraw-Hill Co.
Ltd.
05 Product catalogues of various pump manufacturers
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17411FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fabrication Technology & Erection Engineering
Course Code : FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Welding Technology
Subject Code : 17455
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
To teach students to understand facts concepts principles and procedures of gas and arc
welding, brazing, soldering.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1. Make student familiar with gas welding process.
2. Understand phenomenon of manual metal arc welding.
3. Describe and use the welding arc & metal transfer mechanism.
4. Identify weld defects.
5. Use the knowledge of joint design and weld metallurgy
6. Compare various metal joining processes - welding, brazing & soldering.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17455 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Use different arc and gas welding methods to different metals
and parts.
Procedures
Welding equipments for
AC/DC Generators,
rectifiers, holders, safety
precautions.
Principles
Different arc welding
techniques, electrodes, types
of joints.
Gas welding techniques
different gas mixtures and
nozzles used, different
joints
MMAC, welding current,
speeds and electrodes.
Types of flames, flame
controls, filler metals
electrodes.
Concepts
Facts
Gas cylinders, regulators
torches, safety in welding.
Joining of different metal parts used in fabrication industry.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17455 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Details: Contents
Chapter
1
2
3
4
Description
Marks
Gas Welding
Theory
 Types of joints and terminology & symbols of welding
 Definition of gas welding.
 Oxy acetylene welding.
16
 Types of welding flames.
 Gas welding equipment.
 Gas welding techniques.
 Advantages & limitations of gas welding.
 Filler metals and fluxes
Manual Metal Arc Welding
Theory
 Electric arc definition
 Arc structure & mechanism, arc characteristics, arc stability,
arc blow
 Metal transfer mechanism-Free flight type, short circuit type
pulse transfer type
 Arc welding power sources both D.C. & A.C.
 Factor affecting 7 selection of power sources
 Polarity, current voltage, electrical travel, arc length
24
 Positions flat, horizontal vertical overhead
 Electrodes sizes, composition, coating, classification & coding,
manufacturing of electrodes, care & storage of electrodes
Practice:
 Straight line deposition - down hand
 But welding - down hand
 T-joint - down hand
 Straight-line deposition - Vertical
 But welding - Vertical
 T-joint - Vertical
Welding of Different Metals
Theory
 Weldability and factors affecting it.
 Welding of mild steel & iron- processes used & explanation of
metal arc welding.
 Welding of cast iron- processes used & explanation of metal
arc welding.
 Welding of alloy steels, stainless steels- processes used &
explanation of oxy acetylene welding.
 Welding of aluminum & other non-ferrous metals - processes
used & explanation of Tig welding.
Welding Metallurgy & Weld Defects
Theory:
 Solidification of metals in welding.
 Heat affected zone and structure of weld metal for M.S.,
Copper, and Aluminum etc.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
Hours
08
18
20
08
24
08
17455 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme



Effect of welding on properties of metals.
Heat treatment used in welding.
Weld defects.
 Types of defects & their causes
 Remedial Procedures
Brazing & Soldering
Theory:
 Definition of brazing & soldering
 Difference between brazing, soldering, welding
 Principle of brazing
 Filler metals, joint preparation & design
 application & limitations
 Processes, torch, furnace, vacuum, induction Dip. Resistance,
carbon arc etc. of brazing.
 Principle of soldering
 Soldering joint & design.
Total
5
16
06
100
48
Practicals:
Skill to be developed
Intellectual Skill:
1. Identify the joining methods of welding
2. Understand welding of different materials
3. Specify different arc welding parameters.
Moral Skill:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Edge preparation for making the welding joint
Cleaning of edges.
Use welding machine & equipment.
Set the tool, job & decide parameter of machines.
Inspect the dimensions of the job using measuring instruments
Evaluation of weld quality
Learning Resources:
Books:
Author
Title
Edition
Year of
Publication
Publisher &
Address
O.P. Khanna
Welding Technology
--
1994
Dhanpatrai & Sons
L. Little
Welding & Welding
Technology
10th
1986
TMC, New Delhi
Agarwal &
Maghani
Welding Engineering
--
--
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
--
17455 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fabrication Technology & Erection Engineering
Course Code : FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Fabrication Process
Subject Code : 17456
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
This subject will help the students to know the basic requirements of fabrication & the
orderly sequence in which a component is prepared for fabrication.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:

Know basic marking / measuring processes. Identify & select various marking /
measuring tools in sheet metal shops.

To know the methods used for straightening & stiffening in sheet metal works.

To know recent trends of materials in fabrication.

To know the layout employed for fabrication processes.

To know importance of surface cleaning prior to coating.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
17456 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Alternative marking & measuring e g. Templates, weight / strength
ratio, Heat treatment methods & distortion control, design /
selection of layout, improve life of coatings.
Procedures
Theory & practical
Theory & practical
Principles
Tools in measurement &
marking works.
Application of applied
mechanics, strength of
materials, engineering
materials, process flow,
surface quality.
Concepts
Measurement terminology,
marking processes, datum
measurement, geometric
shapes, templates.
Stiffening, straightening,
composite materials, layout
& surface cleaning.
Facts
Measurements & marking processes, straightening, stiffening,
composite materials, layout & surface cleaning.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17456 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
THEORY:
Topic and Contents
1. Measurement
Introduction
--------------------------------------------------- 04 Marks
1. Definition and meaning of :
Quantity, measurement, metrology, measure
Precision & accuracy,
Repeatability,
Calibration,
Sensitivity & readability
2. Sources of error
3. Classification of measurements
Standards of measurements ------------------------------- 04 Marks
1. Introduction to standards
2. Line standard
3. End standard
4. Angular standard
Marking process ---------------------------------------------- 16Marks
1. Tools used in marking
2. Marking methods for large size plates
3. Use of chalk line for marking long straight line
4. Shop method of drawing an ellipse
5. Plotting ellipse using trammels
6. Shop method of drawing a circle
7. Method of marking out bolt holes for flanges
8. Marking out a bracket from a datum surface
9. Procedure for marking out instrument panel
10. Marking of holes in angle sections, channel sections, T- sections,
columns and beams
Instruments for datum measurements ----------------- 04 Marks
1. Vertical datum- plumb line
2. Horizontal datum- spirit level
3. Alignment testing- use of tensioned wire, surveyor’s level
Geometric shape ------------------------------------------- 08 Marks
1. Straightness testing- straight edge method, spirit level method
2. Flatness testing- comparison with flat circles, use of spirit level
3. Squareness testing- engineer’s square, block square
4. Roundness measurement – Diametral, circumferential confining
gauge, rotating on centres, assessment using a V-block, roundness
measuring machine
Templates
------------------------------------------------ 12 Marks
1. The need of templates
2. Materials used for templates
3. Information given on templates
4. Use of templates
• Templates for setting out sheet metal fabrications
• Templates for hopper plates
• Box templates
• Steel templates (ordinary and bushed)
5. Templates as means of checking
6. Templates as a means of marking hole positions
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
Marks
Hours
48
28
17456 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
7. Templates as means of to provide an economical arrangement of
layout for press-work
8. Templates as a guide for cutting processes
9. Protection and storage of templates and tools
10. Comparison of methods of direct marking and use of templates
2. Straightening Methods
Mechanical straightening
1. Manual
2. Machine straightening
Thermal methods
1. Hot shrinking
2. Use of heat strips
3. Use of heat triangles
4. Principle of hot straightening for structural sections
3. Stiffening of Fabricated Material
Methods of stiffening sheet metal
Reasons for stiffening
Stiffening of large panels
1. Use of applied stiffeners
2. Use of angle stiffeners
Need for web stiffeners
4. Composite Materials in Fabrication
Introduction to composite material
Classification of composites
Composition of composites
Processing of composites
Joining of composites
Applications
5. Surface Cleaning
Introduction
Need for coating & cleaning
Methods of surface cleaning
1. Chemical method
2. Mechanical method
3. Thermal method
4. Dry method
6. Factory / Workshop Layout
Introduction
Definition of Factory layout
Importance of layout
Essentials of layout
Types of layout
Factors influencing layout
Dynamics plant layout
Examples
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
08
04
12
04
08
04
12
04
12
04
100
48
17456 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical:
Skill to be developed;
Intellectual skills
1. Ability to read job drawings.
2. Ability to identify & select proper material & tools for marking / measuring.
Motor skills
1. Ability to set work piece for measurement on measuring instruments / devices.
2. Ability to inspect the job for confirming desired dimensions and shape.
3. Ability to recognize errors from mistakes and take remedial actions.
Practicals:
1. Demonstration and use of :
 Vernier calliper,
 Micrometer screw gauge,
 Vernier height gauge,
 Vernier depth gauge,
 Feeler gauge, radius gauge & screw pitch gauge
 Slip gauges,
 Universal Bevel Protractor,
 Sine bar
 Angle gauges,
2. Study of Engineer’s rule,
3. Study of Steel rule and tape (Layout preparation)
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher & Address
1
Kadam Manish J
Metrology & Quality Control
Everest Pub. House
2
Hume K.J.
Sharp G.H.
Practical Metrology
ELBS Macdonald & company
3
R. K. Jain
Metrology
Khanna Publications
4
Kenyon W. Pitman
Basic welding and fabrication
Pitman Pub. Ltd.
5
F.J. M. Smith/
Longman
Basic fabrication and welding
Engg
Longman Craft Studies.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17456 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fabrication Technology & Erection Engineering
Course Code : FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Process Equipment
Subject Code : 17457
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
Rationale:
It is intended that the students understand facts, concepts regarding construction and
working of process equipment used in the fabrication industry.
Objectives: The students will be able to1. Learn pressure vessel terminology.
2. Study design loads on process equipments.
3. Find stresses / thickness of vessels & dished ends.
4. Study of supports.
5. Design the process equipment.
6. Study & decide the materials & welding processes used in pressure vessel construction.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17457 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedures
Alternative marking & measuring e g. Templates, weight / strength
ratio, Heat How to design different components, study their stresses
and failures
Theory & practical class
with discussion
Principles
Study of different design
loads, study of stress
analysis, stress
concentration, joint
efficiency
Concepts
Thin / thick cylinder,
structural design, press
work, process flow, joining
media selection.
Facts
Theory & practical class
with discussion
Study of compositions, properties,
advantages, disadvantages and
comparisons of different materials
used in fabrication industry with
respect to weldability.
Determine weldability of
material selected
Pressure vessels, supports, dish ends, nozzles, flanges, saddles,
bolts etc. (Refer terminology of pressure vessels), weld processes &
material selection.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17457 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Marks
Hrs.
12
08
24
16
24
16
Stress concentrations, Nozzle reinforcement, placement and shape, fatique
concentration, stresses concentration in circular and elliptical opening.
Weld Design (Theory only)
16
08
Introduction, groove welds, fillet welds, plug weld, defects in welds, NDT of
welds, stress concentration factors, welding processes, welding symbols,
welded joints, bolted joints, vessel supports and attachments, gaskets.
Construction Materials
12
06
12
10
100
64
Pressure Vessels
Introduction, types, accessories & mountings, terminology.
Design of Pressure Vessels
Introduction, design approach, design pressure design temperature, dead load,
wind load, piping load, earthquake loads, and combination of design loads,
allowable stress range, general design criterion, stresses in ring, cylinder,
sphere, poisson ratio, dilation of pressure vessels, membrane stress, thick
cylinder, thick sphere, intersecting sphere, thermal stresses, ultra high
pressure vessel , multishell construction, discontinuity stresses in vessels,
stresses in bi-metallic joints, deformation and stresses in flanges and flanged
joints, gaskets, reinforced circular plates, stacked plates and built up plates.
Membrane Stress Analysis in Various Parts of Vessels
Cylindrical shell, spherical shell, hemispherical heads, semi ellipsoidal heads,
torispherical heads, conical heads (simple problems)
Supports skirts, support legs, support lugs, anchor bolts, saddles, stiffeners.
Design for thickness; shell, dish ends, nozzles, flanges, bolt size & numbers,
dilation & ligament efficiency.
Design Construction Features
General considerations, Non corrosive service, ferrous and non ferrous
materials for corrosive service, bolting material, selection of material for
hydrogen service, aluminum alloys, stainless steels, method of attaching
protective layers.
Note: Derivation / Proof of any formula is not expected
TOTAL
Assignments:
Eight assignments based on above theory content. Details of the assignments be written
Implementation Strategies:
The subject matter will be taught as per the teaching scheme for Theory and practical. The
subject teacher will prepare and provide learning material/handout for supplementing/
complementing classroom instructions.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17457 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
References:
Books:
Author
Henry H.
Bednar
John F. Harvey
Eugene F.
Megyesy
---Joshi &
Mahajan
Edition
Year of
Publication
--
--
1st
1987
C.B.S. Pub. Delhi
--
1992
Press Vessel Handbook
Pub. Cl.
--
1992
ASME, New York
--
1980
ASME, USA
Unfired Pressure Vessels
--
1946
ASME, New York
Process Equipment
Design
--
1996
Macmillan, New Delhi.
Title
Pressure Vessel design
handbook
Theory and design of
pressure vessel
Pressure Vessel
Handbook
ASME Boiler & Pressure
Vessel Code
Boiler & Pressure Vessel
Code
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
Publisher & Address
--
17457 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Fabrication Technology & Erection Engineering
Course Code : FE/FG
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17048
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
The purpose of introducing Professional practices is to fulfill the need of students to stand in
today’s global market with knowledge and confidence. This can be achieved by arranging industrial
visits, expert lectures attitude to present them-selves, get alternative solutions and validation of the
selected alternatives, socially relevant activities, and modular courses. Professional Practices is
helpful in broadening technology base of students beyond curriculum. Model making exercises
allow students to think more creatively and innovatively and inculcating habit of working with their
own hands. Modular courses are introduced with a view of learning and acquiring higher
technology skills through industry experts and consultants from the respective fields.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1) Acquire information from different sources.
2) Prepare notes for given topics
3) Present seminar using power projection system.
4) Interact with peers to share thoughts.
5) Work in a team and develop team spirit.
Intellectual Skill:
Student will be able to1) Search information from various resources.
2) Prepare notes on selected topics.
3) Participate in group discussions.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17048 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Motor Skills:
1) Observe industrial practices during visits.
2) Prepare slides / charts for presentation in seminar.
3) Develop a model
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedures
Concepts
Facts
Gaining confidence in report writing and presentations skills in identified
contents of curriculum, apply knowledge in model making. Developing self
learning habbit.
Writing skill, expert lectures, seminars, industrial visit, material conversion
processes, brain storming technique.
Industry Institute Interaction, Team work, brain storming, information search.
Contents of identified topics, Industrial experts, models, equipments, machinery,
projection system, etc.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
17048 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Content:
Topic & Content
1. Information Search:–
Information search be made through manufacturers catalogue, Hand books, magazines
journal and websites, and submit a report on any Two Topics in a group of 3 to 4
students, report size shall not be more than 10 pages.
Following topics are suggested, any other equivalent topics may be selected.
1. Present scenario of electric power generation in Maharashtra state /India.
2. Composite materials – Types, properties & application
3. Material handling equipments commonly used in industries.
4. Advances in Automobile engines.
5. Hydraulic steering systems of Automobile.
6. Mechanisms used to produce straight-line motion.
7. Mechanisms used for generating intermittent motion.
8. Advanced surface coating techniques like chemical vapor deposition, ion
implantation, physical vapor deposition.
9. Types of cutting tools- specification, materials and applications.
10. Booking of E-Tickets for Railways/Buses/Air travel.
11. Profiles of 2 multinational companies.
12. Engine lubricants, coolants and additives
13. Power steering, power windows
14. ABS(anti lock braking systems)
15. MPFI(multi point fuel injection) system
16. Role of MIDC, MSSIDC, DIC, Financial institutions in development of
industrial sector.
17. Solar energy systems - Components and their functions, applications
18. Design data book - Study and use of types of data.
2. Lectures by professionals/Industry ExpertsTwo lectures of two hour duration be arranged on any two topics suggested below or
any other suitable topics to acquire practical information beyond scope of
curriculum.
Students shall prepare a brief report of each lecture as a part of their term work.
1. Components of project Report.
2. Various loan schemes of banks, LIC and other agencies for education and other
purposes.
3. Use of plastics & rubbers in Automobiles industries.
4. Type of processes used to protect material surfaces from environmental effect.
5. Product life cycle.
6. Industrial application of mechatronics.
7. Special features of CNC machines
8. Gear manufacturing & gear teeth finishing processes.
9. Gear boxes-industrial & Automobile applications.
10. super-finishing operation &their industrial applications.
11. processing methods for plastic components.
12. Features of modern boilers
13. Strainers and filters –Types, functions and applications
14. Industrial drives-Types, components, comparison and applications.
15. Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
3. Seminars:
One seminar be arranged on the subjects related to 4 th semester. Or topics beyond
curriculum.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
Hours
10
06
06
17048 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Each student shall submit a report up to 10 pages and deliver the seminar.
batch size - 2-3 students.
Source of information - books, magazine, Journals, Website ,surveys,
Topics suggested for guidance1. Clutches - Types, Principles, working, & applications.
2. High pressure boilers.
3. Heat exchangers - Types, working applications.
4. Hydraulic turbines -Types, working & applications.
5. Hydraulic pumps - Types, working & applications.
6. Sensors -Types, principle & applications.
7. Super conductor technology - Types, principle & applications.
8. Semi conductors- Types, materials & applications.
9. Industrial brakes- Types, construction, working & applications.
4. Industrial visits
Structured industrial visits be arranged and report of the same shall be submitted by each
student to form a part of the term work.
No of visits- At least one
Scale of industry- medium scale unit, large scale unit.
Group size- practical batch
Report-not exceeding 7 to 10 pages.
Purpose :
To study the profile of industry
To see the advanced manufacturing processes & machinery.
To observe working of CNC machines, work centres, flexible manufacturing
systems
To observe working in foundry, forging shop, press shop, heat treatment shop etc.
To observe chip less manufacturing machines & processes.
To study process sheets , quality control charts & production drawings, metallurgical
testing laboratory
To observe Tool room, standards room etc.
08
Following types of industries may be visited in & around the institute.
1. Foundry
2. Forging units
3. Sheet metal processing unit
4. Machine/ Automobile component manufacturing unit
5. Fabrication unit/ powder metallurgy component manufacturing unit.
6. Machine tool manufacturing unit.
7. Any processing industry like chemical, textile, sugar, agriculture, fertilizer
industries.
8. Auto workshop / four wheeler garage.
9. City water supply pumping station
10. Hydro electric power plant,
11. Wind mills, Solar Park
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17048 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
5. Socially Relevant Activities
Conduct any one activity through active participation of students and write the report.
Group of students- maximum 4
Report- Not more than 6 pages
List of suggested activities- (activities may be thought in terms of campus improvement)
1. Awareness about carbon credit
2. Anticorruption movement
3. Awareness about cyber crimes.
4. Developing good citizens.
5. Management of E- WASTE
6. Recycling of waste materials.
7. Accident prevention & enforcement of safely rules.
8. Awareness about pollution and pollution control.
9. (Any other relevant activity may be performed)
6. Mini Projects
Students, in a group of 4, shall perform any one activity listed below.
1. Model making out of card board paper, wood, thermocol, plastics, metal, clay
etc
a) Any new idea/principle converted into model
b) Mechanisms
c) Jigs/fixtures
d) Material handling device, etc.
2. Toy making with simple operating mechanisms
3. Layout of workshop/department/college
4. Experimental set up/testing of a parameter
5. Display board indicating different type of machine components like bearing,
fasteners, couplings, pipe fitting, valves, cams & followers, exploded views of
assemblies, type of welding equipment ,welding rods (drawings, photo graphs )
6. Any relevant project which will make students to collect information & work
with their own hands.
7. Students shall arrange exhibition of all mini projects in the class/hall and present
the task to the audience/ experts/examiners. The student shall submit a brief
report (Max. 5 pages) of the mini project.
OR
Modular course:
06
12
Modular courses on any one of the suggested or equivalent topic be undertaken by a
group of 15 to 20 students.
1. Advance features in CAD
2. Meshing of solid model using any suitable software
3. Developing Unfold Sheet or Hyperblank by using Blanking Software
4. CAM Software
5. Basics of PLC programming
6. Applications of mechatronics
7. Piping Technology
8. Modern packaging technology
9. Enterprise Resource Planning
10. Bio-pneumatic Robots
11. Bio-mimicry
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17048 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No.
01
02
03
04
05
Author
NRDC, Publication Bi
Monthly Journal
Title
Invention Intelligence
Journal
Publisher
National Research
Development Corporation,
GOI.
How things works
DK Publishing
encyclopedia
Innovation mgmt.& new
Trott
Pearson Education
product development
Basic Managerial Skills for
E.H. McGrath, S.J.
PHI
All – Ninth Edition
Apprenticeship Training Scheme:- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
DK Publishing
2. Web sites
www.engineeringforchange.org
www.wikipedia.com
www.slideshare.com
www.teachertube.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
17048 FG4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : DIPLOMA IN INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
COURSE CODE : IF
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
PATTERN : FULL TIME - SEMESTER
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies
$
Computer Hardware &
β
Maintenance
Data Communication &
Networking
Microprocessor and
β
Programming
Object Oriented Programming β
Applied Multimedia Technology
Professional Practices-II
β
TEACHING
SCHEME
Abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
TH
TU
EST
17401
01
--
CHM
17428
03
DCN
17430
03
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
PR
PAPER
HRS.
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
02
01
50#*
20
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
10
--
02
03
100
40
25#
10
--
--
[email protected]
10
--
02
03
100
40
25#
10
--
--
[email protected]
10
SW
(17400)
50
MAP
17431
OOP
AMT
PPT
17432
17041
17042
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
40
25#
10
--
--
[email protected]
10
03
-04
03
100
40
50#
20
---04
---50#
20
---03
------13
-19
-450
-175
--Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
-----
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
225
10
20
20
--
50
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 32 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 900
@- Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* - Online Examination,
β - Common to CO, CM, CD, CW
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as sessional
work (SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Concept
Environment,
Ecosystem
Fact
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Credit, Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
 Value of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Computer Engineering Group
Course Code
: CO/CD/CM/CW/IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Computer Hardware & Maintenance
Subject Code
: 17428
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The aim of the subject is to teach the basic working of the computer motherboard,
peripherals and add-on cards. The subject helps the students to do the maintenance of the
Computer, peripherals and its add-on cards. The students will be able to select the proper peripheral
as per their specification and requirement. This is the core technology subject. The pre-requisite of
the subject is Microprocessor. The subject is practical oriented and will develop the debugging
skills in the students.
Objectives:
The student will be able to:
1. Debug and repair the faults in system.
2. Assemble the system.
3. Load the operating system and device drivers in the system.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17428 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedures
Understand the architecture of PC, use different techniques to troubleshoot the
PC problems using preventive measures and repairing.
Learning
architectural
details
Principles
Logic of
components
Concepts
Motherboard, drives,
formatting, latency,
landing zone, HDD.
Facts
AT.ATX
motherboard, AGP,
PCI Port etc
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
-
Write everything down
Do the easy stuff first
Check for operator error
Check the software
Check external signals
Run diagnostic programs.
Rules of
troubleshooting
Repairing the different
Components of PC by
using different
methods.
Rules of repairing
Error codes, memory package, styles and structures,
memory signals, memory manager, disk manager EZDrive, DMI, SCSI, Video adapter etc.
Problems of system
boards, display
problems
8
Tools for repairing
the faults, types of
tests.
17428 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Sr.
No
1
2
Theory
Motherboard & Its Component
Specific Objectives
 To Understand the various components of Motherboard.
 To Know about the different memories in PC & their usage.
 To Understand the selection of different components of PC.
1.1 CPU – Concept like address lines, data lines, internal registers.
1.2 Modes of operation of CPU – Real mode, IA-32 mode, IA-32
Virtual Real Mode.
1.3 Process Technologies, Dual Independent Bus Architecture, Hyper
Threading Technologies & its requirement.
1.4 Processor socket & slots.
1.5 Chipset basic, chipset Architecture, North / South bridge & Hub
Architecture.
1.6 Latest chipset for PC
1.7 Overview & features of PCI, PCI –X, PCI express, AGP bus.
1.8 Logical memory organization conventional memory, extended
memory, expanded memory.
1.9 Overview & features of SDRAM, DDR, DDR2, DDR3.
1.10 Concept of Cache memory:
1.11 L1 Cache, L2 Cache, L3 Cache, Cache Hit & Cache Miss.
1.13 BIOS – Basics & CMOS Set Up.
1.14 Motherboard Selection Criteria.
Storage Devices & Interfacing.
Objective
 To understand the Recording techniques in storage devices.
 To understand the working of storage devices.
2.1 Recording Techniques: FM, MFM , RLL, perpendicular recording
2.2 Hard Disk construction and working.
2.3 Terms related to Hard Disk.
Track, sector, cylinder, cluster, landing zone, MBR, zone recording,
write pre-compensation.
2.4 Formatting: Low level, High level & partitioning.
2.5 FAT Basics: Introduction to file system, FAT 16, FAT 32, NTFS,
2.6 Hard Disk Interface: Features of IDE, SCSI, PATA, SATA, Cables
& Jumpers.
2.7 CD ROM Drive: Construction, recording.(Block diagram)
2.8 DVD: Construction, Recording. (Block Diagram)
2.9 Blue-ray Disc specification.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
Hrs.
Marks
12
24
08
24
17428 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
3
4
5
6
‘G’ Scheme
Display Devices & Interfacing
Objective
 To understand the construction and working of display devices
like CRT, LCD.
 To understand the Interfacing of above devices to PC.
3.1 CRT: - Block diagram & working of monochrome & colour Monitor
3.2 Characteristics of CRT Monitor :DOT Pitch, Resolution, Horizontal Scanning frequency, Vertical
scanning frequency, Interlaced Scanning, Non-Interfaced scanning,
Aspect ratio.
3.3 LCD Monitor: - Functional Block Diagram of LCD monitor,
working principle, Passive matrix, Active matrix LCD display.
3.4 Touch Screen Display – The construction and working principle
3.4 Plasma Display Technology: - Construction & working principle.
3.5 Basic Block Diagram of Video Accelerator card
Input and Output Devices
Objective
 To understand the construction and working of Input /Output
Devices.
 To understand the Interfacing of the above peripherals.
4.1 Keyboard: Types of key switches: Membrane, Mechanical, Rubber
dome, Capacitive, optoelectronic and interfacing.
4.2 Mouse: Opto-mechanical, optical ( New design)
4.3 Scanner: Flat Bed, Sheet-fed, Handheld: Block diagram of flat Bed
and specifications, OCR, TWAIN, Resolution, Interpolation.
4.4 Modem: Internal and External: Block diagram and specifications.
4.5 Printer: Printer Characteristics, Dot matrix, Inkjet, Laser: block
diagram and specifications.
Power Supplies
Objective
 To understand the working of SMPS.
 To understand the power problems.
5.1 Block diagram and working of SMPS.
5.2 Signal description and pin-out diagram of AT and ATX connectors
5.3 Power supply characteristics: Rated wattage, Efficiency, Regulation,
Ripple, Load regulation, Line regulation.
5.4 Power problems: Blackout, Brownout, surges and spikes.
5.5 Symptoms of power problems.
5.6 Protection devices: circuit breaker, surge suppressor.
5.7 Uninterrupted Power Supply, ONline and OFFline UPS, working of
UPS: Block diagram, advantages and disadvantages, Ratings
Interfaces
Objective
 To understand the ports of PC.
 To understand interfacing techniques of devices to ports
6.1 SCSI, SCSI cables and connectors, SCSI drive configuration.
6.2 USB features.
6.3 RS 232 : (Voltages and 9 pin description)
6.4 Centronics (interface diagram, important signals and timing
waveform)
6.5 Firewire features
6.6 Blue tooth
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
06
12
06
12
04
08
06
12
17428 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
7
‘G’ Scheme
PC Troubleshooting, Maintenance and Tools.
Objective
 To understand the preventive maintenance of PC
 To understand the diagnostic tools of PC
7.1 POST: POST sequence, Beep codes, visual display codes.
7.2 Preventive maintenance: Active, Passive, periodic maintenance
procedure.
7.3 Diagnostic Tools: logic Analyzer, logic probe.
7.4 Diagnostic software for trouble shooting PC.
BGA workstation and its applications for reballing of north bridge
and south bridge
Total
06
08
48
100
PRACTICAL:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
 Understanding basic hardware of computer
 Fault finding of input/output devices.
 Troubleshooting of input/output devices
 Proper connection of input/output devices.
Motor Skills:
 Proper handling of Computer System Hardware.
List of Practical:
01. Identify and draw the motherboard layout of Intel i3 processor and understand connection
and layout of the H67 or P67chipset.
02. Perform Basic Input/output System (BIOS) setting and configuration setup using
Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (CMOS).
03. Format, partition and install a Hard Disk Drive (HDD) and format a pen drive.
04. Understand layout, characteristics and functions of different components of Hard
Disk Drive (HDD) as a storage device.
05. Install Video Graphics Array (VGA) or Super Video Graphics Array (SVGA) display
cards.
06. Install and understand the working of printer.
07. Install and understand the working of Input/output devices such as scanner and modem.
08. Connect Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) and identify different parts of SMPS.
Understand the working of SMPS and Uninterrupted Power Supply (UPS).
09. Use diagnostic software to identify installed computer peripherals and test their working
condition.
10. Find faults related to Monitor, CPU, Hard disk, Printer and other peripherals.
11. Form a pico net using Bluetooth devices and transfer data.
12. Assemble PC and install an operating system.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17428 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Scott Muller
Upgrading & Repairing PCs
Pearson
02
Mark Minasi
The Complete PC Upgrade &
Maintenance guide
Wiley India
03
Barry Press and
Maricia Press
PC Upgrade and Repair
Wiley India
04
Begelow
Bigelow’s Troubleshooting,
Maintaining & Repairing PCs
Tata McGraw Hill
05
Mike Meyers Scott
Jernigan
Managing & Troubleshooting PCs
Tata McGraw Hill
06
D.Balasubramanian
Computer Installation & Servicing
Tata McGraw Hill
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17428 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Diploma in Information Technology
Course Code
: IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Data Communication & Networking
Subject Code
: 17430
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The world in the information era has become network centric. A Computer networks has
been growing with rapid technological progress. Computer communication through networking
becomes essential part of our life. We can manage many application like Air Line Reservation,
Railway Reservation, E-banking, E-Governance, On-Line shopping, E-learning etc. by clicking
mouse button from our own place. Because of this, world become the global village. By
considering importance of networking towards all aspects of our life, we here introduce basic
concept of networks, network classification, network topologies, network devices, Transmission
media, Network reference models, concept of TCP/IP.
This knowledge explores the student for understanding current network management
technology.
Objectives:
To develop following skills:
Intellectual Skills:
 Understand network & can identifying benefits of networks.
 Understand and describe communication media.
 Compare different types of Topology.
 Compare different types of network devices.
 Compare OSI and TCP/IP protocol suite.
 Configuration of TCP/IP
Motor Skills:
1. Able to handle Computer Network.
2. To develop a small Computer Network.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17430 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Procedure
Apply the basic principle of computer network in the
application for network management, network
troubleshooting, etc.
Follow step by step procedure to install TCP/IP Protocols
and TCP / IP configuration.
Principle of TCP/IP reference model
Principle
Principle of OSI reference model, Principles of
Data Communications
Concepts
Fact
Types of
Topology
Types of Network
Devices
Types of
Transmission
Media
Computer
Network and
Benefits
Classification of
Network
Network
Features
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
17430 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Chapter
Name of the Topic
Hours
Marks
10
20
12
22
10
22
Introduction to Data Communication and Networking
Objectives: Understand Basic Concept of Data Communication
 Understand Analog and Digital Transmission Methods.
 Differentiate between Baud rate and Bit rate.
01
02
03
1.1 Introduction, Fundamental Concepts, Data Communication,
protocols, Standards, Standard organizations, Bandwidth and Data
Transmission Rate.
1.2 Analog Signal, Analog Transmission, Digital Signal ,Digital
Transmission, Digital Signal Analog Transmission, Baud Rate and
Bits per second
1.3 Modes of Data Transmission and Multiplexing, Parallel and Serial
Communication, Asynchronous, Synchronous and Isochronous
Communication, Simplex, Half-Duplex, Full Duplex,
Multiplexing and Demultiplexing, Types of Multiplexing: TDM,
FDM , TDM Vs FDM
Transmission Errors: Detection and Correction, Transmission
Media and Network Topologies
Objectives: Understand Errors and Error Correction
 Understand Types of Medias.
 Understand various Network Topologies and Network Control
Devices
2.1 Introduction, Error Classification, Types of Errors and Error
Detection
2.2 Types of Transmission Media- 1) Guided Media: Cable
Characteristics, Types of Cable-Twisted Pair Cable, Co-axial
Cable, Fiber Optic Cable. 2) Unguided media: Types of
Communication Band-Microwave Communication, Radio wave
Communication, Satellite Communication, Infrared
Communication.
2.3 Introduction IEEE Standards for LAN,MAN and WAN 802.1,
802.2, 802.3, 802.4, 802.5, 802.11
2.4 Latest Technologies in Wireless Network-Bluetooth Architecture,
Wi-Fi, Wi- Max
2.5 Cellular (Mobile) Telephone - Band in Cellular Telephony, Calls
using Mobile Phones, Transmitting receiving / Handoff operations
2.6 Network Topologies, Switching: Packet , Circuit
2.7 Introduction Star, Ring, Tree, Bus, Mesh, Hybrid, Basics of
Switching, Router.
OSI Model, LAN,WAN,MAN, MAC Sublayer
Objectives: Understand OSI Model
 Understand LAN/WAN/MAN
3.1 Introduction– Layered Architecture , Peer-to- Peer ProcessesInterfaces between Layer, Protocols, Organization of the Layers,
Encapsulation.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
17430 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
04
05
‘G’ Scheme
3.2 Layers of the OSI Reference Model (Functions of each Layer &
Protocols used) – Physical Layer, Data-Link Layer, Network
Layer, Transport Layer, Session Layer, Presentation Layer,
Application Layer.
3.3 LAN, Ethernet, Virtual LAN, Fast and Gigabit Ethernet, Token
Ring, FDDI, Comparison of Ethernet,Token Ring FDDI, MAN,
Distributed Queue Dual Bus, SMDS, WAN and its architecture,
WAN transmission Mechanism, WAN Addressing.
Internetworking Concepts, Devices, Internet Basics , History And
Architecture
Objectives: Understand Internetworking and Issues
 Understand Internetworking Issues
 Understand the concept of ISP
4.1 Introduction–Why Internetworking, Problems in
Internetworking, Dealing with Incompatibility, Vistual Network,
Internetworking Devices, Repeaters, Bridges, Routers, Gateways
4.2 Brief History of Internet, Growth of Internet, Internet Topology,
Internal Architecture of ISP.
4.3 Ways of Accessing the Internet : Introduction, Dial Up access
for an Individual User, Leased Lines, DSL and Cable Modems
TCP/IP, ARP, RARP and ICMP, TCP vs UDP , DNS, Email , FTP
5.1 Introduction, TCP/IP Basics, Why IP addresses, Logical
Addresses, Concept of IP Address and IP datagram Packet, ARP,
RARP, ICMP, Data Fragmentation and Reassembly, Comparison
of OSI and TCP/IP Protocol Suites.
5.2 TCP and UDP :Introduction, TCP Basics, Features of TCP,
Relationship between TCP and IP, Ports and Sockets,
Connections, TCP Connections, Packet Format, Persistent TCP
Connection, UDP and UDP Packet .
5.3 Introduction DNS, TCP,FTP TFTP
Total
08
18
08
18
48
100
List of Practical:
Sr.
No.
Title of Experiment
No. of Hours
1
To observe Components of Network in your Computer Network Lab.
02
2
To understand Transmission Media and Network Control devices.
04
3
4
To Prepare a Straight Cable and Network Cross over Cable and test by
Line Tester.
To Connect Computers in Star Topology using Wired Media and any
Network control Device.
04
02
5
To Install Network Interface Card to locate MAC address of Computer.
02
6
To Configure Peer-to-Peer Network.
02
7
To Share Printer and Folder in Network.
04
8
To Install TCP/IP Protocols (version 4 and /version 6) and configure
advanced TCP/IP Protocols. Install Wireshark software and configure as a
04
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
17430 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
packet sniffer.
9
10
To Run Basic TCP/IP Utilities and Networking commands with all options
(Ping,Ping ::1, ipconfig, Tracert, Netstat, Wireshark, ARP,
NBTSTAT.EXE, WINIPCFG.EXE),
Capture TCP, UDP, IP, ARP, ICMP, Telnet, FTP packets using Wireshark
packet sniffer software and verify header fields.
04
04
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr. No.
1
2
Title
Data Communications and
Networks
Data Communications and
Networking (Forth Edition)
Author
Publisher
Achyut S. Godbole
Tata McGraw Hill
Behrouz A. Forouzan
Tata McGraw Hill
3
Complete Reference Networking
Craig Zacker
Tata McGraw Hill
4
Computer Networking
Tularam M Bansod
Dreamtech, Wiley
5
Networking + Certification
(Second Edition)
Microsoft Press
PHI(Prentice-Hall of India
Private Limited)
6
Computer Network by
Andrew S. Tanenbaum
Pearson
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17430 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Computer Engineering Group
Course Code : CO/CD/CM/CW/IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Microprocessor and Programming
Subject Code : 17431
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Microprocessor is brain of computer. Intel family is widely used all over the world. 8085 is
the 8-bit CPU and 8086 is the 16-bit CPU. 8086 is the base of all upward developed processors. It
is more powerful and efficient computing machine. It overcomes all major limitations of the
previous processors. It is able to get interfaced with 8-bit, 16-bit systems. IBM PC is introduced in
1980 with 10MB hard disk, one double side double density floppy disk drive, KBD, monitor and
asynchronous communications adapter.
This subject covers Basics of 8085, architecture of 8086 along instruction set. It also covers
assembly language programming with effective use of procedure and macros. This will act as base
for the advanced assembly language programming for next generation microprocessors.
General objectives:
Students will be able to:
1. Understand the execution of instructions in pipelining and address generation.
2. Write syntax of given instructions.
3. Apply instructions in Assembly Language Program for different problem statements.
4. Use the procedures and macros in assembly language programming.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17431 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedures
Principles
Concepts
Facts
Enable students to design 8086 based Assembly Language Programs and
efficient Assembly Language Program using procedures and macros.
8086
Microprocessor
Operations
Coding, assembling,
syntax error removal
Principle of writing
Statements
Principle of
digital design
Hardware
Debugging, logical
error removal,
execution of program
Assembler, Linker,
Debugger, Editor
Addressing modes
Software instruction
syntax rules, logic
development
Microprocessor, Signals, Registers, Buses, Stack, Memory
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17431 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory
Name of Topics
Topic 1: Basics of Microprocessor
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Draw the architecture of 8085
 Define the functions of different pins of 8085
 Identify status of different flags
1.1 Evolution of Microprocessor and types
1.2 8085 Microprocessor,
 Salient features
 Pin description,
 Architecture of 8085 - Functional Block diagram,
 Register organization,
Topic 2 :16 Bit Microprocessor: 8086
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Define the functions of different pins
 Draw functional block diagram of 8086
 Understand the operating modes of 8086
2.1 8086 Microprocessor,
 Salient features
 Pin descriptions
 Architecture of 8086 - Functional Block diagram
 Register organization,
 Concepts of pipelining,
 Memory segmentation
 Physical memory addresses generation.
2.2 Operating Modes of 8086
 8284 Clock Generator
 8288 Bus Controller
 74LS245 Bi-directional Buffer
 74LS373 Octal Latch
 Minimum Mode operation and its timing diagram
 Maximum Mode operation and its timing diagram
Topic 3 : Instruction Set of 8086 Microprocessor
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Understand the different types of instructions
 Identify the addressing modes of instructions
 State the operation of an instructions
3.1 Machine Language Instruction format,
addressing modes
3.2 Instruction set, Groups of Instructions
 Arithmetic Instructions
 Logical Instructions
 Data transfer instructions
 Bit manipulation instructions
 String Operation Instructions,
 Program control transfer or branching Instructions
 Process control Instructions
Topic 4 :The Art of Assembly Language Programming
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
Hours Marks
04
08
12
24
10
20
04
08
17431 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Know the program development steps
 Use the different program development tools
 Illustrate the functions of assembler directive and operators
4.1 Program development steps
 Defining problem,
 Writing Algorithms
 Flowchart
 Initialization checklist
 Choosing instructions
 Converting algorithms to assembly language programs.
4.2 Assembly Language Programming Tools
 Editors
 Assembler
 Linker
 Debugger.
4.3 Assembler directives and Operators
Topic 5: 8086 Assembly Language Programming.
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Write a appropriate programs using editor
 Run program using assembler and linker
 Debug program using debugger
5.1 Model of 8086 assembly language programs
5.2 Programming using assembler  Arithmetic operations on Hex and BCD numbers - Addition,
Subtraction, Multiplication and Division
 Sum of Series
 Smallest and Largest numbers from array
 Sorting numbers in Ascending and Descending order
 Finding ODD/EVEN numbers in the array
 Finding Positive and Negative Numbers in array
 Block transfer
 String Operations - Length, Reverse, Compare, Concatenation, Copy
 Count Numbers of ‘1’ and ‘0’ in 8/16 bit number
 BCD to Hex and Hex to BCD number conversion
Topic 6 : Procedure and Macro in Assembly Language Program
Specific Objective: Students will be able to
 Understand the purpose of procedure and macros
 Use procedure and macros
6.1 Procedure
 Defining Procedure - Directives used, FAR and NEAR
 CALL and RET instructions.
 Reentrant and Recursive procedures.
 Assembly Language Programs using Procedure
6.2 Defining Macros.
 Assembly Language Programs using Macros.
Total
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
12
24
06
16
48
100
17431 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual skills:
 Use of programming language constructs in program implementation.
 To be able to apply different logics to solve given problem.
 To be able to write program using different implementations for the same problem
 Study different types of errors as syntax semantic, fatal, linker & logical
 Debugging of programs
 Understanding different steps to develop program such as
 Problem definition
 Analysis
 Design of logic
 Coding
 Testing
 Maintenance (Modifications, error corrections, making changes etc.)
Motor skills:
 Proper handling of Computer System.
Practicals:
List of Practical:
1. Identify the Assembly Language programming tools like Assembler, linker, debugger,
editor.
2. Write an Assembly Language Program to add / subtract two 16 bit numbers.
3. Write an ALP to find sum of series of numbers.
4. Write an ALP to multiply two 16 bit unsigned/ signed numbers.
5. Write an ALP to divide two unsigned/ signed numbers (32/16 , 16/8, 16/16, 8/8 )
6. Write an ALP to add / Sub / multiply / Divide two BCD numbers.
7. Write an ALP to find smallest/ largest number from array of n numbers.
8. Write an ALP to arrange numbers in array in ascending/ descending order.
9. Write an ALP to perform block transfer data using string instructions / without using string
instructions.
10. Write an ALP to compare two strings using string instructions / without using string
instructions.
11. Write an ALP to display string in reverse order, string length, Concatenation of two strings.
12. Write an ALP to convert Hex to Decimal, Decimal to Hex.
Learning Resources
1. Books
Sr.
No.
1.
Name of Book
Microprocessor & interfacing
(programming & hardware)
Revised Second Edition
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Author
Douglas V. Hall
22
Publication
Tata McGraw Hill
17431 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
2.
Microprocessor Architecture,
Programming and Applications with
the 8085
Ramesh S. Gaonkar
Penram International
Publishing (India)
3.
The 8088 and 8086 Microprocessors
Walter A. Triebel, Avtar
Singh
Pearson Publications
4.
The 8086.8088 Family, Design,
Programming, and Interfacing
John Uffenback
PHI
2. Websites:
www.intel.com
www.pcguide.com/ref/CPU
www.CPU-World.com/Arch/
www.techsource .com / engineering- parts/microprocessor.html
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17431 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Computer Engineering Group
Course Code
: CO/CD/CM/CW/IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Object Oriented Programming
Subject Code
: 17432
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
04
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The ability to organize & process information is key to success in modern age. Object
Oriented Programming has become the most preferred approach for software projects. It offers a
new and powerful way to cope up with complexity of real world problems. Among the OOP
languages available, C++ is one of the most widely used language.
Instead of viewing program as a series of steps to be carried out, OOP approach views it as
a group of objects that have certain properties & can take appropriate actions.
Object Oriented Concepts like inheritance, polymorphism, data abstraction and
encapsulation etc. requires knowledge of C++, which also acting as base for programming
languages like Java, Object Oriented Modeling & Designing (OOMD), VC++.
Objectives:
To develop following skills:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Understand the concepts of OOP.
2. Implement programs based on OOP concepts.
3. Understand basic fundamentals of C++.
4. Develop small software applications using C++.
Motor Skills:
1. Proper Handling of Computer System.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
24
17432 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Develop any Software Application using C++
Application
Procedures
Concepts
Facts
Coding
OOP Features
Debugging
(Error Removing)
Execution of
Program
Syntax Rules
Semantics Rules
Logic
Development
Operators, Keywords, Input Expressions, Output Expressions
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17432 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic
No
1
2
3
4
5
Contents
Principles of Object Oriented Programming
Objectives:
 State OOP’s basic Concepts.
 Difference between OOP & POP.
 C++ Programming structure.
1.1 Its need & requirement, Procedure Oriented Programming (POP)
verses Object Oriented Programming (OOP), Basic concepts of
Object Oriented Programming, Object Oriented Languages,
Applications of OOP.
1.2 Beginning with C++: What is C++? , keywords, variables,
constants basic data types, operators, scope resolution operator,
memory management operators, console input/output, structure of
C++ program.
Classes & Objects:
Objectives:
 Defining classes & objects.
 Declaring & using static data member & static member
function, friend function.
 Programs based on classes & objects.
2.1 Structures in C++.
2.2 Class & Object: Introduction, specifying a class, access specifies,
defining member functions, creating Objects, memory allocations
for objects.
2.3 Array of Objects, Object as function arguments.
2.4 Static data members, static member function, friend Function
Constructors & Destructors
Objectives:
 State Concepts of constructor & destructor, types of
constructor.
 Programs based on constructor & destructors
3.1 Concepts of Constructors, Types of constructors:
Default, Parameterized, Copy.
3.2 Overloaded Constructors :Multiple Constructors in a Class,
Constructors with default arguments.
3.3 Destructors.
Inheritance: Concept of Reusability
Objectives:
 Concept of Inheritance & its types.
 Types of Visibility modes.
 Programs based on Inheritance.
4.1 Introduction, defining a derived class, visibility modes & effects.
4.2 Types of Inheritance : Single, multilevel, multiple,
hierarchical, hybrid
4.3 Virtual base class, abstract class, constructors in derived class.
Pointers in C++
Objectives:
 Declare Pointer & Pointer arithmetic.
 Pointer to Arrays, string & Object.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
Hours Marks
06
12
08
20
08
14
08
20
10
18
17432 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
6
‘G’ Scheme
 “this” pointer concept.
5.1 Concepts of Pointer: Pointer declaration, Pointer operator,
address operator, Pointer arithmetic.
5.2 Pointer to Array: Searching, Insertion, deletion
5.3 Pointer to String: Searching, finding length, comparisons,
concatenation, reverse
5.4 Pointer to Object: Pointer to Object, this pointer, Pointer to
derived class.
Polymorphism
Objectives:
 Polymorphism concept & its types.
 Program for overloading operators & functions.
6.1 Introduction, Types of polymorphism: Compile time, Run time
6.2 Compile time Polymorphism: Function overloading, operator
overloading: Overloading unary and binary operators, Rules for
operator overloading.
6.3 Run time polymorphism: Virtual functions, rules for virtual
functions, pure virtual function.
Total
08
16
48
100
List of Practical:
Sr. No.
Title of Experiment
1
Write a program to Input & Output data for exchanging values of two variables.
2
Develop a program to declare a class ‘person’ having data members name, age & salary.
Accept and display this data for one object.
3
Write a program to declare a class ‘employee’ having data members name and age.
Accept and display the data for three objects.
4
Write a program to show how static member is shared by multiple objects of the same
class.
5
Develop a program to find out the mean value of a given number using friend function.
6
Develop a program to print student details of ‘stud’ class using constructor and
destructor
7
Write a program to find prime number using default argument in constructor
8
Write a program to find out the payroll system using single level inheritance.
9
A. Write a program to find student details using multiple inheritance.
B. Write a program to compute total marks of student using virtual base class.
10
Write a program to evaluate the largest number of an array using pointer
11
Write a program to search a character in a string using pointer.
12
Write a program to input and display code and price for two items using pointer to
object.
13
Write a program to display roll_no and name of student using ‘this’ pointer.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17432 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
14
Write a program to using function overloading to calculate volume of cube, cylinder &
rectangular box
15
Write a program to overload unary ‘--‘ operator
16
Write a program to display the output using the virtual function.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
Title
Publisher
1
E. Balagurusamy
Object oriented Programming with C++
Mc Graw Hill
2
Rajesh K. Shukla
Object oriented Programming in C++
Wiley India
3
B. M. Harwani
C++ for Beginners
SPD
4
Robert Lafore
Object Oriented Programming in C++ (4th
edition)
Pearson
2. CDs, PPTs Etc.:
www.vikaspublishing.com/teachermanual.aspx (PPTs available)
www.pearsoned.co.in/prc (After Registration resources are available)
3. Websites:
www.cplusplus.com
www.learncpp.com
www.sourcecodesworld.com
www.softeam.com
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
17432 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Diploma in Information Technology
Course Code : IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Applied Multimedia Technology
Subject Code : 17041
Teaching and Examination Scheme
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
04
--
--
50#
--
[email protected]
100
Rationale:
Technology moves on a tremendous pace. In modern society, multimedia technology deals
with developments in communication, internet, hardware technologies and tools.
The contents of this subject portray the present and future developments in the area of multimedia.
It is a practical oriented subject which provides the students an insight into various fonts,
basic shapes, images, audio formats, video formats, animation controls and tools.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to
 To know multimedia fundamentals and multimedia architecture.
 To understand need of data compression and various compression techniques.
 To know concepts of text, image, audio, video and animation
 To use multimedia tool-Flash, Adobe, Dreamweaver
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
17041 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
‘G’ Scheme
30
17041 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Development of animated multimedia object to create movie
Procedure
Tools & Control audio & video for animation & multimedia
Principle
File formats RIFF, DCT, TIFF, RTF
Fonts & Alignment
Colors
Coloring & Editing
Image
Synchronisation,
Compression &
Compression
Text
Image
Modulation of
Audio - Video
Concepts
Facts
Alphabets
Numbers
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Symbols
Pixels, Basic,
Shapes
31
Audio - Video
17041 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Content:
Note: Contents of theory should be taught in practical period with the help of LCD projector.
Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Activity
Introduction to Flash
 Introduction to Multimedia tool – Flash
 Creating & Modifying elements
 Line tool, fill/attributes, different shapes, text tools & pen tool
Activity:
Selecting lines fill with arrow tool, selecting shapes, using lasso tool
performing basic editing tools, selecting & deselecting elements,
modifying created objects.
Dream weaver and Firework
Activity:
 To set up website in Dreamweaver.
 To create content using Microsoft Word.
 To copy content from Word and paste in web page.
 To create CSS DIV to hold navigation index.
 To create page navigation index.
 To link page index to page content using anchors.
Theory: compression and Decompression
 Need , Types , Evaluating & Visibility
 Evaluating the Compression System, Types of compression ,
 Need of Data Compression
 Color Gray Scale and Still Video Image
 Color Characteristics
 Color Model
Activity:
Find answers through software and try to incorporate in the practicals
 How much Compression require?
 How Good is Picture,
 How fast Does it Compress or Decompress,
 What is effect of hardware on the multimedia application development?
 Does it take, Redundancy & Usability in consideration?
Theory: Jpeg Architecture. Formats
Activity:
Use theory concepts in the practicals
Theory:
Mpeg architecture and File format
 MPEG-objectives, Architecture, BIT stream syntax performance
 MPEG2 & MPEG4
Theory:
Revision of Basic tag , Cascaded , Inline and Embedded style , Javascript for
Client side validation like Blank check , String check for name, Numeric check
for telephone number , validate email address , date of birth
Activity:
Construction of website using text , picture/Graphics / Audio /Video using
flash, HTML, DHMTL, CSS, Scripts
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
32
Hours
04
03
03
02
02
02
17041 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Intellectual skills:
 To create and edit images using image editing software
 To create animation, build and play movie
 To integrate Audio and Video
 To integrate Multimedia in web page
Motor Skills:
Proper handling of computer system with multimedia system
List of Practical:
Sr. No
Name Practical
Hours
1
Design an Advertisement in Flash
2
2
Implement C/VB program to Read BMP , Jpeg , GIF image and display
Write program for Small Website college, Mall, School , Theatre etc. which
include basic components
Create multimedia database for student ID card preparation ie. storage image
in data base
Edit the sample movie clip using Adobe premiere software
Design a game/application in flash
Implement Calculator and Media Player with voice control:
Button, Label ,Text box control of VB, How use OCX control in VB ,
Mediaplayer, DirectSS and Direct SR component of VB.
Implement C/VB program to Display color, height, width, resolution ,and
other such tag value of Different image formats
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Learning Resources:
Sr. No.
Author
1
Chris Grover
Ze-Nian Li, Mark S.
2
Drew
3
David sawyer
2
2
2
2
2
2
Title
Flash CS6: The Missing Manual
Publisher
Shroff Publisher
Fundamentals of Multimedia
PHI
Dreamweaver CS6:The Missing Manual
Shroff Publisher
Weblinks:
1) www.mediacollege.com/adobe/premiere/pro/
2) www.echoecho.com/flash.htm
Equipment List/ Tools:Hardware Tools:1) Computer System (Pentium-IV or Higher Version).
2) LCD Projector.
Software Tool:-1) Flash
2) Dreamweaver
3) Adobe Premiere (video editing software)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17041 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Computer Engineering Group
Course Code : CO/CD/CM/CW/IF
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Professional Practices-II
Subject Code : 17042
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
--
--
03
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
50
Rationale:
Our world is witnessing a measure change in communication pattern with expansion of
industrial sphere, as industries demanding more competitive and challenging students.
To create multicultural working professionals, student must have positive attitude,
confidence, and ability to communicate in addition to basic technological skill.
The purpose of introducing professional practices is to provide opportunity to diploma
holder to undergo activities which will enable them to develop confidence. The semester is planned
with expert lectures, seminar on technical topics and soft skills, group discussion along with mini
project.
Objectives:
Intellectual Skills:
Students should be able to:
1. Acquire the knowledge from different resources.
2. Present a given topic effectively in a seminar and build a stage-daring.
3. Interact with colleague through group discussion.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17042 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To manage and present information effectively, build stage daring, working
with team members and execute project successfully.
Procedure
Search information
on internet, journals,
and books
Use of power point for
presentation, observing
group discussion
Identify guest lectures
from industry,
professional consultancy
Principle
Use of appropriate
styles, key word
phrases
Group formation,
mechanism, time
allocation techniques
Principles of coding,
use of GUI, menus and
login controls
Initiating
communication,
leadership
Converting ideas into
output, modeling,
designing
Concept
Fact
Organizing data,
report
Information, Seminar, Group Discussion, Project and Guest Lecture.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
35
17042 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
Activity
1
2
3
4
Name of Activity
Lectures by professional, industrial experts to be organized from
following or any other suitable technical areas.
[Any two]: 1. Advanced technical writing skill
2. SAP modules and career.
3. Career trends in computer / IT field
4. Intelligent computer system.
5. Advanced trends in hardware technology.
6. Advanced programming languages in IT field.
7. Introduction to Apprenticeship Training Scheme
Information search: Form group of 6 students. Information should be collected from
internet, news papers, journals, book etc.
Each student should submit write-up about 8-10 pages from following
allocated topic or any other suitable topic suggested by teacher.
1. Human machine interface
2. Dynamic languages
3. Robotic surgery
4. Virtual keyboard
5. Wireless USB
6. Concept of cloud computing
7. Bubble sensing
8. Blu – ray disc
9. Or any other suitable topic
Seminar: Form a group of 6 students and deliver seminar on any one of the
following technical topic or any other suitable subject topic suggested by
teacher for 10 minutes. seminar should be presented in power point
presentation. Students should draw notes about 8-10 pages on respected
topic.
1. Trouble shooting methods for various computer peripherals.
2. Viruses / antivirus and firewalls [checkpoints]
3. Protocols suits: - SLIP and PPP, ARP, IP- V6, ICMP-V6, TCP &
UDP [each protocol may be separate topic].
4. Stream classes in C++.
5. Exception handling in C++.
6. Pointers in C++.
7. Interrupts useful for microprocessor programming.
8. Or any other suitable topic.
Group discussion: Form a group of 6 students. Teacher should allocate a topic from the
following list or any other suggested topic and do the group discussion
for 10 minutes.
1. Is china a threat to the Indian software industry?
2. Education is only business in these days.
3. Is male and female equal in all aspects?
4. Opinion about reservation in education sector.
5. Boom in retail sector?
6. Whether software is dominant over hardware or vice-versa?
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
36
Hours
17042 IF4
04
06
16
12
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
‘G’ Scheme
7. Or any other topic.
Mini projects / activities: Form a group of 6 students. Teacher should allocate a topic for mini
project from the following topics or any other suggest topic and develop
the mini project.
1. Web site development system.
2. Database management system project
3. Animation project using C and C++.
4. System project using front end and back end.
5. Game designing.
6. Assembly of computer system and installation of application
software.
TOTAL
10
48
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Title
Fourth semester subjects reference books
Journals and magazines – IEEE Journals, IT technologies.
Local news papers and events
Apprenticeship Training Scheme :- Compiled By – BOAT (Western Region), Mumbai,
Available on MSBTE Web Site.
2. Websites:
1. http://www.wikipedia.com
2. http://www.seminarforyou.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
37
17042 IF4
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CH/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG
Industrial Training (Optional) after 4th semester examination.
Note:- Examination in Professional Practices of 5th Semester.
INDUSTRIAL TRAINING (OPTIONAL)
Rational:There was a common suggestion from the industry as well as other stakeholders that curriculum of
Engineering and Technology courses should have Industrial training as part of the curriculum.
When this issue of industrial training was discussed it was found that it will be difficult to make
industrial training compulsory for all students of all courses as it will be difficult to find placement
for all the students. It is therefore now proposed that this training can be included in the curriculum
as optional training for student who is willing to undertake such training on their own. The
institutes will help them in getting placement or also providing them requisite documents which the
student may need to get the placement.
Details:- Student can undergo training in related industries as guided by subject teachers / HOD.

The training will be for four weeks duration in the summer vacation after the fourth
semester examination is over.

The student undergoing such training will have to submit a report of the training duly
certified by the competent authority from the industry clearly indicating the achievements of
the student during training. This submission is to be made after joining the institute for Fifth
semester.

The student completing this training will have to deliver a seminar on the training activities
based on the report in the subject Professional Practices at Fifth Semester.

The student undergoing this training will be exempted from attending activities under
Professional Practices at Fifth semester except the seminar.

The students who will not undergo such training will have to attend Professional Practices
Classes/activities of fifth semester and will have to complete the tasks given during the
semester under this head.

There work will be evaluated on their submissions as per requirement and will be given
marks out of 50. Or student may have to give seminar on training in Industry he attended.

Institute shall encourage and guide students for Industry training.

Evaluation:- Report of Training attended and delivery of seminar and actual experience in
Industry will be evaluated in fifth semester under Profession Practices-III and marks will be
given accordingly out of 50.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
38
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
MAHARASHTRA STATE BOARD OF TECHNICAL EDUCATION, MUMBAI
TEACHING AND EXAMINATION SCHEME FOR POST S.S.C. DIPLOMA COURSES
COURSE NAME : INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, INSTRUMENTATION, INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL AND INDUSTRIAL
ELECTRONICS ( SANDWICH PATTERN) ENGINEERING GROUP
COURSE CODE : IE/IS/IC/IU
DURATION OF COURSE : 6 SEMESTERS for IE/IS/IC and 8 SEMESTERS for IU
WITH EFFECT FROM 2012-13
SEMESTER : FOURTH
DURATION : 16 WEEKS
FULL TIME / PART TIME : FULL TIME
SCHEME : G
SR.
NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SUBJECT TITLE
Environmental Studies
$
Industrial Measurements β
Power Electronics
Linear Integrated Circuits β
Principles of Communication
Systems
Visual Basic
β
Professional Practices-II β
Abbrevi
ation
SUB
CODE
TEACHING
SCHEME
EXAMINATION SCHEME
TH (1)
PR (4)
OR (8)
TW (9)
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS.
--
01
03
03
03
50#*
100
100
100
20
40
40
40
--25#
50#
--10
20
-----
-----
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
[email protected]
10
10
10
10
03
100
40
25#
10
--
--
[email protected]
10
01
02
--------03
------15
-15
-450
-100
--Examination in 5th Semester Professional Practices-III
----
[email protected]
[email protected]
200
10
20
--
EST
IME
PEL
LIC
17401
17434
17444
17445
01
03
03
04
--
02
02
02
02
PCS
17472
03
--
02
VBA
PPT
17043
17044
TOTAL
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
Max
Min
SW
(17400)
50
50
** Industrial Training (Optional)
Student Contact Hours Per Week: 30 Hrs.
THEORY AND PRACTICAL PERIODS OF 60 MINUTES EACH.
Total Marks : 800
@- Internal Assessment, # - External Assessment,
No Theory Examination, $ - Common to all branches, #* - Online Theory Examination, β Common to DE / EV / MU
Abbreviations: TH-Theory, TU- Tutorial, PR-Practical, OR-Oral, TW- Term Work, SW- Sessional Work.
** Industrial Training (Optional) - Student can undergo Industrial Training of four weeks after fourth semester examination during summer vacation.
Assessment will be done in Fifth semester under Professional Practices-III. They will be exempted from activities of Professional Practices-III of 5th Semester.
 Conduct two class tests each of 25 marks for each theory subject. Sum of the total test marks of all subjects is to be converted out of 50 marks as sessional work
(SW).
 Progressive evaluation is to be done by subject teacher as per the prevailing curriculum implementation and assessment norms.
 Code number for TH, PR, OR and TW are to be given as suffix 1, 4, 8, 9 respectively to the subject code.
MSBTE – Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
1
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : All Branches of Diploma in Engineering & Technology
Course Code : AE/CE/CM/CO/CR/CS/CW/DE/EE/EP/IF/EJ/EN/ET/EV/EX/IC/IE/IS/
ME/MU/PG/PT/PS/CD/CV/ED/EI/FE/IU/MH/MI/DC/TC/TX/FG/AU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Environmental Studies
Subject Code : 17401
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
01
50#*
--
--
[email protected]
75
#* Online Theory Examination
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Environment essentially comprises of our living ambience, which gives us the zest and
verve in all our activities. The turn of the twentieth century saw the gradual onset of its degradation
by our callous deeds without any concern for the well being of our surrounding we are today facing
a grave environmental crisis. The unceasing industrial growth and economic development of the
last 300 years or so have resulted in huge ecological problems such as overexploitation of natural
resources, degraded land, disappearing forests, endangered species, dangerous toxins, global
warming etc.
It is therefore necessary to study environmental issues to realize how human activities affect
the environment and what could be possible remedies or precautions which need to be taken to
protect the environment.
The curriculum covers the aspects about environment such as Environment and Ecology,
Environmental impacts on human activities, Water resources and water quality, Mineral resources
and mining, Forests, etc.
General Objectives: The student will be able to,
1. Understand importance of environment
2. Know key issues about environment
3. Understands the reasons for environment degradation
4. Know aspects about improvement methods
5. Know initiatives taken by the world bodies to restrict and reduce degradation
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
2
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Awareness amongst the society, about Environmental aspects,
pollution control, conservation of resources and biodiversity. Concept
of Carbon credit and its importance
Procedure
Methods to find
component of
force and
resultant of
forces
Principles
Principle of
Ecosystem,
Concept
Fact
Environment,
Ecosystem
Natural
resources such
as Forest,
Water, Food,
Energy
Conservation of
Natural Resources,
Classification
Natural
Resources
Sources,
effects,
prevention
Classificati
on of
pollution
Pollution,
Pollution
Control
Threats,
Conservation
Conservation of
biodiversity
Biodiversity
Natural Resources, Biodiversity, Environmental Pollution, Carbon
Credit, Ecosystem
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
3
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic and Contents
Topic 1: Nature of Environmental Studies
Specific Objectives:
 Define the terms related to Environmental Studies
 State importance of awareness about environment in general public
Contents:
 Definition, Scope and Importance of the environmental studies
 Importance of the studies irrespective of course
 Need for creating public awareness about environmental issues
Topic 2: Natural Resources and Associated Problems
Specific Objectives:
 Define natural resources and identify problems associated with
them
 Identify uses and their overexploitation
 Identify alternate resources and their importance for environment
Contents:
2.1 Renewable and Non renewable resources

Definition

Associated problems
2.2 Forest Resources

General description of forest resources

Functions and benefits of forest resources

Effects on environment due to deforestation, Timber
extraction, Building of dams, waterways etc.
2.3 Water Resources

Hydrosphere: Different sources of water

Use and overexploitation of surface and ground water

Effect of floods, draught, dams etc. on water resources and
community
2.4 Mineral Resources:
Hours
Marks
01
04
04
10
01
04
02
06

Categories of mineral resources

Basics of mining activities

Mine safety

Effect of mining on environment
2.5 Food Resources:

Food for all

Effects of modern agriculture

World food problem
Topic 3. Ecosystems
 Concept of Ecosystem
 Structure and functions of ecosystem
 Energy flow in ecosystem
 Major ecosystems in the world
Topic 4. Biodiversity and Its Conservation
 Definition of Biodiversity
 Levels of biodiversity
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
4
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Value of biodiversity
 Threats to biodiversity
 Conservation of biodiversity
Topic 5. Environmental Pollution
 Definition
 Air pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Water Pollution: Definition, Classification, sources, effects,
prevention
 Soil Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
 Noise Pollution: Definition, sources, effects, prevention
Topic 6. Social Issues and Environment
 Concept of development, sustainable development
 Water conservation, Watershed management, Rain water
harvesting: Definition, Methods and Benefits
 Climate Change, Global warming, Acid rain, Ozone Layer
Depletion, Nuclear Accidents and Holocaust: Basic concepts
and their effect on climate
 Concept of Carbon Credits and its advantages
Topic 7. Environmental Protection
Brief description of the following acts and their provisions:
 Environmental Protection Act
 Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act
 Wildlife Protection Act
 Forest Conservation Act
Population Growth: Aspects, importance and effect on
environment
 Human Health and Human Rights
Total
03
08
03
10
02
08
16
50
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Collection of information, data
2. Analysis of data
3. Report writing
Motor Skills:
1. Presentation Skills
2. Use of multi media
List of Projects:
Note: Any one project of the following:
1. Visit to a local area to document environmental assets such as river / forest / grassland / hill
/ mountain
2. Visit to a local polluted site: Urban/Rural/Industrial/Agricultural
3. Study of common plants, insects, birds
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
5
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
4. Study of simple ecosystems of ponds, river, hill slopes etc
Prepare a project report on the findings of the visit illustrating environment related facts,
analysis and conclusion. Also suggest remedies to improve environment.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
Anindita Basak
Environmental Studies
Pearson Education
02
R. Rajgopalan
Environmental Studies
from Crises to Cure
Oxford University Press
03
Dr. R. J. Ranjit Daniels, Dr.
Jagdish Krishnaswamy
Environmental Studies
Wiley India
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
6
17401
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: EJ/EX/ET/EN/IE/IS/IC/IU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Industrial Measurements
Subject Code
: 17434
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
--
--
[email protected]
125
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The science of instrumentation system plays vital role in the development of technology. An
electronic system has prime importance in the field of instrumentation. Most of the physical
parameters can be converted into electrical signal with the use of transducers. The obtained
electrical signal can be conditioned, processed, displayed and controlled with the use of advanced
control system.
With the background of measuring instruments, this subject deals with measurement of
different physical parameters like temperature, pressure etc. covering the entire gamut of industrial
measurement. Different types of transducers used for measurement of different physical quantities
with their construction, working principle, advantages, and disadvantages are studied through this
subject.
General Objectives:
After studying this subject the students will be able to:
1) Understand the nature and working of instrumentation system used in industrial & general
applications.
2) Classify the physical parameters with their proper units
3) Understand the concepts of different types of transducers
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
7
17434
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Measurement of Pressure, Flow, Level, Temperature,
Humidity and Speed.
Procedure
Principle
Selection of suitable transducer for measurement
of specific physical parameter
PRESSURE
Deformation, Diff.
Pressure, Resistive,
Inductive. Effect
FLOW
Variable head
Variable area
Faraday’s law,
Ultrasonic effect,
Bernoulli’s Theorem`
LEVEL
Doppler
Ultrasonic
Radiation, Air purge
effect
TEMPERATURE
First law of
Thermodynamics,
Seeback, Peltier
effect, Temp.coeff. of
Resist.
Concept
Transducers for different physical parameters
Facts
Different physical quantities such as, Pressure, Level,
Temperature, Humidity and Speed.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
8
17434
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Contents:
Topic
No
Theory
Hrs.
Marks
08
16
08
20
Transducers:
Specific Objectives:
 Draw and describe the block diagram of Instrumentation
system.
 Compare different Transducers
 Draw and describe different Electronic Transducers.
Contents

1
Instrumentation System:
Block diagram of Instrumentation system: Function of each
block, Explanation of basic instrumentation systems
 Transducer:
Need of Transducer:
Classification of transducers: Active and Passive, Analog and
Digital, Primary and Secondary.
 Electrical Transducers:
Resistive transducers- Linear & Angular potentiometers
Capacitive transducer
Inductive transducer –LVDT, RVDT ( As a displacement
transducer)
Piezoelectric transducer
(Principle of operation and applications of above)
 Selection criterion of transducers
Pressure measurement
 Draw and describe the non-elastic and elastic pressure
transducers.
 Draw and describe electronic pressure transducers.
 Write procedure of calibration of elastic pressure gauges
using dead weight tester.
Contents

2




Pressure:
Definition
Types - Absolute, Gauge, Atmospheric, Vacuum( Definition,
Units)
Classification of Pressure measuring devices
Non elastic pressure transducer:
U tube
Inclined Tube
Well type manometer
Elastic pressure transducer:
Bourdon Tube
Bellows
Diaphragm
Capsule
Electronic pressure transducers:
Bourdon tube with LVDT
Diaphragm with Strain gauge
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
9
17434
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
 Calibration of pressure gauge using dead weight tester
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Flow Measurement
 List 0f different types of flow.
 List of different types of flow measuring transducers.
 Draw and describe construction and working of different
Flow measuring transducers.
Contents
3
 Flow:
Definition
Types of Flow –Laminar, turbulent , Reynolds number
 Classification of flow measuring transducers :
Variable head flow meter- Venturimeter, orifice plate meter
Variable area flow meter – Rota meter
Electromagnetic Flow meter
Ultrasonic flow meter- Time difference and Doppler Type
06
14
08
16
10
20
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Level Measurement
 State the need of level measurement.
 List of different level measuring methods.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Level
measuring transducers.
Contents
4
 Level:
Definition
Need of level measurement
 Classification of level measurement methods:
Float type – linear & rotary potentiometer ( Contact type)
Capacitive type (Contact type)
Ultrasonic type (Non-contact type)
Radiation type (Non-contact type)
RADAR type (Non-contact type)
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Temperature measurement
 List different temperature measuring scales and its
conversions.
 List different temperature measuring transducers.
 Draw the construction and describe working of different
temperature transducers.
5
Contents
 Temperature :
Definition and units
First law of thermodynamics
Different temperature scales & their conversions
 Classification of temperature measuring transducers:
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
10
17434
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Filled system type thermometer.
Bimetallic thermometer
Thermistors
RTD – (PT-100) , 2 /3/4 wire systems ( circuit diagram only )
Thermocouple – Seeback & Peltier effect , Types J, K, R , S, T
etc. ( Based on material, temperature ranges)
Pyrometer - Optical, Radiation
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Special Transducers and Measurements
 List different types of humidity and its units.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Humidity
transducers.
 Draw the construction and describe working of Speed
measuring transducers.
Contents

6
Humidity:
Definition
Types - Absolute, relative
 Humidity measurement devices:
Psychrometer - Dry & wet Bulb thermometer type
Hygrometer- hair type , capacitive , resistive type
 Speed
Definition
Classification of speed measurement methods
Photoelectric pick-up (Non contact type)
Magnetic pick-up (Non contact type)
 pH Measurement
Note: Each transducer should be studied on the basis of working
principle, construction, advantages, disadvantages and applications.
Total
08
14
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
 Selection of transducer based on application.
 Interpretation of results.
Motor Skills:
 Connection of different transducers with measuring system.
 Measurement of various physical parameters using transducers.
 Observation and plotting the characteristics.
List of Practicals:
Sr. No.
1
Title of the Experiment
Measure displacement using LVDT
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
11
17434
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
‘G’ Scheme
Measure weight using strain gauge pressure transducer with cantilever setup
Measure pressure using Bourdon tube pressure gauge
Calibrate pressure gauge using Dead weight pressure gauge tester
Determine the rate of flow of liquid in pipe using Rotameter
Calculate flow through pipe using orifice meter
Measure temperature of liquid using Resistance Temperature Detector (PT 100)
Measure temperature of liquid using thermocouple
Observe and interpret humidity of air using wet and dry bulb Hygrometer
Measure speed of motor using non contact type photo electric tachometer.
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
Author
No.
Title
Publisher
01
A.K.Sawhney
Electrical and Electronic
Measurements and Instrumentation
Dhanpat Rai & Sons.
02
S.K.Singh
Industrial Instrumentation & Control
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
03
D. Patranabis
Principles of Industrial Instrumentation
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
Rangan Mani
Sharma
Instrumentation Systems and Devices
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi
05
Bela Liptak
Kriszta Venczel
Process Measurement
Instrument Engineers Handbook
Chilton Book Co.
06
B.C.Nakra
K.K.Chaudhry
Instrumentation Measurement and
Analysis
Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
Co. Ltd; N. Delhi.
04
2. CD/ PPTs etc.:
 www.proprofs.com/webschool
 www.osvn.com
3. Websites
 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
 www.youtube.com/ “here type name of instrument”
 www.controlnet.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
12
17434
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: ET/EN/EX/EJ/DE/ED/EI/IE/IS/IC/IU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Power Electronics
Subject Code
: 17444
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Day by day the change in Electronics Industry is dynamic. The role of Diploma engineers
changed over the years. Engineers should have concepts of industrial electronics. Electronic control
circuits have major role in Industries for which study of power devices is essential.
Concepts of electronic devices and circuits along with their applications are necessary.
Industrial electronic is the foundation subject to study industrial drives, and advanced industrial
electronics.
Objectives:
Students will be able to:
1. Understand construction and operating principle of various power electronic devices.
2. Study construction and operation of controlled rectifiers, choppers and inverter and
industrial control circuits.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
13
17444
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Applications
Procedure
Principle
Concepts
Facts
Applications of Power Devices used in Industrial Electronics, Different
Industrial Control Circuits, and Choppers, Inverters, UPS, SMPS,
Battery charger, Low power DC Flasher, Light dimmer circuit.
Operation of
Power Devices
& their Turn
ON-Off
V-I Characteristics
of Power Devices.
Operation
of Polyphase
Rectifiers
Operation
of
Controlled
Rectifiers
Operation of
Choppers
and
Inverters
Operation of
Industrial
Control
circuits
Operating principles of all Controllers, Rectifiers,
Choppers and Inverters.
Power Electronic Devices, Control Rectifiers, Poly-phase Rectifiers,
Choppers, Inverters and Control Circuits
Power Devices, Triggering Circuits, Turn OFF Circuits, Control
Rectifiers, Poly-phase Rectifiers, Choppers, Inverters and Converters etc.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
14
17444
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory:
Topic
No
1
2
3
Contents
Power Electronics
Specific Objectives:
 Realize construction, working principle of different Power
Devices.
 To select proper power device for particular applications.
Contents:
 Introduction to power electronics.
 Power transistor: Construction, Operating Principle, V-I
characteristics and Uses of power transistors.
 Power MOSFET- Construction, Operating Principle, V-I
characteristics and Uses of Depletion and Enhancement type
power MOSFET.
 IGBT- Construction, Operating Principle, V-I characteristics
and Uses of IGBT.
Thyristor Family Devices
Specific Objectives:
 Classify different power devices.
 Identify thyristors and triggering devices.
 Describe the operation of thyristor.
 Interpret V-I characteristics of different power devices.
Contents:
 SCR: Construction, Operating Principle with Two transistor
analogy, V-I characteristics, Latching Current (IL) and
Holding Current (IH). Applications of SCR, LASCR, SCS,
GTO and TRIAC.
 Thyristor family devices LASCR,SCS, GTO and TRIAC:
Construction, Operating Principle, V-I characteristics and
applications.
 Triggering Devices- Construction, Operating Principle, V-I
characteristics and applications of UJT, PUT, SUS, SBS and
DIAC.
Turn ON and Turn OFF methods of SCR
Specific Objectives:
 Classify Turn ON and Turn OFF circuits.
 Compare low power and high power triggering circuits
Contents:
 Concept of Turn ON mechanism of SCR: High Voltage
triggering, thermal triggering, Illumination triggering, dv/dt
triggering Gate triggering of SCR.
 Gate trigger circuits –Resistance triggering circuit, Resistance
Capacitance triggering circuit (Operation, applications and
limitations)
 SCR triggering using UJT, PUT-Relaxation Oscillator circuit
and Synchronized UJT triggering circuit: (Operation and
applications).
 Pulse transformer used in triggering circuit (Operation and
applications).
 Concept of Turn OFF mechanism and methods of - Class A-
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
15
Hours
Marks
04
10
10
20
08
16
17444
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
4
5
6
‘G’ Scheme
Series resonant commutation circuit,
Class B-Shunt resonant commutation circuit,
Class C-Complimentary Symmetry commutation circuit
Phase controlled Rectifiers
Specific Objectives:
 Draw and explain concept of phase control.
 Draw and interpret the phase control waveforms.
 Derive the expression of average voltage of control
rectifier.
 Solve the numerical examples on control rectifier.
Contents:
 Concept of phase control. (Firing Angle α and conduction
angle Ø)
 Circuit diagram, working, equations for and Waveforms of
VDC of following rectifiers.
 Single phase half wave controlled rectifier with R, RL load.
Effect of freewheeling diode.
 Single phase centre tapped full wave controlled rectifier with
R, RL load. Effect of freewheeling diode.
 Single phase Bridge type full wave controlled rectifier with R,
RL load. Effect of freewheeling diode.
 Basic three phase half wave uncontrolled and controlled
rectifier.
 Need and Uses of Polyphase rectifier.
Converters
Specific Objectives:
 Understand the concept of Chopper.
 Realize the concept of Inverter.
 Explain operation of Chopper and Inverter.
 List different applications of Chopper and Inverter.
Contents:
 Concept of Choppers
 Chopper: basic circuit and its operation using MOSFET
 Step Up and Step down Chopper using MOSFET basic
circuits.
 Inverters-Need of an inverter, Classification of inverters
Important applications of inverter.
 Working principle of single phase half bridge inverter.
 Definitions of performance parameters of inverter.
Industrial Control Circuits.
Specific Objectives:
 Understand the concept of Industrial Control Circuits.
 Draw the Circuit diagram and explain working of
Industrial control circuits.
 Draw the Block diagram and explain working of SMPS
and UPS.
Contents:
Circuit diagram, working and applications of :
 Low power DC flasher.
 Light dimmer circuit using DIAC-TRIAC.
 Electronic timer using SCR.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
16
16
24
04
14
06
16
17444
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13






‘G’ Scheme
Battery charger using SCR.
Emergency Lighting System.
Temperature Controller using SCR.
Speed Control of fan using TRIAC.
Block diagram and Concept of UPS.
Block diagram and Concept of SMPS.
Total
48
100
Practical:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills:
1) Selection of proper devices and instruments.
2) Interpretation of characteristics under various conditions.
Motor Skills:
1) Make accurate measurements.
2) Adjust proper firing angle.
3) Observe and draw the output waveforms
4) Conduct test on control circuits.
List of Practicals:
1) Plot output characteristics of power transistor.
2) Plot V-I characteristics of IGBT.
3) Determine the break over voltage using of DIAC.
4) Determine latching current and holding current using I-V characteristics of SCR.
5) Effect of variation of R, C in R and RC triggering circuits on firing angle of SCR.
6) Effect of variation of R in UJT Triggering technique.
7) Draw the output waveforms of three phase half wave Rectifier using diodes.
8) Draw the output waveform of half wave controlled rectifier with resistive load and
determine load voltage.
9) Draw the output waveform of full wave controlled rectifier with resistive load, resistiveInductive load, freewheeling Diode and determine load voltage.
10) Determine the effect of firing angle using DIAC and TRIAC on output power (using
different loads such as bulb, motor or heater).
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
17
17444
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Resources:
1. Books:
Sr.
No
Author
Title
Publisher
Power Electronics and Its
Applications
Fundamentals of Power
Electronics
Penram International
Publishing (India) Pvt. Ltd.
ISTE Learning materials
centre.
M D Singh
K B Khanchandani
Power Electronics
Tata McGraw-Hill
Muhammad H. Rashid
Power Electronics Circuits
Devices and Applications
Prentice Hall of India
01
Alok Jain
02
S. K. Bhattacharya
03
04
2. Websites:
www.vikaspublishing.com
www.scitechpublications.com
www.tatamegrahill.com
www.Phindia.com
www.pearsoned.co.in
www.wileyindia.com
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
18
17444
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Electronics Engineering Group
Course Code
: ET/EN/EX/EJ/IE/IS/IC/DE/EV/MU/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Linear Integrated Circuits
Subject Code
: 17445
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
04
--
02
03
100
50#
--
[email protected]
175
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
Modern age technology has developed on high density and high speed electronics circuits.
Integrated circuits are basis of these high density circuits enabled to reduce size, weight and cost of
equipments. They have intrinsic features such as low power consumption, low noise and ease of
design.
Today the growth of any industry depends upon electronics to great extent. Contents of this
subject are the basic building blocks of different analog circuits.
Basic operating and designing principle of such a large collection of circuits establishes a
foundation for understanding new development in the electronics field, instrumentation and power
control. This subject acquaints student with general analog principles and design methodologies
using integrated circuit for system design.
Prerequisites various devices and circuits studied in elements of electronics and electronic devices
and circuits. Prospects- LSI, MSI, VLSI.
General Objectives:
Students will be able to:

Understand working principle of Op-Amp and IC555

Develop electronics circuits using timer IC555 and Op-Amp
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
19
17445
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13

‘G’ Scheme
Analyze the response of frequency selective circuits such as PLL with respect to the
incoming signal.
Learning Structure:
Application:
Develop simple analog circuits using Op-Amp and timer circuits. Trouble
shooting of these circuits, in the area communication and instrumentation
amplifier.
Procedure:
Operation for
inverting noninverting amplifier
adder, subtractor
Response of
Active filters
Principle:
Operational amplifier
circuit, inverting noninverting and
differential
Timers using
IC-555, comparator
using IC-741, PLL
Concept:
Operational Amplifier, Linear and non-linear circuits
Fact:
Amplifers, timers, filters, Multivibrators and Oscillators
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
20
17445
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents: Theory
Topic
1
2
3
Content
Operational Amplifier (Op-Amp):
Specific Objectives :
 Draw labeled block diagram of Op-Amp
 Specify and define Different parameters of Op-Amp
 Interpret ideal transfer characteristics of Op-Amp
Contents:
 Importance of Op-Amp:
Block diagram of Op-Amp and function of each block with the
circuit such as balanced, Unbalanced, differential amplifiers
with simple current source, level shifter and complementary
push-pull amplifier. Equivalent Circuit, Circuit Symbols And
Terminals. Op-Amp IC-741 pin diagram and function.
 Parameters of Op-Amp:
Input offset voltage, Input offset current, Input bias current,
differential input resistance, Input capacitance, Input voltage
range, offset voltage adjustment range, Common Mode
Rejection Ratio (CMRR), Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio
(SVRR), large signal voltage gain and transfer characteristics,
supply voltages, supply current, output voltage swing, output
resistance, slew rate, gain bandwidth product, output short
circuit current.
Op-Amp Configuration:
Specific Objectives: Students will be able to
 Differentiate open and close loop configuration.
 Identify inverting and non-inverting configuration.
 Construct integrator and differentiator.
2.1 Open loop and closed loop configuration of Op-Amp,
its comparison. Virtual ground, virtual short concept.
Open loop configuration – Inverting , Non-inverting
Close loop configuration – Inverting, non- inverting,
differential amplifier, unity gain amplifier (voltage
follower), inverter(sign changer)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
21
Marks
12
10
12
18
12
22
[08]
2.2 Inverting and non-inverting configuration of
[10]
Adders (summing amplifier, scaling Amplifier, averaging
amplifier) Subtractor.
Basic Integrator
Basic Differentiator
Basic concept of frequency compensation of Op-Amp and
Offset nulling.
Numerical based on designing of above circuit.
Applications of Op-Amp:
Specific Objectives:
 Compute component values for instrumentation amplifier.
 Explain IC LM-324
 Explain different applications of Op-Amp.
3.1 Need for signal conditioning and signal processing.
Hours
[ 08]
17445
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Circuit diagram, operation, derivation of output voltage
Equation. advantages and applications of Instrumentation
amplifier.
Pin diagram pin functions and specifications of IC LM 324
Voltage to current converter (with floating load, with grounded
load) Current to voltage converter.
3.2 Sample and hold circuit.
4
5
[16]
Logarithmic and antilogarithmic amplifiers (using Diodes)
Analog divider and analog multiplier
Comparator: Circuit diagrams and operation of
 Zero crossing detector,
 Schmitt trigger,
 Window detector,
 Phase detector,
 Active peak detector,
 Peak to peak detector
Filters:
Specific Objectives:
 Distinguish the types of filter
 Explain active and passive filter
 Explain different parameters of filter.
Contents:
 Introduction to filters ,Classification of filters,
 Concept of passive and active filters
 Merits and demerits of active filters over passive filters
 Ideal and actual characteristics, terms: - cut off frequency, Pass
band, Stop band, center frequency, roll off rate, BW, Q-factor,
first order and second order Butterworth filters, order of filter,
Low pass filter, high pass filter, band pass filter ( wide band
pass , narrow band pass filter) Band reject filter(wide band
reject, narrow band reject filter), all pass filter. Numerical
based on design of different filters.
Timers
Specific Objectives:
 Draw block diagram of IC 555
 Understand industrial applications of IC 555 ,565
5.1 Introduction to timer IC 555
[10]
 Block diagram of IC 555 and its pin diagram and function of
each pin.
 Concepts of different timer circuits used in industries: water
level controller, Touch plate switch, frequency divider.
 Numericals based on timers.
5.2 Phase Lock Loop
 Principle of operation, block diagram of PLL.
[08]
 Applications of PLL as multiplier, FM demodulator.
 Pin diagram and pin functions of IC 565(PLL)
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
22
10
16
10
18
17445
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Oscillators:
Specific Objectives:
 Explain concept of oscillators
 Explain different types of oscillators
 Develop multivibrators and oscillators for given values.
Contents:
 Concept of oscillators,
 Types of oscillators: Phase shift oscillators, Wien bridge
oscillators using IC-741
 Types of Multivibrators: Monostable, Astable, Bistable using
IC-555 and IC-741. Schmitt trigger, voltage controlled
oscillator (VCO) using IC-555.
Total
6
08
16
64
100
Practical:
Intellectual Skills:
1. Interpret the waveforms.
2. Find faults in circuits.
Motor Skill:
1. Testing and Measurement.
List of Practicals:
Sr. No.
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Title of the Experiment
Determine the op-amp parameters:
 Input Offset Voltage (Vio)
 Output Offset Voltage (Voo)
 Common mode rejection ratio (CMRR)
Determine the gain of Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier using op-amp and
compare it with theoretical gain.
Verify the operation of Adder and Subtractor circuit using op-amp IC 741.
Verify the working of active integrator and differentiator circuits using op-amp IC
741 for following inputs:
 Sine waveform
 Square waveform
 Rectangular waveform
Assemble V to I converter and I to V converter using IC 741 and measure the
respective output.
Verify the working of following comparator circuits using op-amp IC 741 and draw
the input-output waveforms
 Zero crossing detector
 Active peak detector
Assemble first order low pass Butterworth filter using op-amp and plot the frequency
response and determine its cutoff frequency.
Assemble Astable multivibrator circuit using IC 741. Plot the output waveform and
determine the frequency of oscillations and duty cycle.
Assemble Monostable multivibrator circuit using IC 555. Plot the output waveform
and determine the on-time.
Assemble Schmitt trigger circuit using IC 555. Plot the output waveform and
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
23
17445
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
11
12
‘G’ Scheme
determine UTP and LTP
Assemble Instrumentation amplifier circuit using IC 324 and determine the overall
gain.
Verify the operation of frequency Multiplier using PLL IC 565 and determine the
output frequency.
Learning Resources:
Books:
Sr.
No.
Author
Title
Publisher
01
K.R. Botkar
Integrated Circuit
Khanna
02
Ramakant Gayakwad
Op-Amps and Linear Integrated Circuit
PHI
03
Serigo Franco
04
Willam D. Stanley
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Design with Operational Amplifier and
Analog Integrated Circuit
Operation Amplifier with Linear
Integrated Circuit
24
Tata-McGraw Hill
Person
17445
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name
: Industrial Electronics, Instrumentation, Instrumentation & Control
Course Code
: IE/IS/IC/IU
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title
: Principles of Communication Systems
Subject Code
: 17472
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
03
--
02
03
100
25#
--
[email protected]
150
NOTE:
 Two tests each of 25 marks to be conducted as per the schedule given by MSBTE.
 Total of tests marks for all theory subjects are to be converted out of 50 and to be
entered in mark sheet under the head Sessional Work (SW).
Rationale:
The Concept of global village has become reality only due to advancement in
communication technology. In India communication has developed by leaps and bounds in last two
decades. We are witness to the mobile and television revolution. In this Scenario, diploma passed
out students should be aware about the principles, procedure and application of communication
techniques, so that they can face the technological changes happening due to globalization &
competition. The upcoming field of fibre optics plays a vital role in present communication
systems. The knowledge of this subject will help the students to handle and operate different
communication systems.
General Objectives:
After Studying this subject the students will be able to
1. Describe various communication systems.
2. Understand concept about the digital communication, multiplexing techniques and encoding
techniques.
3. Understand basic fundamentals in satellite, mobile and data communication.
4. Understand the fundamentals of fibre optic communication.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
25
17472
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
Use of communication techniques in related engineering fields.
Procedure
Working of Modulators, Demodulators.
Working of Satellite and Mobile Communication.
Working of fibre optic communication system.
Principles
Modulation Index, AM , FM,PAM,PPM, PWM Techniques.
Sampling Theorem, Nyquist Rate.
Network topologies .
Concept
Fact
Modulation –Demodulation (Definition of AM,FM and PM) , Satellite
& Mobile communication, Fibre optics.
Electromagnetic Spectrum, Different types of Signal, Discrete and IC Circuits,
Amplifier, Oscillator, Filter Circuits, Mobile Handset, Tower.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
26
17472
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory Contents:
Topic
No
Theory
Hrs.
Marks
10
18
12
24
Fundamentals of Electronic Communication
Specific objectives:
 State basic terminology concepts regarding Electronic
Communication.
 Know different techniques of analog communication.
1
Contents:
1.1 Basics of communication system
[12]
 Block diagram of communication system.
 Electromagnetic spectrum
 Concept of decibel bandwidth, information capacity in
communication.
Terminology related to noise
 sources of noise
 Effects of noise.
 Signal to noise ratio(SNR)
 Noise voltage
 Noise factor
 Noise figure
 Noise temperature.
Modulation-demodulation
 Classification of communication system.
 Need for modulation
 Understanding of AM, FM, & PM on the basis of definition,
waveform, bandwidth. Modulation index, numerical based on
modulation index.
 FM modulation circuit using varactor diode.
 Concept of demodulation- amplitude demodulation by diode
detector.
1.2 Pulse Modulation
[06]
 Sampling theorem, nyquist criteria (only statement),
Pulse analog modulation
 Block diagram for generation waveforms, working, principle,
advantages, disadvantages & applications of PAM,PWM &
PPM. (No Numericals)
 Advantages of pulse modulation over AM.
Digital Communication
Specific objectives:
 Describe PCM
 Describe digital modulation techniques & multiplexing
techniques
2
Contents:
2.1 Fundamental Of Digital Communication
[16]
 Block diagram for generation, working principle, waveforms,
advantages, disadvantage and application of ASK, FSK, BPSK,
QPSK, DPSK.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
27
17472
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13

3
4
‘G’ Scheme
Block diagram, working principle, waveforms, advantages,
disadvantages & application of PCM, delta modulation, and
adaptive delta modulation.
2.2 Multiplexing & Data Encoding Techniques.
[08]
 Multiplexing technique:
Definitions, schematic diagram, principle, application,
advantages & disadvantage of TDM, FDM and WDM
 Data encoding techniques
Unipolar –NRZ,
Polar –NRZ, RZ,
 Manchester (split phase), differential Manchester Bipolar RZ
(Pseudo ternary or AMI) and their waveforms.
Satellite Communication.
Specific objectives:
 State basic concept regarding satellite communication.
 Define terms related to satellite communication
Contents:
 History of satellite.
 Terminology related to satellite communication: satellite
orbits, elevation angle, azimuth angle, foot print, station
keeping, altitude, geostationary satellite.
 Block diagram of satellite communication. Frequency bands
used in satellite communication.
 Diagram, working, principle of uplink model, transponder,
down link model.
 Diagram ,working, principle, advantages & disadvantages of
TDMA, FDMA, CDMA
Topic 4) Mobile Communication
Specific objectives:
 State the terminology related to cellular phone
 State the different concepts related to cell, interference, base
station etc.
Contents:
 Evolution of cellular telephone
 Concept of cell pattern, frequency reuse, interference - co
channel & adjacent channel, cell splitting, sectoring,
segmentation & dualization, roaming & handoffs.
 Block diagram and working of mobile communication
 Cellular telephone call processing
 Mobile (cellular) to wire line (PSTN) call procedure
 Mobile (cellular) to mobile (cellular) call procedure.
 Wire line (PSTN) to mobile (cellular) call procedure.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
28
06
14
06
12
17472
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
6
‘G’ Scheme
Data Communication & Networking
Specific objectives:
 Describe modes of data transmission
 Describe the concepts of network topologies, types of network
and the network models.
Contents:
5.1 Modes of transmission, topologies, categories and models of
network.
[14]
 Modes of data transmission serial, parallel, synchronous,
asynchronous
 Network topologies
Diagram, working, advantage, disadvantages and application of
mesh, star, bus, ring
 Network categories
Fundamentals of LAN,WAN,MAN
 Network models
Architecture of OSI model, TCP/IP model
 RS-232 (9 pin) standard for communication
5.2 Connecting devices and network security
[06]
 MODEM- Block diagram and classification
 INTERNET- Types of subscriber lines, operation of Internet
(only concepts), internet service providers in India.
 Connecting devices
Concept and operation of hubs, repeaters, bridges, routers,
gateway
 Network security
Concept of
message confidentiality, message integrity,
message authentication, digital signature, entity authentication
Topic 6) Fiber Optics
Specific objectives
 Draw the fiber optic communication link
 State the fiber power losses
 Differentiate between single mode and multimode fibers.
 Identify the optical transmitters and receivers
Contents
6.1 Optical fiber cable
[6]
 Advantages of optical fiber cable
 Propagation of energy in fiber: Total internal reflection,
acceptance angle and numerical aperture.
 Construction, characteristics, specification and application of
Single mode step index fiber
Multimode step index fiber
Multimode graded index fiber
 Losses in optical fiber due to dispersion, scattering and bending.
Connector loss, splice loss and coupling loss.
6.2 Fiber Optic Communication System
[6]
 Block diagram of optical communication system
 Optical Transmitters: LED and LASER (specifications)
 Optical Receivers: PIN photodiode and avalanche photodiode
Total
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
29
08
20
06
12
48
100
17472
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Practical’s:
Skills to be developed:
Intellectual Skills
1. Interpretation of result.
2. Selection of communication techniques based on application.
Motor Skills
1. Make connections/arrange experimental set up carryout the tests.
2. Observe and record out puts.
3. Draw waveforms.
4. Locate the faults.
List of Experiments:
1. Measurement of modulation index of amplitude modulated wave and observe the effect of
modulating signal voltage on it by Emitter / Base / Collector Modulation.(any one circuit)
2. Measurement of modulation index of the frequency modulated wave and observe the effect
of modulating and Carrier signal voltage on Frequency Modulation.(construct the circuit by
using IC8038)
3. Generate PAM and draw input / output waveform and measure amplitude of each pulse.
4. Generate PWM and draw input / output waveform and measure Width of each pulse.
5. Generate ASK Signal and draw input/output waveforms.
6. Generate FSK Signal and draw input/output waveforms.
7. Generate PSK Signal and draw input/output waveforms.
8. Generate PCM Signal and draw input/output waveforms.
9. Generate PPM Signal and draw input/output waveforms.
10. Identify the components required for LAN networking.
11. Preparation of patch cords and cross connection cables required for LAN.
12. Measurement of bending losses in fibre optic cable
Learning Resources:
1. Books
Sr.
Title
No.
Electronic Communication System
1
(Vth Edition)
2
Electronic Communication System
3
Data Communication & Networking
4
Mobile Cellular Telecommunication
5
Electronic Communication
Author
Publisher
Wayne Tomasi
Prentice Hall of India.
Kennedy
Forouzan
William Lee
Frenzel
Tata McGraw Hill
Tata McGraw Hill
McGraw Hill
Tata MCgraw Hills
2. Websites
 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
 www.youtube.com/
 www.google.com(as a search engine)
 www.tech-faq.com
 www.howstuffworks.com  www.williamson-labs.com MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
30
17472
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Course Name : Electronics Engineering and & Video Engineering Group
Course Code : ET/EJ/IE/IS/EN/EX/IC/MU/EV/DE/IU/ED/EI
Semester
: Fourth
Subject Title : Visual Basic
Subject Code : 17043
Teaching and Examination Scheme:
Teaching Scheme
Examination Scheme
TH
TU
PR
PAPER
HRS
TH
PR
OR
TW
TOTAL
01
--
02
--
--
--
--
[email protected]
25
Rationale:
Today’s most of the electronically operated devices, integrated circuits, controllers,
equipments, gadgets are run by specific drivers/software. To understand design, develop and write
drivers programming knowledge is required. To run the devices software has to be user friendly.
New approach is to use graphical user interface. Graphical user interface can be implemented using
visual software’s.
Traditionally visual basic is the most popular, versatile, suitable, simple and commonly used
visual programming language to write efficient, compact and portable interfaces, drivers/
software’s.
The subject will enable the students to inculcate visual programming concepts and
methodology used to write, debug, compile and execute simple visual basic programs using
different powerful data types, built in visual controls and integrated visual basic environment (IDE)
provided by Microsoft visual studio. Students will be exposed to event driven programming and
bottom up approached used in objects oriented programming.
Students will understand how a complex interface can be easily implemented in visual basic
with almost no programming expertise.
This course will lay the basic foundation of visual programming which will enable students
to develop simple to complex programmable systems interfaces in the real world of work
General Objectives
Students will able to.
1. Learn visual programming development environment, concepts and methodology.
2. Use essential components (visual tools ) of Visual software’s
3. Develop the skill of visual basic programming to build custom standalone applications
4. Develop applications with Multiple documents interface ( MDI) using common
dialog, menus and graphics
5. Use ADO for database connectivity with different databases.
6. Create simple reports using data report, Seagate crystal reports and integrating it with
visual basic
7. Develop applications using class modules
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
31
17043
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Learning Structure:
Application
To develop the skill of visual Basic Programming to build software/program
 Text editors, device drivers, hardware control
 Operating system utilities
 Simple to complex academic applications
 GUI based applications
 Database applications (client server based)
Procedures
Programming using
Visual Basic, Menu
driven graphics using
methods
Principles
Design principles of
forms,
common
dialog box, MDI,
Graphics
Concepts
Data types, procedures,
functions, toolbox,
buttons, forms, dialog
boxes, menus, project
check box, status bar,
tab control etc.
Facts
Objects, variables,
constants, Arrays
collections,
Arguments, control
Flow statements,
operators, Library
functions images.
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
Creating and using the
ActiveX controls
Principles of creation
of active X control,
properties of active X
controls.
ActiveX controls, Events,
property pages, interface
wizard.
Active X control interface
wizard, command button,
Radio button checkbox,
class, modules
32
Programming with
Active data objects.
Principles of DAO, ADO,
database connectivity, data
controls, use, its events and
properties
Database,
record
set, rows, column,
tables, visual data
manager,
Data
controls
Data, Connection,
command, record,
cursor, cursor
location, cursor
types, lock types etc.
17043
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Theory
Name of Topics
Hours
Topic 1] Introduction to Visual Environment
Specific Objectives:
 Familiar with IDE of Visual basic
 Use concepts of object based language
 Use basic elements of visual interface
 Use properties, events and methods at design time and runtime
02
 Create objects, place them on forms
Contents:
1.1 Concepts of visual programming, object, features, properties, methods, events.
1.2 Environment of VB – Menu bar, toolbar, project explorer, toolbox, properties
window, form designer, form layout, immediate window.
1.3 Concept of project, elements of projects, form, their properties, methods and events.
Topic 2] Introduction to Visual Basic
Specific Objectives:
 Use different data types
 Use powerful features of arrays and collections
 Write procedures and functions
 Call procedures and functions
 Differentiate between procedure and functions
02
 Use library functions for math and string operations
 Use Inputbox and Msgbox functions
Contents:
2.1 Data types, variables, constants, arrays, collections
2.2 procedures, Arguments, function, return values, control flow statements, loop
statements, Nested control structures, exit statement
2.3 Math operators & formulas, logical operators, string functions, special functions
available in VB like Input Box ( ), Message Box ( ) , Format ( ).
Topic 3] Controls and Events
Specific Objectives:
 Use basic controls
 Select appropriate controls for given data
 Set properties of different basic controls
 Call methods and events of basic controls
 Demonstrate the use of each control with simple examples
02
Contents:
3.1 Basic controls: Text box, list Box , Combo Box , Scroll Bar, frame , Option button,
checkbox, command button, OLE controls
3.2 File, Drive, directory, Picture box, Image and timer controls .Designing a form
using controls, concepts of event & properties, changing properties (runtime &
design time) Important events of each control & creating applications using
controls.
Topic 4] Advance Controls & Events
Specific Objectives:
 Add extrinsic controls in an application
 Use common dialog box control and its properties such open, save as, font,
03
color, print and help
 Use rich text box to design simple ms-word like application
 Use and create explorer like utilities using tree view and list controls
 Familiar with windows common controls
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
33
17043
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
‘G’ Scheme
Contents:
4.1 Common Dialog Box controls, The Tree view and List, View controls, the rich
textbox controls
4.2 Windows common controls – status Bar, Tab control, image list control, Important
properties, changing properties at design or run time, event handling.
Topic 5] Module, Class Module, Mdi, Menu Graphics
Specific Objectives:
 Write class modules
 Define functions and procedures in class module
 Access functions and procedures from class module
 Use multiple document interface
 Design menu based applications such as notepad editor
 Work with graphic functions and methods
Contents:
5.1 Concept of module, class module, using class module to define functions,
procedures, variables and accessing them using objects
5.2 MDI- MDI form and child form, Creation and use in
5.3 Menu: Creating own menu using menu editor, popup menu.
5.3 Graphics: Basic controls – Line & shape control , line method, circle method, Pset
method, RGB ( ) Functions, Paint picture ( ) method, Load picture ( ) function.
Topic 6] Database and Report
Specific Objectives:
 Create database
 Use ADO and its properties, methods and events
 Select appropriate concepts such as back-end and front-end
 Make database connectivity with different databases
 Generate report using Data Report and Crystal Report
Contents:
6.1 Concept of database, Record, Record set, Data control & its important properties
6.2 validating data, entering data, visual data manager.
6.3 Programming with ADO ( Active data objects ), using ADO Objects at design timeconnection, command, record set , parameter, Creating & closing a connection;
executing a command,
6.4 Using ADO Objects at run time, attaching visual controls to record set at run time,
Using delete, save, search, update exit, new, add, methods.
6.5 Report generation using data report and crystal report
Total
03
04
16
TERM WORK:Sr
No.
1
2
3
4
Name of the Experiments
a) Study and Understand Visual
Basic Environment
b) Develop VB Project which
accepts User Name & Password
using three forms Login Form1
and Form2 to accept data, and
Form3 to display data.
Design simple calculator to perform mathematical function using Control array like Windows
Calculator.
Design GUI to Find Resistor Value from it’s color code.
Display student data using structure in loop. Implement it using Class module & Procedures
MSBTE - Final Copy Dt. 30/08/2013
34
17043
w.e.f Academic Year 2012-13
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
‘G’ Scheme
Demonstrate list boxes features with sorted list and selected item transfer facility.
a) Design Color box using RGB function to observe color change using H- scroll bar.
b) Design project to demonstrate file, folder & drive controls to e